2019 Subaru Forester Owner Manual

2019 Forester Owner’s Manual
MSA5M1902A
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates and lead, which are known to the State of California
OWNER’S MANUAL
Forester
A8240BE-A
Issued July 2018
to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Printed in USA 07/18
2019A
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle
the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a 2019
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Vehicles shown on the cover of this booklet

may not be available in all markets. Please see
One Subaru Drive SUBARU CORPORATION your Subaru Retailer for a Product Brochure
Camden, NJ 08103-9800 TOKYO, JAPAN detailing all currently available models.
Love. It’s what makes a Subaru, a Subaru.
(1,1)
Foreword
Foreword
SFWAA
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU
CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
“SUBARU” and the six–star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
*
C Copyright 2018 SUBARU CORPORATION
北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 4

(2,1)

(3,1)
Vehicle types
SFWAB
This manual describes the following vehicle types.

(2,1)

(3,1)
1
S00
Warranties & Warranties except for U.S.A. How to use this Owner’s 0
S00AA and Canada Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. S00AA06
All warranty information, including details S00AB
S00AA01
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of of coverage and exclusions, is in the & Using your Owner’s Manual
S00AB01
America, Inc. and sold at retail by an “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United Read these warranties carefully. read this manual. To protect yourself and
States come with the following warranties: extend the service life of your vehicle,
. SUBARU Limited Warranties follow the instructions in this manual.
. Federal Emission Control Systems Failure to observe these instructions may
Warranties result in serious injury and damage to your
. California Emissions Control Sys- vehicle.
tems Warranties This manual is composed of fourteen
All warranty information, including applic- chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
ability, details of coverage and exclusions, table of contents, so you can usually tell at
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance a glance if that chapter contains the
Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully. information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-
& Warranties for Canada bags
S00AA05
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru This chapter informs you how to use the
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada tions for the SRS airbags.
come with the following warranties: Chapter 2: Keys and doors
. SUBARU Limited Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
. Emission Control System Warranty the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
All warranty information, including applic-
This chapter informs you about the opera-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
tion of instrument panel indicators and how
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.
to use the instruments and other switches.
Read these warranties carefully.
– CONTINUED –

(4,1)
Chapter 4: Climate control Chapter 12: Specifications WARNING

This chapter informs you how to operate This chapter informs you about dimen-
the climate control. sions and capacities of your SUBARU. A WARNING indicates a situation in
Chapter 5: Audio Chapter 13: Consumer information and which serious injury or death could
This chapter informs you about your audio reporting safety defects result if the warning is ignored.
system. This chapter informs you about Uniform
Chapter 6: Interior equipment tire quality grading standards and Report-
ing safety defects. CAUTION
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment. Chapter 14: Index A CAUTION indicates a situation in
Chapter 7: Starting and operating This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in which injury or damage to your
This chapter informs you how to start and this manual. You can use it to quickly find vehicle, or both, could result if the
operate your SUBARU. something you want to read. caution is ignored.
Chapter 8: Driving tips For models with EyeSight system:
This chapter informs you how to drive your For details about the EyeSight system, NOTE
SUBARU in various conditions and ex- refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement A NOTE gives information or sugges-
plains some safety tips on driving. for the EyeSight system. tions how to make better use of your
Chapter 9: In case of emergency vehicle.
This chapter informs you what to do if you & Safety warnings
S00AB02
have a problem, such as a flat tire or You will find a number of WARNINGs,
engine overheating. CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
Chapter 10: Appearance care These safety warnings alert you to poten-
This chapter informs you how to keep your tial hazards that could result in injury to you
SUBARU looking good. or others.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service Please read these safety warnings as well
This chapter informs you when you need to as all other portions of this manual care-
take your SUBARU to the dealer for fully in order to gain a better understanding
scheduled maintenance and informs you of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.

(5,1)
& Safety symbol & Abbreviation list Abbreviation Meaning

0
S00AB03 S00AB04
You may find several abbreviations in this LATCH Lower anchors and tethers for
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia- children
tions are shown in the following list. LED Light emitting diode
Abbreviation Meaning MIL Malfunction indicator light
A/C Air conditioner Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
MMT ganese tricarbonyl
ABS Anti-lock brake system
OBD On-board diagnostics
AKI Anti knock index
RAB Reverse Automatic Braking
ALR Automatic locking retractor
RON Research octane number
ALR/ELR Automatic locking retractor/
Emergency locking retractor SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive
AVH Auto Vehicle Hold Steering Responsive Head-
SRH light
You will find a circle with a slash through it AWD All-wheel drive
in this manual. This symbol means “Do Supplemental restraint sys-
Blind Spot Detection/Rear SRS
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this BSD/RCTA Cross Traffic Alert
tem
happen”, depending upon the context. TIN Tire identification number
CVT Continuously variable trans-
mission Tire pressure monitoring sys-
TPMS tem
DRL Daytime running light
EBD Electronic brake force distri-

bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
INT Intermittent

(6,1)
Vehicle symbols Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with
S00AC driving considerable speed and force.
There are some of the symbols you may S00AD
Occupants who are out of the
see on your vehicle. & Seatbelt and SRS airbag proper position when the SRS
S00AD01 airbag deploys could suffer very
For warning and indicator lights, refer to serious injuries. Because the
“Warning and indicator lights” FP24. WARNING
SRS airbag needs enough space
Mark Name for deployment, the driver should
. All persons in the vehicle must
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE always sit upright and well back
WARNING the vehicle starts to move. Other- in the seat as far from the steer-
wise, the possibility of serious ing wheel as practical while still
injury becomes greater in the maintaining full vehicle control
CAUTION and the front passenger should
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent. move the seat as far back as
Read these instructions care- possible and sit upright and well
fully . To obtain maximum protection in
back in the seat.
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must For instructions and precautions, carefully
Wear eye protection always wear seatbelts when in read the following sections.
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-
mental Restraint System) airbag . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
Battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid does not do away with the need to belts” FP47.
fasten seatbelts. In combination . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
with the seatbelts, it offers the “SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
Keep children away
best combined protection in case tem airbag)” FP73.
of a serious accident.
Keep flames away Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
Prevent explosions
vehicle has the SRS airbag.

(7,1)
& Child safety with considerable speed and themselves or others through 0
S00AD02
force and can injure or even kill inadvertent operation of the ve-
WARNING children, especially if they are not hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
restrained or improperly re- temperature in a closed vehicle
. Never hold a child on your lap or strained. Because children are could quickly become high en-
in your arms while the vehicle is lighter and weaker than adults, ough to cause severe or possibly
moving. The passenger cannot their risk of being injured from fatal injuries to them.
protect the child from injury in a deployment is greater. . When leaving the vehicle, close
collision, because the child will . NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT all windows and lock all doors.
be caught between the passen- IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
ger and objects inside the vehi- RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR For instructions and precautions, carefully
cle. DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- read the following sections.
. While riding in the vehicle, infants CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
and small children should always CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. belts” FP47.
be seated in the REAR seat in an . Always turn the child safety locks . For the child restraint system, refer to
infant or child restraint system to the “LOCK” position when “Child restraint systems” FP59.
which is appropriate for the children sit in the rear seat. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
child’s age, height and weight. If Serious injury could result if a “SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
a child is too big for a child child accidentally opens the door tem airbag)” FP73.
restraint system, the child should and falls out. Refer to “Child
sit in the REAR seat and be safety locks” FP137.
restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, . Always lock the passenger’s win-
children are safer when properly dows using the lock switch when
restrained in the rear seating children are riding in the vehicle.
positions than in the front seating Failure to follow this procedure
positions. Never allow a child to could result in injury to a child
stand up or kneel on the seat. operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” FP138.
. Place children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in . Never leave unattended children,
a child restraint device or in a adults or animals in the vehicle.
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys They could accidentally injure
– CONTINUED –

(8,1)
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem sumed too much alcohol to drive safely
monoxide) checked and corrected as soon even if the level of alcohol in your blood is
S00AD03 as possible. If you must drive below the legal limit. The safest thing you
WARNING under these conditions, drive can do is never drink and drive. However if
only with all windows fully open. you have no choice but to drive, stop
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the rear gate closed while drinking and sober up completely before
Engine exhaust gas contains driving to prevent exhaust gas getting behind the wheel.
carbon monoxide, a colorless from entering the vehicle.
and odorless gas which is dan- & Drugs and driving
S00AD05
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en- & Drinking and driving WARNING
S00AD04
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering There are some drugs (over the
WARNING counter and prescription) that can
the vehicle.
Drinking and then driving is very delay your reaction time and impair
. Never run the engine in a closed your perception, judgment and at-
space, such as a garage, except dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction time tentiveness. If you drive after taking
for the brief time needed to drive them, it may increase your, your
the vehicle in or out of it. and impairs your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive passengers’ and other persons’ risk
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve- after drinking – even if you drink just of being involved in a serious or fatal
hicle for a lengthy time while the a little – it will increase the risk of accident.
engine is running. If that is un- being involved in a serious or fatal
avoidable, then use the ventila- accident, injuring or killing yourself, If you are taking any drugs, check with
tion fan to force fresh air into the your passengers and others. In your doctor or pharmacist or read the
vehicle. addition, if you are injured in the literature that accompanies the medication
. Always keep the front ventilator accident, alcohol may increase the to determine if the drug you are taking can
inlet grille free from snow, leaves severity of that injury. impair your driving ability. Do not drive
or other obstructions to ensure after taking any medications that can make
Please don’t drink and drive. you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly. to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent have a medical condition that requires you
. If at any time you suspect that causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects to take drugs, please consult with your
exhaust fumes are entering the all people differently, you may have con- doctor.

(9,1)
Never drive if you are under the influence & Modification of your vehicle & Driving vehicles equipped 0
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your S00AD07
with navigation system
own health and well-being, we urge you CAUTION S00AD09
not to take illegal drugs in the first place WARNING

and to seek treatment if you are addicted Your vehicle should not be modified
to those drugs. other than with genuine SUBARU Do not allow the monitor to distract
parts and accessories. Other types your attention from driving. Also, do
& Driving when tired or sleepy of modifications could affect its not operate the controls of the
S00AD06
performance, safety or durability, navigation system while driving.
WARNING and may even violate governmental The loss of attention to driving could
regulations. In addition, damage or lead to an accident. If you wish to
When you are tired or sleepy, your performance problems resulting operate the controls of the naviga-
reaction time will be delayed and from modification may not be cov- tion system, first take the vehicle off
your perception, judgment and at- ered under warranties. the road and stop it in a safe
tentiveness will be impaired. If you location.
drive when tired or sleepy, your,
your passengers’ and other per- & Use of cell phones/texting
sons’ chances of being involved in and driving & Driving with pets
a serious accident may increase. S00AD16 S00AD10
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
CAUTION driving and distract your attention from
Please do not continue to drive but instead
find a safe place to rest if you are tired or driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
Do not talk on a cell phone or text unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
sleepy. On long trips, you should make while driving; it may distract your
periodic rest stops to refresh yourself around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
attention from driving and lead to an your passengers. Besides, the pets can be
before continuing on your journey. When accident. If you use a cell phone to
possible, you should share the driving with hurt under these situations. It is also for
talk or text, first pull off the road and their own safety that pets should be
others. park in a safe place. In some States/ properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on strain a pet with a special traveling harness
a phone while driving, but only if the which can be secured to the rear seat with
phone is hands-free. a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be
secured to the rear seat by routing a
seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.
– CONTINUED –

(10,1)
Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the & Attaching accessories General information
front passenger’s seat. For further infor- S00AD15
S00AK
mation, consult your veterinarian, local WARNING & California Perchlorate Advi-
animal protection society or pet shop. sory
. Do not attach any accessories, S00AK03
Certain vehicle components, such as air-
& Tire pressures labels or stickers (other than
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
S00AD11
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres- properly placed inspection stick-
ers) to the windshield. Such keyless entry transmitter batteries, may
sure of each tire (including the spare) at contain perchlorate material. Special
least once a month and before any long items may obstruct your view.
handling may apply for service or vehicle
journey. . If it is necessary to attach an end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
accessory (such as an electronic hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are toll collection (ETC) device or
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the security pass) to the windshield,
tire pressures to the values shown on the & Noise from under the vehicle
consult your SUBARU dealer for S00AK01
tire placard. For detailed information, refer details on the proper location. NOTE
to “Tires and wheels” FP459. You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
WARNING after the ignition switch is turned to the
Driving at high speeds with “LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction. This
excessively low tire pressures noise is caused by the operation of the
can cause the tires to deform fuel evaporation leakage checking sys-
severely and to rapidly be- tem and the operation is normal. The
come hot. A sharp increase in noise will stop after approximately 15
temperature could cause tread minutes.
separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of & Event data recorder
S00AK04
vehicle control could lead to This vehicle is equipped with an event data
an accident. recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag

(11,1)
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
that will assist in understanding how a to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
0
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is such as law enforcement, that have the
designed to record data related to vehicle special equipment, can read the informa-
dynamics and safety systems for a short tion if they have access to the vehicle or
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
(1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and reporting safety defects 13
Index 14

(14,1)
12
Illustrated index
S00AE
& Exterior
S00AE01
1) Engine hood (page 447)
2) Front wipers (page 239)
3) Replacing bulbs (page 476)
4) Headlights (page 229)
5) Moonroof (page 149)
6) Roof rails (page 396)
7) Outside mirror (page 248)
8) Door locks (page 131)
9) Tire pressure (page 462)
10) Flat tires (page 415)
11) Snow tires (page 392)
12) Fog lights (page 236)
13) Tie-down hooks (page 423)
14) Towing hook (page 423)

(15,1)
13
1) Rear window defogger (page 250)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 292) 0
3) Child safety locks (page 137)
4) Tie-down hole (page 423)
5) Replacing bulbs (page 476)
6) Rear window wiper (page 240)
7) Rear gate (page 141)
8) Towing hook (page 423)
– CONTINUED –

(16,1)
14
& Interior
S00AE02
! Passenger compartment area

S00AE0201
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint
system (page 68)
2) Seatbelt (page 47)
3) Front seat (page 32)
4) Rear seat (page 39)

(17,1)
15
1) Power windows (page 138)
2) Door locks (page 132) 0
3) Select lever (page 309)
4) USB power supply (page 282)
5) Front power supply socket (page 280)
6) Glove box (page 278)
7) Cup holder (page 278)
8) Center console (page 278)
– CONTINUED –

(18,1)
16
1) Button for SUBARU STARLINK
2) Moonroof switch (page 149)
3) Electronic parking brake switch (page
332)
4) Auto Vehicle Hold switch (page 334)
5) X-MODE switch (page 326)
6) Front seat heater switches (page 46)
7) USB power supply (page 282)
8) Rear seat heater switches (page 46)
NOTE
. For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU
STARLINK: Refer to the Owner’s Man-
ual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK
Safety and Security.
. For models with EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.

(19,1)
17
& Instrument panel 0

S00AE03
1) Seat position memory switch (page 37)
2) Power rear gate switch (page 142)
3) Steering Responsive Headlight OFF
switch (page 235)
4) Memory switch (page 142)
5) Illumination brightness control dial (page
164)
6) Combination meter (page 160)
7) Type A multi-function display (black and
white) (page 197)/Type B multi-function
display (color LCD) (page 203)
8) Audio*
9) Hazard warning flasher switch (page
160)
10) Climate control panel (page 257)
11) Tilt/Telescopic steering wheel (page 251)
12) Driver Monitoring System OFF switch
(page 380)
13) Fuse box (page 474)
14) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 351)
15) Auto Start Stop OFF switch (page 339)
16) Hood lock release knob (page 447)
17) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 325)
*: For details about how to use the audio
and navigation system (if equipped),
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
– CONTINUED –

(20,1)
18
1) Audio control switches*
2) INFO button for type A multi-function
display (black and white) (page 198)/
INFO button for type B multi-function
display (color LCD) (page 205)
3) Cruise control switches (page 346)
4) Shift paddle (page 312)
5) SI-DRIVE switches (page 318)
6) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page
252)
7) SRS airbag (page 73)
8) Horn (page 253)
9) Combination meter display control
switches (page 189)
10) Talk switch for voice command system*/
Hands-free phone switches*
*: For details about how to use the
switches, refer to the separate naviga-
tion/audio Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
For models with EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

(21,1)
19
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 0

S00AE04
1) Windshield wiper (page 237)
2) Mist (page 239)
3) Windshield washer (page 239)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 240)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 239)
6) Windshield wiper and washer switches
(page 239)
7) Light control switch (page 229)
8) Fog light switch (page 236)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 229)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change
(page 231)
11) Turn signal lever (page 237)
– CONTINUED –

(22,1)
20
& Combination meter

S00AE05
! U.S.-spec. models
S00AE0549
1) Tachometer (page 160)
2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
184)
3) Combination meter display (color LCD)
(page 189)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 161)
5) Speedometer (page 160)
6) Fuel gauge (page 162)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be
slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

(23,1)
21
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type A)
S00AE0531
0
184)
5) ECO gauge (page 162)
– CONTINUED –

(24,1)
22
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type B)

S00AE0519
184)
3) Combination meter display (color LCD)
(page 189)

(25,1)
23
– CONTINUED –

(26,1)
24
& Warning and indicator lights

S00AE06
Mark Name Page Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
AT OIL TEMP warning Vehicle Dynamics

Seatbelt warning light 165 light 170 Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics 176
Control operation indi-
Front passenger’s cator light
seatbelt warning light 165 ABS warning light 172
Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator 178
SRS airbag system 167 Brake system warning 173 light
warning light light
Turn signal indicator 185
Front passenger’s Electronic parking lights
/ frontal airbag ON indi- 167 / brake indicator light 173
cator
High beam indicator 185
Front passenger’s Door open warning light
/ frontal airbag OFF in- 167 light 175
dicator
High beam assist indi- 185
CHECK ENGINE Engine hood open cator light (if equipped)
warning light/Malfunc- 168 warning light 175
tion indicator light Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning 186
Coolant temperature light (if equipped)
low indicator light/ AWD warning light 175
Coolant temperature 168 Steering Responsive
high warning light Headlight warning
Power steering warn- 176 light/Steering Respon-
ing light sive Headlight OFF in- 186
Charge warning light 169 dicator light (if
Auto Vehicle Hold ON equipped)
indicator light 175
Oil pressure warning 169 Front fog light indicator
light light (if equipped) 186
Auto Vehicle Hold op- 175
Engine oil level warn- eration indicator light Access key warning
170
ing light indicator light (if 178
Depress brake indica- equipped)
tor light 175

(27,1)
25
Mark Name Page Mark Name Page

0
Auto Start Stop No
Security indicator light 183 Activity Detected indi- 187
cator light
Headlight indicator 186 BSD/RCTA warning
light (if equipped) light (if equipped) 188
Cruise control indica- 185 BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

tor light (if equipped) cator light (if equipped) 188
Cruise control set indi- 186 RAB warning light (if

cator light (if equipped) equipped) 188
X-MODE indicator light 187 RAB OFF indicator

(if equipped) light (if equipped) 188
Hill descent control in- Driver Monitoring Sys-

dicator light (if 187 tem operation indicator
equipped) light (green) (if 188
equipped)
Low fuel warning light 175 Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem warning light (yel- 188
Low tire pressure low) (if equipped)
warning light 171 Driver Monitoring Sys-
(U.S.-spec. models) tem OFF indicator light 188
(if equipped)
Windshield washer 170
fluid warning light Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem temporary stop in- 188
Auto Start Stop warn- dicator light (if
ing light/Auto Start equipped)
Stop OFF indicator 186
light (yellow) Icy road surface warn- 189
ing light (if equipped)
Auto Start Stop indica- 187
tor light (green)

(28,1)
26
Function settings
S00AF
& Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display (color LCD)
S00AF01
If your vehicle is equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting adjustments to the following items can be manually
changed within the display to meet your personal requirements.
NOTE
. If your vehicle is not equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting changes to the following items will
need to be performed by a SUBARU dealer. Refer to “Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer” FP29.
. For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.
Item Page reference for

1st menu/vehicle 2nd menu/adjustable ve- 3rd menu/selectable ve- Available settings Factory default setting the vehicle system
system hicle system setting hicle system setting operation
Welcome Screen — On/Off On 190

Good-bye Screen — On/Off On 190
Gauge Initial Movement — On/Off On 163
U.S.-spec models: mile,
Units — km, km/h, Liter/mile, MPH, Gallon 197 and 203
Screen Settings MPH, Gallon Other models: km, km/h,
Liter
Tire Pressure Units (U.S.- — kPa/PSi PSi 193
spec. models)
English/Español/Fran- U.S.-spec models: Eng-

Languages — çais lish 203
Other models: Français

(29,1)
27
Item
Available settings Factory default setting
Page reference for
the vehicle system
0
1st menu/vehicle 2nd menu/adjustable ve- 3rd menu/selectable ve-
355 and 367

For details about
EyeSight system,
Warning Volume* — — Max/Mid/Min Mid refer to the Own-
er’s Manual sup-
plement for the
EyeSight system.
Lead Vehicle Acquisition — On/Off On
Sound
Lead Vehicle Moving — On/Off On
Monitor Function Refer to the Own-
EyeSight er’s Manual sup-
Cruise Control Accelera- Lv.4 (Dynamic)/Lv.3 plement for the
tion Characteristics* — (Standard)/Lv.2 (Com- Lv.3 (Standard) EyeSight system.
fort)/Lv.1 (ECO)
Select Drive on Left/Drive — Drive on Left/Drive on Drive on Right
on Right Right
RAB (if equipped) Sonar Audible Alarm — On/Off On 367
– CONTINUED –

(30,1)
28
Item Page reference for

1st menu/vehicle 2nd menu/adjustable ve- 3rd menu/selectable ve- Available settings Factory default setting the vehicle system
Audible Signal On/Off On 123

Hazard Warning Flasher On/Off On 115
Keyless Entry System
Driver Door Unlock Driver Door Only/All Driver Door Only 117
Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock Rear Gate/Trunk Only/All Rear Gate/Trunk Only 117
Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 15 minutes 250
Interior Light — 10 seconds/20 seconds/ 30 seconds 275

30 seconds/Off
Auto Door Lock Vehicle Speed/Shift Into Vehicle Speed 133

or Out of PARK/Off
Auto Door Lock and Un-
Vehicle Setting lock Shift Into or Out of PARK/
Auto Door Unlock Ignition OFF/Driver Door Driver Door Open 133
Open/Off
Auto Light Sensor — Max/Mid/Low/Min Mid 230
Approaching Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds 230

90 seconds/Off
Welcome Lighting
Leaving Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds 230
90 seconds/Off
One-touch lane changer — On/Off On 237
Door mirror setting Reverse Tilt-Down Mir- On/Off On 195

rors
Default Settings — — No/Yes — 195
*: You can also set this while driving.

(31,1)
29
& Individual settings and adjustments excluding combination meter display (color LCD) 0
S00AF02
For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 136
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 129
& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer

S00AF03
A SUBARU dealer can change the setting adjustments of the following items to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer for details.
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting
Alarm system Monitoring start delay time (after 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
closure of doors)
Alarm/panic alarm Dome light, cargo area light, and ON/OFF OFF
map lights illumination
Keyless Access (if equipped) Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Remote keyless entry system
Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Battery drainage prevention func- Battery drainage prevention func- Operation/Non-operation Operation
tion tion
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto on/off headlights Auto-on/off wiper-linked Operation/Non-operation Operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Operation/Non-operation U.S.-spec. models: Non-operation
Other models: Operation
Auto dimmer cancel Sensitivity of the operation of the OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid

auto dimmer cancel
High beam assist function (if High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
equipped)
– CONTINUED –

(32,1)
30
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting
Power rear gate open and close Power rear gate opening and clos-
function ing by remote control key/access Operation/Non-operation Operation
key
Reverse interlocking outside mirror Right and left mirrors/right mirror Right mirror
target customize
Outside mirrors reverse tilt-down
Reverse interlocking outside mirror Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
last memory customize

(33,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-1. Seats .................................................................. 32 System servicing .................................................58
S01 Precautions against vehicle modification..............58
1
Safety tips ............................................................32
Manual seat (if equipped)......................................35 1-7. Child restraint systems.................................... 59
Power seat (if equipped) .......................................36 Safety tips for installing child restraint systems ...61
1-2. Rear seats ......................................................... 39 Where to place a child restraint system ................61
Armrest (if equipped) ............................................40 Choosing a child restraint system ........................63
Folding down the rear seatback ............................40 Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR
Reclining the seatback (if equipped) .....................42 seatbelt..............................................................63
Installing a booster seat .......................................67
1-3. Head restraints ................................................. 43
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
Front seats ...........................................................43 lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ................68
Rear seats ............................................................44 Top tether anchorages .........................................71
1-4. Seat heater (if equipped).................................. 46 1-8. SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
Safety precautions................................................46 System airbag) ............................................... 73
Front seat heater ..................................................46 General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Rear seat heater (if equipped) ...............................46 system...............................................................73
1-5. Seatbelts............................................................ 47 General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Seatbelt safety tips ...............................................47 system for accessories and any objects .............75
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .....................49 General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency system and children...........................................77
Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) ..............................49 Components ........................................................80
Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................50 SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system .............82
Fastening the seatbelt ..........................................50 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag ...............94
Seatbelt maintenance............................................56 SRS airbag system monitors .............................. 101
1-6. Seatbelt pretensioners ..................................... 56 SRS airbag system servicing.............................. 102
Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ...............57 Precautions against vehicle modification............ 103
Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt How to contact the vehicle manufacturer
pretensioners .....................................................57 concerning modifications for persons with
System monitors ..................................................58 disabilities that may affect the advanced
airbag system .................................................. 104

(34,1)
32 Seats
1-1. Seats always used in the upright posi-

S01AQ tion while the vehicle is running.
& Safety tips If the front seatbacks are not
S01AQ01 used in the upright position in a
! Safety tips for seat collision, the risk of sliding under
S01AQ0101
the lap belt and of the lap belt
WARNING sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
. Never adjust the seat while driv- serious internal injury or death.
ing, as it may cause loss of
vehicle control or personal injury. . The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
. Before adjusting the seat, make Occupants who are out of the
sure the hands and feet of rear proper position when the SRS
seat passengers and cargo are airbag deploys could suffer very
clear of the adjusting mechan- serious injuries. Because the WARNING
ism. SRS airbag needs enough space Place children in the rear seat prop-
. After adjusting the seat, move it for deployment, the driver should erly restrained at all times. The SRS
back and forth to make sure it is always sit upright and well back airbag deploys with considerable
securely locked. If the seat is not in the seat as far from the steer- speed and force and can injure or
securely locked, it may move or ing wheel as practical while still even kill children, especially if they
the seatbelt may not operate maintaining full vehicle control are not restrained or improperly
properly. and the front passenger should restrained. Because children are
. Do not put objects under the front move the seat as far back as lighter and weaker than adults, their
seats. They may interfere with possible and sit upright and well risk of being injured from deploy-
front seat locking and cause an back in the seat. ment is greater. For that reason, we
accident. strongly recommend that ALL chil-
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- dren (including those in child seats
straint when the occupant sits and those that have outgrown child
well back and upright in the seat. restraint devices) sit in the REAR
To reduce the risk of sliding seat properly restrained at all times
under the seatbelt in a collision, in a child restraint device or in a
the front seatbacks should be seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

(35,1)
Seats 33
for the child’s age, height and 1

weight. Secure ALL types of child

restraint devices (including forward
facing child seat) in the REAR seats
at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi- WARNING WARNING
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau- To prevent the passenger from slid- Do not let rear passengers rest their
tions concerning child restraint sys- ing under the seatbelt in the event of feet between the front seatback and
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys- a collision, always put the seatback seat cushion. Doing so may lead to
tems” FP59. in the upright position while the defective operation of the following
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not systems and could result in serious
place objects such as cushions injury.
between the passenger and the seat- . Occupant detection system
back. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt . SRS side airbag
sliding up over the abdomen will . Seat heater (if equipped)
increase, and both can result in . Power seat (if equipped)
serious internal injury or death.
– CONTINUED –

(36,1)
34 Seats
! Safety tips for head restraint

S01AQ0102
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way round. Doing so will prevent
the head restraints from function-
ing as intended. Therefore, when
WARNING WARNING you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
Seatbelts provide maximum re- Never stack luggage or other cargo straints correctly to protect vehi-
straint when the occupant sits well higher than the top of the seatback cle occupants.
back and upright in the seat. Do not because it could tumble forward and
. All occupants, including the dri-
put cushions or any other materials injure passengers in the event of a
ver, should not operate a vehicle
between occupants and seatbacks sudden stop or accident.
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
head restraints are placed in their
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
proper positions in order to mini-
of the lap belt sliding up over the
mize the risk of neck injury in the
abdomen will increase, and both can
event of a crash.
result in serious internal injury or
death.

(37,1)
Seats 35
& Manual seat (if equipped) ! Reclining the seatback ! Seat height adjustment (driver’s 1
S01AQ05 S01AQ0502
seat)
! Forward and backward adjustment S01AQ0503

S01AQ0501
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then 1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to release the lever and make sure the is lowered.
the desired position. Then release the seatback is securely locked into place. 2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
lever and move the seat back and forth to rises.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
make sure that it is securely locked into The height of the seat can be adjusted by
can spring back upward with force when
place. moving the seat adjustment lever up and
the lever is pulled. When operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the down.
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
– CONTINUED –

(38,1)
36 Seats
& Power seat (if equipped) backward. During forward/backward ad- ! Front passenger’s seat
S01AQ06 justment of the seat, the seat cushion S01AQ0602
! Driver’s seat angle or height cannot be adjusted.

S01AQ0601 2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease 1) Seat position forward/backward con-
lower back support, push the rear side of trol switch
the switch. To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or

(39,1)
Seats 37
! Memory function (driver’s seat – if retrieval of the seat position, stop 1

equipped) the retrieval of the seat position
S01AQ0603

by performing any of the follow-
WARNING ing.
– Operate any of the power seat
. To avoid loss of vehicle control or switches.
personal injury, never perform
the following operations while – Press the “SET” button.
driving. – Press button “1” or “2”.
– Adjusting the seat – Operate the outside mirror
– Retrieving the seat position control switch.
. Before adjusting the seat, make Some seat positions can be registered.
sure that cargo or the hands and Register the seat position with button “1” or 2. Press and hold the “SET” button, then
feet of rear seat passengers are “2” or each of the key fobs and retrieve the press button “1” or “2” to register the seat
clear of the adjusting mechan- seat position. position.
ism.
. Perform the seat position retrie- The following seat positions can be regis- A chirp will sound once, and the seat
val before driving. Be sure to tered. position is registered.
confirm that the select lever is in . Forward/backward position of the seat
! Registration of seat position with
the “P” position, and the parking . Angle of the seatback a key fob
brake is applied, when adjusting . Angle of the seat cushion S01AQ060302
the seat position. Do not drive . Height of the seat 1. Adjust the seat position under the
until the retrieval of the seat following conditions.
. Angle of the outside mirrors
position is complete. . The parking brake is applied.
. When retrieving a registered seat ! Registration of seat position with . The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
position, make sure the hands, button “1” or “2” “OFF” position.
feet and possessions of rear seat S01AQ060301 . The select lever is in the “P” position.
1. Adjust the seat position under the
passengers are clear of the seat
following conditions.
adjusting mechanism.
. The parking brake is applied.
. When any unusual conditions or . The select lever is in the “P” position.
malfunctions occur during the
– CONTINUED –

(40,1)
38 Seats
! Retrieval of the seat position

registered with access key fob
S01AQ060304
1. Hold the registered access key fob.
2. Hold the access key fob and press and 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
hold the “SET” button, then press the “ ” position.
button of the access key fob. 2. Put the select lever is in the “P” position
and apply the parking brake, then press
A chirp will sound once, and the seat 2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing
button “1” or “2”.
position is registered. the “ ” button or touching the sensor
A chirp will sound and the seat and outside behind the door handle.
! Retrieval of seat position regis-
tered with button “1” or “2” mirror move to the registered position. 3. Open the driver’s door.
S01AQ060303
NOTE A chirp will sound and the seat moves to
WARNING . If a new position is registered to the the registered position.
same button, the previously registered
Be sure to press the correct button
seat position data will be deleted.
to retrieve your registered seat posi-
. If the vehicle battery is removed, the
tion. If the seat position is not
registered seat position data will not be
optimum for you, it may adversely
deleted. However, deviation of the re-
affect your driving and may reduce
gistered seat position may occur.
the effectiveness of the seatbelt.
That could result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.

(41,1)
Rear seats 39
NOTE 1-2. Rear seats 1

. If the keyless access function is S01AC

disabled, the seat position cannot be
retrieved by touching the sensor be-
hind the driver’s door handle. However,
the seat position can still be retrieved
by pressing the “ ” button on the
access key fob. For information about
how to enable/disable the keyless ac-
cess function, refer to “Disabling key-
less access function” FP120.
. If a new position is registered for the
same access key fob, the previously
registered seat position data will be
deleted. WARNING
! Clearing the registered seat posi- WARNING Never stack luggage or other cargo
tion with access key fob higher than the top of the seatback
S01AQ060305
Seatbelts provide maximum re- because it could tumble forward and
1. Close the driver’s door. injure passengers in the event of a
straint when the occupant sits well
2. Hold the access key fob and press and back and upright in the seat. Do not sudden stop or accident.
hold the “SET” button, then press the “ ” put cushions or any other materials
button on the access key fob. between occupants and seatbacks
A chirp will sound, and the registered seat or seat cushions. If you do so, the
position will be cleared. risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious injury or death.
– CONTINUED –

(42,1)
40 Rear seats
& Armrest (if equipped) & Folding down the rear seat- cargo area, which could cause
S01AC01
back serious injury or death.
S01AC02
WARNING
. When you fold down the seat-
back, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the rear
seat. Not doing so creates a risk
of injury or property damage if
the seatback suddenly folds
down.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
To lower the armrest, pull down the top the cargo area. Doing so may
edge of the armrest. result in serious injury or death.
. Secure all objects and especially
WARNING long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
. To avoid serious injury, passen-
inside the vehicle and causing
gers must never be allowed to sit
serious injury during a sudden
on the center armrest.
stop, a sudden steering maneu-
. When using the seatbelt, do not ver or a rapid acceleration.
allow it to become tangled with
. When you return the seatback to
an arm rest. The seatbelt will not
its original position, shake the
perform its original function in an
seatback back and forth to con-
emergency and it may cause a
firm that it is securely fixed in
serious injury.
place. If the seatback is not
securely fixed in place, the seat- 1) Securing hook
back may suddenly fold down in
the event of sudden braking, or
objects may move out from the

(43,1)
Rear seats 41
WARNING ! Return the rear seatback 1

S01AC0204

When the seatback is returned to its
original position, observe the fol-
lowing precautions. Failure to do so
may lead to serious injury or an
accident because the operation effi-
ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.
. The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and it
should be fully visible.
. The seatbelt should not pass
behind the securing hook for the Release knob
seatback.
WARNING
CAUTION When returning the seatback to its
. Do not hang luggage etc. on the original position, observe the fol-
securing hook. The possibility lowing precaution.
exists that the seatback may not Failure to observe the precaution
be able to be fixed firmly in place. may damage the seatbelt, impairing
This could lead to unexpected its effectiveness, and possibly re-
accidents. sult in a serious injury.
. While driving, if something hits . When returning the seatback to
the release latch, it is possible its original position, pull the
that the seatback will fold down. Release latch on both sides of the cargo
seatbelt out towards the vehicle
Be careful that no luggage etc. area (if equipped) exterior so that it will not be
hits the latch. caught between the seatback
2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock and the trim.
1. Lower the head restraint of the rear release knob or release latch (if equipped)
center seating position. and then fold the seatback down.
– CONTINUED –

(44,1)
42 Rear seats
fold down in the event of sudden

braking, or objects may move out
WARNING
from the cargo area, which could To prevent the passenger from slid-
cause serious injury or death. ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, observe the following
& Reclining the seatback (if precautions:
equipped) . Keep the seatback in the upright
S01AC06
position while the vehicle is in
motion.
. Do not place objects such as
cushions between the passenger
and the seatback.
Lock release knob Otherwise, the risk of sliding under
1) Unlocked the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding
2) Locked up over the abdomen will increase,
A) Unlocking marker in red
and both can result in serious inter-
To return the seatback to its original nal injury or death.
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that the unlock-
ing marker on the lock release knob is no CAUTION
longer visible.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
WARNING cargo area cover, observe the fol-
lowing precautions.
When you return the seatback to its . Be careful not to pinch your hand
original position, check that the between the head restraint and
unlocking marker on the lock re- the cargo area cover when you
lease knob is not visible. Also, shake recline the rear seat.
the seatback slightly to confirm that
. Move the front cover of the cargo
it is securely fixed in place. If the
area cover backward so that the
seatback is not securely fixed in
cover is not damaged by the
place, the seatback may suddenly

(45,1)
Head restraints 43
reclined seatback. Refer to “Car- 1-3. Head restraints & Front seats 1
go area cover” FP285. S01AS Both the driver’s seat and the front
S01AS01

passenger’s seat are equipped with head
WARNING restraints. Both head restraints are adjus-
table in the following ways.
The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the ! Height adjustment
S01AS0101
front seats only. The rear seat head
restraints are designed to be in-
stalled into the rear seats only. Do
not attempt to install the front seat
head restraints into the rear seats, or
the rear seat head restraints into the
front seats.
Pull the strap and adjust the seatback to NOTE

the desired position. It is possible to adjust the angle of the
Then release the strap and make sure the front seat head restraints only. When
seatback is securely locked into place. installing the front seat head restraints,
make sure that the angle of the head 1) Head restraint
restraints can be adjusted. 2) Release button
3) Remove button
To release:
. Lowermost to the 1st step
Pull the head restraint up to the 1st step.
To raise:
. 1st step to the 3rd step
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the release button on the top of the
seatback.
– CONTINUED –

(46,1)
44 Head restraints
To lower: perform the installation and removal Then, adjust the head restraint to the
Push the head restraint down while press- tasks. preferred angle.
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback. ! Angle adjustment & Rear seats
S01AS0102
S01AS02
To remove: Head restraints are installed in all second-
Use a key or other hard, pointed object to row seats and can be adjusted as de-
press the remove button, then pull out the scribed below.
head restraint.
! Window side seating position
To install: S01AS0201
Push the head restraint into the holes on

the top of the seatback until it locks.
The angle of the head restraint can be

adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
head restraint to a position where the back
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible. 1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To tilt:
Each head restraint should be adjusted so Tilt the head restraint by hand to the To remove:
that the center is closest to the top of the preferred position. A click will sound when Press the release button, and pull out the
occupant’s ears. the head restraint is locked. head restraint.
To return: To install:
NOTE Tilt the head restraint as far forward as it Push the head restraint into the holes on
When the head restraint cannot be can go. The head restraint will automati- the top of the seatback until it locks. Press
pulled out or installed due to insuffi- cally return to the fully upright position. and hold the release button to lower the
cient clearance, tilt the seat and then head restraint.

(47,1)
Head restraints 45
After installing the head restraint, make extended position. When it is not occupied,
sure it is securely locked. lower it to improve rearward visibility.
1

! Center seating position
S01AS0202
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting in the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Press the release button then push the
head restraint down.
To remove:
Press the release button, and pull out the
head restraint.
To install:
1) Incorrect (retracted position) Push the head restraint into the holes on
2) Correct (extended position) the top of the seatback until it locks. Press
and hold the release button to lower the
head restraint.
When the rear center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the

(48,1)
46 Seat heater
1-4. Seat heater (if equipped) NOTE Front seats

Use of the seat heater for a long period 1) HI – Rapid heating
S01AB
of time while the engine is not running 2) LO – Normal heating
The seat heater is equipped in the front 3) Off
seats or rear seats (window side seating can cause battery discharge.
A) Left-hand side
position). B) Right-hand side
The seat heater operates when the ignition
& Front seat heater
S01AB05 To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or
switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” “HI” position on the switch, as desired,
position. depending on the temperature.
Selecting the “HI” position will cause the
& Safety precautions seat to heat up quicker.
S01AB03
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the

CAUTION
opposite side of the current position.
. People with delicate skin may The indicator located on the switch illumi-
suffer slight burns even at low nates when the seat heater is in operation.
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time. & Rear seat heater (if equipped)
When using the heater, always be S01AB06
sure to warn the persons con-
cerned. CAUTION
. Do not put anything on the seat Do not open and close the center
which insulates against heat, console lid while operating the rear
such as a blanket, cushion, or seat heater switch. There is the risk
similar items. This may cause the of fingers being caught in the lid.
seat heater to overheat.
. When the seat is warmed enough The seat heater operates when the ignition
or before you leave the vehicle, switch is in the “ON” position.
be sure to turn off the seat heater.

(49,1)
Seatbelts 47
to heat up quicker. 1-5. Seatbelts 1

S01AE
NOTE

& Seatbelt safety tips
Only the front seat heater switches S01AE01
retain the previous switch position WARNING

even if the vehicle has restarted. The
rear seat heater switch will reset. . All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
Rear seat heater switch
. All belts should fit snugly in order
1) HIGH mode indicator
2) LOW mode indicator
to provide full restraint. Loose
A) Left-hand side fitting belts are not as effective in
B) Right-hand side preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-
Press the rear seat heater switch. Each port only one person. Never use a
time you press the switch, the mode will single belt for two or more per-
change as follows. sons – even children. Otherwise,
in an accident, serious injury or
death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
When LOW mode is selected, the LOW including retractors and attach-
mode indicator on the rear seat heater ing hardware worn by occupants
switch illuminates. When HIGH mode is of a vehicle that has been in a
selected, both the LOW and HIGH mode serious accident. The entire as-
indicators illuminate. When the OFF mode sembly should be replaced even
is selected, all the indicators turn off. if damage is not obvious.
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
Selecting “HIGH” mode will cause the seat
– CONTINUED –

(50,1)
48 Seatbelts
reversed. In an accident, this can passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
increase the risk or severity of side and curtain airbags deploy.
injury. ! Infants or small children
. Keep the lap belt as low as S01AE0101
Use a child restraint system that is suitable
possible on your hips. In a colli- for your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraint
sion, this spreads the force of the systems” FP59.
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker ! Children
S01AE0102
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- WARNING
straint when the occupant sits Place children in the rear seat prop-
well back and upright in the seat. erly restrained at all times. The SRS
To reduce the risk of sliding airbag deploys with considerable
under the seatbelt in a collision, WARNING speed and force and can injure or
the front seatbacks should be even kill children, especially if they
always used in the upright posi- Never place the shoulder belt under are not restrained or improperly
tion while the vehicle is running. the arm or behind the back. If an restrained. Because children are
If the front seatbacks are not accident occurs, this can increase lighter and weaker than adults, their
used in the upright position in a the risk or severity of injury. risk of being injured from deploy-
collision, the risk of sliding under ment is greater. For that reason, we
the lap belt and of the lap belt strongly recommend that ALL chil-
sliding up over the abdomen will CAUTION dren (including those in child seats
increase, and both can result in and those that have outgrown child
serious internal injury or death. Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that has restraint devices) sit in the REAR
. Do not put cushions or any other seat properly restrained at all times
been closed up in sunny weather;
materials between occupants in a child restraint device or in a
they could burn an occupant. Do not
and seatbacks or seat cushions. seatbelt, whichever is appropriate
touch such hot parts until they cool.
If you do so, the risk of sliding for the child’s height and weight.
under the lap belt and of the lap Your vehicle is equipped with a crash Secure ALL types of child restraint
belt sliding up over the abdomen sensing and diagnostic module, which will devices (including forward facing
will increase, and both can result record the use of the seatbelt by the front child seats) in the REAR seats at all
in serious internal injury or death.

(51,1)
Seatbelts 49
times. cannot be properly positioned, a child & Emergency Locking Retrac- 1

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN restraint system should be used. Never tor (ELR)
place the shoulder belt under the child’s

S01AE02
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO arm or behind the child’s back.
Locking Retractor (ELR).
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE ! Expectant mothers The emergency locking retractor allows
S01AE0103
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO normal body movement but the retractor
THE SRS AIRBAG. locks automatically during a sudden stop,
According to accident statistics, impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
children are safer when properly out of the retractor.
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi- & Automatic Locking Retractor/
tions. For instructions and precau- Emergency Locking Retrac-
tions concerning the child restraint tor (ALR/ELR)
system, refer to “Child restraint S01AE03
systems” FP59. Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
If a child is too big for a child restraint ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic
system, the child should sit in the rear seat Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
and be restrained using the seatbelts. Expectant mothers also need to use the Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
According to accident statistics, children seatbelts. They should consult their doctor gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/
are safer when properly restrained in the for specific recommendations. The lap belt ELR has an additional locking mode
rear seating positions than in the front should be worn securely and as low as “Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seating positions. Never allow a child to possible over the hips, not over the waist. mode” intended to secure a child restraint
stand up or kneel on the seat. system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
out completely and is then retracted even
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
the face or neck, move the child closer to that position and the seatbelt cannot be
the belt buckle to help provide a good extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to will be heard which indicate the retractor
securely place the lap belt as low as functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
possible on the hips and not on the child’s retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
When securing a child restraint system on
– CONTINUED –

(52,1)
50 Seatbelts
the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, 2. Sit well back in the seat.
the seatbelt must be changed over to the 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
When the child restraint system is re- . If the belt stops before reaching the
moved, make sure that the seatbelt re- buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
tracts fully and the retractor returned to the out more slowly.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
mode. the belt retract slightly after giving it a
For instructions on how to convert the strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”
FP63.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
& Seatbelt warning light the shoulder belt.
and chime 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
S01AE04
your hips, not on your waist.
Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and chime”
FP165.
& Fastening the seatbelt

S01AE06
! Front seatbelts
S01AE0601
1. Adjust the seat position according to 4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
the following procedure. until you hear a click.
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.

(53,1)
Seatbelts 51
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder WARNING ! Rear seatbelts (except rear center 1
belt anchor height seatbelt)

S01AE060101 S01AE0602
When wearing the seatbelts, make
1. Sit well back in the seat.
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your 2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
anchor to a lower position. Placing . If the belt stops before reaching the
the shoulder belt over the neck may buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
result in neck injury during sudden out more slowly.
braking or in a collision. . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
S01AE060102
The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
up.
To lower:
1. Push the button on the buckle. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor until you hear a click.
down. 2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to
avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.
Pull down the anchor to make sure that it is
locked in place. Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
– CONTINUED –

(54,1)
52 Seatbelts
! Unfastening the seatbelt ! Rear center seatbelt

S01AE060201 S01AE0603
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt. 1. Push the button on the buckle. 1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on 2) Connector (tongue)
2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to 3) Connector (buckle)
your hips, not on your waist. avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted. 4) Center seatbelt buckle
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.

(55,1)
Seatbelts 53
WARNING WARNING 1

Fastening the seatbelt with the web- . Be sure to fasten both tongue
bing twisted can increase the risk or plates to the respective buckles.
severity of injury in an accident. If the seatbelt is used only as a
When fastening the belt after it is shoulder belt (with the connec-
pulled out from the retractor, espe- tor’s tongue plate not fastened to
cially when inserting the connec- the connector’s buckle on the
tor’s tongue plate into the mating right-hand side), it cannot prop-
buckle (on right-hand side), always erly restrain the wearer in posi-
check that the webbing is not tion in an accident, possibly
twisted. resulting in serious injury or
death.
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the
. The head restraint is not intended
recess of the ceiling.
to be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise 1. Retrieve the connector (tongue) plate
the head restraint to the extended from the slot in the recess by pulling the
position. Otherwise, in an acci- connector (tongue) plate, then pull out the
dent, serious injury or death seatbelt slowly.
could result.
– CONTINUED –

(56,1)
54 Seatbelts
is heard.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
2. Pass the seatbelt through the belt 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
guide. the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips, not on your waist.
4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

into the center seatbelt buckle marked
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
clicks.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click

(57,1)
Seatbelts 55
! Unfastening the seatbelt retractor to roll up the belt slowly. You

S01AE060301 should hold the webbing end and guide it
1
back into the retractor while it is rolling up.

Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess
on the ceiling and then insert the connector
(tongue) plate into the slot located at the
front of the recess.
2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard

1. Push the release button of the center pointed object into the slot in the connector
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it
unfasten the seatbelt. in. The connector (tongue) plate will then
disconnect from the buckle.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector. CAUTION
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly. Other-
wise, the metal tongue plates
may hit against the trim, resulting
in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
3. With the belt held by hand, allow the plate can swing and hit against
– CONTINUED –

(58,1)
56 Seatbelt pretensioners
the trim during driving, causing 1-6. Seatbelt pretensioners seatbelt retractors equipped with
damage to the trim. S01AF seatbelt pretensioners, consult
The following seatbelts have a seatbelt your SUBARU dealer.
& Seatbelt maintenance pretensioner. . When discarding seatbelt retrac-
S01AE07
. Driver’s seatbelt tor assemblies equipped with
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and
. Front passenger’s seatbelt seatbelt pretensioners or scrap-
lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the
ping the entire vehicle due to
belts because this could seriously affect . Rear passenger’s seatbelt (window- collision damage or for other
their strength. side) reasons, consult your SUBARU
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments The seatbelt pretensioners are designed dealer.
including the webbing and all hardware to be activated in the event of an accident
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, involving a moderate to severe frontal and
damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re- NOTE
side collision and rollover accident.
place the seatbelts even if only minor . Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
damage is found. WARNING signed to activate in minor impacts or
in rear impacts.
CAUTION . To obtain maximum protection, . Pretensioners are designed to func-
the occupants should sit in an tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
. Keep the belts free of polishes, upright position with their seat- event that a pretensioner is activated,
oils, chemicals and particularly belts properly fastened. Refer to both the driver’s and front passenger’s
battery acid. “Seatbelts” FP47. seatbelt retractor assemblies should
. Never attempt to make modifica- . Do not modify, remove or strike be replaced only by an authorized
tions or changes that will prevent the seatbelt retractor assemblies SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
the seatbelt from operating prop- equipped with seatbelt preten- belt retractor assemblies, use only
erly. sioners or surrounding area. This genuine SUBARU parts.
could result in accidental activa- . If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt
tion of the seatbelt pretensioners pretensioner does not retract or cannot
or could make the system inop- be pulled out due to a malfunction or
erative, possibly resulting in ser- activation of the pretensioner, contact
ious injury. Seatbelt preten- your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sioners have no user-serviceable sible.
parts. For required servicing of . If the seatbelt retractor assembly or

(59,1)
Seatbelt pretensioners 57
surrounding area has been damaged, . SRS frontal airbag sensor & Seatbelt with shoulder belt 1
contact your SUBARU dealer as soon . Side impact sensor and lap belt pretensioners
as possible.

S01AF02
. Rollover sensor NOTE
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle If the sensor detects a certain predeter- This section is applicable to the front
is equipped with seatbelt preten- mined amount of force during frontal or seatbelt.
sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the side collisions or rollover accidents, any
contents in this section. seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is
quickly drawn back in by the retractor to
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt take up the slack so that the belt more
pretensioner effectively restrains the seat occupant.
S01AF01
NOTE The rear passenger’s seatbelt (window-
side) pretensioner includes a tension
This section is applicable to the follow-
reducing device which limits the peak
ing components.
forces exerted by the seatbelt on the
. Rear passenger’s seatbelt (window- occupant in the event of a collision.
side)
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released. 1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
These occurrences are normal and not belt pretensioner and adaptive force
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a limiter)
fire in the vehicle. 2) Lap belt pretensioner
The shoulder belt pretensioner is supple-
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
mented by a lap belt pretensioner, which is
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
located at the base of the center pillar. Like
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the
must be replaced.
belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of
frontal collision force is detected. As a
The pretensioner sensor also serves as result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat
follows. occupant more effectively.
– CONTINUED –

(60,1)
58 Seatbelt pretensioners
The front seatbelt pretensioner includes a & System servicing retractors, have the work performed
tension reducing device which limits the S01AF04
by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the WARNING
occupant in the event of a collision.
The adaptive force limiter will select a . When discarding a seatbelt re- NOTE
reducing load to the suit body size of tractor assembly or scrapping If the front or side part of the vehicle is
occupant as detected by the occupant the entire vehicle damaged by a damaged in an accident to the extent
detection sensor. collision, consult your SUBARU that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
dealer. operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, as soon as possible.
an operating noise will be heard and a . Tampering with or disconnecting
small amount of smoke will be released. the system’s wiring could result
These occurrences are normal and not in accidental activation of the & Precautions against vehicle
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a seatbelt pretensioner and/or modification
fire in the vehicle. SRS airbag or could make the S01AF05
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
system inoperative, which may
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been want to install any accessory parts to your
result in serious injury. Do not
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re- vehicle.
use electrical test equipment on
mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt any circuit related to the seatbelt CAUTION
cannot be pulled out and retracted and pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-
therefore must be replaced. tems. For required servicing of Do not perform any of the following
the seatbelt pretensioner, con- modifications. Such modifications
& System monitors sult your nearest SUBARU deal- can interfere with proper operation
A diagnostic system continually monitors
S01AF03
er. of the seatbelt pretensioners.
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner . Attachment of any equipment
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position. (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
The seatbelt pretensioners share the
CAUTION
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
control module with the SRS airbag For the locations of the sensors and ine SUBARU accessory parts to
system. Therefore, if any malfunction control modules, refer to “Compo- the front end.
occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the nents” FP80. . Modification of the suspension
SRS airbag system warning light will system or front end structure.
illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS airbag If you need service or repair in those
system monitors” FP101. areas or near the front seatbelt . Installation of a tire of different

(61,1)
Child restraint systems 59
size and construction from the 1-7. Child restraint systems Children could be endangered in an
tires specified on the vehicle accident if their child restraints are not
1
S01AG
properly secured in the vehicle. When

placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi- installing the child restraint system, care-
dual vehicle models in this Own- fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
er’s Manual.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint WARNING
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle. Do not leave children in the car
unattended. High interior tempera-
You should use an infant or child restraint tures may cause heat stroke and
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle dehydration that result in serious
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi- injury or death.
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
child restraint systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)” FP68).
– CONTINUED –

(62,1)
60 Child restraint systems
Lock release knob

1) Unlocked WARNING WARNING
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red Never let a passenger hold a child on Children should be properly re-
his or her lap or in his or her arms strained at all times. Never allow a
WARNING while the vehicle is moving. The child to stand up, or to kneel on any
passenger cannot protect the child seat. Unrestrained children will be
Before installing a child restraint from injury in a collision, because thrown forward during sudden stop
system, be sure to confirm that the the child will be caught between the or in an accident and can be injured
seatback is securely locked into passenger and objects inside the seriously.
place. Otherwise, in an accident, vehicle. Additionally, children standing up or
serious injury or death could result. Additionally, holding a child in your kneeling on or in front of the front
lap or arms in the front seat exposes seat are exposed another serious
that child to another serious danger. danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
Since the SRS airbag deploys with ploys with considerable speed and
considerable speed and force, the force, the child could be injured or
child could be injured or even killed. even killed.

(63,1)
& Safety tips for installing child child suffering personal injury in the contact does not occur. 1
restraint systems event of an accident may be in-

S01AG16 creased.
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat- & Where to place a child re-
belts can become hot in a vehicle straint system
that has been closed up in sunny The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
S01AG01
weather; they could burn a small dations on where to place a child restraint
child. Check the child restraint system in your vehicle.
system before you place a child
in it. WARNING
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle. . Several types of child restraint
Unsecured child restraint sys- systems may conceal the buckle
tems can be thrown around in- of the neighboring seat. If the A: Front passenger’s seat
side of the vehicle in a sudden occupant of the neighboring seat You should not install a child restraint
stop, turn or accident; they can cannot correctly fasten the seat- system (including a booster seat) due to
strike and injure vehicle occu- belt, that person must move to a the hazard to children posed by the
pants as well as result in serious different seat. If the seatbelt can- passenger’s airbag.
injuries or death to the child. not be correctly fastened, there is
the risk of serious injury or death B: Rear seat, window-side seating
in the event of sudden braking or positions
CAUTION a collision. Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
. If the child restraint system can-
When you install a child restraint not be correctly installed be- In these positions, the following equipment
system, follow the manufacturer’s cause it contacts the driver’s is provided for installing a child restraint
instructions supplied with it. After seat, move the child restraint system.
installing the child restraint system, system to a different seat. If it . Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-
check to ensure that it is held cannot be installed in a different gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-
securely in position. If it is not held seat (other than the driver’s seat), belts
tight and secure, the danger of your adjust the front seat so that . Lower anchorages (bars)
– CONTINUED –

(64,1)
. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages) the rear center seat using the lower and weight. According to acci-
anchorages, do not sit in the rear right dent statistics, children are safer
Some types of child restraints might not be seat. when properly restrained in the
able to be secured firmly due to projection If a child restraint system is not correctly rear seating positions than in the
of the seat cushion. fixed in place (for example, if a child front seating positions.
In this seating position, you should use restraint system can be moved more than . Do not use lower anchorages
only a child restraint system that has a 1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), the child (bars) for a seat in the center
bottom base that fits snugly against the restraint system should be moved to a seating position unless a child
contours of the seat cushion and can be window seat position of the rear seat. restraint system manufacturer’s
securely retained using the seatbelt.
instructions permit and specify
C: Rear seat, center seating position WARNING using anchors spaced as far
In this position, the following equipment is . Even with advanced airbags, chil- apart as those in this vehicle.
provided for installing a child restraint dren can be seriously injured by . Do not connect two or more lower
system. the airbag. Place children in the hooks onto the same anchorage
. ALR/ELR seatbelts rear seat properly restrained at (bar).
. Lower anchorages (bars) all times. The SRS airbag deploys
. Top tether anchorages with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
Some types of child restraints might not be children, especially if they are not
able to be secured firmly due to projection restrained or improperly re-
of the seat cushion. strained. Because children are
In this seating position, you should use lighter and weaker than adults,
only a child restraint system that has a their risk of being injured from
bottom base that fits snugly against the deployment is greater.
contours of the seat cushion and can be For that reason, be sure to secure
securely retained using the seatbelt. ALL types of child restraint de-
The rear center seat includes lower an- vices (including forward facing
chorages, and the lower anchorages on child seats) in the REAR seats at
the center side of the rear right seat can be all times. You should choose a
used to install a child restraint system. restraint device which is appro-
When a child restraint system is installed in priate for the child’s age, height

(65,1)
dent. that the child restraint system is compa-

WARNING tible with the vehicle in which it will be
1
used.

. SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN- & Choosing a child restraint
GER’S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER IN- system & Installing child restraint sys-
STALL A CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN S01AG02
tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt
S01AG04
THE FRONT PASSENGER’S
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SER- CAUTION
IOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE When installing a child restraint
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO system in the rear center seating
THE SRS AIRBAG. position, set both seatbacks to the
original position. Otherwise, the
. Do not allow children to lean their
child restraint system cannot be
heads or any other parts of their
securely restrained, which may re-
bodies against the door or the
sult in death or serious injuries in
area of the seat, front and rear
the event of sudden stop, sudden
pillars or roof side rails. The SRS
steering maneuver or an accident.
side airbags and SRS curtain
airbags deploy even if children Choose a child restraint system that is
are seated in the child restraint appropriate for the child’s age and size ! Installing a rearward facing child
system. It will be dangerous if the (weight and height) in order to provide the restraint
S01AG0401
SRS side airbags and SRS cur- child with proper protection. The child
tain airbags inflate. The impact restraint system should meet all applicable WARNING
could cause death or serious requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle
injury to the child. Safety Standards for the United States or NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN
of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
. To secure the child restraint sys- SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
tem, be sure to comply with all for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system or THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
installation instructions provided CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
by the child restraint manufac- the manufacturer’s statement of compli-
ance in the document attached to the THE SRS AIRBAG.
turer. Not doing so could result in
death or serious injury to chil- system. . Before installing a child restraint
dren in a sudden stop or acci- Also it is important for you to make sure system, be sure to confirm that
– CONTINUED –

(66,1)
the seatback is securely locked seating position, if the child restraint system, perform the following procedure.
into place. Otherwise, in an acci- system does not fit snugly against (1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
dent, serious injury or death the contours of the rear center seat retractor to change the retractor over from
could result. cushion, install the child restraint the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to
system in the window-side seating the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
position to be safe. For details, refer mode.
to “Where to place a child restraint (2) Allow the belt to rewind into the
system” FP61. retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through functions as ALR.
or around the child restraint system follow-
ing the instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm

that it is securely locked into place.
– Check the red colored unlocking
marker which is attached to the bottom
of the lock release knob is invisible. For
details, refer to “Folding down the rear 7. Push and pull the child restraint system
seatback” FP40. forward and from side to side to check if it
2. Place the child restraint system in the is firmly secured. Sometimes a child
rear seating position. restraint can be more firmly secured by
pushing it down into the seat cushion and
WARNING 5. Take up the slack in the lap belt. then tightening the seatbelt.
When you intend to install a child 6. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is 8. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR
restraint system in the rear center recommended by the manufacturer’s in- mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion
structions supplied with the child restraint of the belt to confirm that it cannot be

(67,1)
pulled out (ALR properly functioning). ! Installing forward facing child re- CAUTION 1
straint
S01AG0402

Store the head restraint that has
WARNING been removed in the cargo area.
Avoid placing the head restraint in
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT the passenger compartment to pre-
IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO vent it from being thrown around in
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR the passenger compartment in a
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- sudden stop or a sharp turn.
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. 3. For models with rear seat reclining
Before installing a child restraint mechanism, adjust the seatback to the
system, be sure to confirm that the upright position.
seatback is securely locked into 4. Place the child restraint system in the
9. To remove the child restraint system, place. Otherwise, in an accident, rear seating position.
press the release button on the seatbelt serious injury or death could result.
buckle and allow the belt to retract WARNING
completely. The belt will return to the 1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm
ELR mode. that it is securely locked into place. When you intend to install a child
– Check the red colored unlocking restraint system on the rear center
marker which is attached to the bottom seating position, if the child restraint
NOTE system does not fit snugly against
When the child restraint system is no of the lock release knob is not visible.
For details, refer to “Folding down the the contours of the rear center seat
longer in use, remove it and restore the cushion, install the child restraint
ELR function of the retractor. That rear seatback” FP40.
system on the window-side seating
function is restored by allowing the 2. Remove the head restraint of the rear position to be safe. For details, refer
seatbelt to retract fully. seating position where the child restraint to “Where to place a child restraint
system is to be installed. For details, refer system” FP61.
to “Rear seats” FP39.
– CONTINUED –

(68,1)
5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through 7. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 9. Before having a child sit in the child
or around the child restraint system follow- 8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, try to move it back and
ing the instructions provided by its manu- retractor to change the retractor over from forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
facturer. the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to secured. Sometimes a child restraint
– When a child restraint system is the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) system can be more firmly secured by
installed on the rear center seating function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into pushing it down into the seat cushion and
position, pass the rear center seatbelt the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, then tightening the seatbelt.
through the belt guide properly. For clicks will be heard which indicate the 10. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
details, refer to “Rear center seatbelt” retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
FP52. properly functioning).
until you hear a click.

(69,1)
press the release button on the seatbelt & Installing a booster seat 1
buckle and allow the belt to retract S01AG05
completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.
Remember that the head restraint is not
intended to be used at the lowest position
(retracted position). Therefore, when the
rear center seat is occupied (including
when a child restraint system is installed)
next time, be sure to raise the head
restraint to the extended position.
NOTE
11. Latch the top tether hook onto the When the child restraint system is no
tether anchorage that is located behind the longer in use, remove it and restore the 1. Place the booster seat in the rear
rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly. ELR function of the retractor. That seating position and sit the child on it.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top function is restored by allowing the The child should sit well back on the
tether anchorages” FP71. seatbelt to retract fully. booster seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
until you hear a click. Take care not to twist
the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
12. To remove the child restraint system,

– CONTINUED –

(70,1)
effective in preventing or redu- & Installation of child restraint

cing injury. systems by use of lower and
. Place the lap belt as low as tether anchorages (LATCH)
S01AG07
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in- ! Lower and tether anchorages
S01AG0701
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal
injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
4. To remove the booster seat, press the shoulder belt over the neck may
release button on the seatbelt buckle and result in neck injury during sud-
allow the belt to retract. den braking or in a collision.
WARNING
Some types of child restraint systems can
. Never use a belt that is twisted or be installed on the rear seat of the vehicle
reversed. In an accident, this can without use of the seatbelts. Such child
increase the risk or severity of restraint systems are secured to the
injury to the child. designated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
. Never place the shoulder belt
chorages are sometimes referred to as the
under the child’s arm or behind
LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
the child’s back. If an accident
Tethers for CHildren).
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as

(71,1)
There are a total of 5 lower anchorages at ! To install a child restraint system

the rear seat. The rear anchorage from the
1
using lower and tether an-
right side is used for both the right seat and

chorages
center seat. Each lower anchorage is S01AG070103
located where the seat cushion meets WARNING

the seatback.
! Tether anchorages Before installing a child restraint
S01AG070102 system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm

This vehicle is equipped with five lower that it is securely locked into place.
anchorages (bars) and three upper an- – Check the red colored unlocking
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom- marker which is attached to the bottom
modating such child restraint systems. of the lock release knob is not visible.
! Lower anchorages For details, refer to “Folding down the
S01AG070101 rear seatback” FP40.
The tether anchorages (upper an-

chorages) are provided at the locations
shown in the above illustration. For details,
refer to “Top tether anchorages” FP71.
– CONTINUED –

(72,1)
2. There are “ ” marks at the bottom of the passenger compartment, as it

the rear seat seatbacks. These marks could be thrown around in the
indicate the positions of the lower an- passenger compartment in a sud-
chorages (bars). den stop or a sharp turn.
7. If your child restraint system is a

flexible attachment type, (which uses
tether belts).
Push the child restraint into the seat
3. Peel off the anchorage cover from the cushion and pull both left and right lower
selected side of the rear seatback. Fold the 5. For models with a reclining rear seat tether belts up to secure the child restraint
peeled anchorage cover in half and affix it mechanism, adjust the seatback to the system by taking up the slack in the belt.
with hook and loop tape to expose the upright position. 8. Fasten the top tether hook onto the
anchorages (bars) to be used for installa- 6. Fasten the lower hooks onto the lower tether anchorage behind the rear seat and
tion of the child restraint system. anchorages located at “ ” marks on the tighten the top tether firmly. For additional
4. Remove the rear seat head restraint. bottom of the rear seatback. When the instructions, refer to “Top tether an-
For details, refer to “Head restraints” hooks are fastened, make sure the adja- chorages” FP71.
FP43. cent seatbelts are not caught.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the cargo area.
Avoid placing the head restraint in

(73,1)
& Top tether anchorages ! Anchorage location 1

S01AG09 S01AG0901
This vehicle is equipped with three top

tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be installed
in the rear seat. When installing such a
child restraint system, proceed as follows,
while observing the instructions from the
child restraint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
9. Before seating a child in the child tether whenever possible.
restraint system, shake it to verify that it
is securely in position.
10. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedure of installa-
tion.
If you have any questions concerning this
type of child restraint system, consult with
your SUBARU dealer.
1) Left seat
2) Center seat
3) Right seat
Three upper anchorages are installed on
the back side of the rear seatback.
– CONTINUED –

(74,1)
! To hook the top tether WARNING

S01AG0902
CAUTION . Do not use a seat belt extender. If

a seat belt extender is used when
. Remove the head restraint when installing a child restraint sys-
mounting a child restraint system, the seat belt will not se-
tem. Otherwise, the top tether curely hold the child restraint
cannot be fastened tightly. system. Use of a seat belt exten-
. Store the head restraint that has der could cause death or serious
been removed in the cargo area. injury to children or other pas-
Avoid placing the head restraint sengers in sudden braking, swer-
in the passenger compartment, ving, or accidents.
as it could be thrown around in . Attach the child restraint system
the passenger compartment in a 3. Attach the top tether hook to the to the anchors properly. When
sudden stop or a sharp turn. appropriate upper anchorage. using the LATCH anchors, be
4. Tighten the top tether securely. sure that there are no foreign
1. Remove the head restraint where the objects around the anchors.
child restraint system is to be installed. For Contact your SUBARU dealer if you have Also, the seat belts should not
details, refer to “Head restraints” FP43. any questions regarding the installation of be caught behind the child re-
a child restraint system. straint system. Make sure the
2. For models with a reclining rear seat,
adjust the seatback to the upright position. child restraint system is securely
attached. Otherwise it may cause
death or serious injury to chil-
dren or other passengers in sud-
den braking, swerving, or acci-
dents.

(75,1)
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 73
1-8. *SRS airbag (Supple- tensioner, refer to “Seatbelt pretensioners” belt. They do not eliminate the
FP56. need to fasten seatbelts. It is also
1
mental Restraint System air-

important to wear your seatbelt to
bag) & General precautions regard- help avoid injuries that can result
S01AH
ing SRS airbag system when an occupant is not seated
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re- S01AH10 in a proper upright position.
straint system. This name is used because WARNING
the airbag system supplements the vehi-
cle’s seatbelts. . To obtain maximum protection in
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple- the event of an accident, the
mental restraint system in addition to a lap/ driver and all passengers must
shoulder belt at each front seating position always wear seatbelts when in
and each rear window-side seating posi- the vehicle. The SRS airbag is
tions. The supplemental restraint system designed only to be a supplement
(SRS) consists of seven airbags. to the primary protection pro-
vided by the seatbelt. It does not
The configurations are as follows.
eliminate the need to fasten seat-
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal belts. In combination with the
airbags seatbelts, it offers the best com-
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side bined protection in case of a
airbags serious accident.
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas- Not wearing a seatbelt increases WARNING
senger, and window-side rear passen- the chance of severe injury or
gers) . The SRS airbags deploy with
death in a crash even when the considerable speed and force.
. Knee airbag for driver vehicle has the SRS airbag. Occupants who are out of proper
These SRS airbags are designed only For instructions and precautions position when the SRS airbag
as a supplement to the primary protec- concerning the seatbelt system, deploys could suffer very serious
tion provided by the seatbelt. refer to “Seatbelts” FP47. injuries. Because the SRS airbag
The system also controls seatbelt preten- . The SRS side airbag and SRS needs enough space for deploy-
sioners. For operation instructions and curtain airbag are designed only ment, the driver should always sit
precautions concerning the seatbelt pre- to be a supplement to the primary upright and well back in the seat
protection provided by the seat- as far from the steering wheel as
– CONTINUED –

(76,1)
74 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
practical while still maintaining parts of the body are too close to airbag contacts an occupant not
full vehicle control and the front the SRS side airbag. in proper position, such as one
passenger should move the seat . Since your vehicle is equipped thrown forward during pre-acci-
as far back as possible and sit with SRS curtain airbags, do not dent braking.
upright and well back in the seat. sit or lean unnecessarily close to Even when properly positioned,
the front or rear door on either there remains a possibility that
side. Also, do not put your head, an occupant may suffer minor
arms or hands out of the window. injury such as abrasions and
The SRS curtain airbags on both bruises to the face or arms be-
sides of the cabin are stored in cause of the SRS airbag deploy-
the roof side (between the front ment force.
pillar and a point behind the rear
quarter glass), and they provide
protection by deploying rapidly
(faster than the blink of an eye) in
the event of a side impact, roll-
over or an offset frontal collision.
However, the force of its deploy-
ment may cause injuries if your
head is too close to it.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because
close to either front door. The the SRS airbag deploys with
SRS side airbags are stored in considerable speed (faster than
both front seat seatbacks next to the blink of an eye) and force to
the door, and they provide pro- protect in high speed collisions,
tection by deploying rapidly (fas- the force of an airbag can injure WARNING
ter than the blink of an eye) in the an occupant whose body is too . Do not rest your arm on either
event of a side impact collision. close to SRS airbag. front door or its internal trim. You
However, the force of SRS side It is also important to wear your could be injured in the event of
airbag deployment may cause seatbelt to help avoid injuries SRS side airbag deployment.
injuries if your head or other that can result when the SRS

(77,1)
. Do not place any objects over or . If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
near the SRS airbag cover or supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
1
of fire caused by leaking fuel. For

between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, these details about restarting of the engine,
objects could interfere with its refer to “If your vehicle is involved in an
proper operation and could be accident” FP430.
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury. & General precautions regard-
ing SRS airbag system for
CAUTION accessories and any objects
S01AH13
. When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath- WARNING
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breath- . Do not put any objects (including
ing trouble. If you or your pas- straps or cords) over the steering
sengers have breathing pro- wheel pad, column cover, or
blems after SRS airbag deploys, dashboard.
get fresh air promptly. – These objects could be en-
. A deploying SRS airbag releases tangled with the steering
hot gas. Occupants could get wheel, preventing the SRS
burned if they come into direct frontal airbag, etc. from oper-
contact with the hot gas. ating properly.
– If the SRS frontal airbag de-
NOTE ploys, these objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge causing injury.
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with SRS airbags. Also, . Do not put any objects under the
notify the buyer of the applicable sec- driver’s side of the instrument
tion in this Owner’s Manual. panel. If the SRS knee airbag
– CONTINUED –

(78,1)
deploys, those objects could in- the SRS airbag deploys, those ob- pillar, the windshield, a side win-
terfere with its proper operation jects could become projectiles that dow, an assist grip, or any other
and could be propelled inside the could seriously injure vehicle occu- cabin surface that would be near
vehicle, causing injury. pants. a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A
. The key must not be attached to hands-free microphone or other
heavy, sharp or hard acces- accessory in such a location
sories, or another key. If the SRS could be propelled through the
knee airbag deploys, those ob- cabin with great force by the
jects could interfere with its curtain airbag, or it could prevent
proper operation and could be correct deployment of the curtain
propelled inside the vehicle and airbag. In either case, the result
cause injury. could be serious injuries.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s WARNING
WARNING occupants and cause injuries.
Do not attach accessories to the . Do not attach a hands-free micro- . Do not put any kind of clothes or
windshield or fit an extra-wide mir- phone or any other accessory to other objects over either front
ror over the inside rear view mirror. If a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear seatback and do not attach labels
or stickers to the front seat sur-

(79,1)
face on or near the SRS side & General precautions regard- have outgrown child restraint de- 1
airbag. They could prevent prop- ing SRS airbag system and vices) sit in the REAR seat properly

er deployment of the SRS side children restrained at all times in a child
airbag, reducing protection avail- S01AH14 restraint device or in a seatbelt,
able to the front seat’s occupant. whichever is appropriate for the
. Do not install a seat cover unless child’s age, height and weight.
it is a genuine SUBARU seat Secure ALL types of child restraint
cover exclusively designed for devices (including forward facing
use with the SRS airbag. Even child seats) in the REAR seats at all
when using a genuine SUBARU times.
seat cover, the SRS side airbag According to accident statistics,
system may not function nor- children are safer when properly
mally if the seat cover is not restrained in the rear seating posi-
installed correctly. tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint sys-
WARNING tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-
Seat children in the rear seat prop- tems” FP59.
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that
– CONTINUED –

(80,1)
WARNING WARNING WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN Never allow a child to stand up or Never hold a child on your lap or in
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS kneel on the front passenger’s seat. your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO The SRS airbag deploys with con- with considerable force and can
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE siderable force and can injure or injure or even kill the child.
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO even kill the child.
THE SRS AIRBAG.

(81,1)
WARNING 1

. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s seat
facing the side window
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback
– Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
– CONTINUED –

(82,1)
& Components
S01AH11
The SRS airbags are stowed in the
following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
pad of the airbag.
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under the
“SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat seatback which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” label
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point behind
the rear quarter glass)
“SRS AIRBAG” marks are located at the
top of each center pillar.
SRS knee airbag: under the steering
column
A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
door of the airbag.
1) SRS frontal airbag

2) SRS side airbag
3) SRS curtain airbag
4) SRS knee airbag

(83,1)

1) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor and rollover sensor) 1
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
4) Front impact sensor (left-hand side)
5) Front impact sensor (right-hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
8) Side impact sensor (center pillar left-
hand side)
9) Side impact sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter (front passenger’s side)
13) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
20) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
– CONTINUED –

(84,1)
23) Side impact sensor (under the rear center

seat) & SUBARU advanced frontal ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-
24) Side impact sensor (front door left-hand airbag system tached to the glove box lid beginning with
side) S01AH02 the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
25) Side impact sensor (front door right-hand
side) advanced frontal airbag system that com- the instructions on the warning labels and
26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s plies with the new advanced frontal airbag tag.
side) requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
27) Lap belt pretensioner (driver’s side)
28) Driver’s seat position sensor No. 208. advanced frontal airbag system is a
29) Passenger’s seat position sensor supplemental restraint system and must
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
30) Rear seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) system automatically determines the de-
31) Rear seatbelt pretensioner (front passen- occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal seated in an appropriate child restraint
ger’s side)
airbag at the time of deployment as well as system.
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
activated, the deployment force of the SRS to “Components” FP80.
frontal airbag at the time of deployment. In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the following components deploy.
. SRS frontal airbag for driver
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
. SRS knee airbag for driver
. SRS curtain airbag*1
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.
These components supplement the seat-
belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

(85,1)
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag ! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air- airbag deploys. This is normal. In this
S01AH0201
case, although the front passenger’s SRS
1
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual bag
S01AH0202
frontal airbag does not operate, the front

stage inflator. The inflator operates in The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
different ways depending on the severity uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-
of impact. operates in different ways depending on ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
the severity of impact. sioner. For details about the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-
sioners” FP56.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system from functioning correctly
or cause the system to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat, such
SRS airbag system warning light
as by kicking.
1) Occupant detection sensors . Do not let rear passengers rest
Have the system inspected by your
their feet between the front seat-
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS The occupant detection system sensors back and seat cushion.
airbag system warning light illuminates. are installed between the seat and seat
. Do not spill liquid on the front
NOTE rails, and monitor the physique and pos-
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
ture of the front passenger. Using this
The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS spilled, wipe it off immediately.
information, the occupant detection sys-
curtain airbag are not controlled by the tem determines whether the front passen- . Do not remove or disassemble
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de- the front passenger’s seat.
tem. ployed or not. . Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other
The occupant detection system may not
than a genuine SUBARU acces-
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
sory under the front passenger’s
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
– CONTINUED –

(86,1)
seat. NOTE
. Do not place anything (shoes, The front passenger’s SRS side airbag
umbrella, etc.) under the front and SRS curtain airbag are not con-
passenger’s seat. trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-
tal airbag system.
. Do not place any objects (books,
etc.) around the front passen- ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
ger’s seat. OFF indicators
S01AH0203
. Do not use the front passenger’s
seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
. Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger’s seat or the
seatbelt tongue and buckle en- SRS airbag system warning light
gaged when you leave your vehi- If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
cle. passenger’s occupant detection system
. Do not put sharp object(s) on the have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-
seat or pierce the seat uphols- ing light will illuminate. Have the system
tery. inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-
diately if the SRS airbag system warning
. Do not place a magnet near the light illuminates.
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
retractor. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
indicator
may affect the proper function of the : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
. Do not use front seats with their SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. indicator
forward-backward position and Have your vehicle inspected at your
seatback not being locked into SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
place securely. If any of them are passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle ON and OFF indicators” FP167.
not locked securely, adjust them to your SUBARU dealer.
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Forward and backward
adjustment” FP35 and “Reclin-
ing the seatback” FP35.

(87,1)
! Occupant detection system case, contact your SUBARU dealer 1

S01AH0209
immediately.

CAUTION
Electrical devices, such as cell
phones, laptops, portable music
players, or electronic games, espe-
cially when connected to the acces-
sory power outlet and placed on the
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
senger’s seat, may affect the opera- SRS airbag system warning light
tion of the occupant detection sys-
1) Occupant detection sensors If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
tem. If either of the following situa-
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of
The occupant detection system sensors tions occurs when using an electro-
the system to determine deployment.
are installed between the seat and seat nic device in the vehicle, at first try
Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat
rails, and monitor the physique and pos- to relocate that device to avoid it
dry naturally and then check the SRS
ture of the front passenger. Using this creating any interference.
airbag system warning light.
information, the occupant detection sys- . The SRS airbag system warning
tem determines whether the front passen- light illuminates.
ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-
. The front passenger’s frontal air-
ployed or not.
bag ON and OFF indicators oper-
WARNING ate erratically.
If the device continues to cause
Do not kick the front passenger seat interference, the use of that device
or subject it to severe impact. Other- in the vehicle should be discontin-
wise, the SRS airbag system warn- ued.
ing light may illuminate to indicate a
malfunction of the front passenger
occupant detection system. In this
– CONTINUED –

(88,1)
! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
S01AH0204
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding
the front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with an appro-
priate child restraint system and an infant
or a child is restrained in it. (See WARN-
ING that follows.)
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON . The front passenger’s occupant detec-
indicator indicator tion system is malfunctioning.
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator indicator WARNING
If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON Also, if luggage or electronic devices are NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN
and OFF indicators do not work properly placed on the front passenger’s seat, this THE FRONT SEAT EVEN IF THE
even when the front passenger’s seat is may adversely affect the ability of the FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front system to determine deployment. This TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
passenger’s seat and have the occupant may prevent the front passenger’s frontal sure to install it in the REAR seat in a
detection system checked by your airbag ON and OFF indicators from work- correct manner. Also, it is strongly
SUBARU dealer. ing properly. Check that the indicators recommended that any forward fa-
work properly. cing child seat or booster seat be
When the OFF indicator turns off and the installed in the REAR seat, and that
ON indicator illuminates, the front passen- even children who have outgrown a
ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a child restraint system be also seated
collision. Remove luggage and electronic in the REAR seat. This is because
devices from the front passenger’s seat. children sitting in the front passen-
ger’s seat may be killed or severely
injured should the front passenger’s

(89,1)
SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR ! If the front passenger’s frontal system.
seats are the safest place for chil- airbag ON indicator illuminates
1
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
and the OFF indicator turns off

dren. position and make sure that the front
even when an infant or a small passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
child is in a child restraint sys- turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
CAUTION tem (including booster seat)
S01AH020401
When the front passenger’s seat is If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
occupied by an infant in an appro- while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
priate child restraint system, ob- following actions.
serve the following precautions. . Ensure that no article is placed on the
Failure to do so may interfere with seat other than the child restraint system
the proper operation of the occupant and the child occupant.
detection system, activating the . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag sition and seatback of the front passen-
even though that seat is occupied by ger’s seat are locked into place securely
the infant in the child restraint by moving the seat back and forth.
system.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
. Do not place any article (includ- while the OFF indicator turns off after
ing electronic devices) on the : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON taking the relevant corrective actions
seat other than the infant in the indicator described above, relocate the child re-
child restraint system. : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF straint system to the rear seat and im-
indicator
. Do not place more than one infant mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
in the child restraint system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ for an inspection.
“OFF” position.
2. Remove the child restraint system from
NOTE
the seat. When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
3. By referring to the child restraint
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
manufacturer’s recommendations as well
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
as the child restraint system installation
system may or may not activate the
procedures in “Child restraint systems”
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
FP59, correctly install the child restraint
– CONTINUED –

(90,1)
depending on the occupant’s seating ! Conditions in which front passen- ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag
posture. Children should always wear a ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated OFF indicator illuminates and the
seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre- S01AH0205
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag ON indicator turns off even when
spective of whether the airbag is deac- will be activated for deployment upon the front passenger’s seat is
tivated or activated. If the front passen- impact when any of the following condi- occupied by an adult
S01AH020501
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated tions are met regarding the front passen-
(the ON indicator remains illuminated ger’s seat.
while the OFF indicator turns off), take
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
the following action.
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
. Ensure that no article is placed on
are placed on the seat.
the seat other than the occupant.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and imme-
diately contact your SUBARU dealer for
an inspection. Even if the system has : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
passed the dealer inspection, it is indicator
recommended that on subsequent trips : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
the child/small adult always take the indicator
rear seat.
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly
Children who have outgrown a child sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
restraint system should always wear the 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag “OFF” position.
is deactivated or activated. 2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.

(91,1)

position.
1

If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
while the ON indicator remains off, take the
following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger
does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat
cover, seat heater or massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
system to complete self-checking. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
should illuminate while the OFF indicator
remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
– CONTINUED –

(92,1)
! Operation
S01AH0207
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
pending on the characteristic of item(s) or
person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection system sensor. For this
reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag may deploy in the event of a
collision, but this does not mean failure of
the system.
If the following sensors detect a predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passen-
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to
inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).
. The front sub sensors
. The impact sensors in the airbag
control module
A) Driver’s side On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.

(93,1)
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS CAUTION passenger’s SRS frontal airbags would not
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. protect the occupant in those situations.
1
The two inflators of each airbag are

Do not touch the SRS airbag system
triggered either sequentially or simulta- SRS airbag deployment depends on the
components around the steering
neously, depending on the severity of level of force experienced in the passen-
wheel and dashboard with bare
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS ger compartment during a collision. That
hands right after deployment. Doing
frontal airbag and depending on the level differs from one type of collision to
so can cause burns because the
severity of impact and the characteristic another, and it may have no bearing on the
components can be very hot as a
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
result of deployment.
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air- ! Example of accident in which the
bag. driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
! Example of the type of accident
! After deployment S01AH0211 senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
S01AH0210 The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- will most likely deploy
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de- S01AH021101
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s signed as follows.
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s . To deploy in the event of an accident
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is involving a moderate to severe frontal
not impaired. The time required from collision
detecting impact to the deflation of the . To function on a one-time-only basis
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye. The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front designed as follows.
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, . To deploy in most lesser frontal im-
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt pacts*1
pretensioners operate at the same time. . To deploy in most side or rear impacts
or in most rollover accidents*2
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, A head-on collision against a thick con-
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and *1: Because the necessary protection can be crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
some smoke will be released. These achieved by the seatbelt alone. mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
occurrences are a normal result of the *2: Because deployment of only the driver’s
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
deployment. This smoke does not indicate SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and front
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
a fire in the vehicle. airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
– CONTINUED –

(94,1)
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a ! Examples of the types of acci- Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
frontal impact similar in fashion and dents in which it is possible that driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
magnitude to the collision described the driver’s/driver’s and front airbags may be activated when the vehicle
above. passenger’s SRS frontal sustains a hard impact in the undercar-
airbag(s) will deploy riage area from the road surface (such as
S01AH021102 when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,
is severely impacted or knocked hard
against an obstacle on the road such as
a curb).

(95,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal 1
airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

S01AH021103
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

(96,1)
! Examples of the types of acci- frontal airbags are not designed to deploy once either or both of the driver’s and front
dents in which the driver’s/dri- in most of the following cases. passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS . If the vehicle is struck from the side or activated on the first impact, it/they will
frontal airbag(s) are not de- from behind. not be activated on the second impact.
signed to deploy in most cases . If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof. & SRS side airbag and SRS
S01AH021104
. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed curtain airbag
frontal collision. S01AH03
! SRS side airbag

1) First impact S01AH0302
2) Second impact The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which
In an accident where the vehicle is bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal In a moderate to severe side impact
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impact. impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
Example: In the case of a double collision, and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
first with another vehicle, then against a the impact on the occupant’s chest and
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS concrete wall in immediate succession, waist. The SRS side airbag operates only

(97,1)
for front seat occupants. ! Operation for a while following deployment then
S01AH0301 slowly deflates.
1
! SRS curtain airbag The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

S01AH0303
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU airbag can function only when the ignition The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
SRS curtain airbag system that complies switch is in the “ON” position. airbag deploy even when no one occupies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety The following airbags deploy indepen- the seat on the side on which an impact is
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226. applied.
dently of each other since each has its
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the own impact sensor. When the SRS side airbag and SRS
cabin is stored in the roof side (between . Driver’s SRS side airbag curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud
the front pillar and a point over the rear . Front passenger’s SRS side airbag inflation noise will be heard and some
seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located . SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side) smoke will be released. These occur-
at the top of each center pillar. . SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side) rences are a normal result of the deploy-
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
In a moderate to severe side impact in the vehicle.
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
impacted side of the vehicle deploys CAUTION
and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-
between the occupant and the side win-
dently of the driver’s and front passenger’s
dow and supplements the seatbelt by Do not touch the SRS side airbag
SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel
reducing the impact on the occupant’s system components around the
and instrument panel.
head. front seat seatback with bare hands
For the locations of the sensors and right after deployment. Doing so can
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
control modules, refer to “Components” cause burns because the compo-
sides of the vehicle deploy between the
FP80. nents can be very hot as a result of
occupant and the side window and supple-
! After deployment deployment.
ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to
the occupant’s head.
S01AH0304
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag After deployment, do not touch any
immediately starts to deflate. The time part of the SRS curtain airbag sys-
In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain tem (from the front pillar to the part
airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after of the roof side over the rear seat).
between the occupant and the side win- Doing so can cause burns because
dow and supplement the seatbelt by deployment is shorter than the blink of an
eye. the components can be very hot as a
reducing the impact to the occupant’s result of deployment.
head and chest. The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
– CONTINUED –

(98,1)
! Example of the type of accident ! Example of the type of accident in

S01AH0305
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain which the SRS side airbag will
airbag are designed as follows: most likely deploy.
S01AH030501
. To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe side impact
collision
. To function on a one-time-only basis
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in the
following cases:
. In most lesser side impacts
. In most frontal or most rear impacts
(because the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deployment would not pro-
tect the occupant in those situations)
1) A severe side impact near the front seat.
The SRS curtain airbags are also de-
signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an
extremely inclined state such as during a
rollover. They are not designed to deploy in
most lesser inclined state.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compart-
ment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

(99,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy. 1

S01AH030502
1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone
laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
– CONTINUED –

(100,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy.
S01AH030503
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.

(101,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy. 1

S01AH030504
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

(102,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy.
S01AH030505
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
impact from a motorcycle.
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.

(103,1)
! Examples of the types of acci- ary). same direction, once the SRS side airbag
2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
1
dents in which the SRS side
3) The vehicle pitches end over end. the first impact, they will not be activated

airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in In the event of accidents like those on the second.
most cases illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
S01AH030506
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy & SRS airbag system monitors
S01AH04
in most cases.
SRS airbag system warning light

1) First impact A diagnostic system continually monitors
2) Second impact the readiness of the SRS airbag system
A) SRS curtain airbag (including front seatbelt pretensioners)
B) SRS side airbag
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
In an accident where the vehicle is struck The SRS airbag system warning light will
from the side more than once, the SRS show normal system operation by illumi-
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy nating for approximately 6 seconds when
only once on the first impact. the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision immediately followed by another from the
with another vehicle (moving or station-
– CONTINUED –

(104,1)
The following components are monitored – Driver’s side . Illumination of the warning light
by the indicator: – Front passenger’s side while driving
. Front impact sensor . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- Immediately take your vehicle to
– Right-hand side ger’s side) your nearest SUBARU dealer to
– Left-hand side . Front passenger’s occupant detection have the system checked. Unless
. Airbag control module (including im- system sensor checked and properly repaired, the
pact sensor and rollover sensor) . Front passenger’s occupant detection seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
. Frontal airbag module control module airbag will not operate properly in
– Driver’s side . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON the event of a collision, which may
– Front passenger’s side and OFF indicator increase the risk of injury.
. Knee airbag module (driver’s side) . All related wiring
. Side impact sensor . Driver’s seat position sensor
– Center pillar right-hand side . Passenger’s seat position sensor
& SRS airbag system servicing
S01AH05
– Center pillar left-hand side . Rear seatbelt pretensioner
WARNING
– Front door right-hand side – Right-hand side
– Front door left-hand side – Left-hand side . When discarding an airbag mod-
– Rear wheel house right-hand side ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
– Rear wheel house left-hand side WARNING cle damaged by a collision, con-
– Under the rear center seat sult your SUBARU dealer.
If the warning light exhibits any of
. Side airbag module the following conditions, there may . The SRS airbag has no user-
– Driver’s side be a malfunction in the seatbelt serviceable parts. Do not use
– Front passenger’s side pretensioners and/or SRS airbag electrical test equipment on any
. Curtain airbag module system. circuit related to the SRS airbag
– Right-hand side system. For required servicing of
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- the SRS airbag, consult your
– Left-hand side ing light
. Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
force limiter . No illumination of the warning ing with or disconnecting the
light when the ignition switch is system’s wiring could result in
– Driver’s side
first turned to the “ON” position accidental inflation of the SRS
– Front passenger’s side
. Continuous illumination of the airbag or could make the system
. Lap belt pretensioner inoperative, which may result in
warning light

(105,1)
serious injury. side seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.
1
. Under the rear center seat
. The rear part of the vehicle was

CAUTION In the event that the SRS airbag is involved in an accident in which no
deployed, replacement of the system SRS airbag was deployed.
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have should be performed only by an author-
the work performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- & Precautions against vehicle
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- nents of the SRS airbag system are modification
bag control module, impact sensors replaced, use only genuine SUBARU S01AH06
and airbag modules are stored in parts. WARNING

these areas. NOTE . To avoid accidental activation of
. Under the center of the instru- In the following cases, contact your the system or rendering the sys-
ment panel SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. tem inoperative, which may re-
. On both the right and left sides at . The front part of the vehicle was sult in serious injury, no modifi-
the front of the vehicle involved in an accident in which only cations should be made to any
. Steering wheel and column and the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both components or wiring of the SRS
nearby areas driver’s and front passenger’s SRS airbag system.
frontal airbags did not deploy. This includes following modifica-
. Bottom of the steering column
. The pad of the steering wheel, the tions.
and nearby areas
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
. Top of the dashboard on front frontal airbag, or either roof side (from – Installation of custom steering
passenger’s side and nearby the front pillar to a point over the rear wheels
areas seat) is scratched, cracked, or other- – Attachment of additional trim
. Each front seat and nearby area wise damaged. materials to the dashboard
. Inside each center pillar . The center pillar, front door, rear – Installation of custom seats
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
. Inside each front door – Replacement of seat fabric or
area near these parts, was involved in
. In each roof side (from the front leather
an accident in which the SRS side
pillar to a point over the rear seat) airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not – Installation of additional fabric
. Between the rear seat cushion deploy. or leather on the front seat
and rear wheel house on each . The fabric or leather of either front – Attachment of a hands-free
– CONTINUED –

(106,1)
microphone or any other ac- CAUTION & How to contact the vehicle
cessory to a front pillar, a manufacturer concerning
center pillar, a rear pillar, the Do not perform any of the following modifications for persons
windshield, a side window, an modifications. Such modifications with disabilities that may af-
assist grip, or any other cabin can interfere with proper operation
surface that would be near a
fect the advanced airbag
of the SRS airbag system.
deploying SRS curtain airbag. system
. Attachment of any equipment S01AH15
– Installation of additional elec- Changing or moving any parts of the front

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
trical/electronic equipment seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
such as a mobile two-way front side frame, radiator panel, instrument
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
radio on or near the SRS air- panel, combination meter, steering wheel,
the front end.
bag system components and/ steering column, tire, suspension or floor
. Modification of the suspension panel can affect the operation of the
or wiring is not advisable. This system or front end structure.
could interfere with proper SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you
operation of the SRS airbag . Installation of a tire of different have any questions, you may contact the
system. size and construction from the following SUBARU distributors.
tires specified on the vehicle
– Modifications on or inside the placard attached to the driver’s <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
front door panels for the pur- door pillar or specified for indivi- of Columbia>
pose of a speaker replace- dual vehicle models in this Own- Subaru of America, Inc.
ment or sound insulation. er’s Manual. Customer Retailer Services Department
. The impact sensors, which detect . Attachment of any equipment P.O. Box 6000
the pressure of an impact, are (side steps or side sill protectors, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
located in the doors. Do not etc.) other than genuine SUBARU 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
modify any components of the accessory parts to the side body.
doors or door trims, such as the <Hawaii>
addition of door speakers for Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you Subaru Hawaii
example. Any modifications to want to install any accessory parts on your 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202,
the doors create a risk of the vehicle. Honolulu, HI 96819-4467
airbag system becoming inop- 808-839-2273
erative or unintended airbag de-
ployment.

(107,1)
<Guam>
1
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-

bile
491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1
Dededo, Guam 96921-6225
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Consumer Support Department
560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.

(108,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(109,1)
Keys and doors

2-1. Keys ................................................................. 109 Setting audible signal operation (models
S02
Key number plate ............................................... 109 without “keyless access with push-button
start system”) .................................................. 129
2-2. Keyless access with push-button start Replacing the battery ......................................... 129 2
system (if equipped) ..................................... 110 Replacing lost transmitters................................. 129
Safety precautions.............................................. 111 Certification for remote keyless entry system ..... 129
Locking and unlocking by holding the access
key fob ............................................................. 114 2-5. Door locks........................................................131
Unlock using PIN Code Access........................... 117 Locking and unlocking from the outside............. 131
Power saving function ........................................ 119 Locking and unlocking from the inside............... 132
Power saving function of access key fob ............ 120 Automatic door locking/unlocking ...................... 133
Disabling keyless access function ...................... 120 Key lock-in prevention function .......................... 133
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 123 Battery drainage prevention function.................. 134
Warning chimes and warning indicator ............... 123 2-6. Alarm system...................................................134
When access key fob does not operate Alarm system operation ..................................... 135
properly............................................................ 123 Arming the system ............................................. 135
Replacing battery of access key fob.................... 123 Disarming the system ........................................ 136
Replacing access key fob ................................... 123 Alarm system setting ......................................... 136
Certification for keyless access with push- If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
button start system .......................................... 123 system............................................................. 137
2-3. Immobilizer...................................................... 125 Valet mode......................................................... 137
Security indicator light........................................ 125 2-7. Child safety locks............................................137
Key replacement................................................. 125 2-8. Windows...........................................................138
Certification for immobilizer system .................... 125 Power window operation .................................... 138
2-4. Remote keyless entry system ....................... 127 Initialization of power window (windows with
Locking the doors .............................................. 128 off delay function) ............................................ 140
Unlocking the doors ........................................... 128 2-9. Rear gate..........................................................141
Unlocking the rear gate....................................... 128 Manual rear gate ................................................ 141
Vehicle finder function ........................................ 128 Power rear gate (if equipped) ............................. 142
Sounding a panic alarm ...................................... 129

(110,1)
Keys and doors
2-10. Moonroof (if equipped)................................. 149 Anti-entrapment function.................................... 150

Moonroof switch................................................. 149 Sun shade ......................................................... 150

(111,1)
Keys 109
2-1. Keys . Glove box & Key number plate

S02AA01
S02AA
The valet key fits only the ignition switch The key number is stamped on the key
NOTE and door locks. You can keep the glove number plate attached to the key set. Write 2
For models with “keyless access with box locked when you leave your vehicle down the key number and keep it in
Keys and doors

push-button start system”, refer to and valet key at a parking facility. another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
“Keyless access with push-button start number is needed to make a replacement
system” FP110. NOTE key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
Locking/unlocking using the remote vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement”
The following keys are provided with the keyless entry system can also be con- FP125.
vehicle. trolled with the buttons on the key. For
details, refer to “Remote keyless entry
system” FP127.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,
thereby stopping the engine.
1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
A key can be used in the following
locations.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door

(112,1)
110 Keyless access with push-button start system
2-2. Keyless access with details, refer to “Starting and stopping

engine (models with push-button start
push-button start system (if system)” FP299.)
equipped) . Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
S02AP
tem (For details, refer to “Alarm system”
The following access key fobs are pro- FP134.)
vided with the vehicle.
NOTE
. Locking/unlocking using the remote
keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the access
key fob. For details, refer to “Remote
keyless entry system” FP127.
. Carefully store the key number plate 1) Release button
supplied with the access key fob. It is 2) Emergency key
necessary for vehicle repair and addi- Press the release button of the access key
tional registration of access key fobs. fob to take out the emergency key.
For details, refer to “Key replacement”
The emergency key is used for the follow-
FP125.
ing operations.
An emergency key is attached to each . Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
1) Access key fob (main) access key fob.
2) Access key fob (sub) . Locking and unlocking the glove box
3) Key number plate
NOTE
The “keyless access with push-button start The glove box can be kept locked when
system” allows the following functions to the vehicle and the access key fob (with
be performed when the access key fob is the emergency key removed) are left at
being carried. a parking facility.
. Locking and unlocking of doors, rear
gate and fuel lid (For details, refer to
“Locking and unlocking by holding the
access key fob” FP114.)
. Starting and stopping the engine (For

(113,1)
Keyless access with push-button start system 111
& Safety precautions . The keyless access with push-

S02AP11
button start system uses radio
WARNING waves of the following fre-
quency* in addition to the radio 2
If you wear an implanted pacemaker waves used for the remote key-
Keys and doors

or an implanted defibrillator, stay at less entry system. The radio
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the waves are periodically output
transmitting antennas installed on from the antennas installed on
the vehicle. the vehicle as shown in the
The radio waves from the transmit- following illustrations.
ting antennas on the vehicle could *: Radio frequency: 134 kHz
adversely affect the operation of
implanted pacemakers and im-
planted defibrillators.
If you wear electronic medical equip-
ment other than an implanted pace-
maker or an implanted defibrillator,
before using the keyless access
with push-button start system, refer
to “Radio waves used for the key-
less access with push-button start
system” mentioned later, and con-
tact the electronic medical equip-
ment manufacturer for more infor-
mation. The radio waves from the
transmitting antennas on the vehicle 1) Antenna
could adversely affect the operation
of the electronic medical equipment.
“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start sys-
tem”
– CONTINUED –

(114,1)
CAUTION may damage the battery or the operation of the airplane. in a

cause circuit malfunctions. bag, take measures to prevent
. Never leave or store the access – Do not wash the access key the buttons from being pressed
key fob inside the vehicle or fob in an ultrasonic washer. accidentally.
within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the
– Do not leave the access key
vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The
fob in humid or dusty loca- NOTE
access key fob may be locked
tions. Doing so may cause . The operational/non-operational
inside the vehicle, or the battery
malfunctions. setting for the keyless access function
may discharge rapidly. Note that
the push-button ignition switch – Keep the access key fob away can be changed. For the setting proce-
may not turn on in some cases from magnetic sources. dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac-
depending on the location of the – Do not leave the access key cess function” FP120.
access key fob. fob near a personal computer . For detailed information about the
. The access key fob contains or home electrical appliance. operation method for the push-button
electronic components. Observe ignition switch while the keyless ac-
– Do not leave the access key
the following precautions to pre- cess function is switched to the non-
fob near a battery charger or
vent malfunctions. operational mode, refer to “Access key
any electrical accessories.
fob – if access key fob does not operate
– It is recommended to have the – Do not apply metallic window properly” FP427.
access key battery replaced at tint or attach metallic objects . The keyless access with push-but-
an authorized SUBARU dealer to the windows. ton start system uses weak radio
to avoid the risk of damage. – Do not fit non genuine acces- waves. The status of the access key
– Do not get the access key fob sories or parts. fob and environmental conditions may
wet. If the access key fob gets . If the access key fob is dropped, interfere with the communication be-
wet, wipe it off immediately the integrated emergency key in- tween the access key fob and the
and let it dry completely. side may become loose. Be care- vehicle under the following conditions,
– Do not apply strong impacts to ful not to lose the emergency key. and it may not be possible to lock or
the access key fob. unlock the doors or start the engine.
. When traveling in an airplane, do – When operating near a facility
– Never leave the access key not press the button of the ac- where strong radio waves are trans-
fob in direct sunlight or any- cess key fob. If any button of the mitted, such as a broadcast station
where that may become hot, access key fob is pressed, radio and power transmission lines.
such as on the dashboard. It waves are emitted and may affect

(115,1)
– When products that transmit reregistration of an access key fob, – On the instrument panel
radio waves are used, such as an contact a SUBARU dealer. – On the floor
access key fob or a remote trans- . For a spare access key fob, contact a – Inside the glove box
mitter key of another vehicle. SUBARU dealer. – Inside the door trim pocket
2
– When carrying the access key fob . Up to 7 access key fobs can be – On the rear seat
Keys and doors

of your vehicle together with the registered for one vehicle. – In the cargo area
access key fob or the remote trans- . Do not leave the access key fob in
mitter of another vehicle. the storage spaces inside the vehicle, If you do, the following situations
– When the access key fob is such as the door pocket, dashboard or may occur.
placed near wireless communica- inside the corner of the cargo area. – The access key fob is mistakenly
tion equipment such as a cell Vibrations may damage the key fob or locked inside the vehicle.
phone. turn on the switch, possibly resulting in – A false warning issues although
– When the access key fob is a lockout. no malfunction actually occurs.
placed near a metallic object. . After the vehicle battery is dis- – No warning issues even when a
– When metallic accessories are charged or replaced, initialization of malfunction occurs.
attached to the access key fob. the steering lock system may be re-
– When carrying the access key fob quired to start the engine. In this case,
with an electronic appliance such as perform the following procedure to
a laptop computer. initialize the steering lock.
– When the battery of the access (1) Turn the push-button ignition
key fob is discharged. switch to the “OFF” position. For
details, refer to “Switching power
. The access key fob is always com-
status” FP159.
municating with the vehicle and is
continuously using the battery. (2) Open and close the driver’s
Although the life of the battery varies door.
depending on the operating conditions, (3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-
it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the onds.
battery becomes fully discharged, re- When the steering is locked, the initi-
place it with a new one. alization is completed.
. If an access key fob is lost, it is
recommended that all of the remaining . Do not leave the access key fob in
access key fobs be reregistered. For the following places.
– CONTINUED –

(116,1)
& Locking and unlocking by access function may not operate prop-
holding the access key fob erly.
S02AP20 . When the access key fob is within
When the access key fob is carried within the operating range, it is possible for
the operating range, the doors, rear gate anyone, even someone who is not
and fuel lid can be locked/unlocked just by carrying the access key fob, to operate
touching the door handle. the keyless access function. Note that
NOTE the keyless access function can be
operated only by the door handle, door
The vehicle can also be locked/un-
lock sensor, rear gate opener button or
locked with the remote keyless entry
rear lock button in the operating range
system. For details, refer to “Remote
in which the access key fob is detected.
keyless entry system” FP127.
. It is not possible to lock the doors,
! Operating ranges 1) LED indicator rear gate and fuel lid using the keyless
S02AP2001 access function when the access key
When the access key fob is within either of
fob is inside the vehicle. However,
the operating ranges of the front doors, the
depending on the status of the access
LED indicator on the access key fob
key fob and the environmental condi-
flashes. When the keyless access func-
tions, the access key fob may be locked
tions are disabled, the LED indicator does
inside the vehicle. Before locking the
not flash unless a button on the access key
vehicle, make sure that you have the
fob is pressed.
access key fob.
NOTE . When the battery of the access key
fob is discharged, or when operating it
. If the access key fob is placed too
in a location with strong radio waves or
close to the vehicle body, the keyless
noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power
access functions may not operate
plant, broadcast station or an area
properly. If it does not operate properly,
where wireless equipment is used), or
1) Antenna repeat the operation from farther away.
2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32 while talking on a cell phone, the
. If the access key fob is placed near
in (40 to 80 cm)) operating ranges may be reduced, or
the ground or in an elevated location
the keyless access function may not
from the ground, even if it is in the
operate.
indicated operating range, the keyless
In such a case, perform the procedure

(117,1)
described in “Locking and unlocking” procedure, it is recommended to pull operating the combination meter dis-
FP427. the REAR door handle to confirm that play (color LCD). For details, refer to
. The doors may lock or unlock when the doors have been locked. “Keyless Entry System” FP196.
the car is being washed or exposed to a . If any of the doors (or the rear gate) 2
significant amount of water that con- are not fully closed, the following will ! Locking with the door lock sensor
Keys and doors

S02AP200201
tacts the door handle while the key fob occur to alert you that the doors (or the
is still in the operating range. rear gate) are not properly closed.
– An electronic chirp sounds five
! How to lock and unlock times.
S02AP2002
It is possible to perform the following – The hazard warning flashers
operations when you are carrying the flash five times.
access key fob. . It is possible to lock the doors even
. Lock and unlock the doors when one of the doors is open. After
. Unlock and lock rear gate performing the locking procedure,
close the opened door or rear gate to
NOTE lock it.
. It is not possible to lock the doors, . Within 3 seconds after locking the
rear gate and fuel lid using the keyless doors and the rear gate using the
access function when the push-button keyless access function, it is not pos- 1) Door lock sensor
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” sible to unlock doors and/or the rear Carry the access key fob, close all doors
position. Refer to “Switching power gate using the keyless access function. including the rear gate, and touch the door
status” FP159. . When locking, be sure to carry the lock sensor on the door handle. All doors
. If the door handle is gripped with a access key fob to prevent locking the including the rear gate and fuel lid will be
gloved hand, the door lock may not be access key fob in the vehicle. locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound
released. . The setting of the hazard warning once and the hazard warning flashers will
. If the door lock sensor is touched flasher operation and the volume of the flash once.
three times or more repeatedly, the audible signal can be changed by your
system will ignore the sensor opera- SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
tion. dealer for details. Also, for models with
. When performing the locking proce- the combination meter display (color
dure too quickly, locking may not LCD), the setting of the hazard warning
complete. After performing the locking flasher operation can be changed by
– CONTINUED –

(118,1)
! Locking with the rear lock button ! Locking with the power rear gate ! Unlocking
S02AP200202 S02AP200203
lock button
S02AP200207
1) Rear lock button Carry the access key fob, and touch the
1) Power rear gate lock button sensor behind the door handle.
Carry the access key fob, close all doors
including the rear gate, and press the rear Carry the access key fob, and press the . The driver’s door handle:
lock button. The rear gate, fuel lid and all power rear gate lock button. It will close Either the driver’s door and fuel lid will
doors will be locked. Also, an electronic automatically, and the rear gate, all doors unlock, or all doors and the fuel lid will
chirp will sound once and the hazard and the fuel lid will be locked. Also, the unlock.
warning flashers will flash once. hazard warning flashers will flash once, . The front passenger’s door handle:
and an electronic chirp will sound once. The fuel lid, rear gate and all doors will be
unlocked.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.

(119,1)
! Unlocking rear gate ! Door unlock selection function & Unlock using PIN Code Ac-
S02AP200204 S02AP2003
When the door is unlocked using the cess
S02AP21
keyless access function, only the doors When all doors including the rear gate are 2
that were set can be unlocked. locked, you can unlock the doors (includ-
Keys and doors

The settings can be changed with the ing rear gate) without a key by pressing the
following methods. rear lock button.
. The setting can be changed by operat-
ing the combination meter display (color
LCD). Refer to “Keyless Entry System”
FP196.
. The setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
1) Rear gate opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the
rear gate opener button. Either only the
rear gate will unlock, or all doors and the
fuel lid will unlock. Also, an electronic chirp
will sound twice and the hazard warning 1) Rear lock button
flashers will flash twice.
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the
key fob is accidentally left in the
vehicle. It is recommended that a 5-
digit security code (PIN code) be regis-
tered.
– CONTINUED –

(120,1)
! Registration for a PIN code

S02AP2102
Steps Operation Time from the previous step
1 Turn off the ignition switch. -
2 Close all doors (including rear gate). -
3 Press and hold the “ ” button on the access key fob, and press and hold the -
rear lock button until a chirp sounds.
4 Press and hold the “ ” button on the access key fob until a chirp sounds. Within 30 seconds
The PIN code is inputted by using the rear lock button within 30 seconds after
the chirp sound of step 4.
For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code, perform the following
procedure.
(1) Press the button three times.
Within 30 seconds
(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.
5 (3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.
(4) After a chirp sounds once (ding), press the button six times.
(5) After a chirp sounds once (ding), press the button eight times.
6 Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts -
sounding intermittently.
7 All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered. -
NOTE
Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the
“ ” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.

(121,1)
NOTE . The PIN code cannot be deleted & Power saving function
. Press the rear lock button ten times while the keyless access function is S02AP23
The keyless access function will be dis-
to enter “0”. disabled by operating the access key abled in the following cases to protect the
. Change the PIN code frequently to fob. 2
access key fob battery and the vehicle
protect your vehicle from theft. . Reregister the PIN code in the fol-
Keys and doors

battery.
. If you have lent your vehicle to lowing cases.
. Case 1: When the keyless access
another person, confirm that the PIN – When you forget the PIN code.
function and the remote keyless entry
code has not been changed or deleted. – When you want to change the PIN system have not been used for 2 weeks
If the PIN code has been changed or code. or longer while all doors are locked
deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
. If you make an error during the ! Unlocking Operate one of the following items to
S02AP2103
registration procedure, press the “ ” Perform step 5 described in “Registration recover the keyless access function:
or “ ” button on the access key fob. for a PIN code”. – Unlock the doors by any procedure
Then, start over from the procedure other than gripping the front passen-
described in “Preparation for register- NOTE ger’s door handle.
ing a PIN code”. . You cannot unlock by PIN Code – Lock the doors.
. To protect your vehicle from theft, Access in the following cases. – Open a door and then close it.
you cannot register a string of the same – When the access key fob is within
five numbers together, such as the operating ranges. . Case 2: When the access key fob has
“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code. – When the ignition switch is in the been left in the operating range for 10
. Do not register your vehicle license “ACC” or “ON” position. minutes or longer while all doors are
plate number or simple numbers such . If you make an operation error dur- locked
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code. ing the unlocking procedure, start over
Doing so will increase the risk of Operate one of the following items to
with the unlocking procedure after recover the keyless access function:
vehicle theft. waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. When you try to register “22222”, the – Unlock the doors by gripping the
. To protect your vehicle from theft, a
registered PIN code will be deleted. You door handle.
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes
cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code are entered five times continuously. If – Unlock the doors by pressing the
Access until a new code is registered. this occurs, you cannot unlock the rear gate opener button.
. After registering a new PIN code, doors by PIN Code Access for 5 – Lock the doors by touching the door
make sure that you can unlock the minutes. lock sensor.
doors using the PIN code. – Lock or unlock the doors using the
– CONTINUED –

(122,1)
remote keyless entry system. and push-button start system will not be . To start the engine while the func-
– Lock or unlock the doors using the available. tions are disabled, perform the proce-
power door locking switch. To cancel the power save mode, press one dure described in “Starting engine”
– Open either of the front doors. of the buttons on the access key fob. FP428.
! Disabling functions
& Power saving function of ac- & Disabling keyless access S02AP0701
cess key fob function ! By operating the access key fob

S02AP22 S02AP07 S02AP070102
This function stops the access key fob If you have registered a PIN code for PIN
from receiving signals and helps minimize WARNING Code Access, you can disable the keyless
the battery consumption of the access key access function by operating the access
fob. If you wear an implanted pacemaker key fob. For details about registering a PIN
or an implanted defibrillator, per- code, refer to “Unlock using PIN Code
1. Press the “ ” button twice while hold-
form the procedure described in Access” FP117.
ing the “ ” button.
“By operating the driver’s door”
1. Open the driver’s door.
FP121 to disable the keyless access
function. If you perform the proce- 2. Rotate the lock lever toward the lock
dure described in “By operating the position.
access key fob” FP120, the opera-
tion of an implanted pacemaker or
implanted defibrillator may be af-
fected by the radio waves from the
transmitter antenna.
When the vehicle is not going to be used

for a long time or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the key-
less access function can be disabled.
1) LED indicator
2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4

NOTE
times to notify that the setting is complete. . The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is 3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”
When the access key fob is in the power
not disabled. button on the access key fob simulta-
save mode, the keyless access function

(123,1)
neously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp will sound, and the function will be
disabled. 2
! By operating the driver’s door
Keys and doors

S02AP070101
– CONTINUED –

(124,1)
Steps Operation Time from the previous step Driver’s door status
1 Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door. - Close
2 Push “ ” of the power door locking switch. - Close
3 Open the driver’s door. Within 5 seconds Close?Open
4 Push “ ” of the power door locking switch twice. Within 5 seconds Open
5 Close and open the driver’s door twice. Within 10 seconds Open?Close?Open?
Close?Open
6 Push “ ” of the power door locking switch twice while Within 10 seconds Open
the door is open.
7 Close and open the driver’s door once. Within 10 seconds Open?Close?Open
8 Close the door. Within 5 seconds Open?Close
A chirp will sound, and the functions will be disabled.

(125,1)
NOTE & Selecting audible signal op- & Replacing battery of access
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door eration key fob
locking switch slowly. If the switch is S02AP12
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
S02AP09
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key
pressed quickly, the functions may not 2
give you an audible signal when the doors fob” FP484.
be disabled.
Keys and doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
! Enabling functions the audible signal off. For more details, & Replacing access key fob
S02AP0702 contact a SUBARU dealer. Access key fobs can be replaced by a
S02AP13
When the procedure to disable the func-
tions is performed again, a chirp will NOTE SUBARU dealer. For more details, contact
sound, and the functions are enabled. a SUBARU dealer.
The setting can be changed by operat-
NOTE ing the combination meter display
(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi- & Certification for keyless ac-
. The keyless access function will be cle Setting” FP196. cess with push-button start
enabled only if you perform the proce- system
dure in the same manner used to S02AP14
& Warning chimes and warning . U.S.-spec. models
disable the function (for example, when
disabling by operating the driver’s indicator FCC ID: HYQ14AHK
S02AP06
door, the function will not be enabled The keyless access with push-button start FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
even if you operate the access key fob). system sounds a warning chime and FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-1
. Press the push-button ignition flashes the access key warning indicator
switch if you do not know the proce- on the combination meter in order to CAUTION
dure in which the keyless access func- minimize improper operations and help
tion was disabled. protect your vehicle from theft. FCC WARNING
– When disabling by operating the For details, refer to “Warning chimes and Changes or modifications not ex-
driver’s door: a chirp will not sound warning indicator of the keyless access pressly approved by the party re-
– When disabling by operating the with push-button start system” FP178. sponsible for compliance could void
access key fob: a chirp will sound the user’s authority to operate the
& When access key fob does equipment.
not operate properly
S02AP08
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key NOTE
fob does not operate properly” FP427.
This device complies with part 15 of the
– CONTINUED –

(126,1)
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the . Canada-spec. models . Mexico-spec. models

following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
IFT
RLVDE1415-1661
14AHK
DENSO

(127,1)
Immobilizer 125
2-3. Immobilizer NOTE One key that has already been registered
S02AB . To protect your vehicle from theft, is required in order to register a new key.
The immobilizer system is designed to please pay close attention to the follow-
ing security precautions: NOTE 2
prevent an unauthorized person from
– Never leave your vehicle unat- If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code
Keys and doors

starting the engine. Only keys registered
tended with its keys inside. still remains in the memory of the
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
– Before leaving your vehicle, vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se-
be used to operate your vehicle. If engine
close all windows and the moon- curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code
start is attempted with an unregistered
roof, and lock the doors and rear should be erased from the memory. To
access key fob or key, the engine will not
gate. erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys
start. Even if the engine does start, it will
– Do not leave spare keys or any that will be used are required.
stop after a few seconds. This system,
however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran- record of your key number in the For details about new key registration
tee. vehicle. and erasing the lost key’s ID code,
. The vehicle has a maintenance-free contact your SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION type immobilizer system.
. Do not place the key under direct & Certification for immobilizer
sunlight or anywhere it may be-
& Security indicator light system
S02AB02
come hot. Refer to “Security indicator light” FP183. . For models with “keyless access
S02AB05
. Do not get the key wet. If the key with push-button start system”:
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth & Key replacement Refer to “Certification for keyless access
S02AB03
immediately. Your key number plate will be required if with push-button start system” FP123.
. Do not modify or remove the you ever need a replacement key made.
system. If modified or removed, Any new key must be registered for use
the proper operation of the sys- with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
tem cannot be guaranteed. before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered for
use with one vehicle is as follows.
. Four (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
. Seven (models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
– CONTINUED –

(128,1)
126 Immobilizer
. For models without “keyless access – Canada-spec. models – Mexico-spec. models

with push-button start system”:
– U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-2
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
operation.

(129,1)
Remote keyless entry system 127
2-4. Remote keyless entry

system
S02AQ 2
CAUTION
Keys and doors

. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
Access key fob Transmitter
. Do not get the remote transmitter 1) Lock/arm button 1) Lock/arm button
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with 2) Unlock/disarm button 2) Unlock/disarm button
a cloth immediately. 3) Rear gate unlock button 3) Rear gate unlock button
. When you carry the remote trans- 4) PANIC button 4) PANIC button
mitter on an airplane, do not The remote keyless entry system has the
press the button of the remote following functions.
transmitter while in the airplane.
. Locking and unlocking the doors, rear
When any button of the remote
gate and fuel lid
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect . Unlocking the rear gate
the operation of the airplane. . Sounding a panic alarm
When you carry the remote trans- . Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
mitter in a bag on an airplane, tem. For details, refer to “Alarm system”
take measures to prevent the FP134.
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed. The operable distance of the remote key-
less entry system is approximately 30 feet
(10 meters). However, this distance will
vary depending on environmental condi-
– CONTINUED –

(130,1)
128 Remote keyless entry system
tions. The system’s operable distance will & Locking the doors NOTE
be shorter in areas near a facility or S02AQ01
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors, If the interval between the first and
electronic equipment emitting strong radio the rear gate and fuel lid. An electronic second presses of the unlock/disarm
waves such as a power plant, broadcast chirp will sound once and the hazard button (for unlocking of all of the doors
station, TV tower, or remote controller of warning flashers will flash once. and the rear gate) is extremely short,
home electronic appliances. the system may not respond.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not
NOTE fully closed, the following will occur to alert
. For models with “keyless access you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not & Unlocking the rear gate
S02AQ05
with push-button start system”, the properly closed. Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock
remote keyless entry system will not . An electronic chirp sounds five times. the rear gate.
be activated when the push-button . The hazard warning flashers flash five An electronic chirp will sound twice and the
ignition switch is in any position other times. hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
than the “OFF” position.
. For models without “keyless access When you close the door, it will automati- & Vehicle finder function
with push-button start system”, the cally lock and then the following will occur. S02AQ07
Use this function to find your vehicle
remote keyless entry system will not . An electronic chirp sounds once. parked among many vehicles in a large
be activated when the key is inserted in . The hazard warning flashers flash parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
the ignition switch. once. (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
. The hazard warning flashers will lock/arm button three times in a 5-second
flash once or twice when the access & Unlocking the doors period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
key fob/transmitter button is pressed in S02AQ02
sound once and its hazard warning
the following cases. Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
the driver’s door and fuel lid. An electronic flashers to flash three times.
– When locking the doors
chirp will sound twice and the hazard
– When unlocking the doors warning flashers will flash twice. To unlock NOTE
– When unlocking the rear gate all doors and the rear gate, briefly press If the interval between presses is too
the unlock/disarm button a second time short when you press the lock/arm
Operation of the hazard warning button three times, the system may
flashers in the above cases can be set within 5 seconds.
not respond to the signals from the
to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer. remote transmitter.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
tails.

(131,1)
Remote keyless entry system 129
& Sounding a panic alarm & Replacing the battery

S02AQ08 S02AQ12
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC” Refer to “Replacing key battery” FP484.
button once. 2
The horn will sound and the hazard & Replacing lost transmitters
Keys and doors

S02AQ13
warning flashers will flash. If you lose a transmitter or want to
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any purchase additional transmitters (up to
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a four can be programmed), your transmit-
button on the remote transmitter is ters should be reprogrammed for security
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated reasons. For details, contact your
after approximately 30 seconds. SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry
& Setting audible signal opera- system.
tion (models without “keyless 2. Press and hold the “ ” of the power
access with push-button start locking switch and pull the key out and & Certification for remote key-
system”) reinsert it into the ignition switch at least 6 less entry system
S02AQ09 S02AQ18
Using an electronic chirp, the system will times within 10 seconds after Step 2. ! U.S.-spec. models
give you an audible signal when the doors 3. Open and close the driver’s door once S02AQ1801
within 10 seconds after Step 3. The hazard FCC ID: CWTB1G077

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off. warning flashers flash 3 times to indicate FCC ID: CWTD1G049
completion of the setting.
Perform the following steps to deactivate CAUTION
the audible signal. You can also use the Your SUBARU dealer can perform the
same steps to restore the function. above procedure for you. Also, for models FCC WARNING
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all with a combination meter display (color Changes or modifications not ex-
doors and the rear gate. LCD), the setting can be changed using pressly approved by the party re-
the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle sponsible for compliance could void
Setting” FP196. the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
– CONTINUED –

(132,1)
130 Remote keyless entry system
NOTE ! Canada-spec. models ! Mexico-spec. models

S02AQ1802 S02AQ1803
operation.
IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814
SUBARU
MODEL: TB1G077
IFETEL RLVSUTD15-1815
SUBARU
MODEL: TD1G049

(133,1)
Door locks 131
2-5. Door locks – Insert the key into the ignition direction that the grooved side is facing
S02AC
switch and turn the ignition switch and insert it again.
& Locking and unlocking from to “ON”.
the outside
! How to lock the vehicle without 2
S02AC01 For details about the alarm system, using the key
Keys and doors

S02AC0102
NOTE refer to “Alarm system” FP134. To lock the door from outside without the
If you unlock the driver’s door with a ! How to lock and unlock the vehicle key, the following methods are available.
key (including an emergency key) and using the key
open the door while the alarm system is ! Locking using lock lever
S02AC0101 S02AC010201
armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
. Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
– Press any button on the access
key fob (except when the access
key fob battery is discharged).
– Press the push-button ignition
switch to “ACC”.
– Carry the access key fob and
perform either of the following pro- 1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock. 1) Rotate the lock lever forward.
cedures. 2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock. 2) Close the door.
– Grip the front door handle. In this case, only the driver’s side door is In this way, only the door that was operated
– Press the rear gate opener locked or unlocked. will be locked.
button.
. Models without “keyless access
NOTE
with push-button start system”: Models with “keyless access with
– Press any button on the remote push-button start system”:
transmitter (except when the trans- The emergency key is directional. If the
mitter battery is discharged). key cannot be inserted, change the
– CONTINUED –

(134,1)
132 Door locks
! Locking using power door lock- & Locking and unlocking from WARNING
ing switch
S02AC010202
the inside
S02AC02
Keep all doors locked when you
! How to use the lock lever drive, especially when small chil-
S02AC0202
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat-
belts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is acciden-
tally opened, and intruders from
unexpectedly opening doors and
entering your vehicle.
1) Press the lock side of the power door
locking switch.*
2) Close the door. 1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock. ! How to operate the power door
*: For details about the power door locking 2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock. locking switches
switch, refer to “How to operate the power S02AC0203
door locking switches” FP132. Always make sure that all doors and the All doors, the rear gate and fuel lid can be
rear gate are closed before starting to locked and unlocked using the power door
drive. locking switches located on the driver’s
In this case, all closed doors, the rear gate side and the front passenger’s side doors.
and fuel lid are locked at the same time. The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
NOTE Pull the inside door handle to open an
Make sure that you do not leave the key unlocked door.
inside the vehicle when locking the
doors from the outside without the key.

(135,1)
Door locks 133
& Automatic door locking/un- warning indicator “ ” will appear and

locking the warning chime will also sound.
S02AC08
All doors and the fuel lid are automatically 2
locked or unlocked under the following & Key lock-in prevention func-
Keys and doors

conditions. tion
S02AC06
. For automatic door locking Under the following conditions, all the
– When the vehicle speed reaches 12 doors will not lock when the door lock
mph (20 km/h) or higher. switch is pushed with the driver door open.
– When the select lever is shifted into . The key is still in the ignition switch
a position other than the “P” position. (models without “keyless access with
. For automatic door unlocking push-button start system”).
– When the ignition switch is turned to . The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
Example OFF. “ON” position (models with “keyless ac-
1) Press to lock – When the select lever is shifted into cess with push-button start system”).
2) Press to unlock the “P” position.
– When the driver’s door is open. NOTE
NOTE . When leaving the vehicle, make sure
Make sure that you do not leave the key NOTE you are holding the key before locking
inside the vehicle before locking the . Perform the settings of the auto- the doors.
doors from the outside using the power matic door locking and unlocking on . The factory setting (default setting)
door locking switches. the combination meter. Refer to “Menu for this function is set as “operational”.
screens” FP195. This function’s operational/non-opera-
. When getting out of the vehicle from tional setting can be changed by a
a rear door, make sure to unlock all the SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
doors by pushing the unlock side of the dealer for details.
power door locking switch. If a rear . When getting out of the vehicle from
door is unlocked from the inside door a rear door, make sure to unlock all the
lever then the door is opened and doors by pushing the unlock side of the
closed, the Key lock-in prevention power door locking switch. If a rear
function will be triggered. All doors will door is unlocked from the inside door
be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention lever then the door is opened and
– CONTINUED –

(136,1)
134 Alarm system
closed, the Key lock-in prevention Item Switch Automatically turning 2-6. Alarm system
function will be triggered. All doors will position off
S02AF
be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention Approximately 20
Map lights DOOR minutes later The alarm system helps to protect your
warning indicator “ ” will appear and
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
the warning chime will also sound. Approximately 20
Dome light DOOR minutes later
sounds and the hazard warning flashers
! Non-operation of key lock-in pre- flash if someone attempts to break into
vention function Ignition — Approximately 20 your vehicle.
S02AC0602
switch light minutes later
When the system is set so that it does not Cargo area Approximately 20 For models with “keyless access with
operate, the doors are locked by the light DOOR minutes later push-button start system”:
following operation. The system can be armed or disarmed
. If the lock lever is turned to the front NOTE with the keyless access function or access
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door . The default setting for this function key fob.
open and the driver’s door is then closed is set as “operational”. The operational/ The system will not be activated when the
with the lock lever in that position, the non-operational setting of this function push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
driver’s door is locked. can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. or “ON” position.
. If the spare key is used to lock the Contact your SUBARU dealer to
driver’s door from the outside of the change the setting. For models without “keyless access
vehicle, the door is locked. . When leaving the vehicle, please with push-button start system”:
make sure that all doors and the rear The system can be armed or disarmed
& Battery drainage prevention gate are completely closed. with the remote transmitter.
function . The battery drainage prevention The system will not be activated when the
S02AC03 function does not operate while the key is inserted into the ignition switch.
If a door or the rear gate is not completely key is in the ignition switch.
closed, the interior lights will remain Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
illuminated as a result. However, several for activation at the time of shipment from
lights are automatically turned off by the the factory. You can set the system for
battery drainage prevention function to deactivation yourself or have it done by
prevent the battery from discharging. The your SUBARU dealer.
following interior lights are affected by this
function.

(137,1)
Alarm system 135
& Alarm system operation The notifications regarding the map . Locking using the rear lock button.
When the alarm system is armed, it is
S02AF01 lights, dome light and cargo area light For details, refer to “Locking with the
triggered by the opening any of the doors, are deactivated as the factory setting. A rear lock button” FP116.
SUBARU dealer can activate the sys- . Locking using the power rear gate 2
the rear gate or engine hood.
tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for lock button. For details, refer to “Lock-
Keys and doors

The alarm system will activate the follow- details. ing with the power rear gate lock
ing alarms when triggered.
button” FP116.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds. & Arming the system NOTE
S02AF04
. The hazard warning flashers will flash The alarm system becomes armed when
for 30 seconds. the following operation is performed.
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
If any of the doors, the rear gate or engine equipped) and turn the ignition switch to
hood remains open after the 30-second the “OFF” position.
period, the horn will continue to sound for a
2. Carry the key and get out of the
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear
vehicle.
gate or engine hood is closed while the
horn is sounding, the horn will stop 3. Make sure that the engine hood is
sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds. locked.
4. Lock the doors using any of the
NOTE following methods.
The alarm system can be set to trigger . Locking using the remote keyless
the illumination of the following interior entry system. For details, refer to
lights. “Remote keyless entry system” Security indicator light
. Map lights (illuminates only when FP127.
the door interlock switch is in the . Locking using the keyless access . All doors, the rear gate and fuel lid
“DOOR” position) function (if equipped). For details, refer will lock, an electronic chirp will sound
. Dome light (illuminates only when to “Locking with the door lock sensor” once, the hazard warning flashers will
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR” FP115. flash once, and the security indicator
position) . Locking using the power door lock- light will start flashing rapidly.
. Cargo area light (illuminates only ing switch. For details, refer to “Locking . If any of the doors or the rear gate is
when the cargo area light switch is in using power door locking switch” not fully closed, an electronic chirp
the “DOOR” position) FP132. sounds five times and the hazard
– CONTINUED –

(138,1)
136 Alarm system
warning flashers flash five times to access function (models with “key- ! Emergency disarming
alert you that the doors (or the rear less access with push-button start S02AF0501
If you cannot disarm the system using the
gate) are not properly closed. When system”). access key fob/transmitter (i.e., the trans-
you close the door, doors will automa- – Any door (including the rear gate mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter
tically lock and the system will auto- and engine hood) is opened. battery is too weak), you can disarm the
matically arm in 30 seconds. – The ignition switch is turned to system without using the access key fob/
5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the the “ON” position (models without remote transmitter.
system will enter surveillance state. “keyless access with push-button The system can be disarmed if you turn the
start system”). ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”
When the system is in surveillance state, – Push-button ignition switch is position to the “ON” position with a
the security indicator light will then flash turned to the “ACC” position (mod- registered key/access key fob.
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec- els with “keyless access with push-
onds), indicating that the system has been button start system”). NOTE
armed for surveillance. For models with “keyless access with
& Disarming the system push-button start system”, if the ac-
NOTE S02AF05
Perform either of the following procedures. cess key fob battery is discharged,
. The system can be armed even if the perform the procedure described in
. Briefly press a button (for less than 2
windows and/or moonroof are open. “Switching power status” FP428. In
seconds) on the access key fob/remote
Always make sure that they are fully such a case, replace the battery im-
transmitter.
closed before arming the system. mediately. Refer to “Replacing battery
. The 30-second standby time can be . Carry the access key fob and perform
either of the following procedures (models of access key fob” FP484.
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
formed by your SUBARU dealer. with “keyless access with push-button
. If any of the following actions is start system”). & Alarm system setting
done during the standby period, the – Grip the front door handle. To change the setting of your vehicle’s
S02AF11
system will not switch to the surveil- – Press the rear gate opener button. alarm system for activation or deactiva-
lance state. – Unlock using the PIN code access. tion, do the following.
– Doors (including the rear gate) 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
The flashing of the security indicator light
are unlocked using the access key “Disarming the system” FP136.
will then change slowly (once approxi-
fob/remote transmitter. 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-
– Doors (including the rear gate) proximately every 2 seconds), indicating doors, the rear gate and engine hood.
are unlocked using the keyless that the alarm system has been disarmed. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

(139,1)
Child safety locks 137
position. with push-button start system”). 2-7. Child safety locks

4. Hold down “ ” of the driver’s power . Turn the push-button ignition to the S02AG
door locking switch, open the driver’s door “ACC” position (models with “keyless
within the following 1 second, and wait 10 access with push-button start system”). 2
seconds without releasing the switch. The
Keys and doors

setting will then be changed as follows. NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the
. Type A combination meter alarm. If the immobilizer transponder
Setting Combination Horn is not registered, the alarm will not
status meter display stop.
Activate AL on Once
Deactivate AL off Twice & Valet mode
S02AF06
. Type B combination meter When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
Setting Combination Horn mode, the remote transmitter is used only
status meter display Each rear door has a child safety lock.
for locking and unlocking the doors and When the child safety lock lever is in the
Activate AL ON Once rear gate and panic activation. lock position, the door cannot be opened
Deactivate AL OFF Twice from the inside. The door can only be
To enter the valet mode, change the
NOTE setting of your vehicle’s alarm system to opened from the outside.
You may have the above setting change deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm system
setting” FP136. The security indicator WARNING
done by your SUBARU dealer.
light will continue to flash once every 3
Always turn the child safety locks to
& If you have accidentally trig- seconds, indicating that the system is in
the “LOCK” position when children
gered the alarm system the valet mode.
sit in the rear seat. Serious injury
S02AF03
To exit valet mode, change the setting of could result if a child accidentally
! To stop the alarm
S02AF0301 your vehicle’s alarm system to activation opens the door and falls out.
Do any of the following operations: mode. Refer to “Alarm system setting”
. Press any button on the access key fob/ FP136.
remote transmitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position (models without “keyless access

(140,1)
138 Windows
2-8. Windows ming, entrapment or malfunction. & Power window operation

S02AH07
S02AH – The closing window slides down
slightly and stops. ! Power window switches
S02AH0701
WARNING – The opening window stops slid- . Driver’s side power window switches:
ing down.
To avoid serious personal injury . The power window system may
caused by entrapment, always con- detect resistance, an impact or an
form to the following instructions abnormality in the following cases.
without exception. – A substantial sized object is
. When operating the power win- caught between the window and
dows, be extremely careful to the window frame.
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms, – A foreign object is caught be-
neck, head or other objects from tween the window and the window
being caught in the window. frame.
. Always lock the passengers’ win- – The vehicle drives over a deep
dows using the lock switch when pothole.
children are riding in the vehicle. . The window cannot be closed for a
few seconds after the window is auto- 1) For front left window (with one-touch auto
. Always carry the key when you up and down feature)
matically stopped by the system. 2) For front right window (with one-touch
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat- auto up and down feature (if equipped))
tended child to remain in the 3) For rear left window
vehicle. Failure to follow this 4) For rear right window
5) Lock switch
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window. All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster on the driver
side door.
NOTE These switches illuminate when activated.
. If the power window system detects
resistance, an impact or abnormality,
the window operation may be automa-
tically stopped to prevent further jam-

(141,1)
Windows 139
. Passenger’s side power window ! Operating the window

switches: S02AH0702
Keys and doors

Without one-touch auto up and down
feature
With one-touch auto up and down feature
1) Close
Each passenger’s window can be con- 1) Automatically close*
2) Open
trolled by the power window switch located 2) Close
on the door. 3) Open
4) Automatically open* NOTE
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the Avoid the following.
switch to the opposite side.
. Continuously operating a switch in
the same direction after the window is
fully closed or fully opened.
. Continuously operating three or
more switches all at once in the same
direction after the windows are fully
closed or fully opened.
Either of the operations described
above may cause the power window
breaker to operate making it impossible
to open or close the window. Be sure to
initialize the power windows. Refer to
– CONTINUED –

(142,1)
140 Windows
“Initialization of power window (win- few seconds after the anti-entrapment & Initialization of power window
dows with off delay function)” FP140. function operates. (windows with off delay func-
! Anti-entrapment function (windows ! Off delay function (if equipped) tion)
S02AH06
S02AH0705
with one-touch auto up and down The windows can be operated for approxi- If the one-touch auto up and down function
function) mately 40 seconds even after the ignition or off delay function does not operate
S02AH0703
While closing the window automatically, if switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF” properly, operate each window according
the window senses a substantial enough position. If a front door is opened within 40 to the following procedure in order to
object trapped between the window and seconds, the off delay function is can- initialize the power window system.
the window frame, it automatically moves celed. 1. Close the door.
down slightly and stops. ! Locking the passengers’ windows 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
If a foreign object is caught while window is S02AH0704 position.
opening automatically, the window will 3. Open the window completely and then
stop. press and hold down the power window
switch for approximately 1 second.
CAUTION 4. Close the window completely and then
pull and hold the power window switch for
. Never attempt to test the power approximately 1 second.
window operation using body
parts fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
. If an object is caught just before
the window fully closes, the sys-
tem may not operate properly.
1) Lock
NOTE 2) Unlock
. If a window detects an impact similar When the lock switch is in the lock position,
to that caused by trapping an object (for the rear passenger’s window switches on
example, when the vehicle encounters the driver side door and the passengers’
a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment window switches cannot be operated.
function may operate.
. You cannot close the window for a

(143,1)
Rear gate 141
2-9. Rear gate 2. Press and hold the rear gate opener WARNING
S02AJ
button. The rear gate will open slightly.
& Manual rear gate 3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly. . To prevent dangerous exhaust
2
S02AJ04
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
Keys and doors

using any of the following systems. NOTE
while the engine is running.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to If the rear gate cannot be opened due to
“Locking and unlocking from the inside” a discharged vehicle battery, a mal- . Do not attempt to shut the rear
FP132. function in the door locking/unlocking gate while holding the recessed
. Keyless access with the push-button system or other causes, you can unlock grip. Also do not close the rear
start system (if equipped): Refer to “Key- it by manually operating the rear gate gate by pulling the handle from
less access with push-button start system” lock release lever. For the procedure, inside the cargo space. There is a
FP110. refer to “Rear gate – if the rear gate danger of your hand being
cannot be opened” FP429. caught and injured.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” FP127. To close:
To open: CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down when loading or unloading cargo.
Rear gate opener button firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
1. Unlock the rear gate. pull it down holding the handle.
– CONTINUED –

(144,1)
142 Rear gate
& Power rear gate (if equipped) remain in the vehicle. Failure to may malfunction.
S02AJ01
follow this procedure could re-
WARNING sult in injury to a child operating The power rear gate operates only when
the power rear gate. all of the following conditions are satisfied.
. When operating the power rear . The driver should be aware of and . The vehicle is stopped completely.
gate, observe the following pre- pay careful attention to his/her . The outside temperature is within a
cautions. Ignoring the precau- responsibilities. range of −228F to 1408F (from −308C to
tions may result in an injury (e. 608C).
g., anyone’s body is hit against . Use the power rear gate only
when the area around the rear . The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
the rear gate or is caught in the “OFF” or “ACC” position. Or, the ignition
rear gate, etc.) gate is clearly visible and when
you have checked that there is no switch is in the “ON” position and the select
– Make sure there are no people danger of people being caught in lever is in the “P” position.
around the rear gate. the gate.
– Never let anyone get close to We recommend using the power rear gate
the rear gate. function in most circumstances instead of
CAUTION manual operation.
. When closing the rear gate, be
extremely careful to prevent any- . When closing the rear gate after NOTE
one’s fingers, arms, neck, head opening it, make sure to use the . Do not press the power rear gate
or other objects from being power rear gate. If you close the button repeatedly while the power rear
caught in the rear gate. Other- rear gate manually with extra gate is operating. Otherwise, the sys-
wise, serious personal injury may force, the power rear gate may tem may ignore the button operation in
be caused by entrapment. be damaged. order to avoid being damaged.
. After opening the rear gate on a . If the vehicle starts to move while the
. Do not install any accessories
slope using the power rear gate power rear gate is operating, the sys-
other than genuine SUBARU
feature, the rear gate may close. tem sounds a buzzer and closes the
parts on the rear gate. If the
Make sure that the rear gate has rear gate automatically. At this time, if
weight of rear gate increases
stopped completely after open- the system detects jamming, it will
excessively, the rear gate stay
ing it. deactivate the power rear gate and the
cannot support the rear gate
. When leaving the vehicle, always rear gate will not be closed. If this
sufficiently when opening the
carry the key for safety and never rear gate. Also, the power rear occurs, close the rear gate manually.
allow an unattended child to gate may not function properly or For details, refer to “Manual rear gate”

(145,1)
Rear gate 143
FP141. ! Operation
. If you try to open the rear gate using S02AJ0111
the power rear gate function immedi- NOTE

ately after closing the rear gate using . The rear gate will remain unlocked 2
the power rear gate function, an elec- even after closing it. Always lock the
Keys and doors

tronic chirp will sound and the rear gate rear gate when leaving the vehicle.
will not open. Wait for a while before . If you cannot open/close the rear
trying to open the rear gate via the gate by performing the operation de-
power rear gate function. scribed here, a short electronic chirp
. If either of the operating conditions will sound three times (beep, beep,
has not been satisfied while operating beep).
the power rear gate, an electronic chirp
! By the power rear gate button
will sound and the power rear gate will
(other than the buttons on the Power rear gate button on the access key
be deactivated. In this case, the rear
rear gate) fob
gate may stop opening or closing S02AJ011101
suddenly.
Power rear gate button on the instrument Power rear gate button on the transmitter
panel
To open the rear gate:
Press and hold the power rear gate button
when the rear gate is closed. The rear gate
– CONTINUED –

(146,1)
144 Rear gate
will open automatically. Then an electronic NOTE power rear gate button can be changed
chirp and the hazard warning flashers will by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your
operate as follows: SUBARU dealer for details.
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the instrument panel/transmitter: ! By the buttons on the rear gate
S02AJ011102
sounds and flashes twice.
. When operating the power rear gate
NOTE
button on the access key fob: sounds and After performing the following proce-
flashes four times. dures, an electronic chirp will sound
twice and the hazard warning flashers
NOTE will flash twice.
While the rear gate is locked, you
cannot open the rear gate by operating
the power rear gate button on the
instrument panel. In such a case,
unlock the rear gate before operating
the power rear gate button. The rear gate cannot be paused when it
is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) range
To pause the opening rear gate: from the fully closed position. The
Briefly press the power rear gate button system will ignore any button operation
while the rear gate is being opened. Then and the rear gate will continue to open.
an electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice. To close the rear gate:
If you press the power rear gate button Press and hold the power rear gate button.
again, the rear gate will close. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice Rear gate opener button
You can open the rear gate by pressing the and the hazard warning flashers will flash
power rear gate button briefly while the twice. If you briefly press the power rear
rear gate is being closed. gate button again, the rear gate will open.
NOTE
The operational/non-operational
setting of the power rear gate using

(147,1)
Rear gate 145
. Power rear gate button on the inside tons.

edge of the rear gate . Rear gate opener button
If you press the power rear gate button . Power rear gate button on the inside 2
again, the rear gate will close. You can edge of the rear gate
Keys and doors

open the rear gate by pressing the power If you press the power rear gate button
rear gate button briefly while the rear gate again, the rear gate will open.
is being closed.
To Lock the doors using the power rear
NOTE gate lock button:
Carry the access key fob, and press the
power rear gate lock button. All doors, the
rear gate and the fuel lid are locked, and
Power rear gate button on the inside edge the rear gate will be closed. Also, the
of the rear gate hazard warning flashers will flash once,
1) Power rear gate button and an electronic chirp will sound once.
2) Power rear gate lock button (if equipped)
NOTE
To open the rear gate: . By pushing the power rear gate lock
1. For models with “keyless access with button for more than 2 seconds, all
push-button start system”, carry the ac- doors are locked, however, the auto
cess key fob. For models without “keyless door closing function of the rear gate
access with push-button start system”, will be canceled.
unlock the rear gate. . If any of the doors is not fully closed,
2. Briefly press the rear gate opener the outside warning chime sounds five
button when the rear gate is closed. The rear gate cannot be paused when it times to alert you that the doors are not
is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) range properly closed.
The rear gate will open automatically. from the fully closed position. The
To pause the opening rear gate: system will ignore any button operation ! By manual operation
S02AJ011103
and the rear gate will continue to open. To open the rear gate:
Briefly press either of the following buttons
while the rear gate is being opened. To close the rear gate: Lift up the rear gate, when the rear gate at
. Rear gate opener button midway position. The rear gate will open
Briefly press either of the following but- automatically.
– CONTINUED –

(148,1)
146 Rear gate
To close the rear gate: ! Memory function registered.

S02AJ0101
Pull down the rear gate when the rear gate Registration of the rear gate height:
is opened. The rear gate will close auto-
matically. To register the rear gate height, perform
the following procedures while the ignition
NOTE switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
. If the rear gate is moved slowly, it 1. Open the rear gate using the power
may not operate automatically open or rear gate function.
close. 2. With the rear gate at the desired
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure height, stop it using the power rear gate
that all doors and the rear gate are function.
completely locked. 3. Press the memory switch to select the
“ON” status.
! Manual operation
S02AJ0108
NOTE Memory switch
Using the power rear gate operation is
recommended. Manual operation will
require physical effort.
The power rear gate can be closed
manually. Refer to “Manual rear gate”
FP141.
Power rear gate button on the inside edge

of the rear gate
1) Power rear gate button
Memory switch status
2) Power rear gate lock button (if equipped)
1) ON status
2) OFF status 4. With the rear gate at the desired
Your desired rear gate height can be height, press and hold the power rear gate

(149,1)
Rear gate 147
button on the inside edge of the rear gate height. CAUTION

until an electronic chirp is heard and the
hazard warning flashers flash three times. NOTE . If the reverse function is operated
The electronic chirp and the flashing The rear gate will open to the position 3 times consecutively, automatic 2
hazard warning flashers confirm the se- that is stored in the memory function opening and closing of the power
Keys and doors

lected rear gate height has been regis- even if the rear gate is opened by the rear gate function will be can-
tered. reverse function. celed and the rear gate will stop
opening or closing suddenly.
! Reverse function
NOTE S02AJ0102 However, the rear gate may open
. To change the registered height, or close depending on the rear
WARNING gate height when automatic op-
press the memory switch to select the
“OFF” status and perform the register- . Do not let parts of your body get eration is ceased. Be careful that
ing procedure again. caught when operating the re- the rear gate does not hit any-
. It is possible to register the height verse function. If the reverse one’s head or face, etc. and that
from approximately 2 in (5 cm) or more function does not operate for fingers and baggage, etc. are not
from the completely closed position. some reason, this may lead to caught in it.
serious injury or accidents. . Take care not to damage the
Retrieval of the rear gate height: . The reverse function may not touch sensors. Otherwise, the
To open the rear gate and stop it at the operate if foreign objects are reverse function may cease to
registered height, perform the following caught in the rear gate just before operate.
procedure. it closes completely. Be careful
1. Press the memory switch to select the not to catch your fingers and If, while opening or closing using power
ON status. other body parts. rear gate, the rear gate catches persons or
baggage or hits an obstacle, an electronic
2. Press and hold any of the power rear . The reverse function may not chirp will sound 3 times and the rear gate
gate switches. operate depending on the object will operate as follows.
shape and the manner in which it
Even if any of the power rear gate switches When opening the rear gate: The rear
was caught. Be careful not to
are pressed and held while the memory gate will automatically close.
catch your fingers and other
switch is in the OFF status, you can stop it
body parts.
at the registered height by pressing the When closing the rear gate: The rear
memory switch to select the ON status gate will automatically open.
before the rear gate reaches the registered
– CONTINUED –

(150,1)
148 Rear gate
! Rear gate drop prevention function such as that caused by “Reverse function”
S02AJ0104
The rear gate is lowered by the weight of FP147 or “Rear gate drop prevention
snow and such, an electronic chirp will function” FP148, it cannot be set as non-
sound and the rear gate drop prevention operational.
function will apply braking to the rear gate
so that it prevents a rapid closure of the
rear gate.
NOTE
. If there is snow on the rear gate, only
use the power rear gate function after
removing the snow.
1) Touch sensor ! Selecting audible signal operation
S02AJ0109
Touch sensors are attached on the left and Using an electronic chirp, the power rear
right edges of the rear gate. If the touch gate will give you an audible signal before
sensors detect fingers, baggage, etc. starting its operation. If desired, the audi-
while closing by the power rear gate ble signal can be turned off by a SUBARU
function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3 dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
times and the rear gate will open auto- details.
matically. For models with “keyless access with
NOTE push-button start system”, you can turn
the audible signal off by operating the
When the rear gate is opened using the combination meter display (color LCD).
reverse function, it will be opened fully For details, refer to “Keyless Entry Sys-
or to the height registered in the tem” FP196.
memory function.
The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal
also works as the audible signal settings
for the “remote keyless entry system” and
the “keyless access with push-button start
system”. However, for the warning chime

(151,1)
Moonroof 149
2-10. Moonroof (if equipped) vehicle. Failure to follow this & Moonroof switch
S02AK02
S02AK procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the moon-
WARNING roof. 2
Keys and doors

. Never try to check the anti-en-
Never let anyone’s hands, arms, trapment function by deliberately
head or any objects protrude from placing part of your body in the
the moonroof. A person could be moonroof.
seriously injured if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur.
. The vehicle stops suddenly. CAUTION
. The vehicle turns sharply. . Do not sit on the edge of the open
. The vehicle is involved in an moonroof.
accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if 1) OPEN/CLOSE switch
. Body parts protruding from the falling snow or extremely cold 2) Open
vehicle are struck by outside conditions have caused it to 3) Close
objects. freeze shut.
To open the moonroof:
To avoid serious personal injury . Do not touch the moving parts of Press the rear side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
caused by entrapment, always con- the moonroof while the moonroof switch. The sun shade will also be opened
form to the following instructions is operating. together with the moonroof. The moonroof
without exception. . If the moonroof does not close, will stop at a position approximately 6 in
. Before closing the moonroof, we recommend that you have the (15 cm) away from the fully opened
make sure that no one’s hands, system checked by a SUBARU position. Slide the switch rearward again
arms, head or other objects will dealer. to open the moonroof completely.
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof. The moonroof operates only when the To close the moonroof:
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. Press the front side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
. Always carry the key when you
switch.
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat- To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-
tended child to remain in the way position while opening or closing it,
momentarily push the switch to the
– CONTINUED –

(152,1)
150 Moonroof
“OPEN” side or “CLOSE” side. & Anti-entrapment function & Sun shade
S02AK06 S02AK05
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, When the moonroof senses a substantial
wipe away water on the roof prior to enough object trapped between its glass
opening the moonroof to prevent drops of and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
water from falling into the passenger automatically moves back to the fully open
compartment. position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
ment function may also be activated by a
NOTE strong shock on the moonroof even when
. Driving with the moonroof fully open there is nothing trapped.
can cause an annoying sound to be
generated at high speeds. If this oc- CAUTION
curs, use the moonroof at the initial
stop position of 6 in (15 cm) away from Never attempt to test this function
the fully opened position. using fingers, hands or other parts
. The moonroof cannot be operated of your body. The sun shade can be slid forward or
while the remote engine starter system backward by hand while the moonroof is
is operating. NOTE closed.
For the sake of safety, it is recom- If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
mended that you avoid driving with the also moves back.
moonroof fully opened.

(153,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(154,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(155,1)
Instruments and controls

3-1. Ignition switch (models without “keyless CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
S03
access with push-button start system”) ..... 156 indicator light................................................... 168
Key positions ..................................................... 156 Coolant temperature low indicator light/
Coolant temperature high warning light ............ 168
Key reminder chime............................................ 157
Charge warning light .......................................... 169
Ignition switch light (if equipped) ........................ 157
3-2. Push-button ignition switch (models with
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 169 3
Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 170
“keyless access with push-button start Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 170
system”) ........................................................ 158
AT OIL TEMP warning light ................................. 170
Safety precautions.............................................. 158
Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
Operating range for push-button start system ..... 158 models)............................................................ 171
Switching power status....................................... 159 ABS warning light .............................................. 172
When access key fob does not operate Brake system warning light (red) ........................ 173
properly............................................................ 160
Electronic parking brake light............................. 173
3-3. Hazard warning flasher .................................. 160 Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light .................. 175
3-4. Meters and gauges ......................................... 160 Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light......... 175
Speedometer ...................................................... 160 Depress brake indicator light (if equipped) ......... 175
Tachometer......................................................... 160 Low fuel warning light........................................ 175
Odometer ........................................................... 161 Door open warning light..................................... 175
Double trip meter................................................ 161 Engine hood open warning light ......................... 175
Fuel gauge ......................................................... 162 All-Wheel Drive warning light ............................. 175
ECO gauge (if equipped)..................................... 162 Power steering warning light .............................. 176
Combination meter settings ................................ 163 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
3-5. Illumination brightness control ..................... 164 Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 176
Auto dimmer cancel function .............................. 164 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 178
3-6. Warning and indicator .................................... 164 Warning chimes and warning indicator of the
Initial illumination for system check .................... 164 keyless access with push-button start system
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 165 (if equipped)..................................................... 178
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 167 Security indicator light ....................................... 183
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF SI-DRIVE indicator light ...................................... 184
indicators ......................................................... 167 Select lever/gear position indicator..................... 184

(156,1)
Turn signal indicator lights ................................. 185 Icy road surface warning light (if equipped) ........ 189
High beam indicator light.................................... 185 3-7. Combination meter display (color LCD)
High beam assist indicator light (if equipped) ..... 185 (if equipped) ..................................................189
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) .......... 185 Basic operation.................................................. 190
Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)..... 186 Welcome screen (opening animation) and
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light Good-bye (ending animation) screen ................ 190
(if equipped) ..................................................... 186 Warning screen .................................................. 191
LED headlight warning light (if equipped)............ 186 Telltale screen.................................................... 191
Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/ Basic screens .................................................... 193
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator Menu screens .................................................... 195
light (if equipped) ............................................. 186 3-8. Multi-function display (black and white) .......197
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 186 Driving information display ................................ 197
Headlight indicator light...................................... 186 Outside temperature indicator ............................ 202
Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto Start Stop X-MODE indicator (if equipped) .......................... 202
OFF indicator light (yellow) ............................... 186
Clock ................................................................. 202
Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)................. 187
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator 3-9. Multi-function display (color LCD) .................203
light.................................................................. 187 Features ............................................................ 203
X-MODE indicator light (if equipped) ................... 187 Welcome screen................................................. 203
Hill descent control indicator light Self-check screen............................................... 204
(if equipped) ..................................................... 187 Interruption screen............................................. 204
BSD/RCTA warning light (if equipped) ................. 188 Basic operation.................................................. 205
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator light (if equipped) ........ 188 Basic screens .................................................... 205
RAB warning light (if equipped) .......................... 188 Setting screen.................................................... 212
RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped).................. 188 How to get the source code using the open
Driver Monitoring System operation indicator source ............................................................. 224
light (green)/Driver Monitoring System warning 3-10. Clock ..............................................................225
light (yellow) (if equipped) ................................ 188 Setting the clock manually ................................. 225
Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light Setting the clock automatically........................... 228
(if equipped) ..................................................... 188 Regulatory information....................................... 228
Driver Monitoring System temporary stop
indicator light (if equipped) ............................... 188

(157,1)
3-11. Light control switch...................................... 229 3-16. Wiper and washer..........................................237

Precautions and tips........................................... 229 Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 239
Headlights .......................................................... 229 Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 240
High/low beam change (dimmer) ......................... 231 3-17. Mirrors ............................................................241
Headlight flasher ................................................ 231 Inside mirror ...................................................... 241
High beam assist function (if equipped) .............. 231 Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink® 3
Daytime running light system ............................. 234 (if equipped)..................................................... 241

3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) Outside mirrors.................................................. 248
(if equipped) .................................................. 235 3-18. Defogger and deicer (if equipped) ...............250
3-13. Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) .......... 236 3-19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel.......................251
3-14. Fog light switch (if equipped)...................... 236 Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) ....... 252
3-15. Turn signal lever ........................................... 237 3-20. Horn................................................................253
One-touch lane changer...................................... 237

(158,1)
156 Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)
3-1. Ignition switch (models CAUTION NOTE

without “keyless access with . Keep the ignition switch in the
Do not attach a large key holder or “LOCK” position when the engine is
push-button start system”) key case to either key. If it banged not running.
S03AA
against your knees or hands while . Using electrical accessories for a
WARNING you are driving, it could turn the long time with the ignition switch in the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi- “ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
. Never turn the ignition switch to tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi- battery to go dead.
the “LOCK” position while the tion, thereby stopping the engine. . If the ignition switch will not move
vehicle is being driven or towed Also, if the key is attached to a key from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
because that will lock the steer- holder or to a large bunch of other position, turn the steering wheel
ing wheel, preventing steering keys, centrifugal force may act on it slightly to the left and right as you turn
control. And when the engine is as the vehicle moves, resulting in the ignition switch.
turned off, it takes a much greater unwanted turning of the ignition
effort than usual to steer. switch. & Key positions
S03AA11
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
Position Description
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and The key can only be inserted
or removed in this position.
never allow an unattended child LOCK The ignition switch will lock
to remain in the vehicle. Failure to the steering wheel when you
follow this procedure could re- remove the key.
sult in injury to a child or others. In this position the electrical
Children could operate the power ACC accessories (audio, acces-
windows, the moonroof or other sory power outlet, etc.) can be
used.
controls or even make the vehicle
move. This is the normal operating
ON position after starting the en-
gine.
The engine is started in this
START position.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

(159,1)
Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”) 157
CAUTION . The engine may not start in the der.

following cases: – The key is near or touching
Do not turn the ignition switch to the another transmitter.
“START” position while the engine
is running. & Key reminder chime
S03AA05 3
The reminder chime sounds when the

NOTE driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
The chime stops under the following
conditions.
. When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. When the key is removed from the
ignition switch.
– The key grip is touching another
. When the driver’s door is closed.
key or a metallic key holder.
& Ignition switch light (if
equipped)
S03AA06
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
. To turn the key from the “ACC” to nates when the driver’s door is opened or
“LOCK” position, the select lever must when the driver’s door is unlocked using
be in the “P” position and the key must the remote keyless entry transmitter.
be pushed in and turned. The light remains illuminated for several
. If your registered key fails to start tens of seconds and then gradually turns
the engine, pull out the key once (the off under the following conditions.
security indicator light will blink), and . When the driver’s door is closed.
then insert the key again and turn it to
– The key is near another key that . When the doors are unlocked using the
the “START” position again to restart
contains an immobilizer transpon- remote keyless entry transmitter.
the engine.
– CONTINUED –

(160,1)
158 Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
The light turns off immediately under the 3-2. Push-button ignition cannot be operated.
following conditions. . Even when the access key fob is
switch (models with “keyless outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
. When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
access with push-button start close to the glass, it may be possible to
. When all doors and the rear gate are system”) switch the power or to start the engine.
locked using the remote keyless entry S03BG . Do not leave the access key fob in
transmitter. & Safety precautions the following places. It may become
S03BG04
Refer to “Safety precautions” FP111. impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start. It
& Operating range for push- may also cause a false warning to issue
button start system although no malfunction actually oc-
S03BG01 curs, or not to issue a warning when
any malfunction occurs.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– In the cargo area
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key fob battery is dis-
charged, perform the procedure de-
scribed in “Access key fob – if access
1) Antenna key fob does not operate properly”
2) Operating range FP427. In such a case, replace the
battery immediately. Refer to “Repla-
NOTE cing battery of access key fob” FP484.
. If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the anten-
nas inside the vehicle, the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start

(161,1)
Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”) 159
& Switching power status Power Indicator color Operation . If the push-button ignition switch
S03BG02 status does not operate smoothly, stop
OFF Turned off Power is turned the operation. Contact a SUBARU
off. dealer immediately.
The following . If the push-button ignition switch
systems can be does not illuminate even when 3
ACC Orange used:
audio and ac- the instrument panel illumination

cessory power is turned on, have the vehicle
outlet. inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
Orange . If the vehicle was left in the hot
(while engine is
stopped) All electrical sun for a long time, the surface of
ON systems can be the push-button ignition switch
Turned off used.
(while engine is may get hot. Be careful not to
running) burn yourself.
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
CAUTION NOTE
The power is switched every time the
. When operating the push-button
push-button ignition switch is pressed. . When the push-button ignition ignition switch, firmly press it all the
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the switch is left in “ON” (while the way.
driver’s seat. engine is not running) or “ACC” . If the push-button ignition switch is
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”/“N” for a long time, it may result in pressed quickly, the power may not
position. vehicle battery discharge. turn on or off.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch . Do not spill drinks or other liquids
without depressing the brake pedal. Every on the push-button ignition
time the button is pressed, the power is switch. It may cause a malfunc-
switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”, tion.
“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is . Do not touch the push-button
stopped and the push-button ignition ignition switch with a hand soiled
switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation with oil or other contaminants. It
indicator on the push-button ignition switch may cause a malfunction.
illuminates in orange.
– CONTINUED –

(162,1)
160 Hazard warning flasher
. If the indicator light on the push- 3-3. Hazard warning flasher 3-4. Meters and gauges
button ignition switch flashes in green S03AB S03AD
when the push-button ignition switch is NOTE
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition Some of the meters and gauges on the
switch while turning the steering wheel combination meter use liquid-crystal
left and right. displays. You will find their indications
hard to see if you wear polarized
! Battery drainage prevention func- glasses.
tion
S03BG0201
When the push-button ignition switch is left & Speedometer
in the “ACC” or “ON” position for approxi- S03AD03
The speedometer shows the vehicle
mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition
speed.
switch will be automatically switched to
“OFF” to prevent the battery from going
dead. & Tachometer
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn S03AD06
other drivers when you have to park your The tachometer shows the engine speed
& When access key fob does in thousands of revolutions per minute.
not operate properly vehicle under emergency conditions. The
S03BG03 hazard warning flasher works regardless
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key of the position of the ignition switch.
CAUTION
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, Do not operate the engine with the
push the hazard warning button on the pointer of the tachometer in the red
instrument panel. All the turn signal lights zone. In this range, fuel injection will
and the turn signal indicator lights will be cut by the engine control module
flash. To turn off the flasher, push the to protect the engine from overrev-
button again. ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
NOTE is reduced below the red zone.
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.

(163,1)
Meters and gauges 161
& Odometer closed.

S03AD04
& Double trip meter

S03AD05
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pressing the TRIP 3
RESET switch and keep the knob pressed

for more than 2 seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
1) TRIP RESET switch result.
2) Type A combination meter
3) Type B combination meter
1) TRIP RESET switch NOTE
This meter displays the odometer when 2) Type A combination meter . If the connection between the com-
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. 3) Type B combination meter
bination meter and battery is broken for
The odometer shows the total distance This meter displays the two trip meters any reason such as vehicle mainte-
that the vehicle has been driven. when the ignition switch is in the “ON” nance or fuse replacement, the data
position. recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
NOTE The trip meter shows the distance that the . If you press the TRIP RESET switch
If you press the TRIP RESET switch vehicle has been driven since you last set when the ignition switch is in the
when the ignition switch is in the it to zero. “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
odometer/trip meter will light up. The display can be switched as shown in possible to switch between the A trip
The indicators will turn off when: the following sequence by pressing the meter and B trip meter indications while
. The TRIP RESET switch is not oper- TRIP RESET switch. the odometer/trip meter is lit up.
ated for approximately 10 seconds. In addition, it is possible to reset the trip
. The driver’s door is opened and then meter by pressing and holding the TRIP
– CONTINUED –

(164,1)
162 Meters and gauges
RESET switch. to fuel level movement in the tank. & ECO gauge (if equipped)
S03AD12
The indicators will turn off when:
– The TRIP RESET switch is not NOTE
operated for approximately 10 sec- . You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
onds. gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
– The driver’s door is opened and door (lid) is located on the right side of
then closed. the vehicle.
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
while the ignition switch is in the
& Fuel gauge “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
S03AD07
fuel gauge will light up and indicate the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
The indicators will turn off when:
– The TRIP RESET switch is not
operated for approximately 10 sec- 1) Type A combination meter
onds. 2) Type B combination meter
– The driver’s door is opened and
The ECO gauge shows the difference
then closed.
between the current rate of fuel consump-
tion and the average rate of fuel consump-
tion since the trip meter was last reset.
If the ECO gauge moves towards the +
side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.
1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Type A combination meter NOTE
3) Type B combination meter
. The ECO gauge shows only an
The fuel gauge is displayed when the approximate indication of fuel effi-
ignition is in the “ON” position, and it shows ciency.
the approximate amount of fuel remaining . After resetting the trip meter, the
in the tank. average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until you have driven for 1 mile
The gauge indication may change slightly (or 1 km). Before that time, the ECO
during braking, turning or acceleration due

(165,1)
Meters and gauges 163
gauge does not operate. NOTE edly until the item you want to change is
. If you switch the units on the combi- displayed.
& Combination meter settings nation meter, the units on the multi- 3. Press and hold the TRIP RESET
S03AD16 function display (black and white) also switch while the item to be changed is
Meter and vehicle settings can be set on switches accordingly. displayed, the setting of the item will be
the combination meter. . If either of the following conditions switched. 3
! Type A combination meter is met, the combination meter setting

S03AD1601
Various adjustments can be made, such mode will be canceled. ! Type B combination meter
S03AD1602
as switching units shown on the combina- – The driver’s door is opened. Meter and vehicle settings can be set on
tion meter and adjusting the warning tone – The TRIP RESET switch is not the combination meter display (color
volume. operated for approximately 10 sec- LCD). Refer to “Menu screens” FP195.
While the ignition switch is in the “OFF” onds or more.
position, each press of TRIP RESET ! Switching method
switch results in items shown in the table S03AD160101
below being switched. 1. Push the ignition switch in the “OFF”

Combination Possible position.
Item meter display settings
A trip —
B trip —
Gauge
needle On/Off
sweep
function
Changing mile/km
the unit*
Warning Lv. 1/Lv. 2/Lv. 3
volume* 1) TRIP RESET switch
*: If available 2. Press the TRIP RESET switch repeat-

(166,1)
164 Illumination brightness control
3-5. Illumination brightness NOTE 3-6. Warning and indicator

control . When the control dial is turned fully S03AE
S03AJ
upward, the illumination brightness & Initial illumination for system
becomes the maximum and the auto- check
matic dimming function does not work S03AE29
Several of the warning and indicator lights
at all.
illuminate when the ignition switch is
. The brightness setting is not can-
initially turned to the “ON” position. This
celed even when the ignition switch is
permits checking the operation of the
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
bulbs.
& Auto dimmer cancel function Apply the parking brake and turn the
S03AJ01 ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
When the ambient light is bright, the
the system check, several of the following
illumination brightness is set to the max-
lights illuminate and then turn off after
imum regardless of the position of the
several seconds or after the engine has
control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust
started.
the illumination brightness by using the
The illumination brightness of the instru- control dial. When the ambient light is dark, : Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt
ment panel illuminates under the following you can dim the illumination brightness as warning light turns off only when the
conditions. described above. driver fastens the seatbelt.)
. When the light switch is in the “ ” or : Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
“ ” position The operational/non-operational setting
and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel light (The seatbelt warning light turns
. When the light control switch is in the off only when the front seat passenger
“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi- function can be changed by your SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for fastens the seatbelt.)
nate automatically
details. : SRS airbag system warning light
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility. / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
OFF indicator light

(167,1)
Warning and indicator 165
/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/ : Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ & Seatbelt warning light
Malfunction indicator light Vehicle Dynamics Control operation and chime S03AE01
indicator light
: Coolant temperature low indicator Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
light/Coolant temperature high warn- : Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator warning device at the driver’s and front
ing light light passenger’s seat, as required by current 3
: Charge warning light : Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto Start safety standards.

Stop OFF indicator light (yellow) (mod- With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
: Oil pressure warning light els without combination meter display position, this device reminds the driver and
: Engine low oil level warning light (color LCD)) front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by
(models without combination meter illuminating the warning lights in the loca-
: Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected tions indicated in the following illustration
display (color LCD)) indicator light (models without combi- and sounding a chime.
: Windshield washer fluid warning light nation meter display (color LCD))
(models without combination meter If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
display (color LCD)) burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
: AT OIL TEMP warning light corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.- for repair.
spec. models)
/ : ABS warning light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Electronic parking brake light
: Low fuel warning light
Driver’s warning light
: Door open warning light
: AWD warning light
: Power steering warning light
– CONTINUED –

(168,1)
166 Warning and indicator
The warning light(s) for unfastened fail.

seatbelt(s) will alternate between . Do not install any accessory such as a
steady illumination and flashing at table or TV onto the seatback.
15-second intervals. The chime will . Do not store a heavy load in the
not sound. seatback pocket.
– At speeds higher than approxi- . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) place his/her hands or legs on the front
The warning light(s) for unfastened passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
seatbelt(s) will alternate between pull the seatback.
flashing and steady illumination at
. Do not use front seats with their back-
15-second intervals and the chime
ward-forward position and seatback not
will sound while the warning light(s)
being locked into place securely. If any of
is/are flashing.
Front passenger’s warning light them are not locked securely, adjust them
. It is possible to cancel the warning again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
operation that follows the 6-second “Manual seat” FP35.
! Operation
S03AE0101 warning after turning ON the ignition
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ switch. When the ignition switch is If the seatbelt warning device for the front
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when turned ON next time, however, the passenger’s seat does not function cor-
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” complete sequence of the warning rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will operation resumes. For further details front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
flash for several seconds, to warn that the about canceling the warning operation, deactivated even when the front passen-
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s please contact your SUBARU dealer. ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take
seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also the following actions.
sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning . Ensure that no article is placed on the
NOTE device for the front passenger’s seat will seat other than a child restraint system and
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- be deactivated. The front passenger’s its child occupant, although we strongly
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened occupant detection system monitors recommend that all children sit in the rear
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning whether or not there is a passenger on seat properly restrained.
device operates as follows according the front passenger’s seat. . Ensure that there is no article left in the
to the vehicle speed. Observe the following precautions. Failure seatback pocket.
– At speeds lower than approxi- to do so may prevent the device from . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) functioning correctly or cause the device to sition and seatback of front passenger’s

(169,1)
seat are locked into place securely by . Continuous illumination of the The indicator is displayed near the map
moving the seat back and forth. warning light lights.
. Illumination of the warning light When the ignition switch is turned to the
If still the seatbelt warning device for front “ON” position, both the ON and OFF
passenger’s seat does not function cor- while driving
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- which time the system is checked. Follow- 3
tions described above, immediately con- For details about the components mon-
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS ing the system check, both indicators turn

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
tion. airbag system monitors” FP101.
indicators illuminates depending on the
& Front passenger’s frontal air- status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
& SRS airbag system airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
warning light bag ON and OFF indicators
S03AE02 S03AE03 vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
WARNING is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
If the warning light exhibits any of ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
the following conditions, there may indicator will remain off.
be a malfunction in the seatbelt If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
system. Immediately take your vehi- airbag ON indicator will remain off while
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer the OFF indicator will illuminate.
to have the system checked. Unless With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
checked and properly repaired, the position, if both the ON and OFF indicators
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS remain illuminated or off simultaneously
airbag will not operate properly in even after the system check period, the
the event of a collision, which may ON : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON system is malfunctioning. Contact your
increase the risk of injury. indicator SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF spection.
indicator
ing light
. No illumination of the warning The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
light when the ignition switch is and OFF indicators show you the status of
first turned to the “ON” position the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
– CONTINUED –

(170,1)
& CHECK ENGINE warn- NOTE The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
ing light/Malfunction This light also illuminates when the fuel stop blinking and illuminate steadily after
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. several driving trips. You should have your
indicator light S03AE04
vehicle checked by an authorized
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
CAUTION SUBARU dealer immediately.
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light illuminating
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
& Coolant temperature
Malfunction indicator light illumi- Remove the cap and retighten it until it low indicator light/
nates while you are driving, have clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with Coolant temperature
your vehicle checked/repaired by the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap high warning light S03AE48
your SUBARU dealer as soon as will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-
possible. Continued vehicle opera- ing light turn off immediately. It may take CAUTION
tion without having the emission several driving trips. If the light does not
control system checked and return off, take your vehicle to your author- . After turning the ignition switch
paired as necessary could cause ized SUBARU dealer immediately. to the “ON” position, if this
serious damage, which may not be indicator light/warning light be-
covered by your vehicle’s warranty. ! If the light is blinking haves in any of the following
S03AE0402
If the light is blinking while driving, an ways, the electrical system may
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks engine misfire condition has been de- be malfunctioning. Contact your
while the engine is running, it may indicate tected which may damage the emission SUBARU dealer immediately for
that there is at least one problem or control system. an inspection.
potential problem somewhere in the emis- To prevent serious damage to the emis- – It remains blinking in RED.
sion control system. sion control system, you should do the
– It remains illuminated in RED
! If the light illuminates steadily following.
for more than 2 seconds.
S03AE0401 . Reduce vehicle speed.
If the light illuminates steadily while driving – It remains blinking in RED and
or does not turn off after the engine starts, . Avoid hard acceleration.
BLUE alternately.
an emission control system malfunction . Avoid steep uphill grades.
. While driving, if this indicator
has been detected. . Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
light/warning light behaves in
You should have your vehicle checked by ble.
any of the following ways, take
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- . Stop towing a trailer as soon as the specified appropriate mea-
ately. possible. sure listed below.

(171,1)
– Blinking or illuminated in changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- However, this is not a malfunction if the
RED: tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light indicator light/warning light turns off
Safely stop the vehicle as turns off when the engine is warmed up after a short time.
soon as possible, and refer to sufficiently.
the emergency steps to take in & Charge warning light
If the engine coolant temperature in- S03AE05
3
the case of engine overheat-
creases over the specified range, the If this light illuminates when the engine is
ing. After that, have the sys-
indicator light/warning light blinks in RED.

tem checked by your nearest running, it may indicate that the charging
At this time, the engine is close to over- system is not working properly.
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En-
heating.
gine overheating” FP422. If the light illuminates while driving or does
– Blinking in RED and BLUE If the engine coolant temperature in- not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
alternately: creases further, the indicator light/warning engine at the first safe opportunity and
The electrical system may be light illuminates in RED continuously. At check the alternator belt. If the belt is
malfunctioning. Contact your this time, the engine may be overheating. loose, broken or if the belt is in good
SUBARU dealer for an inspec- When the indicator light/warning light condition but the light remains illuminated,
tion. blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and immediately.
This coolant temperature low indicator refer to the emergency steps to take in the
light/coolant temperature high warning case of engine overheating. Refer to & Oil pressure warning
light has the following three functions. “Engine overheating” FP422. After that, light S03AE06
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- have the system checked by your nearest
cient warming up of the engine. If this light illuminates when the engine is
SUBARU dealer. running, it may indicate that the engine oil
. Blinking in RED indicates that the
Also, if the indicator light/warning light pressure is low and the lubricating system
engine is close to overheating.
often blinks in RED, the electrical system is not working properly.
. Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
may be malfunctioning. Contact your If the light illuminates while driving or does
ing condition of the engine.
SUBARU dealer for an inspection. not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
For a system check, this indicator light/ engine at the first safe opportunity and
warning light illuminates in RED for ap- NOTE check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
proximately 2 seconds when the ignition If the engine is restarted after a certain low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
switch is turned to the “ON” position. After driving condition, this indicator light/ at the proper level but the light remains
that, this indicator light/warning light warning light may illuminate in RED. illuminated, contact your nearest
– CONTINUED –

(172,1)
SUBARU dealer immediately. NOTE – When the vehicle is driven on a

For details about checking the engine oil . The warning light may stay illumi- road that alternates continuously
level or adding the engine oil, refer to nated when the engine is started between uphill and downhill.
“Engine oil” FP450. straight after topping up or changing
the engine oil. In such cases, park the & Windshield washer
CAUTION vehicle on a level surface and wait for fluid warning light S03AE42
more than a minute until the oil level
Do not operate the engine with the settles, after which the warning light This light illuminates when the fluid level in
oil pressure warning light illumi- will turn off. the windshield washer fluid tank de-
nated. This may cause serious en- . The engine low oil level warning light creases to the lower limit (approximately
gine damage. will not turn off immediately even if you 0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).
replace or add engine oil. It will turn off
after the vehicle starts to move. De- & AT OIL TEMP warning
& Engine low oil level pending on the driving conditions and light S03AE07
warning light S03AE58 environment where the vehicle is dri-
ven, it may take a period of approxi- If this light illuminates when the engine is
This light illuminates when the engine oil running, it may indicate that the transmis-
level decreases to the lower limit. mately 10 minutes for the light to turn
off. If the light has still not turned off sion fluid temperature is too hot.
If the engine low oil level warning light
after 15 minutes have elapsed, we If the light illuminates while driving, im-
illuminates while driving, park the vehicle
recommend that you contact your mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
in a safe and level location, and then check
SUBARU dealer. and let the engine idle until the warning
the engine oil level. When the engine oil
. The warning light may illuminate light turns off.
level is not within the normal range, refill
temporarily in the following conditions
with engine oil. Refer to “Engine oil” ! Transmission control system warn-
because a low oil level may be detected
FP450. ing
as a result of significant oil movement S03AE0701
If the warning light does not turn off after in the engine. If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
refilling the engine oil, or the warning light – When the vehicle is considerably after the engine has started, it may indicate
illuminates even though the engine oil inclined on an uphill or steep slope. that the transmission control system is not
level is within the normal range, have the working properly. Contact your nearest
– When the vehicle has continu-
vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer. SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
ously accelerated and decelerated.
– When the vehicle is continuously
turned.

(173,1)
& Low tire pressure can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also replacement or alternate tires and wheels
warning light (U.S.- reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, allow the TPMS to continue to function
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and properly.
spec. models) S03AE08
stopping ability. Should the warning light illuminate steadily
When the ignition switch is turned to the Please note that the TPMS is not a after blinking for approximately one min-
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- substitute for proper tire maintenance, ute, have the system inspected by your 3
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 and it is the driver’s responsibility to nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

seconds to check that the tire pressure maintain correct tire pressure, even if possible.
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning under-inflation has not reached the level
properly. If there is no problem and all tires to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire WARNING
are properly inflated, the light will turn off. pressure telltale.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), If this light does not illuminate
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
should be checked monthly when cold and briefly after the ignition switch is
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- turned ON or the light illuminates
when the system is not operating properly.
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on steadily after blinking for approxi-
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- mately one minute, you should have
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
When the system detects a malfunction,
different size than the size indicated on the tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
the telltale will flash for approximately one
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure soon as possible.
minute and then remain continuously
label, you should determine the proper tire illuminated. This sequence will continue If this light illuminates while driving,
inflation pressure for those tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long never brake suddenly and keep
as the malfunction exists. When the mal- driving straight ahead while gradu-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle ally reducing speed. Then slowly
function indicator is illuminated, the sys-
has been equipped with a tire pressure pull off the road to a safe place.
tem may not be able to detect or signal low
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates Otherwise an accident involving
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
a low tire pressure telltale when one or serious vehicle damage and serious
tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
more of your tires is significantly under- personal injury could occur.
including the installation of replacement or
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that If this light still illuminates while
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- driving after adjusting the tire pres-
stop and check your tires as soon as
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction sure, a tire may have significant
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under- telltale after replacing one or more tires or damage and a fast leak that causes
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
– CONTINUED –

(174,1)
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire km/h). After adjusting the tire pres- during driving.
as soon as possible. sures, increase the vehicle speed to . When the warning light is on (and
When a spare tire is mounted or a at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the the brake system warning light is
wheel rim is replaced without the TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- off), the ABS function shuts
original pressure sensor/transmitter tion pressures. If the tire pressures down. However, the conventional
being transferred, the Low tire pres- are now above the severe low pres- brake system continues to oper-
sure warning light will illuminate sure threshold, the low tire pressure ate normally.
steadily after blinking for approxi- warning light should turn off a few
mately one minute. This indicates minutes later. Therefore, be sure to The ABS warning light, Vehicle Dynamics
the TPMS is unable to monitor all install the specified size for the front Control warning light, and brake system
four road wheels. Contact your and rear tires. warning light illuminate simultaneously if
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible the EBD system malfunctions. For further
for tire and sensor replacement and/ details of the EBD system malfunction
or system resetting. & ABS warning light S03AE09 warning, refer to “Electronic Brake Force
If the light illuminates steadily after Distribution (EBD) system warning”
CAUTION FP173.
blinking for approximately one min-
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU . If any of the following conditions NOTE
dealer to have the system inspected. occur, we recommend that you
If the warning light behavior is as
have the ABS repaired at the first
described in the following conditions,
available opportunity by your
CAUTION the ABS may be considered normal.
SUBARU dealer.
. The warning light illuminates when
The tire pressure monitoring system – The warning light does not the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
is NOT a substitute for manually illuminate when the ignition position and turns off approximately 2
checking tire pressure. The tire switch is turned to the “ON” seconds after the engine has started.
pressure should be checked peri- position. . The warning light illuminates right
odically (at least monthly) using a – The warning light illuminates after the engine is started but turns off
tire gauge. After any change to tire when the ignition switch is immediately, remaining off.
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- turned to the “ON” position, . The warning light remains illumi-
itoring system will not re-check tire but it does not turn off even nated after the engine has been started,
inflation pressures until the vehicle after the vehicle is started. but it turns off while driving.
is first driven more than 20 mph (32 – The warning light illuminates . The warning light illuminates during

(175,1)
driving, but it turns off immediately and The brake system warning light has the ! Vacuum pressure system warning
remains off. following functions. The brake system warning light
S03AE1006
/ will
When driving with an insufficient battery ! Brake fluid level warning illuminate when the vacuum pressure
voltage, such as when the engine is jump S03AE1002 sensor is malfunctioning or brake booster
started, the ABS warning light may illumi- This light illuminates when the brake fluid pressure is decreasing.
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of
If the brake warning light continues to
3
and does not indicate a malfunction. When the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
illuminate for several minutes after starting

the battery becomes fully charged, the switch in the “ON” position and with the
the engine, there may be a malfunction in
light will turn off. parking brake fully released.
the vacuum system. In this case, drive the
If the brake system warning light should vehicle carefully and have the system
& Brake system illuminate while driving (with the parking inspected by a SUBARU dealer.
warning light (red) S03AE10 brake fully released and with the ignition
This light illuminates with the parking
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an & Electronic parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake light S03AE85
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe
parking brake is fully released. ! Parking brake indicator
location and check the brake fluid level. If S03AE8501
the fluid level is below the “MIN” mark in The light illuminates with the parking brake
WARNING applied while the ignition switch is in the
the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle.
. Driving with the brake system Have the vehicle towed to the nearest “ON” position. It turns off when the parking
warning light on is dangerous. SUBARU dealer for repair. brake is fully released.
This indicates your brake system ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution ! Electronic parking brake system
may not be working properly. If (EBD) system warning warning
S03AE8502
the light remains illuminated, S03AE1003
If the warning light remains on even though
have the brakes inspected by a WARNING
the parking brake is released, the brake
SUBARU dealer immediately.
fluid level may be low or there could be a
. If at all in doubt about whether the . When you release the electronic
problem with the EBD system. Park the
brakes are operating properly, do parking brake while the engine is
vehicle in a safe place immediately and
not drive the vehicle. Have your running, the electronic parking
contact a SUBARU dealer.
vehicle towed to the nearest brake indicator light will turn off.
SUBARU dealer for repair. However, if the light still illumi-
nates, stop the vehicle in a safe
– CONTINUED –

(176,1)
place immediately and have the illuminates, remains illuminated for remains illuminated when the parking
system inspected by a SUBARU approximately 30 seconds and then brake cannot be released even if the
dealer. turns off. parking brake switch is pushed. For de-
. If at all in doubt about whether the . Even if the electronic parking brake tails, refer to “Electronic parking brake”
brakes are operating properly, do indicator light flashes, if the warning FP332.
not drive the vehicle. Have your light behavior is as described in the
following examples, the electronic ! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-
vehicle towed to the nearest ing
SUBARU dealer for repair. parking brake system is not malfunc- S03AE850201
tioning. The electronic parking brake indicator light
. If the electronic parking brake – The indicator light turns off when flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
indicator light flashes, the elec- the electronic parking brake is re- will be heard if the parking brake switch is
tronic parking brake system may leased. operated when the parking brake cannot
be malfunctioning. Immediately be applied.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
stop your vehicle in a safe loca-
tor light may flash immediately after the ! Frequent operation warning
tion, use tire stops under the tires
engine is started. However, it is not S03AE850202
to prevent the vehicle from mov- The electronic parking brake indicator light
malfunctioning if the indicator light
ing and contact your SUBARU flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
turns off after the electronic parking
dealer. For details, refer to “Elec- will be heard if the parking brake switch is
brake is released.
tronic parking brake” FP332. operated too frequently. In this case, the
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash after the electronic operation of the parking brake switch is
parking brake is frequently applied and restricted to protect the electronic parking
NOTE brake system.
. When the ignition switch is turned to released. However, the electronic park-
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the ing brake system is not malfunctioning NOTE
electronic parking brake applied, the if the light turns off for a short period of
Wait until the indicator light turns off.
electronic parking brake indicator light time.
remains illuminated for approximately The electronic parking brake indicator light
30 seconds and then turns off. flashes when the electronic parking brake
. When the electronic parking brake system is malfunctioning. If the indicator
switch is pulled to apply the electronic light flashes, promptly park in a safe
parking brake while the ignition switch location as soon as possible and contact
is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the your SUBARU dealer.
electronic parking brake indicator light The electronic parking brake indicator light

(177,1)
& Auto Vehicle Hold ON Hold function while the vehicle is stopped nated before you start to drive.
indicator light by the Auto Vehicle Hold function.
S03AE94
. The electronic parking brake is re- & Engine hood open
CAUTION leased. warning light S03AE98
If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator & Low fuel warning light The warning light illuminates if the engine 3
S03AE11
light does not illuminate even when hood is not fully closed. This function is

the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is The low fuel warning light illuminates when effective even if the ignition switch is in the
pressed to activate the Auto Vehicle the tank is nearly empty, at approximately “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, or the
Hold function, the electronic parking 2.5 US gal (9.5 liters, 2.1 Imp gal). It only key is removed from the ignition switch.
brake system may be malfunction- operates when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. Always make sure this light is not illumi-
ing. nated before you start to drive.
This indicator light illuminates when the
CAUTION
& All-Wheel Drive warn-
Auto Vehicle Hold is activated. For details, Promptly put fuel in the tank when- ing light S03AE13
refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold function” ever the low fuel warning light
FP334. illuminates. Engine misfires as a This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with
result of an empty tank could cause tires of differing diameters fitted on the
& Auto Vehicle Hold op- damage to the engine. wheels or with an excessively low air
eration indicator light S03AE95
pressure in any of the tires.
This indicator light illuminates while the WARNING
vehicle is stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold & Door open warning light S03AE12
function. For details, refer to “Auto Vehicle The warning light illuminates if any door or If the AWD warning light flashes,
Hold function” FP334. the rear gate is not fully closed. This promptly park in a safe location then
function is effective even if the ignition check whether all four tires are the
& Depress brake indicator switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” same diameter and whether any of
light (if equipped) S03AEA10 position, or the key is removed from the the tires has a puncture or has lost
ignition switch. air pressure for some other reason.
This light illuminates if the brake pedal is Continuing to drive with the AWD
not depressed in the following conditions. For some models, only the open doors are warning light flashing can lead to
. The Auto Vehicle Hold switch is indicated by the warning lights. powertrain damage.
pressed to deactivate the Auto Vehicle
Always make sure this light is not illumi-
– CONTINUED –

(178,1)
NOTE system components, such as the con- & Vehicle Dynamics Con-
If the temporary spare tire is used, the trol computer and drive motor, from trol warning light/Vehi-
AWD warning light may flash. Use of the overheating.
cle Dynamics Control
temporary spare tire should therefore . The steering wheel is operated fre-
be restricted to the minimum time quently and turned sharply while the
operation indicator
necessary. Replace the temporary vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low light S03AE14
spare tire with a conventional tire as speeds, such as while frequently turn-
soon as possible. ing the steering wheel during parallel ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
parking. light
& Power steering warning . The steering wheel remains in the S03AE1401
fully turned position for a long period of CAUTION

light S03AE53
time.
While the engine is running, this warning The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
light illuminates when a malfunction has At this time, there will be more resis- tem provides its ABS control
been detected in the electric power steer- tance when steering. However this is through the electrical circuit of the
ing system. not a malfunction. Normal steering ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is
force will be restored after the steering inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and Control system becomes unable to
the power steering control system has provide ABS control. As a result, the
When the power steering warning an opportunity to cool down. However, Vehicle Dynamics Control system
light is illuminated, there may be if the power steering is operated in a also becomes inoperative, causing
more resistance when the steering non-standard way which causes power the warning light to illuminate.
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to assist limitation to occur too frequently, Although both the Vehicle Dynamics
the nearest SUBARU dealer and that may result in a malfunction of the Control system and ABS are inop-
have the vehicle inspected immedi- power steering control system. erative in this case, the ordinary
ately. functions of the brake system are
still available. You will be safe while
NOTE driving with this condition, but drive
carefully and have your vehicle
If the steering wheel is operated in the checked at a SUBARU dealer as
following ways, the power steering soon as possible.
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the

(179,1)
NOTE NOTE ! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle If the warning light behavior is as indicator light
S03AE1402
Dynamics Control system itself mal- described in the following examples, The indicator light flashes during activation
functions, the warning light only illumi- the Vehicle Dynamics Control system of the skid suppression function and during
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock may be considered normal. activation of the traction control function.
Brake System) remains fully opera- . The warning light illuminates when 3
tional. the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” NOTE

. The warning light illuminates when position and turns off approximately 2 . The light may remain illuminated for
the electronic control system of the seconds after the engine has started. a short period of time after the engine
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system . The warning light illuminates right has been started, especially in cold
malfunctions. after the engine is started but turns off weather. This does not indicate the
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn- immediately, remaining off. existence of a problem. The light
ing light, ABS warning light, and brake . The warning light illuminates after should turn off as soon as the engine
system warning light illuminate simul- the engine has started and turns off has warmed up.
taneously if the EBD system malfunc- while the vehicle is subsequently being . The indicator light illuminates when
tions. For further details of the EBD driven. the engine has developed a problem
system malfunction warning, refer to . The warning light illuminates during and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
“Electronic Brake Force Distribution driving, but it turns off immediately and malfunction indicator light is on.
(EBD) system warning” FP173. remains off. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is . The warning light illuminates when probably malfunctioning under the follow-
probably inoperative under any of the the engine has stalled and continues to ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
following conditions. Have your vehicle illuminate after the engine has been at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- restarted. However, it will turn off once
the vehicle starts moving. . The light does not turn off even after the
ately. lapse of several minutes (the engine has
. The warning light does not illuminate warmed up) after the engine has started.
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
– CONTINUED –

(180,1)
& Vehicle Dynamics Con- & Warning chimes and WARNING

trol OFF indicator light S03AE15 warning indicator of the
keyless access with Never drive the vehicle if the indica-
The light illuminates when the Vehicle tor on the push-button ignition
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed push-button start sys- switch is flashing in green when
or turned to deactivate the Vehicle Dy- tem (if equipped) S03AE55 starting the engine. This indicates
namics Control system. the status that the steering wheel is
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is not released and could result in an
probably malfunctioning under any of the accident involving serious injury or
following conditions. Have your vehicle death.
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
CAUTION
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” . When starting the engine again
position. after the operation indicator on
. The light does not turn off even once the push-button ignition switch
several seconds have elapsed after the flashes in green, if the operation
ignition switch has been turned to the “ON” indicator is still flashing in green,
position. there could be a steering lock
Access key warning indicator
malfunction. Contact your
The keyless access with push-button start SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
system sounds a warning chime and sible.
flashes the access key warning indicator
on the combination meter in order to . When the operation indicator on
minimize improper operations and help the push-button ignition switch
protect your vehicle from theft. flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator flashes, take the
appropriate action.

(181,1)
NOTE
. Even when the access key fob is
within the operating ranges inside the
vehicle, the access key warning for
engine start may be provided depend-
ing on the status of the access key fob 3
and the environmental conditions.

. When the access key fob is taken out
of the vehicle through an open window,
the access key fob takeout warning or
passenger access key fob takeout
warning will not be provided.
! List of warnings
S03AE5504
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warn-
ing indicator does not appear, take
the appropriate action.
– CONTINUED –

(182,1)
Inside warning Outside warning Operation indicator

chime chime on push-button igni- Status Action
tion switch
The driver’s door was opened while the Switch the push-button ignition switch to
push-button ignition switch is “ACC” “OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
(when the select lever is in the “P” *When exiting the vehicle, be sure to
Ding, ding ... position). switch the push-button ignition switch to
(intermittent) — — “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch was
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door Close the driver’s door.
is open.
Lockout warning: Take out the access key fob from the
An attempt was made to lock all doors vehicle, and lock the doors.
Ding Short beep — using the power door locking switch or *The doors cannot be locked while the
(2 seconds) access key fob while the access key fob is access key fob is inside the vehicle.
left inside the vehicle. For details, refer to *A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors
133 will be unlocked.
Access key fob lock-in warning: Take out the access key fob from the
Short beep The door lock sensor was touched while vehicle, and lock the doors.
— (2 seconds) — the push-button ignition switch is “OFF” *If the access key fob is inside the vehicle,
and the access key fob is inside the the doors cannot be locked.
vehicle.
Door ajar warning:
Beep, beep, beep, The door lock sensor is touched while the Close the doors securely and lock them.
— beep, beep — ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and *If one of the doors including the rear gate
(5 times) one of the doors including the rear gate is is opened, the doors cannot be locked.
opened.
Power warning: Return the access key fob inside the
The door lock sensor was touched while vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
Ding Long beep — carrying the access key fob, the push- switch to “OFF”.
(60 seconds max.) button ignition switch is in a position other *If the push-button ignition switch is not
than “OFF” (when the select lever is in the switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
“P” position). locked.
Ding, ding ... Access key warning: Carry the access key fob, and drive the
(7 seconds) — — The vehicle was driven while the access vehicle.
key fob is not inside the vehicle.

(183,1)

tion switch
Access key warning for engine start:
Ding — — The push-button ignition switch was Carry the access key fob, and press the
pressed while the access key fob is not push-button ignition switch.
inside the vehicle. 3

Access key takeout warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the
Ding Beep, beep, beep — access key fob and closed the driver’s Switch the push-button ignition switch to
(3 times) door while the push-button ignition switch “OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
is in a position other than “OFF” (when the
select lever is in the “P” position).
Passenger access key takeout warn-
ing:
Beep, beep, beep A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with Return the access key fob to inside the
Ding (3 times) — the access key fob and closed a door vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
other than the driver’s door while the switch to “OFF”.
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF”.
Access key takeout without P position
warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
Long beep Long beep — access key fob and closed the driver’s switch the push-button ignition switch to
(continuous) (continuous) door while the push-button ignition switch “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
is in a position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in a position other than the
“P” position.
Select lever position warning: Start the engine, shift the select lever to
Long beep The engine is turned off by pressing the the “P” position, switch the push-button
(continuous) — — push-button ignition switch and the select ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the
lever is in a position other than the “P” vehicle.
position.
– CONTINUED –

(184,1)

tion switch
Select lever position warning:
Long beep The driver’s door was opened while the Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
(continuous) — — push-button ignition switch is in a position switch the push-button ignition switch to
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
a position other than the “P” position.
Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.
Flashes in green Steering lock warning: While turning the steering wheel right and
Ding — (15 seconds max.) The engine start procedure was per- left lightly, depress the brake pedal and
formed, but the steering is still locked. press the push-button ignition switch.
Flashes in orange System malfunction warning: Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately

Ding — (15 seconds max.) A malfunction was detected in the power and have the vehicle inspected.
system or steering lock.

(185,1)
& Security indicator light S03AE16

For models without “keyless access “ACC” position and the driver’s
with push-button start system”: door has not been opened or
This indicator light shows the status of the . Immediately after the key is pulled out. closed.
alarm system. It also indicates operation of
the immobilizer system. . Approximately 60 seconds after the Models without “keyless access
ignition switch is turned from the “ON” with push-button start system”:
! Alarm system position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. 3
S03AE1601 – While the engine is running.
It blinks to show the driver the operational

If the indicator light does not blink in the – When the ignition switch is in the
status of the alarm system. For detailed above conditions, it may indicate that “ON” position.
information, refer to “Alarm system” immobilizer system may be malfunction- – For approximately 60 seconds
FP134. ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer after the ignition switch is turned
! Immobilizer system immediately. from the “ON” position to the “ACC”
S03AE1602
The security indicator light starts blinking or “LOCK” position.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
in the following conditions. example, an unauthorized duplicate) is . Even if a malfunction occurs, such
For models with “keyless access with used to start the engine, the security as the security indicator light flashes
push-button start system”: indicator light illuminates. For details about irregularly, it will not affect the func-
. Immediately after the push-button igni- the immobilizer system, refer to “Immobi- tionality of the immobilizer system.
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position. lizer” FP125.
. Immediately after the driver’s door is NOTE
opened or closed when all of the following . The security indicator light remains
conditions are met. off in the following conditions. It means
– The push-button ignition switch is in that the matching of the ID code is
the “ON” or “ACC” position. completed and the immobilizer system
– The engine is not running. is deactivated, and it does not indicate
a malfunction.
In the event that an unauthorized key is
used (for example, the key is unregistered Models with “keyless access with
or the ID code does not match), the power push-button start system”:
is not switched to “ON” and the security – While the engine is running.
indicator light continues blinking. – The push-button ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” or
– CONTINUED –

(186,1)
& SI-DRIVE indicator light & Select lever/gear position in-

S03AE52
dicator
S03AE43
SI-DRIVE indicator light (type B)

1) Sport (S) mode (if equipped)
SI-DRIVE indicator light (type A)
2) Intelligent (I) mode
1) Sport (S) mode Type A
3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode (if equipped)
2) Intelligent (I) mode 1) Upshift indicator
This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE 2) Downshift indicator
mode. 3) Select lever/gear position indicator
For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to “SI-
DRIVE” FP317.

(187,1)
& Turn signal indicator & Cruise control indicator

lights S03AE20 light (if equipped) S03AE22
These lights show the operation of the turn This light illuminates when the cruise
signal or lane change signal. control main button is pressed to activate
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink the cruise control function. For details, 3
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned refer to “To set cruise control” FP346.

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. If this light blinks, do not use the cruise
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” FP476. control. In addition, if it blinks frequently,
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
& High beam indicator inspection.
light S03AE21
CAUTION
Type B This light shows that the headlights are in
1) Upshift indicator the high beam mode. If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
2) Downshift indicator This indicator light also illuminates when malfunction indicator light illumi-
3) Select lever/gear position indicator the headlight flasher is operated. nates, the cruise control indicator
light flashes at the same time. At this
This indicator shows the position of the
select lever.
& High beam assist indi- time, avoid driving at high speed and
cator light (if equipped) S03AE83
have your vehicle inspected at a
For models with manual mode, when the SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
manual mode is selected, the gear position This light illuminates when the high beam ble.
indicator (which shows the current gear assist function is activated. For details
selection) and the upshift/downshift indi- about the high beam assist function, refer
cator light up. Refer to “Continuously to “High beam assist function” FP231.
variable transmission” FP309.
For models with SI-DRIVE, the upshift/
downshift indicators are switched off while
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected.
– CONTINUED –

(188,1)
& Cruise control set indi- & Steering Responsive – The level of the ambient light is as
cator light (if equipped) Headlight warning light/ dark as the auto on/off headlights turns
S03AE23
on
This light illuminates when vehicle speed Steering Responsive
. When the light switch is turned to the
has been set to use the cruise control Headlight OFF indicator “ ” or “ ” position.
function. Refer to “To set cruise control” light (if equipped) S03AE89 . When the light control switch is in the
FP346. “AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
This light illuminates when the Steering
Responsive Headlight OFF switch is nate automatically.
& Automatic headlight pressed to deactivate the Steering Re-
beam leveler warning sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flashes & Auto Start Stop warning
light (if equipped) S03AE33 when a malfunction occurs in the Steering light/Auto Start Stop
This light illuminates when the automatic Responsive Headlight. Refer to “Steering OFF indicator light (yel-
headlight beam leveler does not operate Responsive Headlight (SRH)” FP235. low) S03AE65
normally.
If this light illuminates during driving, have
& Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped) ! Auto Start Stop warning light (yel-
your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU S03AE25
low)
dealer. This indicator light illuminates while the S03AE6501
front fog lights are illuminated. CAUTION

& LED headlight warning
light (if equipped) S03AE76 & Headlight indicator . If the Auto Start Stop warning
This light illuminates if the LED headlights light S03AE24
light is flashing in yellow, there
may be a malfunction in the Auto
malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected This indicator light illuminates under the Start Stop system. We recom-
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. following conditions. mend that you have your vehicle
. When the light control switch is in the inspected at a SUBARU author-
“ ” position and the following conditions ized dealer as soon as possible.
are fulfilled.
. If the Auto Start Stop warning
– The engine is running. light is illuminated in yellow at
– The parking brake is fully released. any time other than in the follow-
– The select lever is in a position other ing cases, and will not turn off
than “P” position. even if the Auto Start Stop OFF

(189,1)
switch is pushed and held, we & Auto Start Stop No

recommend that you have your Activity Detected indi-
vehicle inspected at a SUBARU cator light S03AEA3
dealer as soon as possible.
When a vehicle is stopped, the indicator
The Auto Start Stop warning light will light illuminates when the operating con- 3
illuminate in yellow if you open the engine dition of idling stop are not meet. The light

hood when the engine has been tempora- will turn off when the vehicle starts driving.
rily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system. Refer to “Non-operational conditions”
In this case, to ensure safety, the engine FP340.
will not be automatically restarted, even if
you release the brake pedal. Use normal & X-MODE indicator light (if
operation to restart the engine. equipped)
S03AE68 X-MODE indicator (type B)
! Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light 1) X-MODE indicator or D.SNOW/MUD
(yellow) mode indicator
S03AE6502
This light will illuminate in yellow when the 2) SNOW/DIRT mode indicator
Auto Start Stop OFF switch is pressed to This indicator appears while the X-MODE
prevent the Auto Start Stop system from is activated. It will disappear when the X-
operating. It will turn off when the Auto MODE is deactivated. Refer to “To acti-
Start Stop OFF switch is pressed once vate/deactivate the X-MODE” FP327.
more to enable operation of the Auto Start
Stop system. & Hill descent control in-
& Auto Start Stop indica- dicator light (if
tor light (green) equipped) S03AE69
S03AE66
X-MODE indicator (type A) This indicator appears while the hill des-
This indicator light illuminates when the cent control function is in standby. It will
engine has been temporarily stopped by flash while the hill descent control function
the Auto Start Stop system. It will turn off is operating. It will disappear when the hill
when the engine is restarted. descent control function is not available.
Refer to “Hill descent control function”
FP329.
– CONTINUED –

(190,1)
& BSD/RCTA warning & RAB OFF indicator light & Driver Monitoring Sys-
light (if equipped) S03AE80 (if equipped) S03AE92 tem OFF indicator light
This warning indicator appears when the This indicator illuminates when the Re- (if equipped) S03AEA5
BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case verse Automatic Braking System is turned This indicator illuminates when the Driver
the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic Monitoring System OFF switch is pressed
shown on the combination meter display Braking System is suspended temporarily. to deactivate the Driver Monitoring Sys-
(color LCD). When this indicator appears, Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking tem. Refer to the “Driver Monitoring
have your vehicle inspected by your System” FP360. System OFF indicator light” FP377.
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
& Driver Monitoring Sys- & Driver Monitoring Sys-
& BSD/RCTA OFF indica- tem operation indicator tem temporary stop in-
tor light (if equipped) S03AE86 light (green)/Driver dicator light (if
The indicator appears when the BSD/ Monitoring System equipped) S03AEA6
RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate warning light (yellow) (if This indicator illuminates when the Driver
the BSD/RCTA or when the BSD/RCTA is equipped) S03AEA4 Monitoring System is temporarily stopped.
suspended temporarily. In this case the
Refer to “Driver Monitoring System tem-
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on
! Driver Monitoring System operation porary stop indicator light” FP377.
the combination meter display (color
LCD). For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA” indicator light (green)
S03AEA401 NOTE
FP351. This indicator illuminates when the Driver
Monitoring System is activated. Refer to The Driver Monitoring System stops
temporarily in the following circum-
& RAB warning light (if “Driver Monitoring System operation in-
stances.
equipped) dicator light (green)” FP377.
S03AE91
. The temperature of the Driver Mon-
This indicator illuminates if the Reverse ! Driver Monitoring System warning itoring System unit is high.
Automatic Braking System malfunctions. light (yellow)
S03AEA402
Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking This warning illuminates if the Driver
System” FP360. Monitoring System malfunctions. Have
your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.

(191,1)
Combination meter display (color LCD) 189
& Icy road surface warn- 3-7. Combination meter dis-

ing light (if equipped) S03AE82 play (color LCD) (if equipped)
S03BN
When the outside temperature is 378F
(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning WARNING
will illuminate to inform the driver that the 3
road surface may be frozen.
Always pay adequate attention to

NOTE safe driving when operating the
. The outside temperature indicator combination meter display (color
shows the temperature in the area LCD) while the vehicle is in motion.
around the sensor. Therefore, the tem- When operation of the combination
perature indication may differ from the meter display (color LCD) interferes
actual outside air temperature. with your ability to concentrate on
. The icy road surface warning screen driving, stop the vehicle before
should be treated only as a guide. Be performing operations on the
sure to check the condition of the road screen. Also, do not concentrate on
surface before driving. the display while driving. Doing so
. Once the icy road surface warning may cause you to look away from the
screen appears, it will not disappear road and could result in an accident.
unless the outside temperature has
Various information will be shown on the
increased to 418F (58C) or higher.
combination meter display (color LCD).
Also, a warning message will appear on
the display if a malfunction is detected. In
addition, several settings for the displayed
content can be performed. Combination meter display (color LCD)
1) ECO gauge (refer to “ECO gauge”
FP162.)
2) Warning screen (refer to “Warning
screen” FP191.)/Basic screen (refer to
“Basic screens” FP193.)
3) EyeSight screen
4) Cruise control information display
– CONTINUED –

(192,1)
190 Combination meter display (color LCD)
5) Telltale screen (refer to “Telltale screen”

FP191.) & Basic operation original screen after a few seconds. While
6) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer
S03BN01 the “ ” information reminder is shown on
to “Select lever/gear position indicator” the display, it may be possible to display
FP184.) the warning screen again. To recall the
7) X-MODE indicator (if equipped) (refer to message marked with “ ” on the display,
“X-MODE indicator light” FP187.) SI- pull the “ /SET” switch on the steering
DRIVE indicator (refer to “SI-DRIVE
indicator light” FP184.) wheel toward you.
8) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” FP161.)/
double trip meter (refer to “Double trip NOTE
meter” FP161.) When the multi-function display (color
9) Fuel gauge (refer to “Fuel gauge” LCD) is set to the setting screen, the
FP162.) combination meter display (color LCD)
A: Deactivating the Eyesight system or cannot be controlled pressing on the
models without EyeSight system
“ ”, “ ” and “ /SET” on the control
B: Activating the Eyesight system
Control switch switch.
1) (Up)
2) /SET (enter) & Welcome screen (opening
3) (Down) animation) and Good-bye
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control (ending animation) screen
S03BN08
switch, the screens and selection items When the driver’s door is opened and
can be switched. When the “ /SET” closed after unlocking the door, the wel-
switch is pulled toward you, the item can come screen (opening animation) will
be selected and set. appear on the combination meter display
If there are some useful messages, such (color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds.
as vehicle information, warning informa- When the ignition switch is turned to the
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination
screen, and appear on the display accom- meter display (color LCD) gradually turns
panied by a beep. If such a screen is off by showing Good-bye screen (ending
displayed, take proper action according to animation).
the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the

(193,1)
NOTE & Warning screen & Telltale screen

S03BN05 S03BN09
. The welcome screen and the good-
bye screen may differ in the actual
words and appearance.
. The basic screen will be shown
when the ignition switch is turned to 3
the “ON” position while the welcome

screen is displayed.
. Once the welcome screen appears, it
takes a certain period of time to display
it again.
. If the ignition switch is operated
after unlocking the driver’s door, the
welcome screen will not appear even
when the driver’s door is opened and Example of warning 1) Telltale screen
closed.
If there is a warning message or a When the corresponding situation occurs,
. The welcome screen will disappear
maintenance notification, it will appear on the following telltales will be displayed on
when you lock the driver’s door by
this screen. Take the appropriate actions the telltale screen.
using the remote keyless entry system
based on the messages indicated.
(all models) or the keyless access
function (if equipped) while the wel-
NOTE
come screen is displayed. When there is warning information to
. The welcome screen including the display, it will be displayed in five
multi-function display (color LCD) and warning indicators, starting on the left
the audio/navigation unit can be set to in ascending order of severity. If there
on or off. are six or more warning informations
. The welcome screen can be set to on displayed, pull the “ /SET” switch and
or off. For details, refer to “Welcome check the item.
Screen” FP195.
. The Good-bye screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “Good-bye
Screen” FP195.
– CONTINUED –

(194,1)
Mark Name Page Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
Door open indicator Auto Start Stop warning Driver Monitoring Sys-
light 175 light/Auto Start Stop tem temporary stop in-
OFF indicator light (yel- 186 dicator light (if 188
low) equipped)
Engine hood open 175
warning light Automatic headlight Icy road surface warn-
beam leveler system 189
ing light
malfunction warning 186
LED headlight warning 186 light (models with LED
light (if equipped) headlights)
High beam assist indi- Windshield washer fluid 170

cator light (if equipped) 185 warning light
Steering Responsive Auto Start Stop indica-

Headlight warning light 186 tor light (green) 187
(if equipped)
Auto Start Stop No Ac-
Engine low oil level 170 tivity Detected indicator 187
warning light light
Hill descent control in-
RAB warning light (if 188 dicator light (if 187
equipped) equipped)
Driver Monitoring Sys-
RAB OFF indicator light 188 tem operation indicator
(if equipped) light (green) (if 188
equipped)
BSD/RCTA warning 188 Driver Monitoring Sys-
light (if equipped) tem warning light (yel- 188
low) (if equipped)
BSD/RCTA OFF indi- 188
cator light (if equipped) Driver Monitoring Sys-
tem OFF indicator light 188
(if equipped)
X-MODE indicator light 187
(if equipped)

(195,1)
& Basic screens Current fuel consumption screen: Driving information screen:
S03BN06
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the screen
that is always displayed.
Average fuel consumption screen:
3

: Current fuel consumption : Journey time
: Driving range on remaining fuel : Journey distance
This screen displays the journey time (the
NOTE time that has elapsed since the ignition
: Average fuel consumption The driving range on the remaining fuel switch was turned to the “ON” position)
: Driving range on remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may and journey distance (the distance that
differ from the actual driving range on has been driven since the ignition switch
This screen displays the average rate of the remaining fuel, so you must im- was turned to the “ON” position).
fuel consumption since the trip meter was mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
last reset. warning light illuminates.
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
– CONTINUED –

(196,1)
Digital speed screen: Auto Start Stop screen: NOTE

. When the trip meter is reset, the
corresponding accumulated time and
the amount of fuel saving are also reset.
. The time spent with the engine
stopped by means of the Auto Start
Stop system is also added to the
journey time.
TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):
1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped) : The total amount of time that the engine
2) Vehicle speed was stopped by means of the Auto Start
Stop system
This screen displays the current vehicle : The total amount of fuel saved due to the
speed. engine being stopped by the Auto Start
Stop system
The indicated values are calculated from
the most recent reset of the currently
displayed trip meter to the current time.
The indication ranges are as follows.
. Total amount of time: from 00’00” to This screen displays each tire pressure.
9999h59’59” When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire
. Total amount of fuel saved: from 0 ml to and the tire pressure will be displayed on
9999.999 L the screen in yellow.
NOTE
The tire pressure values are displayed
several minutes after driving.

(197,1)

Menu screen entering screen: play, refer to “Function settings” FP26. ! Units
S03BN070108
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the Changes the units displayed in the combi-
steering wheel, you can select the menu. nation meter display (color LCD), the type
Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the A multi-function display (black and white)
selected menu. and the type B multi-function display (color
LCD). 3
NOTE

If you enter the “Go Back” menu, the ! Tire Pressure Units (U.S.-spec.
system will return to the previous models)
S03BN070109
screen. Changes the units displayed in the Tire
Pressure Monitoring system.
! Screen Settings
S03BN0701
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu, ! Languages
S03BN070103
select one of the following menus. Changes the language displayed in the
While this screen is selected, pull and hold combination meter display (color LCD)
the “ /SET” switch to enter the menu ! Welcome Screen and the multi-function display (color LCD).
S03BN070101
screen. The welcome screen can be activated or ! Warning Volume
deactivated. S03BN0713
Sets the EyeSight warning volume, the
& Menu screens ! Good-bye Screen BSD/RCTA warning volume and the RAB
S03BN07
S03BN070106
Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enter The good-bye screen can be activated or warning volume.
the menu screens when all of the following deactivated.
conditions are satisfied. ! EyeSight (models with EyeSight
! Gauge Initial Movement system)
. The menu screen entering screen is S03BN070102
S03BN0702
selected. The movement of the meter needles and NOTE
. The “ ” information reminder is off. gauge needles that occurs when the For details about how to use the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s
NOTE position can be activated or deactivated. Manual supplement for the EyeSight
. While driving, the setting items system.
available on the combination meter
display (color LCD) are limited.
. For function settings and adjust-
ments on the combination meter dis-
– CONTINUED –

(198,1)
! RAB (if equipped) . Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped) . Auto Door Unlock:
S03BN0712
Select only the rear gate to unlock or all Set the conditions of the following items to
! Sonar Audible Alarm doors to unlock simultaneously when unlock the door automatically.
S03BN071204
When the Reverse Automatic Braking accessing from the cargo area. – Shift Into or Out of PARK: When the
system is in operation, the warning sound select lever is shifted into the “P”
to notify that an obstacle is detected in the ! Defogger position.
S03BN070802
rear can be activated or deactivated. Sets and customizes the operation of the – Ignition OFF: When the ignition
defogger. switch is turned to OFF.
NOTE
– Driver Door Open: When the dri-
For models with Reverse Automatic ! Interior Light ver’s door is open.
S03BN070803
Braking system, refer to “Reverse Sets and customizes the interior light off – Off: When the function is set to OFF.
Automatic Braking System” FP360. delay timer.
! Vehicle Setting ! Auto Door Lock and Unlock ! Auto Light Sensor
S03BN070804
S03BN0708 S03BN070808
After entering the “Vehicle Setting” menu, Setting conditions for Auto Door Lock and Sets and customizes the sensitivity of the
select one of the following menus. Unlock auto light sensor.
! Keyless Entry System . Auto Door Lock: ! Welcome Lighting
S03BN070806
S03BN070801
Sets the settings used when the keyless Set the condition of the following items to Sets the leaving time and approaching
access function was operated. lock the door automatically. time.
– Vehicle Speed: When the vehicle . Approaching time set
. Audible Signal (if equipped)
speed reaches more than 12 mph (20 Sets the illumination time of the headlights
Sets the electronic chirp that sounds when km/h).
the door is locked or unlocked. that illuminate when you approach the
– Shift Into or Out of PARK: When the vehicle.
. Hazard Warning Flasher select lever is shifted into a position
Sets the operation of the hazard warning . Leaving time set
other than the “P” position.
flasher that blinks when the door is locked Sets the time until the headlights turn off
– Off: When the function is set to OFF.
or unlocked. when you have moved away from the
. Driver Door Unlock (if equipped) vehicle.
Select only the driver’s door to unlock or all
doors to unlock simultaneously when the
driver’s door is unlocked.

(199,1)
Multi-function display (black and white) 197
! One-touch lane changer 3-8. Multi-function display NOTE

S03BN070807
Sets the one-touch lane changer on/off. (black and white) The indicated values vary in accor-
S03BO
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
! Door mirror setting (if equipped) running conditions. Also, the indicated
S03BN070810 NOTE
The reverse tilt-down feature can be values may differ slightly from the
activated or deactivated. For models with multi-function display actual values and should thus be 3
! Default Settings (color LCD), refer to “Multi-function treated only as a guide.

S03BN0704 display (color LCD)” FP203.
Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
restore customized settings to the factory & Driving information display
S03BO09
default settings. Select “No” to return to the NOTE
previous screen without restoring to the You can set the units for both the multi-
factory default settings. function display (black and white) and
the combination meter at the same
time. For details about setting the
language and units, refer to “Type A
combination meter” FP163 or “Menu
screens” FP195.
1) Outside temperature indicator

2) X-MODE indicator (if equipped)
3) Driving information display
4) Clock
With the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, the clock appears on the display.
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion, the outside temperature indicator,
driving information display and clock all
appear on the display.
– CONTINUED –

(200,1)
198 Multi-function display (black and white)
! How to change the information dis- ! Driving range on remaining fuel

S03BO0903
play
S03BO0910
1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH

1) INFO button 2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h
Pressing the INFO button on the steering The driving range indicates the distance
wheel switches changes the display to the *1: Models without combination meter that can be driven taking into account the
following sequence. display (color LCD) amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
the average rate of fuel consumption.

(201,1)
! Average fuel consumption

S03BO0902

1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH 1) TRIP RESET switch
2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h 1) Displays the driving range per gallon of Press the TRIP RESET switch to switch
If the driving range is shown as “ ”, there fuel between the displays for the average fuel
is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the tank. 2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel
consumption that corresponds to the A trip
3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100
km meter mileage and the average fuel con-
NOTE sumption that corresponds to the B trip
The driving range on the remaining fuel This display shows the average rate of fuel meter mileage.
is only a guide. The indicated value may consumption since the trip meter was last When the trip meter displays is reset, the
differ from the actual driving range on reset. corresponding average fuel consumption
the remaining fuel, so you must im- value is also reset.
warning light illuminates. NOTE
When the trip meter display is reset, the
average fuel consumption correspond-
ing to that trip meter display is not
shown until the vehicle has subse-
quently covered a distance of 1 mile
(or 1 km).
– CONTINUED –

(202,1)
! Current fuel consumption ! Average vehicle speed quently covered a distance of 1 mile
S03BO0901 S03BO0905
(or 1 km).
! Auto Start Stop time
S03BO0907
1) Displays the driving range per gallon of 1) When units in miles is selected
fuel 2) When units in km is selected
2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel
3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100 This display shows the average vehicle 1) Total time in conjunction with the trip
km speed since the trip meter was last reset. meter
This indication shows the rate of fuel Pressing the TRIP RESET switch toggles 2) Total time in conjunction with the ignition
switch
consumption at the present moment. the display between the average vehicle
speed corresponding to the A trip meter This display shows the total time that the
display and the average vehicle speed engine was stopped by the Auto Start Stop
corresponding to the B trip meter display. system in the following ways.
When either of the trip meter displays is
Total time in conjunction with the trip
reset, the corresponding average vehicle
meter: Displays the total time that the
speed value is also reset.
engine was stopped by the Auto Start Stop
NOTE system, from the last time the currently
When either trip meter display is reset, displayed trip meter was reset until the
the average vehicle speed correspond- current time. By pressing the TRIP RESET
ing to that trip meter display is not switch, you can toggle the display between
shown until the vehicle has subse- the time the engine was stopped for trip A

(203,1)
and the time the engine was stopped for ! Turn off display of driving informa-
trip B. tion display
S03BO0906
NOTE Select the blank space in the menu to exit
the driving information display selection.
When the trip meter mileage is reset,
the total time in conjunction with the NOTE 3
trip meter is not shown until the vehicle . The average fuel consumption and

has subsequently covered a distance average vehicle speed are calculated
of 1 mile (or 1 km). even while the driving information dis-
play is not displayed.
Total time in conjunction with the igni-
. Even if you turn off the driving
tion switch: Displays the total time that
information display, the display will
the engine was stopped by the Auto Start
automatically turn on when the battery
Stop system, from the time when the 1. Press and hold the “+” button located voltage is disconnected and then re-
ignition switch was turned to the “ON” on the side of the information display. The connected for battery replacement or
position to the current time. stopped time will then flash. fuse replacement.
! How to switch the display 2. Within 5 seconds after the stopped
S03BO090701
Perform the following operation to toggle time starts flashing, press and hold the “−”
the display between the total time in button located on the side of the informa-
conjunction with the trip meter and the tion display. The display will then change
total time in conjunction with the ignition and after flashing for 2 seconds, the
switch. stopped time selected will be displayed.
3. Each time the “−” button is pressed and
held during the 3 seconds that the display
is flashing, the display will change and
flash for 2 seconds. If the “−” button is not
pressed and held during the 3-second
period that the display is flashing, the
stopped time selected will be displayed.
– CONTINUED –

(204,1)
& Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi- condition of the road surface before
tor cation driving.
S03BO01 S03BO0101
& X-MODE indicator (if

equipped) S03BO12
This indicator will be shown while the X-

MODE is activated. It will turn off when the
X-MODE is deactivated.
& Clock
S03BO10
For details about clock setting, refer to
“Clock” FP225.
1) U.S.-spec. models 1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Except U.S.-spec. models 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
When the outside temperature drops to a
NOTE certain temperature or lower, the tempera-
. The outside temperature indicator ture indication flashes for 5 seconds to
shows the temperature around the show that the road surface may be frozen.
sensor. Therefore, the temperature in- If the display is already indicating that the
dication may differ from the actual outside temperature is low when the
outside air temperature. ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
. The temperature unit cannot be position, the indication does not flash.
changed.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the

(205,1)
Multi-function display (color LCD) 203
3-9. Multi-function display & Features & Welcome screen

S03BP25 S03BP07
(color LCD) The multi-function display (color LCD) has When the driver’s door is opened and
S03BP the following functions. closed, the welcome screen will appear for
NOTE Description Page a short time.
For models with multi-function display Displays useful messages, such 204 NOTE 3
(black and white), refer to “Multi-func- as notification, etc.
. The welcome screen will disappear

tion display (black and white)” FP197. Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel 205 when the ignition switch is turned to the
consumption screen, etc.)
“ON” position while the welcome
WARNING Sets and adjusts maintenance 222 screen is displayed.
notification . The welcome screen can be set to on
Always pay adequate attention to or off. For details, refer to “Screen
safe driving when operating the Also, the multi-function display (color LCD)
can also be used to set and initialize the Settings” FP195.
multi-function display (color LCD) . For a certain period of time after the
while the vehicle is in motion. When multi-function display (color LCD) itself.
welcome screen has once appeared, it
operation of the multi-function dis- NOTE may not appear again even when the
play (color LCD) is disturbing your driver’s door is opened and closed
awareness and ability to concen- . When the vehicle is in motion,
certain functions and selections may again. This does not indicate a mal-
trate on driving, stop the vehicle in function.
a safe place before performing op- not be available.
erations on the screen. Also, do not . You can set the language and units
concentrate on the display while for both the multi-function display
driving. Doing so may cause you to (color LCD) and the combination meter
look away from the road and could at the same time. For details about
result in an accident. setting the language and units, refer to
“Menu screens” FP195.
. The images displayed in this Own-
er’s Manual are sample images. The
actual image may vary depending on
the market and vehicle specifications.
– CONTINUED –

(206,1)
204 Multi-function display (color LCD)
& Self-check screen of the icon corresponding to the checked approximately 311 miles (500 km) or
S03BP09 item will change. more.
NOTE If there is a notification, the message will
When the setting is “On”, the self check be displayed. Take the appropriate actions
screen appears. For details about this & Interruption screen
based on the message indicated. S03BP19
setting, refer to “On/Off setting”
After the self-check is completed, today’s
FP223.
date, the stored birthday or the stored
When the ignition switch is turned to the anniversary is displayed.
“ON” position, the vehicle self-check will
be performed. The screens corresponding NOTE
to the following items will appear one after . After performing the maintenance,
another for several seconds each. change the setting of the correspond-
ing maintenance item. For details, refer
to “Maintenance settings” FP222.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed under either of the
following conditions.
– The period of time remaining until Example
the registered notification date is 15
days or less. Useful messages, such as reminder in-
– The total driving distance remain- formation, weather information (if
ing until the registered notification equipped) and traffic information (if
distance is approximately 311 miles equipped) may interrupt the current screen
(500 km) or less. and appear on the display accompanied
by a beep. Take proper action according to
. The maintenance notification screen
1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine the message.
will be displayed until either of the
oil replacement. following conditions is satisfied. The interruption screen will return to the
2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter
replacement. – The period of time passed after original screen after a few seconds. Also,
3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation. the registered notification date is 15 you can press the INFO button to skip the
4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the days or more. interruption screen.
interval of inspection and maintenance. – The total distance driven after the
When the checks are performed, the color registered notification distance is

(207,1)
& Basic operation & Basic screens is in the “ACC” position.

S03BP06 S03BP10
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the basic screen will be
displayed.
3
! Outside temperature indicator

S03BP1016
The outside temperature is displayed on
the multi-function display (color LCD).
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-
Control switch dication may differ from the actual
1) INFO button outside air temperature.
2) . The temperature unit cannot be
3) /SET changed.
4)
Press the INFO button on the steering
wheel to switch the item displayed on the
basic screen. You can operate the items
on the setting screen by using the “ ”,
“ ” and “ /SET” switches.
1) Clock
2) Climate control*
3) Outside temperature
4) Information screen
*: This is not displayed on the multi-function
display (color LCD) when the ignition switch
– CONTINUED –

(208,1)
! Climate control screen climate control operation, refer to “Climate

S03BP1017
The climate control status is displayed on control panel” FP257.
the multi-function display (color LCD). ! Clock
S03BP1018
The clock can be displayed in either 12-
hour display or 24-hour display. For details
about the setting, refer to“Clock” FP225.
Climate control screen

1) Set temperature indicator (left-hand side)
2) FULL AUTO indicator
3) AUTO indicator
4) Airflow mode indicator
5) Set temperature indicator (right-hand
side)*1
6) Air inlet selection indicator
7) SYNC indicator*1
8) Fan speed indicator
9) Air conditioner ON indicator
*1: Models with the SYNC function only
When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the basic screen switches to the
climate control screen. For details about

(209,1)
! Information screen
S03BP1019
Press the INFO button on the steering wheel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.
Content Description Page
Electric components operating status screen*1 Displays the operating status of the electric components and equipment. 208
Prevention safety screen Displays the status of your vehicle. 208 3

2
EyeSight screen* Displays the operating status of EyeSight. 209
Favorite screen Displays up to 3 optional items. 209
3
Weather information screen* Displays weather information. 210
Traffic information*3/Navigation*4 screen Displays information linked with the navigation system. 210
Audio screen Displays audio system information. 211
Fuel consumption screen Displays fuel consumption information. 211
Clock/date screen Displays the clock. 211
Guidance screen Moves to the setting screen. 212
*1: If equipped
*2: Models with EyeSight system
*3: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
*4: Models with navigation system
– CONTINUED –

(210,1)
! Electric components operation ! Prevention safety screen

S03BP101902
screen (if equipped)
S03BP101901
X-MODE screen
1) Vehicle posture
1) Telltale screen
2) X-MODE
1) BSD/RCTA* 2) Steering angle
2) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)* 3) Vehicle posture This screen displays the driving status of
3) Lane Departure Warning* 4) Running condition the vehicle and the operation status func-
4) Pre-Collision Braking* tions. For functions that are operating, the
5) High beam assist* indicator will illuminate or flash.
6) Driver Monitoring System*
*: If equipped NOTE
This screen displays the electric compo- . The vehicle posture indication may
nents operation status of the vehicle. differ from the actual vehicle posture.
. When X-MODE has turned on, the
NOTE screen of the multi-function display is
. Indicators do not display for func- switched to the prevention safety
tions that are not equipped to the screen.
vehicle. . The vehicle posture angle varies not
. The indicators of functions that are only due to the angle of the road
not operating are displayed in grey. surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt
caused by the occupants, cargo, and

(211,1)
acceleration or deceleration. ! Favorite screen Item Details

S03BP101904
! EyeSight screen models with The engine coolant temperature is

EyeSight system displayed.
S03BP101903
3
The engine oil temperature is

displayed.
The average vehicle speed is

displayed.
Favorite screen (display example) The accelerator opening ratio is

displayed.
This screen displays up to three optional
1) Lead vehicle indicator pieces of information that can be selected
2) Your own vehicle indicator from the following items.
The vehicle posture is displayed.
3) Stop lights
4) Road line indicator
5) Lane indicator
The current rate of fuel consump-
This screen displays the status of the tion is displayed.
EyeSight system. The lead vehicle indica-
tor moves forward and backward depend-
ing on the distance with the vehicle in front. The direction of the vehicle is
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual displayed.*1
supplement for the EyeSight system.
The weather information is dis-

played.*2
– CONTINUED –

(212,1)
Item Details ! Weather information screen (if . The weather forecast for the set
equipped) destination remains displayed until a
The posted speed limit of the road S03BP101905 new destination is set or until you reach
you are currently driving on is the destination.
displayed.*1
. Depending on the reception timing
of XM, the display of weather informa-
tion may be delayed.
The calender is displayed.
! Navigation screen (models with
navigation system)
S03BP101906
Driver Monitoring System infor-
mation is displayed.*1
Nothing is displayed.
1) Weather information for the destination.*
2) Weather information for the current loca-
*1: If equipped tion.
*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio *: Only when a destination is set in the
navigation system
NOTE
Some displayed items may not be The weather information is displayed on
displayed depending on the model the screen.
and specifications. NOTE The navigation system information to the
The items shown in the favorite screen can . When all of the following conditions destination is displayed on the screen.
be changed. For details, refer to “Favorite are satisfied, weather information is
setting” FP221. displayed.
NOTE
– The vehicle is equipped with an When a destination is not set in the
audio and navigation system for navigation system, the compass orien-
SiriusXM satellite radio. tation, name, route sign and speed limit
of the road the vehicle is traveling on
– You have a current SiriusXM
remain displayed on the screen.
satellite radio subscription.

(213,1)
! Audio screen ! Fuel consumption screen warning light illuminates.

S03BP101907 S03BP101908
! Clock/date screen
S03BP101909

The screen of the currently selected audio 1) Driving range on remaining fuel
source is displayed. 2) Average fuel consumption corresponding
to the driving distance of each trip meter The time and date are displayed.
For details about how to use the audio set, 3) Current fuel consumption
refer to the separate navigation/audio You can adjust the time and date. For
4) User information (if equipped) details, refer to “Clock” FP225.
Owner’s Manual.
The fuel consumption information is dis-
played on the screen.
If the driver is recognized by the Driver
Monitoring System, average fuel con-
sumption for the driver will be displayed.
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
– CONTINUED –

(214,1)
! Guidance screen NOTE & Setting screen

S03BP101910 S03BP28
1. Press and hold the INFO button on the
guidance screen. The top menu is dis-
played.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the preferred menu from the top
menu.
3. Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the
selected menu.
4. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the preferred menu from the 2nd
menu.
5. Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the
When the INFO button on the steering selected menu.
wheel is pressed and held on this screen, When the combination meter display
the setting screen can be displayed. (color LCD) is displaying the menu
For details, refer to “Setting screen” screen entering screen, the system will
FP212. not move to the setting screen even if
the INFO button is pressed and held.

(215,1)
The menu list is as follows.

Top menu 2nd menu Description Page
Time/Date Time/Date* Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 215
Birthday Set a birthday. 215
Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 215 3

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —
Driver Moni- Repeat facial scan Perform the user recognition. 215
toring System
User Recognition Turn the user recognition settings on or off. On or Off 220
Automatically retract seat on entry Turn the automatically retract seat on entry
function on or off. On or Off 219
Register User Register the user. 216

Update User Settings Re-register the driver’s position. 219
Delete Driver Position Delete the registered driver’s position. 219
Delete User Delete the registered user. 218
Delete All Users Delete the registered all user. 218
Display/Beep Screen Off* Turn the screen on or off. Yes or No 220
Favorite Set and customize the triple meter. 221
Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 221
Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 221
Climate con- Set the operation of the automatic climate
trol Mode Setting control. Normal, Mild, ECO or Power 222
Occupant Detection Set the operation of the climate control depend- On or Off 222
ing on passenger.
– CONTINUED –

(216,1)
Top menu 2nd menu Description Page

Maintenance Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 222
Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 223
Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 223
Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 223
Turn on or off the self-check screen that is
ON/OFF activated when the ignition switch is turned to the On or Off 223
“ON” position.
Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 224
Initialize — Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 224
Go Back — Return to the setting screen. —
*: You can also set this while driving.

(217,1)
! Date and time settings without applying the setting changes.

S03BP2801
You can set the date, time and 12h or 24h
format settings. NOTE
! Current date and time setting You can store a maximum of 5 birth-
S03BP280101 days. 3
For details about clock setting, refer to
“Clock” FP225. ! Anniversary setting

S03BP280103
! Birthday setting 1. The procedure for setting an anniver-
S03BP280102
If a birthday or anniversary is approaching, sary is the same as “Birthday setting”
a message will be displayed when the FP215, except that in step 1 “Anniversary”
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” is selected.
position. This function can be set to on or
off. For details, refer to “Bypass screen 2. Select from the list the number that you NOTE
setting” FP221. want to register. You can store a maximum of 5 anniver-
1. Select “Birthday” from the 2nd menu in saries.
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” FP212. ! Driver Monitoring System settings
S03BP2810
You can set the Driver Monitoring System
settings.
! Repeat facial scan
S03BP281001
1. Select the “Repeat facial scan” from
the 2nd menu in the settings screen. Refer
to “Setting screen” FP212.
3. Enter the date and the text by using the

control switches.
4. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
Back” to return to the previous screen
– CONTINUED –

(218,1)
2. Select “Yes” to start the repeat facial When user recognition is completed, the 3. Select from the list the number that you
scan. Select “No” to return to the previous Hello screen appears and the screen then want to register.
screen. switches to the basic screen associated
3. While seated in the driver’s seat, face with the user information.
straight forward and wait for a few mo-
ments. ! Register User
S03BP281002
1. Adjust the seat position, outside mirror
angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror
angle so that you are seated in the correct
driving posture.
2. Select the “Register User” from the 2nd
menu in the settings screen. Refer to
“Setting screen” FP212.
4. Select “Set” to start the registration

facial scan. Select “Go Back” to return to
the previous screen.
5. While seated in the driver’s seat, face

(219,1)
straight forward and wait for a few mo- NOTE

ments. . A screen recommending user regis-
tration appears at the following times.
– When the driver has not com-
pleted user registration
– When there are 4 or fewer regis- 3
tered users

Operate the control switch and
select “Yes” to display the screen
in step 3. Then follow the registra-
tion procedure to complete user
registration.
. An existing user can be overwritten
6. Enter the text using the control by selecting a registered number. When
switches. a user is registered by overwriting, the
When the screen changes, the registration 7. Set the desired icons using the control individual fuel economy data is reset.
facial scan is completed. switches. . When “User Recognition” is set to
8. Select “Set” to exit the settings screen. OFF, user registration cannot be se-
NOTE lected.
. If the screen does not change, turn-
ing your face to look alternately at the
Multi Function Display and forward
from the driver’s seat will make recog-
nition easier.
. If “Unable to register” appears, re-
peat the procedure beginning from step
4.
– CONTINUED –

(220,1)
! Delete User ! Delete All User

S03BP281003 S03BP281004
1. Select “Delete User” from the 2nd 1. Select “Delete All Users” from the 2nd
menu in the settings screen. Refer to menu in the settings screen. Refer to
“Setting screen” FP212. “Setting screen” FP212.
3. Select “Yes” to delete the number.

Select “No” to return to the previous
screen.
2. Select from the list the number that you 2. Select “Yes” to delete all the users.
want to register. Select “No” to return to the previous
screen.

(221,1)
! Update User Settings ! Delete Driver Position ! Automatically retract seat on

S03BP281009 S03BP281006
1. Select “Update User Settings” from the 1. Select “Delete Driver Position” from the entry setting
S03BP281010
2nd menu in the settings screen. Refer to 2nd menu in the settings screen. Refer to 1. Select “Automatically retract seat on
“Setting screen” FP212. “Setting screen” FP212. entry” from the 2nd menu in the settings
screen. Refer to “Setting screen” FP212. 3

2. Select “Set” to re-register the driver 2. Select “Yes” to delete the driver posi-
position. Select “Go Back” to return to the tion. Select “No” to return to the previous 2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the auto
previous screen. screen. entry/exit function on or off by using the
control switches.
Back” to return to the previous screen.
– CONTINUED –

(222,1)
! User Recognition settings ! Display/Beep settings Restoring the screen

S03BP281008 S03BP2805
You can set the display settings and When the INFO button is operated after
1. Select “User Recognition” from the 2nd
volume settings. the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” or
menu in the settings screen. Refer to
“ACC” position, the screen will be restored.
“Setting screen” FP212. ! Screen OFF setting
S03BP280501
The screen will be restored with the basic
1. Select “Screen Off” from the 2nd menu screen that was displayed when the
in setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen” screen was turned off.
FP212.
NOTE
While the screen is off, the screen
switches to the climate control screen
only when the climate control system is
operated.
2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the User

Recognition settings on or off by using the
control switches.
Back” to return to the previous screen. 2. Select “Yes” to turn off the screen.
Select “No” to return to the previous
screen.

(223,1)
! Favorite setting ! Bypass screen setting ! Beep setting

S03BP280502 S03BP280503 S03BP280504
1. Select the “Favorite” from the 2nd 1. Select “Bypass Screen” from the 2nd 1. Select “Beep” from the 2nd menu in the
menu in setting screen. Refer to “Setting menu in the setting screen. Refer to setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”
screen” FP212. “Setting screen” FP212. FP212.
3

2. Set the desired items by using the 2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the display 2. Set the beep volume by using the
control switches. For details about items, of items on or off by using the control control switches.
refer to “Favorite screen” FP209. switches. 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go Back” to return to the previous screen
Back” to return to the previous screen Back” to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.
without applying the setting changes. without applying the setting changes.
NOTE
NOTE
. You can display a maximum of the 3
items. Traffic information setting is only dis-
. The same item cannot be selected played for the audio unit with SiriusXM
for the left, center or right location. satellite radio.
. Weather information for 3 hours
later or 6 hours later can be displayed.
– CONTINUED –

(224,1)
! Climate Control settings ! Occupant detection settings ! Maintenance settings

S03BP2811 S03BP281102 S03BP2803
You can set the climate control settings. 1. Select “Occupant Detection” from the You can set maintenance reminders.
! Mode setting 2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to ! Engine oil setting
S03BP281101 “Setting screen” FP212. S03BP280301
1. Select “Mode Setting” from the 2nd 1. Select “Engine Oil” from the 2nd menu
menu in the setting screen. Refer to in the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
“Setting screen” FP212. screen” FP212.
2. Select on or off to turn the occupant

detection on or off by using the control
switches.
2. Select “Normal”, “Mild”, “Power” or 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go 2. Set the date and distance of the
“ECO” by using the control switches. For Back” to return to the previous screen reminder by using the control switches.
details about “Mode setting”, refer to without applying the setting changes. 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select
“Automatic climate control customization” “Update” to change the notification dis-
FP262. tance to the default value. Select “Go
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go Back” to return to the previous screen
Back” to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.
without applying the setting changes.

(225,1)
NOTE ! Oil filter setting ! On/Off setting

S03BP280302 S03BP280305
. The reminder will be displayed by The setting procedure is the same as 1. Select “On/Off” from the 2nd menu on
either date or distance in accordance “Engine oil setting” FP222, but select the the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
with the setting. “Oil Filter” item in step 1. screen” FP212.
. Even when either “Day” or “Dis-
tance” are displayed as “_ _” a pop-up ! Tires setting
S03BP280303
3
screen will appear. The setting procedure is the same as

. The reminder will be displayed until “Engine oil setting” FP222, but select the
either of the following conditions is “Tires” item in step 1.
satisfied.
– The period of time passed after ! Maintenance schedule setting
S03BP280304
the registered notification date is 15 The setting procedure is the same as
days or more. “Engine oil setting” FP222, but select the
– The total distance driven after the “Maintenance Schedule” item in step 1.
registered notification distance is
approximately 311 miles (500 km) or
more.
2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the opening
screen on or off by using the control
switches.
Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
– CONTINUED –

(226,1)
! Clear setting ! Initialize & How to get the source code

S03BP280306 S03BP2804
1. Select “Clear All Settings” from the 2nd You can initialize the items that have been using the open source
S03BP29
menu on the setting screen. Refer to set to your preference. Free/Open Source Software Information
“Setting screen” FP212. 1. Select “Initialize” from the 2nd menu on
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting This product contains Free/Open Source
screen” FP212. Software (FOSS).
The license information and/or the source
code of such FOSS can be found at the
following URL.
http://www.globaldenso.com/en/open-
source/ivi/subaru/
2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the

control switches.
2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the
control switches.
NOTE
You cannot initialize the items if the
Driver Monitoring System is not oper-
ated.

(227,1)
Clock 225
3-10. Clock 4. Select “Vehicle”. press and hold the “+” button for approxi-
S03AF 5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then mately 2 seconds. The clock format will
select “Manual”. then change.
For models with a SUBARU genuine
navigation and/or audio system, the clock 4. The clock display will continue to flash
can be adjusted using either auto mode or for approximately 3 seconds to indicate
manual mode. that the clock display has been changed. 3

. Auto mode: automatic clock adjustment
! Type B multi-function display (color
. Manual mode: manual clock adjust- LCD)
ment S03AF0302
NOTE
& Setting the clock manually
S03AF03
! Type A multi-function display (black

and white)
S03AF0301
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
6. Press the “+” button or the “−” button
beside the clock.
! Setting 12-hour or 24-hour dis-

play
S03AF030102
The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour
display. Perform the following procedure to
switch the display format.
1. Turn the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/ When the combination meter display
“OFF” position. (color LCD) is displaying the menu
2. Press and hold the “−” button located screen entering screen, the system will
near the clock display for approximately 5 not move to the selection screen even if
seconds. The clock display will then start the “INFO” button is pressed and held.
2. Press the button. to flash. Before adjusting the clock, be sure to
3. Select “Settings”. 3. While the clock display is flashing, change the combination meter display
– CONTINUED –

(228,1)
226 Clock
(color LCD) to a screen other than the

menu screen entering screen.
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
1) “INFO” button
6. Press the “INFO” button on the steer-

ing wheel to display the guidance screen.
2. Press the button.
3. Select “Settings”.
4. Select “Vehicle”.
5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then
select “Manual”.
7. While displaying the guidance screen,

press and hold the “INFO” button on the
steering wheel. The screen goes to the
selection screen.

(229,1)
Clock 227

1) 9. Select “Time/Date” and pull the /SET 10. Select “Time/Date” and pull the /SET
2) /SET switch. switch.
3)
8. Pull the “ ” or “ ” switch to select the

NOTE
item. If “Clock adjustment” is not in manual
mode, “Time/Date” cannot be selected.
Be sure to perform steps 2 through 5.
– CONTINUED –

(230,1)
228 Clock
& Setting the clock automati- ! Models without navigation system

S03AF0202
cally The clock will be set and adjusted auto-
S03AF02
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”. matically when a smartphone is connected
via Bluetooth® for transferring phonebook
data.
1. Register the smartphone to the audio
system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth
SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-
tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET-
TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
11. Pull the “ ”, “ ” switches to scroll The clock will be adjusted automatically.
through to the items you can set.
(1) Use the / SET switch to choose
the item you would like to change. NOTE
(2) Pull the “ ”, “ ” switches to 2. Press the button. Depending on the model of smart-
adjust the items. 3. Select “Settings”. phone, the settings of the connected
12. Select “Set” and pull the /SET switch 4. Select “Vehicle”. smartphone may need to be changed.
to complete the clock setting. 5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then (ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-
select “Auto”. tion settings may need to be activated.)
Select “Go Back” to return to the previous
screen without saving settings. 6. Press the button again to complete For details, check the instructions on
the setting. connecting smartphones.
NOTE
The Birthday/Anniversary and mainte- ! Models with navigation system & Regulatory information
S03AF04
S03AF0201
nance reminder system function are The clock will be set automatically where a
based on the time and date on the GPS signal is available.
multifunction display (color LCD).
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.

(231,1)
Light control switch 229
3-11. Light control switch & Headlights ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
S03AH
S03AH01 and license plate lights are automatically
& Precautions and tips on or off depending on the level of the
S03AH06 ambient light.
CAUTION NOTE 3
. Use of any lights for a long period The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-

of time while the engine is not lights can be changed by a SUBARU
running can cause the battery to dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer
discharge. for details. Also, for models with a
combination meter display (color
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
LCD), the setting can be changed using
sure that the lights are turned off.
the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle
If the vehicle is left unattended
Setting” FP196.
for a long time with the lights
illuminated, the battery may be To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on . Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights
discharged. the end of the turn signal lever. While the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-
“ ” position: matically turn on when the windshield
NOTE Instrument panel illumination, headlights, wipers operate several times. The head-
. Even if the key is removed from the parking lights, front side marker lights, rear lights will automatically turn off when the
ignition switch, the lights can be illumi- side marker lights, tail lights and license wipers stop.
nated by operating the light control plate lights are on.
switch from the “ ” (off) position to the “ ” position: NOTE
“ ” or “ ” position. Instrument panel illumination, parking The ON/OFF setting of this function can
. If the driver’s door is opened while lights, front side marker lights, rear side be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
the lights are illuminated and the key is marker lights, tail lights and license plate Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
removed from the ignition switch, the lights are on. tails.
chirp sound will inform the driver that “ ” position:
the lights are illuminated. “ ” position:
. Auto on/off headlights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” The headlights are all off.
position, the instrument panel illumination, Only when the following conditions are
headlights, parking lights, front side mar- fulfilled, instrument panel illumination,
– CONTINUED –

(232,1)
230 Light control switch
headlights, parking lights, front side mar- The low beam headlights will remain . 30 seconds have passed since the door
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights illuminated for 30 seconds*1 and then turn is opened and closed.*1
and license plate lights are automatically off. However, if any of the following . The light control switch is turned to a
on or off depending on the level of the operations is done, the low beam head- position other than “AUTO”.
ambient light. lights will turn off. . The locking procedure is performed
– The engine is running. . The doors are locked. twice. When performing the unlocking
– The parking brake is fully released. . The light control switch is turned to a procedure after performing the locking
– The select lever is in a position other position other than “AUTO”. procedure, perform the locking procedure
than “P” position. . The ignition switch is turned to the “ON” twice again.
position.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which the
! Welcome lighting function
S03AH0103 When exiting: low beam headlights remain on by the welcome
The welcome lighting function turns on the lighting function can be changed by a SUBARU
While the welcome lighting function is
low beam headlight for smooth approach- dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-
activated, the low beam headlights, instru-
ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or
ment panel illumination, parking lights, tails.
in a dark place.
front side marker lights, rear side marker ! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
The function is activated while all of the lights, tail lights and license plate lights will lights
following conditions are met. remain illuminated even when either of the S03AH0101
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO” following operation is done.

position. . The push-button ignition switch is
. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/ turned to the “OFF” status (models with
off headlights. “keyless access with push-button start
system”).
When approaching: . The key is pulled out from the ignition
While the welcome lighting function is switch (models without “keyless access
activated, the low beam headlights, instru- with push-button start system”).
ment panel illumination, parking lights,
front side marker lights, rear side marker The low beam headlights will turn off under
lights, tail lights and license plate lights will any of the following conditions.
automatically illuminate when unlocking . 3 minutes have passed since the low
the doors and the rear gate by using the beam headlights were illuminated by the
welcome lighting function. The sensor is as shown in the illustration.
remote keyless entry system.

(233,1)
CAUTION & Headlight flasher & High beam assist function (if
S03AH03
equipped)
If any object is placed on or near the S03AH07
sensor, the sensor may not detect NOTE

the level of the ambient light cor- . The high beam assist function uti-
rectly and the auto on/off headlights lizes the stereo camera installed at the 3
may not operate properly. position of the front map lights.

. For details on how to handle the
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s
& High/low beam change (dim- Manual supplement for the EyeSight
mer) system.
S03AH02
The high beam assist function automati-
cally changes the headlight from high
beam to low beam (or vice versa).
When all of the following conditions are
CAUTION met, the headlight will change to high
Do not hold the lever in the flashing beam.
position for more than just a few . When the vehicle speed increases to or
seconds. above 20 mph (32 km/h).
. There is no preceding or oncoming
To flash the headlights, pull the lever vehicle.
toward you and then release it. The high . The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
beam will stay on for as long as you hold . The road does not have a sharp curve.
the lever.
1) High beam
2) Low beam
When any of the following conditions are
When the headlights are on high beam, the met, the headlight will change to low beam.
When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
combination meter also illuminates. . When the vehicle speed decreases to
high beam indicator light “ ” on the or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
combination meter is also on. . When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.
. When there is a preceding or oncoming
– CONTINUED –

(234,1)
vehicle. “ON” position, set the light control switch to

. When the EyeSight system is malfunc- the “AUTO” position and push the signal
tioning or is temporarily stopped. lever forward (high beam position).
NOTE position and within approximately 15 sec-
The factory setting (default setting) for onds, press the “ / ” (following distance
this function is set as “operational”. setting) switch more than 10 times con-
This setting can be changed to OFF secutively.
(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.
For more details, contact a SUBARU When the sensitivity of the high beam
dealer. assist function is lowered, the high beam
! How to use the high beam assist assist indicator light “ ” on the combina-
function tion meter will flash.
High beam assist indicator
S03AH0701
The high beam assist function will be When the high beam assist function is NOTE
activated when all the following conditions activated, the high beam assist indicator . The sensitivity of the high beam
are met. light on the combination meter will illumi- assist function cannot be lowered in
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO” nate. the following conditions.
position and the low beam headlights are – Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise
on automatically. NOTE Control is in operation.
. The turn signal lever is pushed forward. If the high beam assist function is – The EyeSight warning indicator
malfunctioning or is temporarily (yellow) is illuminated.
stopped, the headlight will be fixed at . The sensitivity of the high beam
low beam. assist function returns to normal level
! How to temporarily lower the sensi- the next time the ignition switch is
tivity of the high beam assist func- turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position
tion and the engine is restarted.
S03AH0704
The sensitivity of the high beam assist
function can be lowered by performing the
following operations.
1. Before turning the ignition switch to the

(235,1)
! How to change the headlight mode ! Tips for the high beam assist sys- – If there are lights similar to the
manually tem headlights or the tail lights in the
Change to the low beam:
S03AH0702
. The high beam assist function recog-
S03AH0703
surrounding area.
nizes the conditions surrounding the ve- – When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
When you return the turn signal lever to the
hicle based on the brightness of illumina- hicle ahead is driven without its head-
center position, the high beam assist
function will turn off and the high beam tion ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, lights and tail lights on. 3
assist indicator light (green) will turn off. the headlight mode may switch in some – If the headlights of an oncoming

situations that do not match to the driver’s vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
Change to the high beam: sense. ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the
When you turn the light control switch to . A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be light beams are not aimed correctly.
the “ ” position, the headlight mode will detected. – When a rapid change of brightness
be changed to the high beam. . Under the following situations, the continues while driving.
At this time, the high beam assist function brightness of ambient illumination may – When driving on a road with many
will turn off, the high beam assist indicator not be detected correctly and the high ups and downs or uneven surfaces.
(green) will turn off and the high beam beam assist function may not work prop- – When driving on a road with many
indicator light will turn on. erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam curves.
may disturb the oncoming vehicle or – When there are some objects that
NOTE vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode reflect light strongly, such as a road
. After manually changing the head- may continue although there are no sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
light mode to the high beam, if you turn oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead. – When the rear part of the vehicle
on the high beam assist function, In the such cases, change the headlight ahead, such as a container, reflects
return the light control switch to the mode manually. light strongly.
“AUTO” position. – In bad weather (fog, snow, sand – When the headlights of your vehicle
. When manually changing the head- storm, heavy rain, etc.). are damaged or dirty.
light mode to the high beam, if you turn – When your vehicle is tilted, such as
– When the windshield glass is dirty or
the light control switch to the “ ” in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is
fogged.
position, the instrument panel illumina- being towed.
tion, parking lights, front side marker – When the windshield is cracked or
damaged. – Immediately after the engine has
lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
– When the stereo camera is de- started.
and license plate lights will be on.
formed or the stereo camera lenses . In the following conditions, the head-
are dirty. light mode will not be automatically chan-
ged from the high beam to the low beam.
– CONTINUED –

(236,1)
– When your vehicle passes an on- ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle & Daytime running light system
coming vehicle suddenly in a blind ahead illuminate on only one side. S03AH04
curve. – When the oncoming vehicle or WARNING

– When another vehicle passes in vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.
front of your vehicle. – Conditions of a road (slope, curve, When the daytime running lights are
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve- road surface, etc.). illuminated, the tail lights do not
hicle ahead comes in and out of view – Number of passengers and weight illuminate. When it becomes dark
because of continuous curves, median of loaded cargo. outside, turn the light switch to the
strips, roadside trees, etc. – Limitation of the detection ability of “ ” position to illuminate the head-
. If the stereo camera detects the light of the stereo camera. lights and tail lights. This will im-
the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle, – If the EyeSight traffic lane customi- prove visibility and allow other dri-
the headlight mode may change from the zation is not set to the actual flow of vers to see your vehicle more easily.
high beam to the low beam automatically. traffic.
. The headlight mode may change from The daytime running lights will automati-
the high beam to the low beam, or the low cally illuminate when the following condi-
beam mode may continue, when affected tions are fulfilled.
by a street light, traffic signal, illumination . The engine is running.
of an advertisement board, or a reflective . The parking brake is fully released.
object such as a road sign and signboard. . The light control switch is in the
. The timing of the change of headlight “AUTO”, “ ” or off position.
mode may differ due to the following . The select lever is in a position other
factors. than the “P” position.
– Color or brightness of the headlights
of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights NOTE
of a vehicle ahead. When the light switch is in the “ ”
– The headlights of the oncoming position, the instrument panel illumina-
vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle tion, front side marker lights, tail lights
ahead are covered with mud, snow, and license plate lights are also illumi-
etc. nated.
– Movement and direction of an on-
coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.
– When the headlights of an oncom-

(237,1)
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) 235
3-12. Steering Responsive The SRH OFF indicator light on the

combination meter illuminates when SRH
Headlight (SRH) (if equipped) is turned off.
S03BL
If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF
indicator light on the combination meter
flashes when the ignition switch is in the 3
“ON” position. It indicates that SRH has

been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
. If you turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position with SRH turned off and
You can turn the SRH function on or off by then start the engine again, SRH will
pressing the SRH OFF switch. automatically turn on.
. When you turn the ignition switch to
1) The target area of illumination when SRH the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi-
is activated. cator light will illuminate and turn off
2) The target area of illumination when SRH after several seconds.
is not activated. . SRH only activates when the vehicle
SRH is a function that automatically moves is traveling forward at the speed of
the headlight beam to the left or right in approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.
accordance with the steering angle and
vehicle speed. This function helps to
improve the visibility at night by illuminat-
ing the road ahead at corners and inter-
sections.
1) SRH OFF indicator light

The SRH OFF indicator light on the
combination meter turns off when SRH is
turned on.

(238,1)
236 Headlight beam leveler
3-13. Headlight beam leveler 3-14. Fog light switch (if

(if equipped) equipped)
S03AT S03BA
The LED headlights produce more light

than conventional halogen headlights.
When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load
and the headlight beams are angled
upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience glare.
To prevent this, the automatic headlight
beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the
optimum height automatically depending
on the load the vehicle is carrying. The indicator light on the combination
meter will illuminate when the front fog
CAUTION lights are illuminated.
In certain circumstances, the head- 1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch
lights may become misaligned, and
the headlight beam leveler will not The front fog lights will turn on when the
reset them to the proper angle. This fog light switch is placed in the “ ” position
may occur after transporting your while the headlights are in the following
vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the condition.
vehicle is parked and restarted on . While the headlight switch is in the “ ”
different angles. In such cases, have position.
the headlight alignment checked by . For models with the auto on/off head-
a SUBARU dealer. lights, while the headlight switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the low beam head-
lights turn on automatically.
To turn off the front fog lights, turn the
switch back down to the “ ” position.

(239,1)
Turn signal lever 237
3-15. Turn signal lever & One-touch lane changer 3-16. Wiper and washer
S03AI01
S03AI To flash the turn signal and turn signal S03AM
indicator light three times, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and WARNING
immediately release it.
In freezing weather, do not use the 3
NOTE windshield washer until the wind-

The operational/non-operational shield is sufficiently warmed by the
setting of the one-touch lane changer defroster.
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Otherwise the washer fluid can
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for freeze on the windshield, blocking
details. For models with the combina- your view.
tion meter display (color LCD), the
setting can also be changed by operat-
ing the combination meter display CAUTION
1) Right turn (color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-
2) Lane change right signal cle Setting” FP196. . Do not operate the washer con-
3) Lane change left signal tinuously for more than 10 sec-
4) Left turn onds, or when the washer fluid
If the lever does not return after cornering, tank is empty. This may cause
return the lever to the neutral position by overheating of the washer motor.
hand. Check the washer fluid level fre-
quently, such as at fuel stops.
To signal a lane change, push the turn . Do not operate the wipers when
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it the windshield or rear window is
during the lane change. The lever will dry. This may scratch the glass,
return automatically to the neutral position damage the blade rubbers and
when you release it. might cause the wiper motor to
fail. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshield or rear win-
dow, always use the windshield
washer.
– CONTINUED –

(240,1)
238 Wiper and washer
. In freezing weather, be sure that Refer to “Windshield washer and streaking on the glass. If you
the blade rubbers are not frozen fluid” FP467. cannot remove those streaks after
to the windshield or rear window . Do not clean the blade rubbers operating the washer or if the wiper
before switching on the wipers. with gasoline or a solvent, such operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
Attempting to operate the wiper as paint thinner or benzine. This face of the windshield or rear window
with the blades frozen to the will cause deterioration of the and the blade rubbers using a sponge
window glass could cause not blade rubbers. or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
only the blade rubbers to be mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
damaged but also might cause rinse the window glass and blade
the wiper motor to fail. If the blade NOTE rubbers with clean water. The glass is
rubbers are frozen to the window . The windshield wiper motor is pro- clean if no beads form on the glass
glass, be sure to operate the tected against overloads by a circuit when you rinse with water.
defroster, windshield wiper dei- breaker. If the motor operates continu- . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
cer (if equipped) or rear window ously under an unusually heavy load, even after following this procedure,
defogger before turning on the the circuit breaker may trip to stop the replace the blade rubbers with new
wiper. motor temporarily. If this happens, park ones. For replacement instructions,
. If the wipers stop during opera- your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
tion because of ice or some other wiper switch, and wait for approxi- FP469.
obstruction on the window, this mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
might cause the wiper motor to will reset itself, and the wipers will
fail even if the wiper switch is again operate normally.
turned off. If this occurs, . Clean your blade rubbers and win-
promptly stop the vehicle in a dow glass periodically with a washer
safe place, turn the ignition solution to prevent streaking, and to
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po- remove accumulations of road salt or
sition and clean the window glass road film. Operate the windshield
to allow proper wiper operation. washer for at least 1 second so that
. Use clean water if windshield washer solution will be sprinkled all
washer fluid is unavailable. In over the windshield or rear window.
areas where water freezes in . Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
winter, use SUBARU Windshield rial on the windshield or the blade
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. rubbers results in jerky wiper operation

(241,1)
Wiper and washer 239
& Windshield wiper and washer ! Wiper intermittent time control ! Windshield washer
S03AM0104
switches S03AM0103
S03AM01
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
! Windshield wipers 3
S03AM0105

When the wiper switch is in the “ ” To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- control lever toward you. The washer fluid
ing interval of the wiper. The operating sprays until you release the lever. The
interval can be adjusted in several steps wipers operate while you pull the lever.
from the shortest interval to the longest.
/ MIST: Mist (for a single wipe)
/ OFF: Off
/ INT: Intermittent
/ LO: Low speed
/ HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “ ”/“OFF” position.
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
– CONTINUED –

(242,1)
240 Wiper and washer
NOTE & Rear window wiper and When you move the select lever/shift lever
washer switch from the “R” (reverse) position to another
S03AM02 position, the rear wiper will return to
intermittent operation.
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off
“ ” position, if the front windshield wiper is
operating continuously, the rear wiper will
operate intermittently when you move the
select lever/shift lever to the “R” (reverse)
position.
The factory setting (default setting) of the
reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as
follows.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
The windshield washer fluid warning : Washer operation (accompanied by
wiper operation) . Other models: Operational
light illuminates when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the : Continuous operation This setting can be changed by a SUBARU
lower limit. If the warning light illumi- : Intermittent operation dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the : Off
details.
refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-
Washer operation (accompanied by CAUTION
shield washer fluid” FP467. : wiper operation)
Do not attach anything that disturbs
! Rear wiper the rear wiper operation on the rear
S03AM0201
With the switch turned to the “ ” position, gate. Doing so may damage the rear
the rear wiper will operate intermittently at wiper when it operates.
intervals corresponding to the vehicle
speed. In this position, when you move
the select lever to the “R” position, the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation.

(243,1)
Mirrors 241
! Washer 3-17. Mirrors & Auto-dimming mirror/com-

S03AM0202
To wash the rear window, turn the knob to S03AP pass with HomeLink® (if
the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays Always check that the inside and outside equipped)
S03AP07
and the wiper operates until you release mirrors are properly adjusted before you
the knob. start driving.
3
& Inside mirror

S03AP01
1) Display
2) HomeLink Buttons
3) Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
1) Normal position feature senses distracting glare from
2) Anti-glare position vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use. matically dims to eliminate the glare and
To reduce glare from the headlights of the preserve your vision.
vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the
antiglare position.
– CONTINUED –

(244,1)
242 Mirrors
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea- 3. To adjust for compass zone variance: ! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
ture (1) Find your current location and tem
S03AP0705 S03AP0704
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto- zone number on the map. The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming (2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for provides a convenient way to replace up to
feature is enabled when the switch’s green more than 6 seconds or until a zone three hand-held radio-frequency remotes
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming number appears in the display. used to activate devices such as gate
feature will default to on with each ignition (3) Once the zone number appears in operators, garage door openers, entry
cycle. the display, toggle the “ ” switch door locks, security systems, and even
again until your current location zone home lighting. The below steps are gen-
! To Operate the Compass Feature
S03AP0706 number appears. After you stop press- eric programming instructions; for Genie
1. To turn the compass feature on/off, ing the switch, your new zone number and Sommer garage door openers, please
press and hold the “ ” switch for more will be saved. Within a few seconds, go directly to the HomeLink website.
than 3 seconds or until the display turns the display will show a compass direc- Additional information and programming
on/off. The compass feature will default to tion. videos can be found at
on with each ignition cycle. 4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan- www.HomeLink.com and
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the ged or if the compass appears inaccurate, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
vehicle in circles until compass is cali- recalibrate the compass. Press and hold
brated. the “ ” switch for more than 9 seconds or CAUTION
until a “C” appears in the display. Once a
“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the . Before programming HomeLink
vehicle in circles until compass is cali- to a garage door opener or gate
brated. operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
. When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
outside of the garage.
. Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features,
Compass calibration zones as required by U.S. federal safety

(245,1)
Mirrors 243
standards (this includes any gar- ! Programming a New HomeLink

age door opener model manufac- Button
S03AP070409
tured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect
an object signaling the door to
stop and reverse does not meet 3
current U.S. federal safety stan-

dards.
. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-
held remote (garage door opener
remote) of the device for quicker
and more accurate training.
1) Garage door opener remote
. Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be turned to the 2. Position the hand-held remote (garage
“ON” or “ACC” position for pro- 1) Indicator Light door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8
2) HomeLink Buttons
gramming and/or operation of cm) away from the HomeLink button that
HomeLink. 1. Press and release the HomeLink but- you would like to program.
. Keep the hand-held remote (gar- ton that you would like to program. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash orange
NOTE
age door opener remote) of the
device you are programming for slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing HomeLink Some hand-held remotes (garage door
use in other vehicles as well as Buttons” FP246). opener remotes) may actually train
for future HomeLink program- better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches
ming. It is also suggested that (15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you
upon the sale of the vehicle, the have difficulty with the programming
programmed HomeLink buttons process.
be erased for security purposes.
Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-
tons” FP246.
– CONTINUED –

(246,1)
244 Mirrors
3. While the HomeLink indicator light is 1) Indicator Light 1) “Learn” button

flashing orange, press and hold the hand- 4. Press the HomeLink button that you 5. At the garage door opener motor,
held remote button. Continue pressing the would like to program and observe the (security gate motor, etc.) locate the
hand-held remote button until the indicator light. “Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. This
HomeLink indicator light changes from . If the indicator light remains constant can usually be found where the hanging
orange to green. You may now release green, your device should operate antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
the hand-held remote button. when the HomeLink button is pressed. unit (see the device’s manual to identify
NOTE At this point, if your device operates, this button). The name and color of the
programming is complete. button may vary by manufacturer.
Some devices may require you to re-
place this “Programming a New . If the indicator light rapidly flashes
green, firmly press, hold for two sec- NOTE
HomeLink Button” step 3 with proce- A ladder and/or second person may
dures noted in the “Gate Operator / onds and release the HomeLink button
up to three times to complete the simplify the following steps.
Canadian Programming” section. Refer
to “Gate Operator/Canadian Program- programming process. At this point if 6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,
ming” FP245. your device operates, programming is “Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
complete. If the device does not have 30 seconds in which to complete step
operate, continue with the next step 7.
of the programming instructions.

(247,1)
Mirrors 245
! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-

gramming
S03AP070410
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter remote signals to “time-out”
(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-
sion, which may not be long enough for 3
HomeLink to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are de-
signed to “time-out” in the same manner.
The indicator LED on the hand-held
remote will go off when the device times
out, indicating that it has finished transmit-
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, 1) Status Indicators
ting.
hold for two seconds and release the 8. If status indicator arrows appear next
HomeLink button up to three times. At this If you live in Canada or you are having
to the indicator light, please refer to difficulties programming a gate operator or
point programming is complete and your “Garage Door Two-Way Communication”
device should operate when the HomeLink garage door opener by using the program-
FP246. ming procedures, replace “Programming a
button is pressed and released.
In the event that there are still program- New HomeLink Button” step 3 with the
ming difficulties or questions, additional following:
HomeLink information and programming While the HomeLink indicator light is
videos can be found at flashing orange, press and release (“cy-
www.HomeLink.com and cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For two seconds until the HomeLink indicator
Genie and Sommer garage door openers light changes from orange to green. You
please go directly to the HomeLink web- may now release the hand-held remote
site. button.
– CONTINUED –

(248,1)
246 Mirrors
NOTE ! Reprogramming a Single Range may be reduced by obstacles such

If programming a garage door opener HomeLink Button as houses or trees. You may have to slow
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug S03AP070406 your vehicle speed to successfully receive
To program a previously trained button,
the device during the “cycling” process the garage door opener communication.
follow these steps:
to prevent possible overheating. ! Programming Two-Way Commu-
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. DO NOT release the button. nication
Proceed with “Programming a New S03AP070414
HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete. 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The
! Using HomeLink HomeLink button can be released at this
S03AP070411
To operate, simply press and release the point. Proceed with “Programming a New
programmed HomeLink button. Activation HomeLink Button” - step 3.
will now occur for the trained device (i.e. 3. If you do not complete the program-
garage door opener, gate operator, secur- ming of a new device to the button, it will
ity system, entry door lock, home/office revert to the previously stored program-
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand- ming.
held remote of the device may also be
used at any time. ! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-
nication
! Erasing HomeLink Buttons S03AP070413
S03AP070412 HomeLink has the capability of commu-
To erase programming from the three 1) Status Indicators
nicating with your garage door opener.
buttons (individual buttons cannot be
HomeLink can receive and display “clos- Within five seconds after programming a
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as
ing” or “opening” status messages from new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s
outlined below), follow the step noted:
compatible garage door opener systems. garage door status indicators will flash
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink At any time, HomeLink can also recall and rapidly green indicating that the garage
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED display the last recorded status commu- door two-way communication has been
indicator will change from continuously lit nicated by the garage door opener to enabled. If your garage door status in-
to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. indicate your garage door being “closed” dicators flashed, two-way communication
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. or “opened”. programming is complete.
HomeLink is now ready to be programmed
HomeLink has the capability of receiving If the garage door status indicators do not
at any time beginning with “Programming a
this communication from the garage door flash, additional HomeLink information
New HomeLink Button” - step 1.
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m). and programming videos can be found

(249,1)
Mirrors 247
online at www.HomeLink.com and ! Certification

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. S03AP070416
In the event that there are still program-
! Using Two-Way Communication ming difficulties or questions, additional
S03AP070415
HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com, 3
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline
at 1-800-355-3515.
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking FCC WARNING
Orange)
2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Changes or modifications not ex-
Green) pressly approved by the party re-
1) Status Indicators 3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink- sponsible for compliance could void
ing Orange) the user’s authority to operate the
Recall and display (at any time) the last 4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid equipment.
recorded garage door status message Green)
communicated to HomeLink by simulta- If two-way communication programming is This device complies with part 15 of the
neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and successful, HomeLink will display the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display status of your garage door opener with following two conditions: (1) This de-
the last recorded status for three seconds. arrow indicators. vice may not cause harmful interfer-
operation.
– CONTINUED –

(250,1)
248 Mirrors
. Canada-spec. models WARNING & Outside mirrors

S03AP03
. When programming the ! Convex mirror (passenger side)

S03AP0301
HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a WARNING
garage door opener or other
Objects look smaller in a convex
device. Make sure that people
mirror and farther away than when
and objects are out of the way of
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the
the garage door or other device
convex mirror to judge the distance
to prevent potential harm or da-
of vehicles behind you when chan-
mage.
ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or
. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire- glance backwards) to determine the
less Control System with a gar- actual size and distance of objects
age door opener that lacks the that you view in convex mirror.
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are
registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
tion.

(251,1)
Mirrors 249
! Remote control mirror switch ! Reverse tilt-down feature (if NOTE

S03AP0302
equipped) . The operational/non-operational
S03AP030201
When backing up the vehicle, the front setting can be changed by operating
passenger’s side outside mirrors will turn the combination meter display (color
downward automatically to provide better LCD). For details, refer to “Vehicle
rear visibility. Setting” FP196. 3
. The setting of the right and left side
1. Push the ignition switch to the ON

mirror/right side mirror operation can
position.
be changed by SUBARU dealer. Con-
2. Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) tact your SUBARU dealer for details.
position.
3. The outside mirror surface moves
downward.
The outside mirror surface will return to its
: Select side to adjust original position when the following condi-
: Direction control tion are met.
The remote control mirrors operate only . After approximately 9 seconds from the
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or shift lever is moved to any position other
“ACC” position. than R (Reverse).
1. Turn the control switch to the side that . The ignition switch is turned to the
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror, “OFF” position.
“R” is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional opera-
tion.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.

(252,1)
250 Defogger and deicer
3-18. Defogger and deicer (if The vehicle is equipped with the defogger
and the deicer (if equipped) system. The
equipped) defogger and deicer system is activated
S03BI
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Climate control panel type B and C

1) Models without outside mirror defogger
2) Models with outside mirror defogger
To activate simultaneously the rear win-
dow defogger, outside mirror defogger (if
Climate control panel type A equipped) and windshield wiper deicer (if
1) Models without outside mirror defogger equipped), press the control switch that is
2) Models with outside mirror defogger
located on the climate control panel. The
indicator light on the control switch illumi-
nates while the defogger and deicer
system is activated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
The defogger and deicer system will
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and the

(253,1)
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel 251
outside mirrors have been cleared and the NOTE 3-19. Tilt/telescopic steering
windshield blade rubbers have been . Turn on the defogger and deicer
deiced completely before that time, press
wheel
system if the wipers are frozen to the S03BF
the control switch to turn them off. windshield.
It is possible for the defogger and deicer . If the windshield is covered with WARNING
system to be set to continuous operation snow, remove the snow so that the 3
windshield wiper deicer works effec- . Do not adjust the steering wheel
mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your

tively. tilt/telescopic position while driv-
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for ing. This may cause loss of
models with a combination meter display . While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation vehicle control and result in per-
(color LCD), it is possible to set the sonal injury.
defogger and deicer system for the con- mode:
tinuous operation mode. For details, refer – If the vehicle speed remains at 9 . If the lever cannot be raised to the
to “Vehicle Setting” FP196. mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15 fixed position, adjust the steering
minutes, the windshield wiper dei- wheel again. It is dangerous to
CAUTION cer system automatically stops op- drive without locking the steering
erating. However, the rear window wheel. This may cause loss of
. To prevent the battery from being defogger system and outside mirror vehicle control and result in per-
discharged, do not operate the defogger system maintain continu- sonal injury.
defogger and deicer system con- ous operation in this condition.
tinuously for any longer than – If the vehicle battery voltage
necessary. drops below the permissible level,
. Do not use sharp instruments or continuous operation of the defog-
window cleaner containing abra- ger system and deicer system is
sives to clean the inner surface of canceled and the system stops
the rear window. They may da- operating.
mage the conductors printed on
the window.
– CONTINUED –

(254,1)
252 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
& Heated Steering Wheel sys- CAUTION

tem (if equipped)
The Heated Steering Wheel system
S03BF01
. Use the Heated Steering Wheel
warms the steering wheel at a constant system with the engine running.
temperature. Otherwise, the battery voltage
may drop below the permissible
level and it may not be possible to
start the engine.
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the Heated
Steering Wheel for a long period
1) Tilt adjustment
of time. When using the Heated
2) Telescopic adjustment
Steering Wheel, always be sure to
3) Tilt/telescopic lock lever
warn the persons concerned.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to . Do not cover the Heated Steering
“Seats” FP32. Wheel with an object such as a
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down. 1) Heated Steering Wheel switch steering wheel cover. Doing so
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired 2) Indicator light may cause the Heated Steering
level. 3) Heated area Wheel to overheat.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel
wheel in place. system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is switch when the ignition switch is in the
securely locked by moving it up and down, “ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering
and forward and backward. wheel will be warmed and the indicator
light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off
the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull
the switch again. Then the indicator light
will turn off.

(255,1)
Horn 253
NOTE 3-20. Horn

. If the surface temperature of the S03AR
steering wheel is approximately above
1048F (408C) when the switch is turned
on, the system will not heat the steering
wheel. Then, the indicator light will 3
continue to illuminate.

. The Heated Steering Wheel system
will automatically turn off approxi-
mately 30 minutes after the system
has been turned on.
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

(256,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(257,1)
Climate control
4-1. Ventilator control ............................................ 256 Air inlet selection ............................................... 265
S04
Center ventilators ............................................... 256 To turn off the climate control system ................ 265
Side ventilators .................................................. 256 4-5. Defrosting ........................................................265
Rear ventilators .................................................. 256 4-6. Operating tips for heater and air
4-2. Climate control panel ..................................... 257 conditioner.....................................................266
Type A................................................................ 258 Cleaning ventilation grille ................................... 266
Type B................................................................ 259 Efficient cooling after parking in direct
Type C................................................................ 260 sunlight ........................................................... 266 4
4-3. Automatic climate control operation............. 261 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit .............................................................. 266
Sensors.............................................................. 261 Checking air conditioning system before
Automatic climate control customization............. 262 summer season ............................................... 266
4-4. Manual climate control operation for front Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity
climate control panel .................................... 263 and low temperature weather conditions .......... 267
Airflow mode selection ....................................... 263 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when
MAX A/C mode ................................................... 264 engine is heavily loaded................................... 267
Temperature control ........................................... 264 Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 267
Fan speed control............................................... 264 4-7. Air filtration system.........................................267
Air conditioner control........................................ 264 Replacing a cabin air filter.................................. 268

(258,1)
256 Ventilator control
4-1. Ventilator control & Side ventilators & Rear ventilators

S04AF02 S04AF04
S04AF
& Center ventilators
S04AF01
Side ventilators Rear ventilators

1) Close 1) Close
Center ventilators 2) Open 2) Open
To adjust the airflow direction, move the To adjust the flow direction, move the tab. To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all
the way down.

(259,1)
Climate control panel 257
4-2. Climate control panel

S04AG
WARNING
. The cooling function operates
only when the engine is running.
. Do not leave children or adults 4
who would normally require the
Climate control
support of others alone in your
vehicle. Pets should not be left
alone either. On hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or ani-
mals.
– CONTINUED –

(260,1)
258 Climate control panel
& Type A
S04AG01
1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” FP263.)
2) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” FP264.)
3) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
perature control” FP264.)
4) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” FP264.)
5) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” FP265.)
6) Rear window defogger button and out-
side mirror defogger button (if equipped)
(Refer to “Defogger and deicer” FP250.)
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.

(261,1)
Climate control panel 259
& Type B
S04AG02
6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
FP265.)
8) Passenger’s side temperature control
dial (Refer to “Temperature control”
FP264.) 4
9) SYNC button (Refer to “SYNC mode”
Climate control
FP264.)
11) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
12) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control operation” FP261.)
NOTE
The climate control screen is displayed
on the multi-function display (color
LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”
FP206.
1) Driver’s side temperature control dial 3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
(Refer to “Automatic climate control conditioner control” FP264.)
operation” FP261 and/or “Temperature 4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
control” FP264.) inlet selection” FP265.)
2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli- 5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C
mate control operation” FP261.) mode” FP264.)
– CONTINUED –

(262,1)
260 Climate control panel
& Type C
S04AG03
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control operation” FP261
and/or “Temperature control” FP264.)
2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation” FP261.)
3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” FP264.)
4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” FP265.)
5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C
mode” FP264.)
6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
FP265.)
8) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
10) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control operation” FP261.)
NOTE
The climate control screen is displayed
on the multi-function display (color
LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”
FP206.

(263,1)
Automatic climate control operation 261
4-3. Automatic climate con- operation, the “FULL” indicator light on & Sensors
the multi-function display (color LCD) S04AI03
trol operation will turn off and the “AUTO” indicator
The sensors are located as follows.
S04AI
light will remain illuminated. You can
When this mode is selected, the fan speed, then manually control the system as
airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and air desired using the button you operated.
conditioner compressor operation are To change the system back to the FULL
automatically controlled. To activate this AUTO mode, press the AUTO button.
mode, perform the following. 4
1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator
Climate control
To turn off the climate control system,
light “FULL AUTO” on the climate control press the ON/OFF button. Then the air
display illuminates. inlet selection will be set to the following.
2. Set the preferred temperature using . When the air inlet selection is set to
the temperature control dial. auto mode: Outside air circulation
. When the air inlet selection is set to
NOTE manual mode: No change
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
the air conditioner compressor will
automatically turn on if the temperature
is set much lower than the current
outlet air temperature. Even in this
case, the “A/C” indicator light on the
control panel illuminates.
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. If you operate any of the buttons on 1) Interior air temperature sensor
the control panel other than the ON/ 2) Solar sensor
OFF button, rear window defogger
button, SYNC button and temperature The automatic climate control system
control dial(s) during FULL AUTO mode employs several sensors. These sensors
– CONTINUED –

(264,1)
262 Automatic climate control operation
are delicate. If they are not treated properly ! ECO mode NOTE
and become damaged, the system may S04AI100104
If the system cannot judge correctly if
Use this mode when fuel efficiency is
not be able to control the interior tempera- there are passengers or not in the rear
prioritized over comfort. This increases
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the seat by the opening and closing of the
the range of the Auto Start Stop operation.
sensors, observe the following precau- rear door, such as when the doors are
tions. ! Occupant detection opened to place some cargo in the
S04AI1003
. Do not subject the sensors to impact. This mode switches the climate control vehicle, the rear occupant detection
. Keep water away from the sensors. operation according to the number of may not operate properly.
. Do not cover the sensors. passengers.
! Front occupant detection
& Automatic climate control This mode detects passenger by the
S04AI100301
customization occupant detection system sensor to set

S04AI10
The automatic climate control can be the front passenger setting temperature
customized on the multi-function display. OFF when there is no front passenger in
Refer to “Setting screen” FP212 for the seat. The setting temperature will be
setting methods. changed to the driver’s setting tempera-
ture automatically.
! Mode setting
S04AI1001
The climate control can be set in the NOTE
following mode. The occupant detection system sensor
may not detect passengers because of
! Normal mode their posture, physical size or weight.
S04AI100101
Use this mode for normal climate control. The front occupant detection function
may not operate properly.
! Mild mode
S04AI100102
Use this mode for the mild airflow mode. ! Rear occupant detection
S04AI100302
! Power mode This function judges if there are any

S04AI100103 passenger in the rear seat by the opening
Use this mode when climate control needs and closing record of rear doors. If there
to be operate to increase the comfort are no passenger in the rear seat, the
quickly. This will reduce the operation airflow of the climate control is reduced
range of the Auto Start Stop function. and priority is on the front seat passenger.

(265,1)
Manual climate control operation for front climate control panel 263
4-4. Manual climate control

operation for front climate
control panel
S04AJ
& Airflow mode selection
S04AJ01
Select the airflow mode using the airflow
mode selection button. 4
Airflow modes are as follows.
Climate control
Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the
and foot outlets instrument panel and some through wind-
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of
air flows to the windshield and both side
windows to prevent fogging.)
Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets
Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and foot

outlets
Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,
– CONTINUED –

(266,1)
264 Manual climate control operation for front climate control panel
foot outlets and both side outlets of the & MAX A/C mode ! SYNC mode (if equipped)
instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting” For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C
S04AJ06
When the SYNC mode is turned on, both
S04AJ0207
FP265.) button. the driver’s and front passenger’s side

When the MAX A/C mode is on, the temperatures are synchronized using the
following settings will be changed auto- driver’s side temperature control dial.
matically. Press the SYNC button to turn on the
. The air conditioner will turn on. SYNC mode. The SYNC button indicator
. The temperature will be set on the will illuminate.
lowest. Press the SYNC button again or turn the
. The fan speed will be set on the front passenger’s side temperature control
maximum speed. dial to cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNC
button indicator will not illuminate. In this
. The air inlet will be set to recirculation.
case, temperature control on the driver’s
. The airflow mode setting will be set to side and front passenger’s side is sepa-
ventilation mode. rated. The temperature will be controlled
To turn off MAX A/C mode and return the individually using the driver’s and front
Defrost: Windshield defroster outlets and passenger’s temperature control dials.
both side outlets of the instrument panel previous setting, press the MAX A/C
(Refer to “Defrosting” FP265.) button again.
& Fan speed control
S04AJ03
& Temperature control Select the preferred fan speed by turning
S04AJ02
Turn the temperature control dial to set the the fan speed control dial.
preferred interior temperature.
& Air conditioner control
NOTE S04AJ04
The air conditioner operates only when the
The controllable temperature range engine is running.
may vary depending on the regional Press the air conditioner button while the
specifications of the vehicle. fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again.

(267,1)
Defrosting 265
NOTE WARNING 4-5. Defrosting

For efficient defogging or dehumidify- S04AH
ing in cold weather, turn on the air Continued operation in the ON posi-
conditioner. If the ambient temperature tion may fog up the windows. Switch
decreases to approximately 328F (08C), to the OFF position as soon as the
the air conditioner and dehumidifica- outside conditions are no longer
tion system may not operate properly. dusty.
4
& Air inlet selection NOTE
Climate control
S04AJ05
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet . When the indicator light on the air
selection button. inlet selection button is flashing at
. Recirculation: engine starting, a malfunction might
be occurring in the electrical system.
When the indicator light on the air inlet
We recommend that you contact your
selection button illuminates, interior air is
SUBARU dealer for inspection. Select the “ ” or “ ” mode to defrost or
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
. The indicator light on the air inlet dehumidify the windshield and front door
air inlet selection button to the ON position
selection button may flash in the fol- windows.
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
lowing cases. However, this does not
when driving on a dusty road. NOTE
indicate a malfunction.
. Outside air circulation: – After the vehicle battery has been . When the “ ” or “ ” mode is
When the indicator light on the air inlet disconnected and reconnected. selected, the air conditioner compres-
selection button does not illuminate, out- – When the vehicle battery voltage sor operates automatically regardless
side air is drawn into the passenger is low. of the position of the air conditioner
compartment. Press the air inlet selection button to defrost the windshield more
button to the OFF position when the quickly. However the indicator on the
& To turn off the climate control air conditioner button will not illumi-
interior has cooled to a comfortable tem-
perature and the road is no longer dusty.
system nate. At the same time, the air inlet
S04AJ07
To turn off the climate control system: selection is automatically set to the
press the ON/OFF button. outside air mode.
. After defrosting the windshield by
pressing the defroster button “ ”,
– CONTINUED –

(268,1)
266 Operating tips for heater and air conditioner
pressing the button again returns the 4-6. Operating tips for heater & Efficient cooling after parking
system to the setting that had been in direct sunlight
selected before the defroster was acti-
and air conditioner S04AD02
vated.
S04AD After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
& Cleaning ventilation grille the windows open for a few minutes to
S04AD01
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of the
air conditioner for maximum cooling effi-
ciency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit
S04AD03
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
1) Front ventilation inlet grille
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille & Checking air conditioning
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions system before summer sea-
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. son
Since the condenser is located in front of S04AD04
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
because cooling performance is impaired
operation each spring. Have the air con-
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
ditioning system checked by your
on the condenser.
SUBARU dealer.

(269,1)
Air filtration system 267
& Cooling and dehumidifying in & Refrigerant for your climate 4-7. Air filtration system
high humidity and low tem- control system S04AE
S04AD07
perature weather conditions Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
S04AD05
Under certain weather conditions (high refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf). equipped with an air filtration system.
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a Therefore, the method of adding, changing Replace the cabin air filter according to
small amount of water vapor emission or checking the refrigerant is different from the replacement schedule found in the
from the air outlets may be noticed. This the method for Freon, CFC12 (R12) or “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This
condition is normal and does not indicate HFC134a (R134a). Consult your SUBARU schedule should be followed to maintain 4
any problem with the air conditioning dealer for service. Repairs needed as a the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
Climate control
system. result of using the wrong refrigerant are not extremely dusty conditions, the filter
covered under warranty. should be replaced more frequently. Have
& Air conditioner compressor your filter checked or replaced by your
shut-off when engine is SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use
heavily loaded only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
S04AD06
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, CAUTION
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air condi- Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
tioner operation whenever the accelerator following occurs, even if it is not yet
is fully depressed such as during rapid time to change the filter:
acceleration or when driving on a steep . Reduction of the airflow through
upgrade. the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
mance if not properly maintained.
– CONTINUED –

(270,1)
268 Air filtration system
& Replacing a cabin air filter and remove the hinge portion. When
S04AE01 doing this, be careful not to damage
1. Remove the glove box. the hinge.
NOTE
We recommend that you take measures
to protect the center console with
masking tape first, so that you avoid
scratching the center console with the
glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
1) Stoppers
(3) Push in the stoppers located on
both sides of the glove box and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will 2. Remove the cabin air filter according to
go. the following procedure in order to prevent
dust on the cabin air filter from falling to the
inside of its housing.
(1) Push in the four stoppers to unlock,
and then slowly pull out the cabin air
filter 0.4 in (1 cm) from the housing.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the (2) Completely pull out the cabin air
glove box. filter by gently tilting the front side of the
cabin air filter downward.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

(271,1)
Air filtration system 269
Climate control
3. Replace the cabin air filter element 4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
with a new one. the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.

(272,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(273,1)
Audio
5-1. Antenna ........................................................... 272 5-2. Audio set..........................................................272
S05
Roof antenna...................................................... 272

(274,1)
272 Antenna
5-1. Antenna 5-2. Audio set

S05AA S05AC
& Roof antenna If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine
S05AA04
SUBARU navigation system or audio
system, refer to the separate navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual for details.
The roof antenna is installed on the roof.

(275,1)
Interior equipment
6-1. Interior lights................................................... 274 6-5. Accessory power outlets ................................280
S06
Map lights .......................................................... 274 Use with the cigarette lighter (dealer option)....... 281
Dome light.......................................................... 274 6-6. USB power supply ..........................................282
Cargo area light and rear gate light How to use the USB power supply ..................... 283
(if equipped) ..................................................... 275 6-7. Ashtray (dealer option) ...................................284
OFF delay timer .................................................. 275 6-8. Floor mat..........................................................284
6-2. Sun visors ....................................................... 276 6-9. Shopping bag hook.........................................285
Sun visor extension plate ................................... 276 6-10. Cargo area cover (if equipped) ....................285
Vanity mirror....................................................... 277 Using the cover.................................................. 285
Vanity mirror with light (if equipped) ................... 277 To install the front part of the cover ................... 286
6-3. Overhead console........................................... 277 To remove the front cover .................................. 286
6-4. Storage compartment..................................... 278 To remove the cover housing ............................. 286 6
Glove box........................................................... 278 Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 287
Center console ................................................... 278 To install the cover housing ............................... 287
Cup holders........................................................ 278 6-11. Cargo tie-down hooks ...................................288
Bottle holders..................................................... 279

(276,1)
274 Interior lights
6-1. Interior lights ! Automatic illumination & Dome light

S06AA0603 S06AA01
S06AA When the door interlock switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the map lights illuminate
CAUTION automatically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors other than the rear
When leaving your vehicle, make gate is opened.
sure the lights are turned off to
. The doors are unlocked using the
avoid battery discharge.
keyless access function (if equipped).
Refer to “Locking and unlocking by holding
& Map lights the access key fob” FP114.
S06AA06 . The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” FP127.
. The ignition switch is turned from the 1) ON
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- 2) DOOR
tion. 3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
three positions.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically in the following cases.
1) Door interlock switch
. Any of the doors or the rear gate is
To turn on the map light, push the lens. opened.
To turn it off, push the lens again. . The doors or the rear gate are unlocked
using the keyless access function (if
equipped). Refer to “Locking and unlock-
ing by holding the access key fob” FP114.
. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked

(277,1)
Interior lights 275
using the remote keyless entry system. & OFF delay timer
Refer to “Remote keyless entry system” The following lights have an automatic
S06AA07
FP127. illumination function.

. The ignition switch is turned from the . Dome light
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion. . Map light
. Cargo area light and rear gate light (if
& Cargo area light and rear gate equipped)
light (if equipped) When the interior light switch is set to the
S06AA02
“DOOR” position, the light will automati-
cally turn on and turn off depending on the
locking and unlocking of the doors, the 6
opening and closing of the doors, as well
Rear gate light (if equipped)
as the position of the ignition switch.
Interior equipment
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off. NOTE
DOOR: The cargo area light illuminates The setting for the period of time in
automatically in the following cases. which the lights remain on (OFF delay
. Any of the doors or the rear gate is timer) can be changed by a SUBARU
opened. dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer
. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked for details. For models with the combi-
using the remote keyless entry system. nation meter display (color LCD), the
Cargo area light Refer to “Remote keyless entry system” setting can also be changed by operat-
1) ON FP127. ing the combination meter display
2) OFF (color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-
3) DOOR
. The ignition switch is turned to the cle Setting” FP196.
“LOCK”/“OFF” position.

(278,1)
276 Sun visors
6-2. Sun visors & Sun visor extension plate

S06AC01
S06AC
CAUTION
With the sun visor positioned over the side
To block out glare, swing down the visors. window, you can use the sun visor exten- Do not pull out the extension plate
To use the sun visor at a side window, sion plate to prevent glare through the gap with the sun visor positioned over
swing it down and move it sideways. between the sun visor and center pillar. To the windshield. The extension plate
use the extension plate, pull it toward the would obstruct your view of the
rear of the vehicle. When you have rearview mirror.
finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.

(279,1)
Overhead console 277
& Vanity mirror & Vanity mirror with light (if 6-3. Overhead console
S06AC03
equipped) S06BC
S06AC02
CAUTION
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
being temporarily blinded by the while the car is being driven to avoid
glare of bright light. being distracted by the light.
Interior equipment
To open the console, push on the lid lightly
and it will automatically open.
CAUTION
When your vehicle is parked in the
sun or on a warm day, the inside of
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the To use the vanity mirror, swing down the the overhead console heats up.
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. Avoid storing plastic or other heat-
The light beside the vanity mirror illumi- vulnerable or flammable articles
nates when the mirror cover is opened. such as a lighter in the overhead
console.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.

(280,1)
278 Storage compartment
6-4. Storage compartment & Glove box & Center console

S06AD01 S06AD02
S06AD The center console box provides a storage
space.
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment. 1) Rotate the key clockwise to lock.
2) Rotate the key counterclockwise to un-
lock. 1) Coin tray
To open the glove box, pull the handle. 2) Accessory tray
To close it, push the lid firmly upward. The top of the console can be used as an
armrest.
NOTE
. The emergency key is directional. If & Cup holders
the key cannot be inserted, change the S06AD16
direction that the grooved side is facing
and insert it again.
CAUTION
. For models with the “keyless access . Do not pick up a cup from the cup
with push-button start system”, use the holder or put a cup in the holder
emergency key to lock or unlock the while you are driving, as this may
glove box. distract you and lead to an acci-
dent.
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-

(281,1)
Storage compartment 279
erages, if hot, might scald you

and/or your passengers. Spilled
beverages may also damage up-
holstery or carpets.
. When a cup in the rear passen-
ger’s cup holder contains a bev-
erage, do not fold down the rear
seatback. Otherwise, the bever-
age could spill and, if the bev-
erage is hot, it could scald you
and/or your passengers.
6
Rear seat’s cup holder The bottle holder equipped on each door
Interior equipment
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest. trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
& Bottle holders
S06AD17
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
Front passenger’s cup holder . When placing a beverage in a
A dual cup holder is built into the center bottle holder, make sure it is
console. capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald
you and/or your passengers.

(282,1)
280 Accessory power outlets
6-5. Accessory power outlets driving.

S06AF
Electrical power (12 V DC) is available at
CAUTION any of the accessory power outlets when
the ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or
. Do not place any foreign objects, “ON” position. Accessory power outlets
especially metal ones, such as are located in the following places.
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not in
use.
. If the plug on your electric appli- Power outlet in the center console
ance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the Power outlet below the climate control
accessory power outlet for a long panel
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord on
Power outlet in the cargo area
your electrical appliance will not
interfere with shifting gears and You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-
operating the accelerator and ance by connecting it to an outlet.
brake pedals. If they do, do not The maximum power rating of an appli-
use the electrical appliance while ance that can be connected is 120 W.

(283,1)
Accessory power outlets 281
CAUTION & Use with the cigarette lighter

(dealer option)
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette To use the accessory power outlet as a
S06AF01
lighter in the accessory power cigarette lighter socket, purchase the

outlets. cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional
. Use only electrical appliances accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is
which are designed for 12 V DC. available from your SUBARU dealer.
The maximum power rating of an The cigarette lighter operates only when
appliance that can be connected the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
is 120 W. Do not use an appliance position.
which exceeds the indicated wat- To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
tage for each outlet. knob and wait a few moments. It will 6
. When using appliances con- automatically spring up when ready for
NOTE
Interior equipment
nected to two outlets simulta- use.
When the lid of the center console is
neously, the total power con-
closed, an opening remains between WARNING
sumed by them must not exceed
the center console and the lid to allow
120 W. Overloading the acces-
the power outlet in the center console To avoid being burned, never grasp
sory power outlet can cause a
to be used. Pass the cord of the the lighter by the end with the
short circuit. Do not use double
electrical appliance through this open- heating element. Doing so could
adapters or more than one elec-
ing. result in injury and could also da-
trical appliance.
mage the heating element.
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
. The electrical power socket is
originally designed to use a gen-
uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
plug. Do not use a non-genuine
– CONTINUED –

(284,1)
282 USB power supply
cigarette lighter plug in the sock- 6-6. USB power supply the connected device.
et. Doing so may cause a short- S06AY . If a device is connected for a long
circuit and overheating, resulting time when the engine is not
in a fire. CAUTION running, it may cause a dis-
. If the socket is ever used for a . The specification of a USB term- charged battery. Even when the
plug-in accessory such as a cell inal that can be used is the A- engine is running, we recom-
phone, that may damage the type. If a different specification of mend that you do not connect a
portion of the socket’s internal terminal is connected, power device for an unnecessarily long
mechanism that causes a cigar- supply or charging may not be time.
ette lighter plug to “pop out” after possible, or the device may mal- . Do not connect a malfunctioning
its lighter element is heated. function. device. Doing so may cause
Therefore, do not place a cigar- smoke and fire.
ette lighter plug in a socket that . There is no guarantee when a
has been used, even once, to connected device malfunctions
power a plug-in accessory. Doing or data is damaged. The connec- NOTE
so may cause the plug to stick tion of a device shall be per-
. The rated voltage of each USB
and overheat, creating a potential formed at your responsibility.
terminal is 5 V. For details about a
fire hazard. . To avoid an electric shock or a maximum rated power, refer to “How to
malfunction, observe the follow- use the USB power supply” FP283.
ing precautions. Before connecting a device, be sure to
– Do not connect a USB hub. read the instruction manual of the
– Do not insert any metal or device and check whether or not this
other foreign objects into the specification of the output is supported
USB terminal. by the device. If a device that requires
power exceeding the maximum rating
– Do not spill water or other is connected, power supply or charging
liquid on the USB terminal. may not be possible. Even if charging
. When you have connected a could be completed, the time required
cable, pay attention not to pull for charging may be longer than when
on it with your legs. Otherwise, it the genuine charger for that device is
may result in injury to you by used.
falling over, or a malfunction of . Depending on the device, charging

(285,1)
USB power supply 283
may be possible only when a special NOTE

cable is used. In this case, be sure to The maximum rated power charges
connect the device using the special depending on the number of the term-
cable. inal.
. When a device that communicates
with a PC is connected, power supply Number of USB Maximum rated
or charging may not be possible. terminal power
. When connect a device for charging,
disconnect the device promptly after DC 5 V/2.1 A*
charging is completed.
& How to use the USB power *: The available electricity of the two
supply USB terminals is a maximum of 4.2 A. 6
S06AY01 Console USB power supply (power supply
Interior equipment
function only) (if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position and a USB electronic device
is connected to the USB terminal, 5 V DC
power can be supplied to the device. Use
the USB terminal to use or charge an
electronic device.
When using the terminal, open the USB
power supply cover. After use, close the
USB power supply cover.
Front seat USB power supply (An audio

device can be connected and used)

(286,1)
284 Ashtray (dealer option)
6-7. Ashtray (dealer option) 6-8. Floor mat

S06AG S06AJ
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This could
cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the The portable ashtray can be installed in
cigarette may spread to another each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
cigarette butt and start a fire. locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
. Do not put flammable material in holders” FP278. For the locations of the CAUTION
the ashtray. bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders”
FP279. If the floor mat slips forward and
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette interferes with the movement of the
butts in the ashtray. When using the ashtray, open the lid of the pedals during driving, it could cause
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the an accident. Observe the following
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke. precautions to prevent the floor mat
NOTE from slipping forward.
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash- . Be sure to use a genuine
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended lent designed with grommets in
implement. the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed in its proper loca-
tion and is correctly secured on
its retaining pins.

(287,1)
Shopping bag hook 285
. Do not use more than one floor 6-9. Shopping bag hook 6-10. Cargo area cover (if
mat. S06AI equipped)
S06AK
CAUTION
The cargo area cover is provided for
Do not hang items on the shopping covering the cargo area and to protect its
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
more. detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the cover

S06AK01
Interior equipment
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
side floor.
The floor mat should be properly secured
using the built-in grommets, by placing the
grommets over the pins and pushing them
downward.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
To extend the cover, pull the end of the
cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.
– CONTINUED –

(288,1)
286 Cargo area cover
WARNING & To install the front part of the & To remove the front cover
S06AK09
cover 1. Push the front cover to the right side
Do not place anything on the ex- S06AK08
and shorten the bar.
tended cover. Putting excessive CAUTION
weight on the extended cover can 2. Remove the front cover.
break it and an object on the cover For models with a reclining rear
could tumble forward in the event of seatback, when reclining, move the & To remove the cover housing
S06AK02
a sudden stop or collision. This front part of the cover back so that it 1. Rewind the cover.
could cause serious injury. is not damaged.
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and re-
winding the cover. Scratches on the
stays could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result in
their inability to hold the rear gate
open.
2. Push the cover housing to the right

side and shorten it.
1. Align the right side of the front cover
3. Take it off the retainer.
with the triangle mark before fixing the
cover in place.
2. Align the left side of the front cover with
the triangle mark before fixing the cover in
place.
3. Push the front cover to the right side
and adjust the size of the bar as necessary.

(289,1)
Cargo area cover 287
& Stowage of the cargo area & To install the cover housing
S06AK05
cover
S06AK04
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
6
3. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
Interior equipment
area end. 1. Insert the protrusion located on the
right end of the sleeve into the recess of
the retainer.
1. Pull the strap to open the center part of
the cargo floor lid, and then remove the lid.
2. Remove the left and right parts of the
cargo floor lid.
– CONTINUED –

(290,1)
288 Cargo tie-down hooks
6-11. Cargo tie-down hooks

S06AM
2. Push the cover housing to the right

side and shorten the bar.
3. Insert the other protrusion into the The cargo area is equipped with several
recess of the other retainer. tie-down hooks so that cargo can be
secured with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the front tie-down hooks, turn
them down out of the storing recesses.
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that ex-
ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The
maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10
kg) per hook.

(291,1)
Starting and operating

7-1. Fuel .................................................................. 291 System maintenance .......................................... 307
S07
Fuel requirements............................................... 291 Certification for remote engine starter ................ 309
Fuel filler lid and cap .......................................... 292 7-7. Continuously variable transmission ..............309
7-2. State emission testing (U.S. only)................. 295 Continuously variable transmission features ...... 310
7-3. Preparing to drive........................................... 297 Select lever ........................................................ 311
7-4. Starting and stopping the engine (models Selection of manual mode (if equipped).............. 312
without push-button start system) .............. 297 Selection of “L” (if equipped) ............................. 314
Starting engine ................................................... 298 Shift lock function.............................................. 315
Stopping the engine ........................................... 299 Driving tips ........................................................ 316
7-5. Starting and stopping engine (models 7-8. SI-DRIVE...........................................................317
with push-button start system).................... 299 Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 317
Safety precautions.............................................. 299 Sport (S) mode................................................... 317
Operating range for push-button start system ..... 299 Sport Sharp (S#) mode ....................................... 317
Starting engine ................................................... 299 SI-DRIVE switches.............................................. 318 7
Stopping engine ................................................. 301 7-9. Power steering.................................................318
When access key fob does not operate Power steering warning light .............................. 318
properly............................................................ 302 Power steering system features ......................... 318
7-6. Remote engine start system 7-10. Braking ...........................................................319
(dealer option) ............................................... 302 Braking tips ....................................................... 319
Remote engine starter transceiver (fob) .............. 302 Brake system ..................................................... 320
Alternate operation method for models with Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 321
“keyless access with push-button start 7-11. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)......................321
system”............................................................ 306 ABS self-check .................................................. 322
Entering the vehicle while it is running via ABS warning light .............................................. 322
remote start...................................................... 306
7-12. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Entering the vehicle following remote engine
start shutdown ................................................. 307 system............................................................322
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the If EBD system malfunctions ............................... 322
vehicle ............................................................. 307 7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Control system ...............323
Remote transmitter program (Remote engine Safety precautions ............................................. 323
starter transceiver) ........................................... 307 System features ................................................. 324

(292,1)
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .......... 325 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator.................................... 356
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................. 325 BSD/RCTA warning indicator .............................. 357
7-14. X-MODE (if equipped)................................... 326 BSD/RCTA OFF switch ....................................... 357
To activate/deactivate the X-MODE ...................... 327 Certification for the BSD/RCTA ........................... 358
Hill descent control function (if equipped)........... 329 Handling of radar sensors .................................. 359
7-15. Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) 7-21. Reverse Automatic Braking System
(U.S.-spec. models)....................................... 330 (if equipped) ..................................................360
7-16. Parking your vehicle..................................... 332 Reverse Automatic Braking System overview ..... 360
Electronic parking brake ..................................... 332 Operating conditions.......................................... 361
Parking tips ........................................................ 337 Reverse Automatic Braking System operation .... 364
7-17. Auto Start Stop system ................................ 339 Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking
System operation ............................................... 339 system operation ............................................. 367
Displaying the Auto Start Stop system status ..... 344 Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF
setting ............................................................. 367
System warning.................................................. 344
RAB warning indicator ....................................... 368
7-18. Hill start assist system................................. 344 Handling of the sonar sensors ........................... 368
7-19. Cruise control (if equipped)......................... 346 7-22. Driver Monitoring System (if equipped) ......369
To set cruise control........................................... 346 User recognition function ................................... 373
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 348 Inattentive/drowsy driving warning ..................... 375
To turn off the cruise control .............................. 349 Driver Monitoring System indicator/warning ....... 377
To change the cruising speed ............................. 349 Using the Driver Monitoring System ................... 377
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 350 Registering and deleting a user .......................... 379
Cruise control set indicator light ......................... 350 Registering and deleting driver position
7-20. BSD/RCTA (if equipped) ............................... 351 personalization ................................................ 379
System features.................................................. 351 Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF settings......... 379
System operation ............................................... 353 Certification for Driver Monitoring System
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning U.S.-spec. models ............................................ 381
buzzer .............................................................. 355

(293,1)
Fuel 291
7-1. Fuel knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or you use such fuels, your emission control
S07AA
when you accelerate. Contact your system performance may deteriorate and
SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
CAUTION specified octane rating and your vehicle function indicator light may turn on. If this
knocks heavily or persistently. happens, return to your authorized
. Use of a fuel which is low in SUBARU dealer for service. If it is deter-
quality or use of an inappropriate ! RON mined that the condition is caused by the
S07AA010301
fuel additive may cause damage This octane rating is the Research Octane type of fuel used, repairs may not be
to the engine and/or fuel system. Number. covered by your warranty.
. Some gas stations, particularly ! AKI ! Gasoline for cleaner air
those in high altitude areas, offer S07AA010302 S07AA0107
fuels posted as regular octane This octane rating is the average of the Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-
gasoline with an octane rating Research Octane and Motor Octane num- ditives will help prevent deposits from
below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of bers and is commonly referred to as the forming in your engine and fuel system.
Anti Knock Index (AKI). This helps keep your engine in tune and
those fuels is not recommended.
your emission control system working
7
! Unleaded gasoline
properly, and is a way of doing your part

S07AA0104
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
& Fuel requirements to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
S07AA01 high-quality fuel with the proper detergent
The engine is designed to operate using nozzle. Under no circumstances should and other additives, you should never
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating leaded gasoline be used because it will need to add any fuel system cleaning
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher. damage the emission control system and agents to your fuel tank.
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Mexico only Many gasolines are now blended with
Add a bottle of genuine SUBARU fuel
S07AA0121
! Reformulated gasoline
S07AA0128 materials called oxygenates. Use of these
additive to the fuel every 9,000 miles SUBARU supports the use of reformulated fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
(15,000 km). Refer to an authorized gasoline when available. Reformulated Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
SUBARU dealer for details. gasoline has been blended to burn more (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your
cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions. vehicle, but should contain no more than
! Fuel octane rating
S07AA0103
! MMT 10% ethanol for the proper operation of
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-
S07AA0106
your SUBARU.
can cause persistent and heavy knocking,
which can damage the engine. Do not be cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo- Do not use any gasoline that contains
concerned if your vehicle sometimes pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If more than 10% ethanol, including from any
– CONTINUED –

(294,1)
292 Fuel
pump labeled, E15, E30, E50 or E85 . If undesirable driveability problems are & Fuel filler lid and cap
(which are only some examples of fuel experienced and you suspect they may be S07AA02
containing more than 10% ethanol). fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- ! Locations of the fuel filler lid
S07AA0202
line before seeking service at your
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer.
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle . Fuel system damage or driveability
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of problems which result from the use of
reformulated gasoline. improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station op- CAUTION
erators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel
sions. may damage the paint, be sure to
wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
As additional guidance, only use fuels Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
suited for your vehicle as explained in the is not covered under the SUBARU ! Refueling
S07AA0201
following description. Limited Warranty. Only one person should be involved in
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an refueling. Do not allow others to approach
octane rating no lower than that specified the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
in this manual. pipe while refueling is in progress.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is Be sure to observe any other precautions
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. that are posted at the service station.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
1. To unlock the fuel filler lid, perform one
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
of the operations below.
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol- – Press the unlock/disarm button on
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to the key fob.
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not – Press the unlock side of the power
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT door locking switch.
under these conditions. – Turn the ignition switch to “ACC” or
“LOCK”/“OFF”.

(295,1)
Fuel 293
2. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid. . When opening the cap, grasp it
3. The fuel filler lid opens automatically. firmly and turn it slowly to the left.
Open it further by hand. Do not remove the cap quickly.
Fuel may be under pressure and
WARNING spray out of the fuel filler neck,
especially in hot weather. If you
Before opening the fuel filler cap, hear a hissing sound while you
first touch the vehicle body or a are removing the cap, wait for the
metal portion of the fuel pump or sound to stop and then slowly
similar object to discharge any sta- open the cap to prevent fuel from
tic electricity that may be present on spraying out and creating a fire
your body. If your body is carrying hazard.
an electrostatic charge, there is a
possibility that an electric spark 1) Open
could ignite the fuel, which could 2) Close 7
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get 4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

back into the vehicle while refueling slowly counterclockwise.
is in progress.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position first and
then close all vehicle doors and
windows. Make sure that there
are no lighted cigarettes, open 5. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
flames or electrical sparks in the inside the fuel filler lid.
adjacent area. Only handle fuel
outdoors. Quickly wipe up any
spilled fuel.
– CONTINUED –

(296,1)
294 Fuel
WARNING CAUTION system, the fuel filler lid will be locked

or unlocked at the same time.
. When refueling, insert the fuel If you spill any fuel on the painted
nozzle securely into the fuel filler surface, rinse it off immediately. CAUTION
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not Otherwise, the painted surface
fully inserted, its automatic stop- could be damaged. . Never add any cleaning agents to
ping mechanism may not func- the fuel tank. The addition of a
tion, causing fuel to overflow the cleaning agent may cause da-
tank and creating a fire hazard. mage to the fuel system.
NOTE
. Stop refueling when the auto- . You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel . After refueling, turn the cap to the
matic stop mechanism on the gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler right until it clicks to ensure that
fuel nozzle activates. If you con- door (lid) is located on the right side of it is fully tightened. If the cap is
tinue to add fuel, temperature the vehicle. not securely tightened, fuel may
changes or other conditions . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened leak out while the vehicle is being
may cause fuel to overflow from until it clicks or if the tether is caught driven or fuel spillage could oc-
the tank and create a fire hazard. under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE cur in the event of an accident,
warning light/malfunction indicator creating a fire hazard.
6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
pump automatically stops. Do not add any ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in- surfaces of the vehicle. Because
more fuel. dicator light” FP168. fuel may damage the paint, be
7. Put the cap back on and turn it clock- . To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
wise until you hear a clicking noise. Be of the operations below. However if quickly. Paint damage caused by
certain not to catch the tether under the these operations are performed when spilled fuel is not covered under
cap while tightening. the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler lid the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
will not lock when it is subsequently . Always use a genuine SUBARU
CAUTION closed. fuel filler cap. If you use the
– Press the lock/arm button on the wrong cap, it may not fit or have
Make sure that the cap is tightened key fob. proper venting and your fuel tank
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
– Press the lock side of the power and emission control system
in the event of an accident.
door locking switch. may be damaged. It could also
. When the doors are locked or un- lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
8. Close the fuel filler lid completely. locked using the automatic door lock

(297,1)
State emission testing (U.S. only) 295
. Immediately put fuel in the tank 7-2. State emission testing

whenever the low fuel warning (U.S. only)
light illuminates. Engine misfires S07AB
as a result of an empty tank could
cause damage to the engine. WARNING
Continuing to operate your vehi-
cle at an extremely low fuel level Only use a four-wheel dynamometer
may result in a reduction of when testing an All-Wheel Drive
engine performance. (AWD) model.
Testing of an AWD model must
! If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened NEVER be performed on a single
S07AA0203
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-
malfunction or a dead battery, it can be 1) Clip ing to do so will result in uncon-
opened from the cargo area. trolled vehicle movement and may
2. Remove the orange knob from the clip. cause an accident or injuries to
7
persons nearby.

CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remem-
ber to tell your inspection or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
1. Remove the access cover at the right-
3. Pull the orange knob to unlock the fuel improper testing is not covered
side of the cargo area trim using flat-head
filler lid. under the SUBARU Limited War-
screwdriver.
ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
– CONTINUED –

(298,1)
296 State emission testing (U.S. only)
its contractors or licensees. served, there are no stored diagnostic on a dynamometer, tell your emission
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness inspector not to place your SUBARU
California and a number of federal states monitors are all complete. AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to . A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
inspect your vehicle’s emission control the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not sion damage will result.
system. If your vehicle does not pass this properly operating (light is illuminated or is The U.S. Environmental Protection
test, some states may deny renewal of not working due to faulty LED [Light Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
your vehicle’s registration. Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more dynamometers in their emission testing
diagnostic trouble codes stored in the program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
vehicle’s computer. AWD vehicles from the portion of the
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi- . A state emission inspection may reject testing program that involves a two-wheel
fied emission inspectors will inspect the (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of dynamometer. There are some states that
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT use four-wheel dynamometers in their
part of the state emission inspection READY” is greater than one. If the testing program. When properly used, this
process. The OBDII system is designed vehicle’s battery has been recently re- equipment should not damage a SUBARU
to detect engine and transmission pro- placed or disconnected, the OBDII system AWD vehicle.
blems that might cause the vehicle emis- inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this Under no circumstances should the rear
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
condition, the vehicle driver should be wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a should the driveshaft be disconnected in
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
few days to reset the readiness monitors an attempt to bypass AWD for state
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
and return for an emission re-inspection. emission testing. An AWD vehicle must
bia have implemented emission inspection
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles be tested using an AWD dynamometer
of the OBDII system.
should contact their SUBARU dealer for with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of service.
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal- Some states still use dynamometers in
function indicator light (MIL) and an ex- their emission inspection program. A
amination of the OBDII system with an dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
electronic scan tool. testing device that allows your vehicle’s
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
inspection if proper operation of the one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-

(299,1)
Preparing to drive 297
7-3. Preparing to drive CAUTION 7-4. Starting and stopping the

S07AC engine (models without push-
Trapping small animals in the cool-
You should perform the following checks
ing fan and belts of the engine may
button start system)
and adjustments every day before you S07BD
start driving. result in a malfunction. Check that
no small animal enters the engine CAUTION
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
compartment or under the vehicle
lights are clean and unobstructed.
before starting the engine. Do not operate the starter motor
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper continuously for more than 10 sec-
inflation. NOTE onds. If the engine fails to start after
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of operating the starter for 5 to 10
. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake
leaks. seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels
more before trying again.
4. Check that no small animals enter the should be checked daily, weekly or at
engine compartment. fuel stops. 7
5. Check that the hood and rear gate are . When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai- NOTE

fully closed. ler hitch (dealer option)” FP398 It may be difficult to start the engine
6. Check the adjustment of the seat. when the battery has been discon-
7. Check the adjustment of the inside and nected and reconnected (for mainte-
outside mirrors. nance or other purposes). This diffi-
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your culty is caused by the electronically
passengers have fastened their seatbelts. controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
9. Check the operation of the warning function. To overcome it, keep the
and indicator lights when the ignition ignition switch in the “ON” position
switch is turned to the “ON” position. for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
– CONTINUED –

(300,1)
298 Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)
& Starting engine . When starting the engine, be sure 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
S07BD01
to sit in the driver’s seat (except sories.
! General precautions when starting when using the remote engine 3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
engine start system). position (preferably the “P” position).
S07BD0105
The starter motor will only operate when
WARNING the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
NOTE
. Never start the engine from out- 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel- position and check the operation of the
side the vehicle (except when eration immediately after the engine
using the remote engine start warning and indicator lights. Refer to
has started. “Warning and indicator” FP164.
system). It may result in an acci- . For a short time after the engine has
dent. started, the engine speed is kept high. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
. Do not leave the engine running When the warm-up is completed, the position without depressing the accelera-
in locations with poor ventilation, engine speed lowers automatically. tor pedal. Release the key immediately
such as a garage and indoors. . On rare occasions, it may be difficult after the engine has started.
The exhaust gas may enter the to start the engine depending on the If the engine does not start, try the
vehicle or indoors, and it may fuel and the usage condition (repeated following procedure.
result in carbon monoxide poi- driving of a distance in which the (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
soning. engine has not warmed up sufficiently). “LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at
. Do not start the engine near dry In such a case, it is recommended that least 10 seconds. After checking that
foliage, paper, or other flammable you change to a different brand of fuel. the parking brake is firmly set, turn the
substances. The exhaust pipe . On rare occasions, transient knock- ignition switch to the “START” position
and exhaust emissions can cre- ing may be heard from the engine when while depressing the accelerator pedal
ate a fire hazard at high tempera- the accelerator is operated rapidly such slightly (approximately a quarter of the
tures. as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel- full stroke). Release the accelerator
eration. This is not a malfunction. pedal as soon as the engine starts.
. The engine starts more easily when (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
CAUTION the headlights, air conditioner and rear the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/
window defogger are turned off. “OFF” position and wait for at least 10
. If the engine is stopped while . Do not shift the select lever while the seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
driving, the catalyst may over- starter is cranking. erator pedal and turn the ignition
heat and burn. switch to the “START” position. If the
1. Apply the parking brake.

(301,1)
Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 299
engine starts, quickly release the ac- & Stopping the engine 7-5. Starting and stopping
celerator pedal. S07BD02
The ignition switch should be turned off engine (models with push-
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn only when the vehicle is stopped and the
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/ button start system)
engine is idling. S07BE
“OFF” position. After waiting for 10
seconds or longer, turn the ignition
& Safety precautions
WARNING S07BE06
switch to the “START” position without Refer to “Safety precautions” FP111.
depressing the accelerator pedal. Do not stop the engine when the
(4) If the engine still does not start, vehicle is moving. This will cause & Operating range for push-
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer loss of power to the power steering button start system
S07BE01
for assistance. and the brake booster, making steer- Refer to “Operating range for push-button
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator ing and braking more difficult. It start system” FP158.
lights have turned off after the engine has could also result in accidental acti-
started. The fuel injection system auto- vation of the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- & Starting engine
matically lowers the idle speed as the tion on the ignition switch, causing S07BE03 7
engine warms up. the steering wheel to lock.
WARNING

While the engine is warming up, make sure
. There are some general precau-
that the select lever is in the “P” or “N”
tions when starting the engine.
position and that the parking brake is
Carefully read the precautions
applied.
described in “Starting engine”
CAUTION FP298.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
If you restart the engine while the ton ignition switch flashes in
vehicle is moving, shift the select green after the engine has
lever into the “N” position. Do not started, never drive the vehicle.
attempt to place the select lever of a The steering is still locked, and it
moving vehicle into the “P” position. may result in an accident.
– CONTINUED –

(302,1)
300 Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
CAUTION NOTE a case, refer to “Starting engine”

. For a short time after the engine has FP428.
. When the operation indicator on started, the engine speed is kept high. . If the vehicle battery is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch is When the warm-up is completed, the the steering cannot be unlocked.
flashing in orange, there may be a engine speed lowers automatically. Charge the battery.
malfunction with the vehicle. . When the push-button ignition . Do not shift the select lever while the
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme- switch is pressed while depressing starter is cranking.
diately. the brake pedal, the engine starter
. If the indicator on the push-but- operates for a maximum of 10 seconds.
ton ignition switch is flashing in After starting the engine, the starter
green after the engine has stops automatically.
started, it means that the steering . When the push-button ignition
is still locked. Depress the brake switch is pressed while depressing
pedal while moving the steering the brake pedal, the engine can be
wheel to the right and left, and started regardless of the status of the
press the push-button ignition push-button ignition switch.
switch. . If the security indicator light illumi-
nates when you attempt to start the
. Do not continue pushing the engine but the engine does not start,
push-button ignition switch for press the push-button ignition switch
more than 10 seconds. Doing so to switch the power to “OFF” and then 1) Operation indicator
could cause a malfunction. If the try to start the engine again. 2) Push-button ignition switch
engine does not start, stop push- . If the engine does not start, press the
ing the push-button ignition When the push-button ignition switch is
push-button ignition switch without pressed while depressing the brake pedal,
switch. Instead, press the push- depressing the brake pedal to switch
button ignition switch without the engine will start. The starting proce-
the power to “OFF”. Then, while de- dure for the engine is as follows.
depressing the brake pedal to pressing the brake pedal more force-
switch the power status to fully, press the push-button ignition
“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then switch.
push the push-button ignition . The engine start procedures may not
switch to start the engine. function depending on the radio wave
conditions around the vehicle. In such

(303,1)
Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 301
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the . When the engine is not started, the er foot pressure will be required
driver’s seat. brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a on the brake pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake. case, depress the brake pedal more The power steering system will
3. Shift the select lever into the “P” forcefully than usual. Check that the not operate either. A greater force
position. The engine can also start when operation indicator on the push-button will be required to steer, and it
the select lever is in the “N” position, ignition switch turns green, and press may result in an accident.
however, for safety reasons, start in the “P” the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine. . If the engine stops during driving,
position. do not operate the push-button
4. Depress the brake pedal until the & Stopping engine ignition switch or open any of the
operation indicator on the push-button S07BE04 doors until the vehicle is stopped
ignition switch turns green. When starting 1. Stop the vehicle completely. in a safe location. It is dangerous
with the select lever in the “N” position, the 2. Move the select lever to the “P” because the steering lock may be
indicator does not turn green. position. activated. Stop the vehicle in a
5. While depressing the brake pedal, 3. Press the push-button ignition switch. safe place, and contact a
press the push-button ignition switch. The engine will stop, and the power will be SUBARU dealer immediately.
7
switched off.

NOTE
CAUTION
. While pressing the select lever but- WARNING
ton in, the indicator on the push-button . Do not stop the engine while the
ignition switch will not turn green even . Do not touch the push-button select lever is in a position other
when the select lever is in the “P” ignition switch during driving. than the “P” position.
position. When the push-button ignition . If the engine is stopped while the
. In case the engine does not start by switch is operated as follows, select lever is in a position other
the normal engine start procedure, the engine will stop. than the “P” position, the power
move the select lever to the “P” posi- – The switch is pressed and held will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is
tion, and switch the power to “ACC”. for 3 seconds or longer. left in this condition, the battery
Depress the brake pedal, and press the
– The switch is pressed briefly 3 may be discharged.
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only times or more in succession.
use this engine start procedure in case When the engine stops, the brake
of emergency. booster will not function. A great-
– CONTINUED –

(304,1)
302 Remote engine start system (dealer option)
NOTE 7-6. Remote engine start mote engine start system.

Although you can stop the engine by system (dealer option)
operating the push-button ignition NOTE
S07AZ
switch, do not stop the engine during . The length of time for which it is
driving except in an emergency. WARNING acceptable to allow the engine to
remain idling may be bound by local
& When access key fob does . There are some general precau- laws and regulations. Check the local
not operate properly tions when starting the engine. rules when using the remote engine
S07BE05 Carefully read the precautions start system.
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key
described in “General precau- . When taking your vehicle in for
tions when starting engine” service, it is recommended that you
FP298. inform the service personnel that your
. Do not remote start a vehicle in an vehicle is equipped with a remote
enclosed environment (e.g. engine start system.
closed garage). Prolonged opera-
tion of a motor vehicle in an & Remote engine starter trans-
enclosed environment can cause ceiver (fob)
a harmful build-up of carbon S07AZ21
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is

harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of carbon monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
The remote engine start system allows you

to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
In addition, the remote engine start system
can activate the heater or air conditioner,
providing you with a comfortable cabin
upon entry. For more details, refer to the 1) Fob button
Owner’s Manual supplement for the re-

(305,1)
Remote engine start system (dealer option) 303
! Starting the engine . The side marker lights, tail lights, and ! Remote start safety features
S07AZ2101
parking lights flash once. S07AZ2103
NOTE For safety and security reasons, the
All vehicle doors (including rear gate) While the engine is idling via the remote remote engine start system will prevent
and the engine hood must be closed engine start system, the following will starting (or stop the engine if running) and
prior to activating the remote engine occur. sound the horn twice if any of the following
start system. Any open entry point will . The side marker lights, tail lights, and conditions is detected. In addition, the fob
prevent starting or cause the engine to parking lights remain illuminated. will flash and beep 3 times.
stop. . The fob button flashes once every 3 . The total run-time has exceeded 20
seconds. minutes.
The remote engine start system is acti- . The brake pedal is depressed.
. The power windows are disabled.
vated by pressing the fob button on your . A key is in the ignition switch.
remote engine starter transceiver (fob) If the engine turns over but does not start . The engine hood is open.
twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within (or starts and stalls) the remote engine . The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
operating range of the system and the start start system will power off and then 7
rpm.
request is received, the following will attempt to start the engine 3 additional
occur. . The security alarm is triggered.

times. The system will not attempt to
. The fob flashes and beeps once. restart the engine if it determines a vehicle . The select lever is not in the “P”
malfunction is preventing starting. If the position.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and engine does not start after 3 additional If the system detects any door (including
parking lights flash once. attempts, the remote engine start request the rear gate) open during operation, it will
will be aborted. prevent starting or stop the engine, and
If the fob is not within range (the user is too ! Stopping the engine sound the horn and flash side marker
far away from the vehicle), the fob will S07AZ2102
lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.
indicate two long flashes without beeping. Press and hold the fob button for at least 2
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will In addition to the items above, if the
The system will check certain safety flash and beep three times, indicating the vehicle’s engine management system
preconditions before starting, and if all engine has stopped. If the stop request is determines there is a safety risk due to a
conditions are met, the engine will start not received (for example, if the user is too vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
within 5 seconds. After the engine starts, far away from the vehicle), the fob will power down and the horn will sound 3
the following will occur. continue to flash once every 3 seconds. times.
. The fob flashes and beeps twice. The system will automatically stop the
. The horn sounds once. engine after 15 minutes.
– CONTINUED –

(306,1)
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine starter activation
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine starter acti-
vation (the security indicator light on
the combination meter is not flashing),
the alarm system will remain disarmed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
! Remote start operation - fob con-
firmation
S07AZ2104
Your remote engine starter fob is a
bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
system operation with several different
visual and audible indications. The fob’s
LED-backlit button and internal piezo
buzzer will indicate status of the system
using the following flash and beep se-
quences, provided the fob is within opera-
tional range of the system.

(307,1)
Fob Indication
Precondition Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed Continuous while button is — The fob is transmitting an RF signal
held down
1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob 1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
button twice within 3 sec
3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started
2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
Engine idling by remote engine start operation Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety
3 flashes 3 beeps reasons (see sections above)
7
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and 3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request

holding fob button for at least 2 sec. 1 flash every 3 sec — Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
– CONTINUED –

(308,1)
& Alternate operation method . The engine hood is closed. & Entering the vehicle while it is
for models with “keyless ac- . The push-button ignition switch is in the running via remote start
cess with push-button start “OFF” position. S07AZ03
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
system” ! When starting the engine keyless access function (if equipped) or
S07AZ22 S07AZ2202
To start the engine with remote engine remote keyless entry system.
start system, briefly press the lock button If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked manu-
twice within 2 seconds, then press and ally using the key, the vehicle’s alarm
hold the lock button for 3 seconds. system will trigger (if the alarm system is
armed prior to activating the remote
1. Press the lock button briefly. The
engine start system) and the engine will
hazard warning flashers then flash once
turn off. Perform either of the following
and the keyless buzzer chirps once.
procedures to disarm the alarm system.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button Refer to “Alarm system” FP134.
briefly again. The hazard warning flashers . Insert the key into the ignition switch
then flash once again, and the keyless and turn it to the “ON” position (models
buzzer chirps once again. without “keyless access with push-
3. After step 2, immediately press and button start system”).
Access key fob hold the lock button. The hazard warning . Turn the push-button ignition switch
1) Lock button flashers then flash three times, and the to the “ACC” or “ON” position (models
horn will honk once. with “keyless access with push-button
An access key fob can be used as the
remote engine start transmitter. Operate 4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3, start system”).
the lock button to start or stop the engine release the lock button. The engine will . Press any button on the access key
as follows. then start successfully. fob/remote keyless entry transmitter.
! Before starting the engine 2. Enter the vehicle.
! When stopping the engine
S07AZ2201 S07AZ2203 3. The engine will shut down when any
Before using the remote engine start Press and hold the lock button to stop the door or rear gate is opened.
system to start the engine, confirm the engine with remote engine start system.
following conditions. 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch
! Remote start safety features and turn to the “START” position to restart
. The select lever is in the “P” position. S07AZ2204
For detailed information, refer to “Remote the engine.
. All doors including the rear gate are
start safety features” FP303.
closed.

(309,1)
& Entering the vehicle following entire process). & System maintenance
S07AZ09
remote engine start shut- 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
NOTE
down 3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
For remote engine starter transceiver:
S07AZ10
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is “LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/
“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”, In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
opened by the remote keyless entry replaced, discharged or disconnected,
transmitter within a few seconds immedi- then back to “ON” again and leave the
ignition “ON” throughout the programming it will be necessary to start the vehicle a
ately following remote engine start shut- minimum of one time using the key
down. process.
prior to activating the remote engine
4. The system will flash the side marker
start system. This is required to allow
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling lights, tail lights and parking lights and
the vehicle electronic systems to re-
the interior of the vehicle honk the horn three times, indicating that
synchronize.
S07AZ04 the system has entered the transmitter
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- learn mode. ! Changing the battery
perature controls to the desired setting and 5. Press and release the “ ” button on S07AZ0901
operation. After the system starts the the transmitter that you want to program. 7
engine, the heater or air conditioning will CAUTION
6. The system will flash the side marker

activate and heat or cool the interior to . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
your setting. or in the remote engine start
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
system has learned the transmitter. Upon transmitter when replacing the
& Remote transmitter program successful programming, the remote start battery.
(Remote engine starter confirmation transmitter button will flash . Be careful not to damage the
transceiver) one time. printed circuit board in the re-
S07AZ13
New transmitters can be programmed to 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional mote engine start transmitter
the remote engine start system in the transmitters (the system will accept up to when replacing the battery.
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, eight transmitters). . Be careful not to allow children to
damaged or additional transmitters are 8. The system will exit the transmitter touch the battery and any re-
desired (the system will accept up to eight learn mode if the key is turned to the moved parts; children could
transmitters). New remote engine start “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed swallow them.
transmitters can be programmed accord- or after 2 minutes.
ing to the following procedure. . There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
is used. Replace only with the
door must remain open throughout the
– CONTINUED –

(310,1)
same or equivalent type of bat-

tery.
. Battery should not be exposed to
excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
For models with “keyless access with

Perform the procedure described in “Re-
placing battery of access key fob” FP484.
For remote engine starter transceiver:
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)
supplied in your remote engine start
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-
transmitter should last approximately one
cated on the back side lower left corner of
year, depending on usage. When the
the transmitter.
battery begin to weaken, you will notice a
decrease in range (distance from the 2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
vehicle that your remote control operates). transmitter halves apart using a small flat-
Follow the instructions below to change head screwdriver.
the remote engine start transmitter battery.
3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove the
battery and replace with new one. Be sure
to observe the (+) sign on the old battery
before removing it to ensure that the new
battery is inserted properly (battery “+”

(311,1)
Continuously variable transmission 309
should be pointed away from the transmit- ! Canada-spec. models 7-7. Continuously variable
ter circuit board on battery). S07AZ2302
transmission
4. Carefully snap the case halves back S07BG
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system. WARNING
& Certification for remote en- Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
gine starter position into the “D” or “R” position
S07AZ23
while depressing the accelerator
! U.S.-spec. models pedal. This may cause the vehicle
S07AZ2301
to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
FCC WARNING CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex- 7
pressly approved by the party re- . Shift into the “P” or “R” position

sponsible for compliance could void only after the vehicle is comple-
the user’s authority to operate the tely stopped. Shifting while the
equipment. vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
. Do not race the engine for more
NOTE than 5 seconds in any position
This device complies with part 15 of the except the “N” or “P” position
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the when the brake is applied or
following two conditions: (1) This de- when chocks are used with the
vice may not cause harmful interfer- wheels. This may cause the
ence, and (2) this device must accept transmission fluid to overheat.
any interference received, including . Never move the vehicle rearward
interference that may cause undesired by inertia with the select lever set
operation. in a forward driving position or
move the vehicle forward by
inertia with the select lever set
– CONTINUED –

(312,1)
310 Continuously variable transmission
in the “R” position. Doing so may & Continuously variable trans- long, steep hill, the engine speed or the
result in an unexpected accident mission features vehicle speed may automatically be
or malfunction. S07BG06 reduced. This is not a malfunction. This
The continuously variable transmission is results from the engine control func-
. Do not shift from the “D” position electronically controlled and provides an
into the “R” position or vice versa tion maintaining the cooling perfor-
infinite number of forward speeds and 1 mance of the vehicle. The engine and
until the vehicle has completely reverse speed. It also has a manual mode
stopped. Such shifting may vehicle speed will return to a normal
or an “L” position. speed when the engine is able to
cause damage to the transmis-
sion. NOTE maintain the optimum cooling perfor-
mance after the heavy load decreases.
. When parking the vehicle, first . When the engine coolant tempera-
Driving under a heavy load must be
securely apply the parking brake ture is still low, the transmission will
performed with extreme care. Do not try
and then place the select lever in upshift or downshift at higher engine
to pass a vehicle in front when driving
the “P” position. Do not park for a speeds than when the coolant tempera-
on an uphill slope while towing.
long time with the select lever in ture is sufficiently high in order to
. The continuously variable transmis-
any other position as doing so shorten the warm-up time and improve
sion is a chain type system that pro-
could result in a dead battery. driveability. The gearshift timing will
vides superior transmission efficiency
automatically shift to the normal timing
for maximum fuel economy. At times,
after the engine has warmed up.
depending on varying driving condi-
. Immediately after transmission fluid
tions, a chain operating sound may be
is replaced, you may feel that the
heard that is characteristic of this type
transmission operation is somewhat
of system.
unusual. This results from invalidation
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving a CVT model under
continuous heavy load conditions such
as when towing a camper or climbing a

(313,1)
& Select lever depressed hard.

S07BG01
! P (Park)
S07BG0101
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. In this position, the
transmission is mechanically locked to
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the mechanical friction of the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P”
1) Models with “L” position position to any other position, you should
Type A 2) Models with manual mode depress the brake pedal fully then move 7
1) Select lever button : With the brake pedal depressed, shift the select lever. This prevents the vehicle

while pressing the select lever button from lurching when it is started.
in. ! R (Reverse)
S07BG0102
: Shift while pressing the select lever This position is for backing the vehicle. To
button in. shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
: Shift without pressing the select lever vehicle completely then move the lever to
button. the “R” position while pressing the select
The select lever has four positions, “P”, lever button in.
“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “L” or “M”
When the ignition switch has been turned
gate.
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, movement
NOTE of the select lever from the “N” to “R”
position is possible for a limited time period
For some models, to protect the engine
by depressing the brake pedal, and then it
while the select lever is in the “P” or “N”
Type B becomes impossible. For details, refer to
position, the engine is controlled so
1) Select lever button “Shift lock function” FP315.
that the engine speed may not become
too high even if the accelerator pedal is
– CONTINUED –

(314,1)
! N (Neutral) NOTE the transmission will temporarily switch to

S07BG0103
This position is for restarting a stalled If the select lever is in the “N” position the manual mode. In this mode, you can
engine. In this position, the transmission is when you stop the engine for parking, shift into any gear position using the shift
neutral, meaning that the wheels and you may not subsequently be able to paddles. For details about the manual
transmission are not locked. Therefore, move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If mode, refer to “Selection of manual mode”
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the this happens, turn the ignition switch to FP312. Once the vehicle speed stabi-
slightest incline unless the parking brake the “ON” position. You will then be able lizes, the transmission will switch from the
or foot brake is applied. to move the select lever to the “P” manual mode back to the “D” position for
position. normal driving.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in ! D (Drive) & Selection of manual mode (if
S07BG0104
this condition. This position is for normal driving. The equipped)
transmission shifts automatically and con- S07BG02
WARNING tinuously into a suitable gear according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration you
Do not drive the vehicle with the
require. Also, while driving up and down a
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
hill, the transmission assists and controls
position. Engine braking has no
the driving performance and engine brak-
effect in this condition and the risk
ing while corresponding to the road grade.
of an accident is consequently in-
creased. When more acceleration is required in the
“D” position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
In this case, the transmission will operate
like a conventional automatic transmis-
sion. When you release the pedal, the Type A
transmission will return to the original gear
position.
For models with manual mode, if one of the
shift paddles behind the steering wheel is
operated while driving in the “D” position,

(315,1)
Type B Select lever/gear position indicator (type Select lever/gear position indicator (type
A) B) 7
With the vehicle either moving or station-
1) Upshift indicator 1) Upshift indicator
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
2) Downshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator

position to the “M” position to select the 3) Gear position indicator 3) Gear position indicator
manual mode.
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate.
The gear position indicator shows the
currently selected gear in the following
range.
. 1st-to-7th-gear range
The upshift and downshift indicators show
when a gear shift is possible. When the
upshift indicator “ ” illuminates, upshift-
ing is possible. When the downshift in-
dicator “ ” illuminates, downshifting is
– CONTINUED –

(316,1)
possible. When both indicators illuminate, CAUTION and let the engine idle until the warning
upshifting and downshifting are both pos- light turns off.
sible. When the vehicle stops (for exam- Do not place or hang anything on the . For models with SI-DRIVE, by select-
ple, at traffic signals), the downshift in- shift paddles. Doing so may result in ing Sport Sharp (S#) mode, upshifting
dicator turns off. accidental gear shifting. will not occur automatically. According
to the road conditions, shift change
Gearshifts can be performed using the manually so that the tachometer needle
shift paddle behind the steering wheel. NOTE does not enter the red zone. Also, if the
Please read the following points care- engine revolutions reach the specified
fully and bear them in mind when using number, the fuel supply will be cut. In
the manual mode. this case, perform shift up operation.
. If you attempt to shift down when the
engine speed is too high, i.e., when a & Selection of “L” (if equipped)
downshift would push the tachometer S07BG03
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will

be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
To upshift to the next higher gear position, example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear sion.
position, pull the shift paddle that has “–” . The transmission automatically se-
indicated on it. lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
To deselect the manual mode, return the moving. Type A
select lever to the “D” position from the “M” . If the temperature of the transmis-
position. sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi-
nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe location

(317,1)
illuminate on the combination meter. ! Shift lock release

S07BG0401
To deselect “L”, move the select lever to If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the “D” position. the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position then move the select lever to the
& Shift lock function “P” position with the select lever button
S07BG04 pressed and brake pedal depressed.
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever. If the select lever does not move after
. The select lever cannot be operated performing the above procedure, perform
unless the ignition switch is turned to the the following steps.
“ON” position and the brake pedal is . When the select lever cannot be
depressed. shifted from “P” to “N”:
. The select lever cannot be moved from Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
Type B the “P” position to any other position before lock release button” FP316.
“L” is for using engine braking when going the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the . When the select lever cannot be 7
down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move brake pedal first, and then operate the shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:

the select lever from the “D” position to the select lever. Within 60 seconds after placing the ignition
“L” position. . Only the “P” position allows you to turn switch in the “ACC” position, move the
the ignition switch from the “ACC” position select lever to the “P” position with the
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove select lever button pressed and brake
the key from the ignition switch. pedal depressed.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select If you must perform the above procedure,
lever is in the “N” position, the select lever the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
may not be moved to the “P” position after system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
a period of time. Therefore, move the SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
select lever to the “P” position with the as possible.
brake pedal depressed soon after the If the select lever does not move after
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/ performing the above procedure, refer to
“OFF” position. “Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” FP316.
When selected, the indicator “L” will
– CONTINUED –

(318,1)
! Shift lock release using the shift & Driving tips

S07BG05
lock release button
S07BG0402
Perform the following procedure to release CAUTION
the shift lock.
If the accelerator and brake pedals
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the are depressed at the same time,
engine. driving torque may be restrained.
This is not a malfunction.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Make sure to apply the parking brake
3. While depressing the brake pedal, when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
insert a screwdriver into the hole, press vehicle with only the mechanical friction of
the shift lock release button using a the transmission.
screwdriver, and then move the select . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
lever. position on an uphill grade by using the “D”
position. Use the brake instead.
If the select lever does not move after
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver performing the above procedure, the shift
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as
This phenomenon does not indicate a
release button is located under the shift soon as possible.
malfunction.
lock cover.

(319,1)
SI-DRIVE 317
7-8. SI-DRIVE efficiency and smooth driveability without & Sport Sharp (S#) mode
S07BC
stress. Power delivery is moderate during S07BC04
acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency. ! For maximum performance driving

SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive) S07BC0401
works to maximize engine performance, This is ideal for around-town driving and
control and efficiency. situations that do not require full power
output. It provides better control in difficult
This system consists of two modes:
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
(S#). By operating the SI-DRIVE switches,
response.
the character of the power unit changes.
& Intelligent (I) mode & Sport (S) mode

S07BC03
S07BC02
! For all-around performance driving
! For smooth, efficient performance S07BC0301
driving
S07BC0201 7

For sports-minded drivers, the Sport
Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating
level of engine performance and control.
The throttle becomes more responsive
regardless of the engine speed. Delivering
maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is
ideal for tackling twisting roads and for
merging or overtaking other vehicles on
the freeway with confidence.
The Sport (S) mode provides the engine

power desired by those who want to make
The linear acceleration characteristic of the driving experience their own personal
the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal adventure.
driving usage.
The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-
balanced performance with greater fuel
– CONTINUED –

(320,1)
318 Power steering
& SI-DRIVE switches “S” switch. 7-9. Power steering

S07BC01
. To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, S07AJ
press the “S#” switch. & Power steering warning light
S07AJ10
NOTE
. While the engine is cool, you cannot
change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.
. The next time you turn on the engine,
after you turned off the engine in the
Sport (S) mode or Sport Sharp (S#)
mode, the SI-DRIVE mode changes to
the Intelligent (I) mode.
. While the engine is running, if the
CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-
Type A SI-DRIVE switches tion indicator light illuminates, the SI-
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)
mode (type A) or Sport Sharp (S#) mode
(type B). In this case, it is not possible
to change to another mode. & Power steering system fea-
. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators tures
S07AJ11
blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be The vehicle is equipped with an electric
malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU power steering system. When the ignition
dealer. switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
power steering warning light on the com-
bination meter illuminates to inform the
driver that the warning system is function-
ing properly. Then, if the engine started,
the warning light turns off to inform the
Type B SI-DRIVE switches driver that the steering power assist is
operational.
. To select the Intelligent (I) mode, press
the “I” switch.
. To select the Sport (S) mode, press the

(321,1)
Braking 319
CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and 7-10. Braking

the power steering control system has S07AK
When the power steering warning an opportunity to cool down. However, & Braking tips
light is illuminated, there may be if the power steering is operated in a S07AK01
more resistance when the steering non-standard way which causes power WARNING
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to assist limitation to occur too frequently,
the nearest SUBARU dealer and this may result in a malfunction of the Never rest your foot on the brake
have the vehicle inspected immedi- power steering control system. pedal while driving. This can cause
ately. dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the ! When the brakes get wet
following ways, the power steering S07AK0101
control system may temporarily limit When driving in rain or after washing the 7
the power assist in order to prevent the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be

system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
overheating. at a safe speed while lightly depressing the
brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the ! Use of engine braking
S07AK0102
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low Remember to make use of engine braking
speeds, such as while frequently turn- in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing the steering wheel during parallel ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
parking. the brakes may start working improperly
. The steering wheel remains in the because of brake fluid overheating,
fully turned position for a long period of caused by overheated brake pads. To help
time. prevent this, shift to a lower gear to get
stronger engine braking.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However, this is ! Braking when a tire is punctured
S07AK0103
not a malfunction. Normal steering Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
force will be restored after the steering when a tire is punctured. This could cause
– CONTINUED –

(322,1)
320 Braking
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep ! Supplemental booster function Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
driving straight ahead while gradually when vacuum pressure fails It assists the brake power when the driver
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the S07AK0205
While the ignition switch is turned “ON” cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
road to a safe place. and the engine is running, the supple- and the brake power is insufficient.
mental booster function operates when the Brake assist generates the brake power
& Brake system brake booster performance is decreased according to the speed at which the driver
S07AK02
due to insufficient vacuum boost. depresses the brake pedal.
! Two separate circuits
S07AK0201 When the brake pedal is depressed while NOTE
Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake
the supplemental booster function is oper-
systems. Each circuit works diagonally When you depress the brake pedal
ating, an operation sound and brake pedal
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the strongly or suddenly, the following will
vibration may be generated. This is not a
brake system should fail, the other half of occur. However, even though these
malfunction.
the system still works. If one circuit fails, occur, they do not indicate any mal-
the brake pedal will go down much closer ! Brake assist system functions, and the brake assist system
S07AK0203
to the floor than usual and you will need to is operating properly.
press it down much harder. A much longer WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal is
distance will be needed to stop the vehicle. applied by lighter force and generates a
Do not be overconfident about the greater braking force.
! Brake booster brake assist. It is not a system that
The brake booster uses engine manifold
S07AK0202 . You might hear an ABS operating
brings more braking ability to the noise from the engine compartment.
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
off the engine while driving because that ity. Always use the utmost care
will turn off the brake booster, resulting in when driving regarding vehicle
poor braking power. speed and safe distance.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. However, if this happens, you CAUTION
will have to depress the pedal much harder
than during normal braking, and the brak- When you need to brake suddenly,
ing distance will increase. continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.

(323,1)
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 321
& Disc brake pad wear warning 7-11. ABS (Anti-lock Brake CAUTION
indicators System)
S07AK03
S07AL
. The ABS does not always de-
crease stopping distance. You
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels should always maintain a safe
which may occur during sudden braking or following distance from other
braking on slippery road surfaces. This vehicles.
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel . When driving on badly surfaced
lock-up. roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
When the ABS is operating, you may hear stopping distances may be long-
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration er for a vehicle with the ABS than
in the brake pedal. This is normal when the one without. Therefore, when
ABS operates. driving under these conditions,
reduce your speed and leave 7
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
The disc brake pad wear warning indica- ample distance from other vehi-

speed is below approximately 6 mph (10
tors on the disc brakes give a warning km/h). cles.
noise when the brake pads are worn. . When tire chains are installed,
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard WARNING stopping distances may be long-
from the disc brakes while braking, im- er for a vehicle with the ABS than
mediately have your vehicle checked by Always use the utmost care in driv- one without. Be sure to reduce
your SUBARU dealer. ing – overconfidence because you your speed and maintain a safe
are driving a vehicle with the ABS distance from the vehicle in front.
could easily lead to a serious acci- . When you feel the ABS operating,
dent. you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
pump the brake pedal since
doing so may defeat the opera-
tion of the ABS.
– CONTINUED –

(324,1)
322 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
& ABS self-check 7-12. Electronic Brake Force & If EBD system malfunctions
S07AL01 S07AM01
Just after the vehicle is started, you may Distribution (EBD) system
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar S07AM
to when the ABS operates, and you may The EBD system maximizes the effective-
also hear the sound of the ABS working ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
from the engine compartment. This is brakes to supply a greater proportion of the
caused by an automatic functional test of braking force. It functions by adjusting the
the ABS being carried out and does not distribution of braking force to the rear
indicate a malfunction. wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
& ABS warning light The EBD system is an integral part of the
S07AL02
Refer to “ABS warning light” FP172. ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
nents to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
system malfunction, the EBD system also the system stops working and the following
stops working. warning lights illuminate simultaneously.
. Brake system warning light
When the EBD system is operating, you . ABS warning light
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction. If the both warning light remains on even
though the parking brake is released, the
brake fluid level may be low or there could
be a problem with the EBD system. Park
the vehicle in a safe place immediately and
contact a Subaru dealer.

(325,1)
Vehicle Dynamics Control system 323
WARNING 7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Con- Vehicle Dynamics Control is no

trol system guarantee that full vehicle control
. Driving with the brake system S07AN
will be maintained at all times and
warning light illuminated is dan- & Safety precautions under all conditions, its activa-
gerous. This indicates your brake S07AN05 tion should be seen as a sign that
system may not be working prop- the speed of the vehicle should
WARNING
erly. If the light remains illumi- be reduced considerably.
nated, have the brakes inspected Always use the utmost care in driv- . Whenever suspension compo-
by a SUBARU dealer immedi- ing – overconfidence because you nents, steering components, or
ately. are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle an axle are removed from a
. If at all in doubt about whether the Dynamics Control system could ea- vehicle, have an inspection of
brakes are operating properly, do sily lead to a serious accident. that system performed by an
not drive the vehicle. Have your authorized SUBARU dealer.
vehicle towed to the nearest . The following precautions should
SUBARU dealer for repair. CAUTION be observed in order to ensure
7
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system is operating properly:
trol system, winter tires should – All four wheels should be
be used when driving on snow- fitted with tires of the same
covered or icy roads; in addition, size, type, and brand. Further-
vehicle speed should be reduced more, the amount of wear
considerably. Simply having a should be the same for all four
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tires.
tem does not guarantee that the – Keep the tire pressure at the
vehicle will be able to avoid proper level as shown on the
accidents in any situation. vehicle placard attached to
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- the driver’s side door pillar.
namics Control system is an – Use only the specified tempor-
indication that the road on which ary spare tire to replace a flat
the vehicle is traveling has a tire. With a temporary spare
slippery surface; since having tire, the effectiveness of the
– CONTINUED –

(326,1)
324 Vehicle Dynamics Control system
Vehicle Dynamics Control & System features pedal is felt.

S07AN06
system is reduced and this In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding – The vehicle or steering wheel
should be taken into account on a slippery road surface and/or during shakes to a small degree.
when driving the vehicle in cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, – An operating sound from the
such a condition. the Vehicle Dynamics Control system engine compartment is heard briefly
. If non-matching tires are used, adjusts the engine’s output and the when starting the engine and when
the Vehicle Dynamics Control wheels’ respective braking forces to help driving off after starting the engine.
system may not operate cor- maintain traction and directional control. – The brake pedal seems to jolt
rectly. when driving off after starting the
. Traction Control Function engine.
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control
The traction control function is designed to . In the circumstances shown in the
system helps prevent unstable
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on following list, the vehicle may be less
vehicle motion such as skidding
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to stable than it feels to the driver. The
using control of the brakes and
maintain traction and directional control. Vehicle Dynamics Control system may
engine power. Do not turn off the
Activation of this function is shown by therefore operate. Such operation does
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control not indicate a system malfunction.
tem unless it is absolutely neces-
operation indicator light. – On gravel-covered or rutted
sary. If you must turn off the
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- roads
. Skid Suppression Function
tem, drive very carefully accord- – On unfinished roads
The skid suppression function is designed
ing to the road surface condi- to help maintain directional stability by – When the vehicle is towing a
tions. suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide trailer
sideways during steering operations. Acti- – When the vehicle is fitted with
vation of this function is shown by flashing snow tires or winter tires.
the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation . Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
indicator light. Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
NOTE different compared to that for normal
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- conditions.
tem may be considered normal when . It is always important to reduce
the following conditions occur. speed when approaching a corner,
– Slight twitching of the brake even if your vehicle is equipped with
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

(327,1)
Vehicle Dynamics Control system 325
. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire. Failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor
S07AN01
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light” FP176 and “Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light”
FP178.
Type B When the switch is pressed or turned
& Vehicle Dynamics Control Press or turn the Vehicle Dynamics Con- during engine operation, the Vehicle Dy- 7
OFF switch trol OFF switch to deactivate the Vehicle namics Control OFF indicator light “ ” on

S07AN02
Dynamics Control system. Creating ade- the combination meter illuminates. The
quate driving wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be
Vehicle Dynamics Control system may deactivated and the vehicle will behave
help to recover from the loss of traction. like a model not equipped with the Vehicle
Use the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Dynamics Control system. When the
switch as necessary. switch is pressed again (type A) or turned
. A standing start on a steeply sloping to the “NORMAL” side (type B) to reacti-
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or vate the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
otherwise slippery surface tem, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
. Extrication of the vehicle when its indicator light turns off.
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
deactivated, traction and stability en-
hancement offered by the Vehicle Dy-
Type A namics Control system is unavailable.
Therefore, you should not deactivate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system except
– CONTINUED –

(328,1)
326 X-MODE
under the above-mentioned situations. system is activated, the Vehicle Dy- 7-14. X-MODE (if equipped)
namics Control operation indicator S07BI
NOTE light flashes.
. When the switch has been pressed WARNING
(type A) or turned (type B) to deactivate
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, . Always use the utmost care in
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system driving – overconfidence be-
automatically reactivates itself the next cause you are driving a vehicle
time the ignition switch is turned to the with X-MODE could easily lead to
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and the engine a serious accident.
is restarted. . Always use the utmost care in
. If the switch is pressed (type A) or driving – overconfidence be-
turned (type B) and held for 30 seconds cause you are driving a vehicle
or longer, the indicator light turns off, with hill descent control function
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is (if equipped) could easily lead to
activated, and the system ignores any a serious accident. Be especially
further pressing of the switch. To make careful, and depress the brake
the switch usable again, turn the igni- pedal if necessary when driving
tion switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- on extremely steep downhill, fro-
tion and restart the engine. zen, muddy or sandy roads. Fail-
. When the switch is pressed (type A) ure to control the vehicle’s speed
or turned (type B) to deactivate the may cause a loss of control and
Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the result in a serious accident.
vehicle’s running performance is com-
parable to that of a vehicle that does not
have a Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- CAUTION
tem. Do not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except when . Even if your vehicle is equipped
absolutely necessary. with X-MODE, winter tires should
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics be used when driving on snow-
Control system is deactivated, compo- covered or icy roads; in addition,
nents of the brake control system may vehicle speed should be reduced
still activate. When the brake control considerably. Simply having X-

(329,1)
X-MODE 327
MODE does not guarantee that – Use only the special tempor- X-MODE has the following functions.
the vehicle will be able to avoid ary spare tire to replace a flat . Hill descent control function (if
accidents in any situation. tire. With a normal temporary equipped):
. Activate the X-MODE when you spare tire, the effectiveness of Using the hill descent control function, you
encounter a very slippery surface the X-MODE is reduced and can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed
at low speed. However, having X- this should be taken into ac- driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is
MODE is no guarantee that full count when driving the vehi- likely to increase, the brake control system
vehicle control will be maintained cle in such a condition. will be activated to adjust the vehicle
at all times and under all condi- . Models with hill descent control: speed.
tions. When activating X-MODE, If the hill descent control function . Driving ability control:
the speed of the vehicle should has operated continuously for a This mode increases the hill-climbing
be reduced considerably. long time, the temperature of the ability and driving ability as well as
. Whenever suspension compo- brake disc may increase and the enabling smooth application of torque for
nents, steering components, or hill descent control function may easier control of the steering wheel.
an axle are removed from a be temporarily disabled. In this 7
vehicle, have the system in- case, the hill descent control

spected by an authorized indicator will disappear. When & To activate/deactivate the X-
SUBARU dealer. the hill descent control indicator MODE
S07BI01
disappears, the hill descent con-
. Observe the following precau- trol function is disabled.
tions in order to ensure that the
X-MODE is operating properly: X-MODE is the integrated control system
– All four wheels should be of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics
fitted with tires of the same Control system, etc. for driving with bad
size, type, and brand. Further- road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can
more, the amount of wear drive more comfortably even in slippery
should be the same for all four road conditions including uphill and down-
tires. hill.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
label attached to the vehicle’s
door pillar. X-MODE switch (type A)
– CONTINUED –

(330,1)
328 X-MODE
NOTE
. SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving
on a snow-covered road where the
points of contact between the tires
and road surface are visible, or for
driving on an unpaved road.
. D.SNOW/MUD is suitable for driving
on a road covered with deep snow
where the points of contact between
the tires and road surface are not
visible, or for driving on a muddy road.
. Even if you try to activate the X-
MODE by turning (type A, type B) or
X-MODE switch (type B) pressing (type C) the X-MODE switch
! To activate
S07BI0101 when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20
Type A and Type B km/h) or more, the X-MODE will not be
Turn the X-MODE switch to the right or left activated. At this time, a buzzer will
and select SNOW/DIRTor D.SNOW/MUD. sound twice.
While the X-MODE is activated, the X- . If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph
MODE indicator appears. (40 km/h) or more while the X-MODE is
activated, a buzzer will sound once and
Type C
the X-MODE will be deactivated.
Press the X-MODE switch. While the X- . While the engine is running, if any of
MODE is activated, the X-MODE indicator the following conditions is met, the X-
appears. MODE will be deactivated. In this case,
! To deactivate it is not possible to activate the X-
S07BI0102
Type A, Type B and Type C MODE.
X-MODE switch (type C) – The CHECK ENGINE warning
Press the X-MODE switch. The X-MODE
indicator will disappear when the X-MODE light/malfunction indicator light illu-
is deactivated. minates.
– The AT OIL TEMP warning light
flashes.

(331,1)
X-MODE 329
– The ABS warning light illumi- – The CHECK ENGINE warning & Hill descent control function
nates. light/malfunction indicator light illu- (if equipped)
– The Vehicle Dynamics Control minates. S07BI03
The hill descent control function will be in
warning light illuminates. – The AT OIL TEMP warning light
standby mode when the X-MODE is
. If the engine could overheat because flashes.
activated and the vehicle speed is less
of a temperature increase of the engine – The ABS warning light illumi- than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
coolant, it may not be possible to nates.
activate the X-MODE. Even while the The function will operate when the vehicle
– The Vehicle Dynamics Control speed is less than approximately 12 mph
X-MODE is activated, the X-MODE will warning light illuminates.
be deactivated when the engine coolant (20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less
. If there is a possibility that the than approximately 10%.
temperature increases. engine could overheat because of a
. For models with Auto Start Stop The function will turn off when the vehicle
temperature increase of the engine
system, the system will be stopped speed is more than approximately 12 mph
coolant, it is not possible to change to
while the X-MODE is activated. (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
the X-MODE. While the vehicle is in the
depressed. 7
X-MODE, it changes to the Sport (S)
NOTE mode or Sport Sharp (S#) mode when CAUTION

For models with SI-DRIVE: the engine coolant temperature in-
. The SI-DRIVE mode will change to creases. The braking power of the hill des-
the Intelligent (I) mode when the X- . It is not possible to activate the X- cent control function may not be
MODE is deactivated. MODE when the engine is not running, sufficient when strong braking
. The SI-DRIVE mode cannot be chan- because the hill descent control func- power is needed (e.g., when towing
ged while the X-MODE is activated. At tion is not activated. a trailer).
this time, a buzzer will sound twice.
. While the engine is running, if any of
the following conditions is met, the X- NOTE
MODE will be deactivated. In this case, . Even while the hill descent control
it is not possible to activate the X- function is operating, you can vary the
MODE. Also, for models with SI-DRIVE, vehicle speed using the brake pedal or
the mode will change to the Sport (S) accelerator pedal.
mode or Sport Sharp (S#) mode and it . During braking by the hill descent
will not be possible to change to the control function, the hill descent con-
other modes. trol indicator will flash.
– CONTINUED –

(332,1)
330 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)
. The hill descent control function is mode. It flashes while the function is 7-15. Tire pressure monitor-
operable regardless of the gradient of operating. It will disappear when the
the road. function is in the disabled mode. When
ing system (TPMS) (U.S.-
. The hill descent control function this function is changed from operational spec. models)
may be considered normal when the to non-operational, it will disappear when S07AO
following conditions occur. the vehicle speed reaches more than

– An operating sound is heard approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
briefly from the engine compart-
ment while the hill descent control
function is operating.
– The sensation of depressing the
brake pedal is different, (harder than
usual etc.) when the brake pedal is
depressed during hill descent con-
trol function operation.
! Hill descent control indicator
S07BI0301
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this
system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a sharp
object).
This indicator appears while the hill des-

cent control function is in the standby

(333,1)
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) 331
WARNING not function when the vehicle is . When a tire is repaired with liquid
stationary. After adjusting the tire sealant, the tire pressure warning
. If the low tire pressure warning pressures, increase the vehicle valve and transmitter may not
light illuminates while driving, speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) operate properly. If a liquid sea-
never brake suddenly. Instead, to start the TPMS rechecking of lant is used, contact your nearest
perform the following procedure. the tire inflation pressures. If the SUBARU dealer or other qualified
Otherwise, an accident involving tire pressures are now above the service shop as soon as possi-
serious vehicle damage and ser- severe low pressure threshold, ble. Make sure to replace the tire
ious personal injury could occur. the low tire pressure warning pressure warning valve and
(1) Keep driving straight ahead light should turn off a few min- transmitter when replacing the
while gradually reducing utes later. tire. You may reuse the wheel if
speed. If this light still illuminates while there is no damage to it and if the
driving after adjusting the tire sealant residue is properly
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a cleaned off. Do not inject any tire
safe location. pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that liquid or aerosol tire sealant into 7
(3) Check the pressure for all four causes the tire to lose air rapidly. the tires, as this may cause a

tires and adjust the pressure If you have a flat tire, replace it malfunction of the tire pressure
to the COLD tire pressure with a spare tire as soon as sensors. If the light illuminates
shown on the tire placard. possible. steadily after blinking for ap-
The tire placard is located on proximately 1 minute, promptly
the door pillar on the driver’s . When a spare tire is mounted or a contact a SUBARU dealer to have
side. wheel rim is replaced without the the system inspected.
original pressure sensor/trans-
Even when the vehicle is driven a mitter being transferred, the low
very short distance, the tires get tire pressure warning light will
warm and their pressures in- illuminate steadily after blinking
crease accordingly. Be sure to for approximately 1 minute. This
let the tires cool thoroughly be- indicates the TPMS is unable to
fore adjusting their pressures to monitor all four road wheels.
the standard values shown on the Contact your SUBARU dealer as
tire placard. Refer to “Tires and soon as possible for tire and
wheels” FP459. The tire pres- sensor replacement and/or sys-
sure monitoring system does tem resetting.
– CONTINUED –

(334,1)
332 Parking your vehicle
CAUTION 7-16. Parking your vehicle vehicle in a safe location, use tire
S07AP stops under the tires to prevent
Do not place metal film or any metal & Electronic parking brake the vehicle from moving and
parts in the cargo area. This may S07AP03 contact your SUBARU dealer.
cause poor reception of the signals . If you operate the electronic park-
from the tire pressure sensors, and ing brake when the brake is over-
the tire pressure monitoring system heated or the vehicle is on a steep
will not function properly. slope, the electronic parking
brake indicator light may flash.
In this case, the vehicle may start
NOTE to move and it may lead to an
This device complies with part 15 of the accident. Always use the tire
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the stops.
ence, and (2) this device must accept CAUTION
any interference received, including 1) Parking brake switch
interference that may cause undesired 2) Indicator light . When the electronic parking
operation. 3) Release the electronic parking brake brake system has a malfunction
4) Apply the electronic parking brake and the parking brake cannot be
FCC CAUTION applied, contact your SUBARU
Changes or modifications not ex- dealer immediately for an inspec-
pressly approved by the party respon- WARNING tion. If you have to park your
sible for compliance could void the vehicle in such conditions, per-
user’s authority to operate the equip- . Before exiting the vehicle, make
form the following procedure.
ment. sure that you turn off the engine.
Otherwise, the parking brake may – Stop your vehicle in a flat
be released and an accident may location.
occur. – Shift the select lever in the “P”
. If the brake system warning light position. When the select le-
turns on, the electronic parking ver cannot be shifted into the
brake system may be malfunc- “P” position, you must release
tioning. Immediately stop your shift lock. Refer to “Shift lock

(335,1)
Parking your vehicle 333
function” FP315. NOTE ate extremely slowly, the system may

– Use tire stops under the tires . If you press the parking brake switch detect an error and turn on the brake
to prevent the vehicle from under the following conditions, the system warning light. However, this
moving. parking brake will not be released. does not indicate a malfunction if the
– The ignition switch is in the brake system warning light turns off
. Never drive with the parking after operating the switch.
brake applied. Doing so will “ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
– You are not depressing the brake . When the electronic parking brake
cause unnecessary brake pad has not been used for a long period of
wear. Before driving off, always pedal.
. The electronic parking brake system time, the electronic parking brake may
make sure that the parking brake operate automatically after the ignition
has been released and the brake uses motors to apply the parking brake.
Therefore, operating sounds from the switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
system warning light has turned position. This occurs due to checking
off. motors will be heard when applying or
releasing the parking brake. Make sure the proper operation of the electronic
that the motor sounds are heard when parking brake and does not indicate a
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the applying or releasing the parking malfunction. 7
brake. . If you cannot release the electronic
parking brake by operating the parking

. If you operate the parking brake parking brake due to the switch mal-
brake switch. function, refer to the instructions de-
switch under the following conditions,
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and a chirp will sound and the electronic scribed in “Automatic release function
pull up the parking brake switch. parking brake indicator light will flash. by accelerator pedal” FP334.
To release: Press the parking brake – When the electronic parking After activating the electronic parking
switch firmly while the ignition switch is in brake system has a malfunction. brake, you may hear a short sound
the “ON” position and the brake pedal is – When the electronic parking several minutes after the electronic
depressed. brake operation is prohibited tem- parking brake indicator light illumi-
porarily. nates as the system confirms proper
When the parking brake is applied while engagement. This sound is different
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, . When you cannot release the park-
ing brake due to, for example, a system from the apply and release sound.
the electronic parking brake indicator light This can occur:
and the indicator light on the parking brake malfunction, contact your SUBARU
dealer and have your SUBARU dealer – If the brakes are extremely hot.
switch illuminate. Refer to “Brake system
release the parking brake. – If the car is parked on a steep
warning light (red)” FP173.
. If you stop operating the electronic incline.
parking brake switch midway or oper- – If the electronic parking brake is
– CONTINUED –

(336,1)
applied after the ignition switch is following conditions. select lever to the “P” position
turned OFF. . Any door (other than the trunk lid) is and apply the electronic parking
open. brake in the following cases.
This is a normal operating sound under
any of these conditions. . The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened. – When you are going to park
your vehicle.
. The Auto Start Stop system is deac- If the parking brake is automatically
tivated while the electronic parking released, the electronic parking brake – When passengers are getting
brake is applied. indicator light and the indicator light on in or out of the vehicle.
. If you operate the electronic parking the parking brake switch turn off. – When you are loading or un-
brake switch while the Auto Start Stop loading.
! Auto Vehicle Hold function
system is activated, the Auto Start Stop S07AP0305
. When using the Auto Vehicle
system will be deactivated. The elec- The Auto Vehicle Hold function will auto-
matically keep the vehicle stopped even Hold function, do not release the
tronic parking brake will activate after brake pedal before the Auto Ve-
the engine is restarted. After the elec- after releasing the brake pedal when the
vehicle is at a complete stop, such as at hicle Hold operation indicator
tronic parking brake indicator light is illuminates. The vehicle may
illuminated, release your foot from the traffic signals. The function will be can-
celed by either of the following operations. move unexpectedly, causing ser-
brake pedal. ious injury or accidents.
. When starting the engine or restart- . Depressing the accelerator pedal
ing the engine using the Auto Start Stop . Depressing the brake pedal again . Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold
system, if you operate the electronic function in the following cases.
parking brake switch, the electronic WARNING Otherwise, the vehicle may move
parking brake indicator light may flash unexpectedly, causing serious
temporarily. However, this is not a . Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold injury or accidents.
malfunction if the light turns off after function on a steep hill or slip- – When washing your vehicle in
the electronic parking brake is deacti- pery road. The vehicle may move an automatic car wash
vated. even when using the Auto Vehicle
– When being towed
Hold function, causing serious
! Automatic release function by ac- injury or accidents.
celerator pedal . Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold CAUTION
S07AP0301
The parking brake will be automatically function to park the vehicle. The
released by depressing the accelerator vehicle may move unexpectedly, . When stopping on a steep slope
pedal. However, the automatic release causing serious injury or acci- with the Auto Vehicle Hold func-
function does not operate under the dents. Make sure to shift the tion turned on, the electronic

(337,1)
parking brake may be automati- ! To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle To turn on:
cally applied. Then the electronic Hold function Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch when
S07AP030501
parking brake indicator light will the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light is
flash. In such a case, depress and OFF. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold ON
hold the brake pedal while stop- indicator light will illuminate.
ping. Otherwise, the vehicle may
move. To turn off:
Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch when
. When being towed, turn off the
the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light
Auto Vehicle Hold function.
illuminates. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold
ON indicator light will turn off.
NOTE NOTE
We recommend turning on the Auto
. When the electronic parking brake
Vehicle Hold function when stopping
system has a malfunction while the 7
on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold
Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned on,
function is turned off, the vehicle may Auto Vehicle Hold switch
a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle

roll backward when driving off.
Hold ON indicator light will turn off and
the brake system warning light will turn
on.
. Every time when starting the engine,
the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be
set to “OFF”.
. If the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is
pressed and held for more than 30
seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON
indicator light will turn off, and the
system will ignore any further pressing
of the switch. To activate the function
again, restart the engine.
Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light . When the Auto Vehicle Hold function
is deactivated while the Auto Vehicle
Hold function has a malfunction, if you
– CONTINUED –

(338,1)
press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch, a ! To release the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light will turn off and
chirp will sound. function the electronic parking brake indicator light
S07AP030504 will illuminate.
! To operate the Auto Vehicle Hold Perform any of the following operations to
function release the Auto Vehicle Hold function. ! Tips
S07AP030505
S07AP030503
. Depress the accelerator pedal. . When the electronic parking brake is
Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal when all of the following conditions . Depress the brake pedal again. automatically applied with the vehicle kept
are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold . Apply the electronic parking brake. stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function,
function will operate. . Shift the select lever to the “P” position release the electronic parking brake by
. Driver’s door is closed. with the brake pedal pressed. either of the following operations before
. Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch with starting off. Then make sure that the
. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.
the brake pedal pressed. electronic parking brake indicator light is
. The select lever is in a position other off.
than the “P” position. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is – Depress the accelerator pedal with
released, the Auto Vehicle Hold operation the driver’s seatbelt fastened and with
indicator light will turn off. the doors closed.
Under any of the following conditions, the – Press the electronic parking brake
switch with the brake pedal depressed.
Auto Vehicle Hold function will be auto-
matically released and the electronic . Under certain conditions, including a
parking brake will be automatically ap- malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a
plied. warning buzzer will sound and a warning
message will appear on the combination
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function has meter display (color LCD). All warning
been in operation for 10 minutes. messages should be strictly observed.
. The driver’s seatbelt is unfastened. . On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be
. The ignition switch is turned to the kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. function. In such a case, depress and hold
Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light . The vehicle is stopped on a steep the brake pedal.
While the vehicle is kept stopped by the slope. . When stopping on a steep slope with
Auto Vehicle Hold function, the Auto . The Auto Vehicle Hold function is the Auto Vehicle Hold function activated,
Vehicle Hold operation indicator light will malfunctioning. the electronic parking brake may automa-
illuminate. tically applied after stopping, then the
In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold

(339,1)
electronic parking brake indicator light then turn it to the “ON” position. ! Electronic parking brake system
may flash. In such a case, depress and ! Emergency brake warning
hold the brake pedal while stopped. S07AP0303 S07AP0304
Otherwise, the vehicle may move. When CAUTION

CAUTION
getting out of the vehicle, stop the vehicle
on a flat surface, then apply the electronic Use the emergency brake only in If the brake system warning light
parking brake. case of an emergency. If the emer- turns on, the electronic parking
. If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator gency brake is excessively used, the brake system may be malfunction-
light does not illuminates even after brake parts will wear down faster or ing. Immediately stop your vehicle in
pressing the Auto Vehicle Hold switch with the brake may not work sufficiently the nearest safe location and con-
the operating conditions met, the function due to brake overheating. tact your SUBARU dealer.
may have a malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection. If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
. You may hear a sound while the Auto NOTE parking brake system, the brake system
Vehicle Hold function is keeping your While using the emergency brake: warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic 7
vehicle stopped. This is normal, and does . The electronic parking brake indica- parking brake light” FP173.

not represent a malfunction. tor light and the indicator light on the
. While the vehicle is kept stopped by the parking brake switch illuminate and a & Parking tips
S07AP02
Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake chirp sounds. When parking your vehicle, always per-
pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not a . A sound may be heard from the form the following items.
malfunction. engine compartment. This is the oper- . Apply the parking brake firmly.
. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold ating sound of the brake that is acti-
. Put the select lever in the “P” position.
function, depress the brake pedal firmly. vated by the Vehicle Dynamics Control
Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold may not system, and does not indicate a mal- Never rely on the mechanical friction of the
operate. function. transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
. When the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can
pressed and held for more than 30 stop the vehicle by pulling the parking
seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON in- brake switch continuously.
dicator light will turn off and further opera- While applying the emergency brake, the
tion of the switch will be ignored. To make electronic parking brake indicator light and
the switch usable again, turn the ignition the indicator light on the parking brake
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
– CONTINUED –

(340,1)
WARNING CAUTION
. Never leave unattended children . If your vehicle has a bumper
or pets in the vehicle. They could under guard (optional), pay atten-
accidentally injure themselves or tion to blocks and other obstruc-
others through inadvertent options on the ground when park-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on ing. The underspoiler could be
hot or sunny days, the tempera- damaged by contact with them.
ture in a closed vehicle could . The braking power of the parking
quickly become high enough to brake may not be sufficient when
cause severe or possibly fatal stronger braking power is
injuries to people. needed (e.g., when parking on a
. Do not park the vehicle over steep slope while towing a trai-
When parking on a hill, always turn the flammable materials such as dry ler).
steering wheel. When the vehicle is grass, waste paper or rags, as
headed up the hill, the front wheels should they may burn easily if they come
be turned away from the curb. near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If engine
exhaust gas enters the passen-
ger compartment, occupants in
the vehicle could die from carbon
monoxide (CO) contained in the
exhaust gas.
When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

(341,1)
Auto Start Stop system 339
7-17. Auto Start Stop system engine will be automatically stopped.

S07BH If you release the brake pedal with the
The Auto Start Stop system is designed to select lever kept in the “D” position, the
automatically stop and restart the engine engine will be automatically restarted.
when the vehicle is stationary for a short However, when the Auto Vehicle Hold ON
period of time (while waiting for a traffic indicator light illuminates, the engine will
light or in a traffic jam) after the engine has not restart.
warmed up. The system operates in order
to reduce fuel consumption, exhaust emis-
sions and undesired idling noise.
& System operation

S07BH01
Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)
CAUTION (type B) 7
The Auto Start Stop system is de- If the engine is temporarily stopped by the

signed to automatically stop and system, the Auto Start Stop indicator light
restart the engine for a short period on the combination meter will illuminate in
of time during idling. Do not use the green. This indicator light will turn off when
system when parking the vehicle the system restarts the engine.
normally. Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)
(type A) NOTE
So that it can be used safely and comfor- . After starting the engine, if the
tably, in addition to driver operations, the vehicle is left idling without being
Auto Start Stop system is designed to driven, the Auto Start Stop system will
constantly monitor the vehicle conditions not operate.
as well as the environment inside and . Your vehicle is equipped with a
outside the vehicle, in order to control special high-performance battery.
stopping and restarting of the engine. When replacing the vehicle battery, be
sure to replace it with a genuine
After the vehicle has been completely SUBARU battery (or equivalent) de-
stopped by depressing the brake pedal signed specifically for use in a vehicle
with the select lever in the “D” position, the
– CONTINUED –

(342,1)
340 Auto Start Stop system
equipped with the Auto Start Stop NOTE . When the malfunction indicator light
system. For details, we recommend . After the vehicle is stopped, the (Check Engine light) is illuminating.
that you consult your SUBARU dealer. engine may not automatically stop . The electronic parking brake is applied.
under the following conditions. . When the engine hood is opened.
! Operational conditions
S07BH0105 – The vehicle is stopped on a road . When the vehicle is at an altitude of
The engine can be automatically stopped with a steep slope. more than approximately 3,000 m (10,000
by the Auto Start Stop system when all of – The vehicle is stopped by hard ft).
the following conditions are met. braking. . When the CVT fluid is not sufficiently
. The engine is sufficiently warmed up. – Negative pressure in the brake warmed up.
. The engine hood is closed. booster is not sufficient. . When the temperature of the CVT fluid
. The driver’s door is closed. . After the vehicle is stopped, the is abnormally high.
. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened. engine may not automatically stop if . When the vehicle battery is not in good
. The malfunction indicator light (Check the brake pedal is not fully depressed. condition.
Engine light) is off. Make sure to depress the brake pedal
firmly when stopping the vehicle. . When using the climate control system,
. The air inlet selection is set to a mode the temperature difference between the
other than “ ” mode. . In the following cases, it may take
some time for the Auto Start Stop setting temperature and the temperature
. The rear window defogger is not in use. inside the vehicle is significant.
system to operate.
. The X-MODE has been turned off (if – When the battery is discharged . When using the climate control system,
equipped). because the vehicle has not been the amount of air flow is significant.
. The power rear gate has been turned used for a long period of time, etc.
off (if equipped). NOTE
– The coolant temperature is low.
The Auto Start Stop system may not
After the vehicle is stopped, the engine will – When the battery terminals have operate if the malfunction indicator
be automatically stopped when the follow- been reconnected after replacing light (Check Engine light) or other
ing conditions are met. the battery, etc. warning lights on the combination
. The steering wheel is in the straight ! Non-operational conditions meter are illuminating or flashing.
ahead position. S07BH0106
In any of the following cases, the Auto
. The steering wheel is not being oper- Start Stop system will not operate.
ated.
. When the Auto Start Stop warning light/
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yellow)
is illuminating or flashing.

(343,1)
! Engine restart operational condi- . When the control of Auto Vehicle Hold – When the negative pressure in
tions function turns off, refer to “Auto Vehicle the brake booster has lowered
S07BH0107
In any one of the following cases, the Hold function” FP334. . In the following cases, the length of
engine will be automatically restarted even ! Engine restart non-operational time that the engine is temporarily
if the brake pedal is kept depressed. conditions stopped by the Auto Start Stop system
S07BH0108 may be shorter.
. When slightly releasing the brake pedal To ensure safety, the engine will not be
on road with a steep slope and the vehicle – When the climate control system
automatically restarted if the engine hood
begins rolling is in operation.
is opened when the Auto Start Stop
. When further depressing the brake system is in operation, even if the brake – When the outside temperature is
pedal pedal is released. In this case, check the high, or when it is low (because the
surrounding area and restart the engine by climate control system can no long-
. When depressing the accelerator pedal er maintain the set temperature).
. When you move the select lever to the normal operation.
– When consumption of electricity
“R” position. Also, when the Auto Vehicle Hold opera-
by electrical components is high.
. When turning the steering wheel tion indicator light is illuminated, the 7
engine will not restart. . When the engine is automatically
. When operating the electronic parking restarted by the Auto Start Stop sys-

brake switch To ensure safety, the engine will not be tem, the power provided via the acces-
automatically restarted if you open the sory power outlet will be reduced.
. When activating the X-MODE (if
engine hood when the Auto Start Stop Depending on the connected appli-
equipped)
system is in operation, even if you release ance, the power of the appliance may
. When the air inlet selection set to “ ” the brake pedal. In this case, check the
mode. temporarily turn off.
surrounding area and restart the engine by
. When the climate control system can normal operation.
no longer maintain the set temperature
. When opening the power rear gate NOTE
automatically . When the Auto Start Stop system is
. When unbuckling the driver’s seatbelt in operation, the brake pedal may feel
. When trying to open the power rear stiff. However, this is not a malfunction.
gate automatically . In the following conditions, the en-
. When opening the driver’s door gine will be automatically restarted
even if you keep the brake pedal
. When activating the rear window de-
depressed.
fogger
– When the battery is discharged.
– CONTINUED –

(344,1)
342 Auto Start Stop system
! Auto Start Stop warning light The Auto Start Stop warning light will ! Auto Start Stop OFF switch
S07BH0109
illuminate in yellow when initially turning S07BH0104
the ignition switch to the “ON” position. The

light will turn off after the engine has
started.
The Auto Start Stop warning light will flash
when the Auto Start Stop system is
malfunctioning. We recommend that you
contact your authorized SUBARU dealer
for an inspection.
CAUTION
If the Auto Start Stop warning light
Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)
does not turn off after the engine has Auto Start Stop OFF switch
(type A) started, the Auto Start Stop system
may be malfunctioning. We recom-
mend that you contact your author-
ized SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yel-

Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow) low) (type A)
(type B)

(345,1)
NOTE
. If the engine is restarted when the
Auto Start Stop system is not opera-
tional and the ignition switch has been
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position,
the Auto Start Stop system will turn on
again.
. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position when leav-
ing the vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in the battery discharging.
! Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yel- indicator light Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected
S07BH0110
low) (type B) indicator light (type B) 7
If the Auto Start Stop OFF switch is If the operational conditions are not met

pressed, operation of the Auto Start Stop when the vehicle is stopped, the engine
system will be disabled. The Auto Start will not stop and the Auto Start Stop No
Stop OFF indicator light on the combina- Activity Detected indicator light will illumi-
tion meter will then illuminate in yellow. If nate. It will turn off when the vehicle begins
the switch is pressed once more, the Auto to drive.
Start Stop system will turn on again. The
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light will then
turn off.
While the engine is temporarily stopped by
the system, if the Auto Start Stop OFF
switch is pressed, the engine will be Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected
restarted even if you do not release the indicator light (type A)
brake pedal.
– CONTINUED –

(346,1)
344 Hill start assist system
& Displaying the Auto Start ! Warning buzzer 7-18. Hill start assist system
S07BH0301
Stop system status The buzzer will sound when the engine S07AU
S07BH02
Approximate indications of the time that hood is opened while the engine is
stopped by the Auto Start Stop system. WARNING
the engine has been stopped by the Auto
Start Stop system and/or the amount of When this occurs, the buzzer will stop . The Hill start assist system is a
fuel saved can be displayed on the multi- sounding when the following operations device only for helping the driver
function display (black and white) or are performed. to START the vehicle on an uphill
combination meter display (color LCD). . The engine is restarted by normal grade. To prevent accidents
For details, refer to “Auto Start Stop time” operation. (Refer to “Preparing to drive” when the vehicle is parked on a
FP200 or “Basic screens” FP193. FP297.) slope, be sure to firmly set the
. The ignition switch is turned to the parking brake. When setting the
& System warning “LOCK”/“OFF” position. parking brake, make sure that the
S07BH03
So that it can be used safely and comfor- ! Display of warning messages vehicle remains stationary when
tably, the Auto Start Stop system is (models with combination meter the brake pedal is released.
designed to constantly monitor the vehicle display (color LCD)) . Do not turn the ignition switch to
conditions as well as the environment S07BH0302
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
If a warning message is displayed on the
inside and outside the vehicle in addition the Hill start assist system is
combination meter display (color LCD)
to driver operations, and to provide various operating. The Hill start assist
while driving, a malfunction may have
warnings to the driver via the warning light system will be deactivated and
occurred in the Auto Start Stop system.
and/or indicator light illuminating or flash- may lead to an accident.
In this case, the Auto Start Stop warning
ing and a buzzer sounding. For details
light will illuminate or flash in yellow. We
about the warning light and indicator light, The Hill start assist system is a device to
recommend that you have your vehicle
refer to “Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto make the following vehicle operations
inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as
Start Stop OFF indicator light (yellow)” easier.
possible.
FP186.

(347,1)
Hill start assist system 345
ditions.
Braking power is maintained temporarily
(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill
start assist system after the brake pedal is
released. The driver is therefore able to
start the vehicle in the same way as on a
level grade, just using the accelerator
pedal.
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by
depressing the brake pedal again.
The Hill start assist system may not
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill 7
start assist system does not operate in the

following cases.
1) Starting forward facing uphill . When starting backward facing uphill

2) Starting backward facing downhill . When starting forward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal
. While the parking brake is applied.
When the vehicle has stopped with the . While the ignition switch is in the “ACC”
brake pedal depressed, the Hill start assist or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
system operates under the following con- . While the Vehicle Dynamics Control
– CONTINUED –

(348,1)
346 Cruise control
warning light is illuminated. Refer to 7-19. Cruise control (if NOTE

“Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ Make sure the cruise control system is
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indi-
equipped)
S07AQ
turned off when the cruise control is not
cator light” FP176. in use to avoid unintentionally setting
NOTE
. While the Auto Start Stop warning light of the cruise control.
is illuminated. Refer to “Auto Start Stop For models with the EyeSight system:
warning light/Auto Start Stop OFF indica- Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple- & To set cruise control
tor light (yellow)” FP186. ment for the EyeSight system. S07AQ01
When using the Hill start assist system, a Cruise control enables you to maintain a
braking effect may be felt even after the constant vehicle speed without holding
brake pedal has been released. your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 20
CAUTION mph (30 km/h) or more.
The braking power of the Hill start WARNING

assist system may not be sufficient
when strong braking power is Do not use the cruise control under
needed (e.g., when towing a trailer). any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
NOTE . Driving up or down a steep grade Cruise control main button
A slight jolt may be felt when the . Driving on slippery or winding
vehicle begins to move forward after 1. Press the cruise control main button.
roads
being reversed.
. Driving in heavy traffic
. Towing a trailer
When using the cruise control, al-
ways set the speed appropriately
according to the speed limit, traffic
flow, road conditions, and other
conditions.

(349,1)
Cruise control 347
Cruise control indicator light (type A) 3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the Cruise control set indicator light (type A)
“SET” side and release it. Then release the 1) When setting the displayed unit as
“MPH”.
7
accelerator pedal. 2) When setting the displayed unit as

“km/h”.
NOTE
When setting a cruise speed for the first
time during a drive, both “SET” and
“RES” may be used to set the initial
cruise speed.
Cruise control indicator light (type B)

The cruise control indicator light on the
combination meter will illuminate.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
– CONTINUED –

(350,1)
348 Cruise control
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- cruise control by shifting the select
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re- lever into the “N” position. However,
leased, the vehicle will return to and do not shift the lever into the “N”
maintain the previous cruising speed. position while driving except in case
of emergency. If the select lever is
& To temporarily cancel the shifted into the “N” position, the
cruise control engine brake will no longer work.
S07AQ02
The cruise control can be temporarily This could result in an accident.
canceled in the following ways.
The cruise control set indicator light in the
combination meter turns off when the
cruise control is canceled.
Cruise control set indicator light (type B)

1) When setting the displayed unit as “MPH”
2) When setting the displayed unit as “km/h”
At this time, the cruise control set indicator
light is illuminated in the combination
meter. The set speed will be shown on
the combination meter. You can change
the displayed unit by operating the combi-
nation meter display.
. For type A meter details, refer to . Press the “CANCEL” button.
“Combination meter settings” FP163. . Press the X-MODE switch to activate
. For type B meter details, refer to the X-MODE (models with X-MODE).
“Screen Settings” FP195. . Depress the brake pedal. To resume the cruise control after it has
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
The vehicle will maintain the desired cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30
only).
speed. km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”
WARNING switch to the “RES” side to return to the
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in- original cruising speed automatically.
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the For CVT models, you can cancel the The cruise control set indicator light in the

(351,1)
Cruise control 349
combination meter will automatically illu- & To change the cruising speed each time by pressing the “RES/SET”
minate at this time. S07AQ04 switch to the “RES” side.
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/
SET” switch) ! To increase the speed (by accelera-
& To turn off the cruise control S07AQ0405 tor pedal)
S07AQ03 S07AQ0402
There are two ways to turn off the cruise 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to ac-
control: celerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
. Press the cruise control main button
again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment 2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
will be memorized and treated as the new “SET” side once. Now the desired speed is
set speed. set and the vehicle will keep running at that
speed without depressing the accelerator
When setting the displayed unit as pedal.
“MPH”:
The set speed can be increased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “RES” side.
When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”:
The set speed can be increased 1 km/h
– CONTINUED –

(352,1)
350 Cruise control
! To decrease the speed (by the “RES/ ! To decrease the speed (by brake & Cruise control indicator light
S07AQ05
SET” switch) pedal) Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”
S07AQ0406 S07AQ0404
1. Depress the brake pedal to release FP185.
cruise control temporarily.
& Cruise control set indicator
light
S07AQ06
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
FP186.
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
2. When the speed decreases to the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
desired speed, press the “RES/SET”
will be memorized and treated as the new
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
set speed.
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
When setting the displayed unit as keep running at that speed without depres-
“MPH”: sing the accelerator pedal.
The set speed can be decreased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “SET” side.
When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”:
The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h
each time by pressing the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side.

(353,1)
BSD/RCTA 351
7-20. BSD/RCTA (if equipped) in a neighboring lane or approach- ! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
S07BM0101
S07BM ing from either side.
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with The driver is responsible for paying
Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross attention to the rear and side areas
Traffic Alert. of the vehicle.
These functions enable the system to
detect objects or vehicles to the rear, & System features
drawing attention to the driver when S07BM01
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
changing a lane or when driving in reverse.
tions.
WARNING . To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
The driver is responsible for driving high speeds (Blind Spot Detection).
safely. Always be sure to check the . To detect a vehicle approaching from 7
1) Operating range
surroundings when changing lanes the right or left while reversing the vehicle
or reversing the vehicle. The system warns the driver of dangers as

(Rear Cross Traffic Alert).
The system is designed to assist the follows.
driver to change lanes or reverse The system uses radar sensors for the . If the system detects a vehicle in the
safely by monitoring the rear and above functions. blind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach in-
side areas of the vehicle. However, NOTE dicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will
you cannot rely on this system alone illuminate.
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
in assuring the safety during a lane
certified by the radio wave related laws
change or reversing. Overconfi-
of the U.S. and Canada. When driving in
dence in this system could result in
other countries, certification of the
an accident and lead to serious
country where the vehicle is driven
injury or death. Since the system
must be obtained. For certification in
operation has various limitations,
the U.S. and Canada, refer to “Certifica-
the flashing or illumination of the
tion for the BSD/RCTA” FP358.
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may be delayed or it may not operate
at all even when a vehicle is present
– CONTINUED –

(354,1)
352 BSD/RCTA
! Lane Change Assist (LCA) ! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

S07BM010101 S07BM0103
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

. If the driver operates the turn signal 1) Operating range 1) Operating range
lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA
The system warns the driver of dangers as The system notifies the driver of another
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
follows. vehicle approaching from either side when
corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-
cator light will flash. . If the system detects a vehicle ap- driving in reverse. This feature helps the
proaching at a high speed in the neighbor- driver check the rear and side areas of the
ing lanes, the BSD/RCTA approach indi- vehicle when moving backward.
cator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will
If the system detects a vehicle approach-
illuminate.
ing from either side while moving back-
. If the driver operates the turn signal ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA following way.
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
cator light will flash.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
. An icon appears on the rear view
camera screen (audio/navigation monitor)

(355,1)
BSD/RCTA 353
! Limitations of the detectability of vehicle. & System operation

RCTA S07BM02
S07BM010301 ! Operating conditions
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited, S07BM0201
the RCTA may not operate properly in The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the
angled parking. following conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
. The Eyesight warning indicator is off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7
mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
. The select lever is in the “R” position
(when reversing). 7
Example 2
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the

1) The detection range of the radar sensors
following situations.
C) Vehicle that may be detected.
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.
Example 1 . The vehicle speed is below 7 mph (12
1) The detection range of the radar sensors NOTE km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
2) Area out of detection range of the radar The system may detect that a vehicle indicator remains off (except when rever-
sensors (C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
A) Vehicle that may not be detected. sing).
Always be sure to check the surround-
B) Parked vehicle ings when reversing the vehicle. NOTE
. In the following case, the BSD/RCTA
WARNING will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA
warning indicator will appear. If the
An approaching vehicle (A) may not BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears,
be detected because the detection have your vehicle inspected at a
range is limited by the parked vehi- SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
cle (B). Always be sure to check the
– When a malfunction occurs in the
surroundings when reversing the
system, including the BSD/RCTA
– CONTINUED –

(356,1)
354 BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light. rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op- the radar may not reflect (vehicles
. In the following cases, the BSD/ eration and the BSD/RCTA OFF indica- with a low body height such as
RCTA will temporarily stop operating tor will disappear. However, if the BSD/ sports cars or a trailer with no
(or may stop operating) and the BSD/ RCTA OFF indicator has appeared for a cargo).
RCTA OFF indicator will appear. prolonged time, have the system in- – Vehicles that are not approaching
– When the radar sensor becomes spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as your vehicle even though they are in
significantly misaligned (If the or- possible. the detection area (either on a
ientation of the radar sensor is . The detectability of the radar sen- neighboring lane to the rear or be-
shifted for any reason, readjust- sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de- side your vehicle when reversing).
ment is required. Have the sensor tection may be impaired and the system (The system determines the pre-
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.) may not operate properly under the sence of approaching vehicles
– When a large amount of snow or following conditions. based on data detected by the radar
ice sticks to the rear bumper sur- – When the rear bumper around the sensors.)
face around the radar sensors. radar sensors is distorted. – Vehicles traveling at significantly
– When the vehicle is driven on a – When ice, snow or mud adheres different speeds
snow-covered road or in an envir- to the rear bumper surface around – Vehicles driving parallel to your
onment in which there are no ob- the radar sensors. vehicle at almost the same speed
jects around (such as in a desert) for – When stickers, etc. are affixed on for a prolonged time
a long time. the areas of the radar sensors on – Oncoming vehicles
– When the temperature around the the rear bumper. – Vehicles in a lane beyond the
radar sensors increased exces- – During adverse weather condi- neighboring lane
sively due to long driving on uphill tions such as rain, snow or fog – Vehicles travelling at a signifi-
grades in summer, etc. – When driving on wet roads such cantly lower speed that you are
– When the temperature around the as snow-covered roads or through trying to overtake
radar sensors becomes extremely puddles . On a road with extremely narrow
low. . The radar sensors may not detect or lanes, the system may detect vehicles
– When the vehicle battery voltage may have difficulty detecting the fol- driving in a lane next to the neighboring
lowers. lowing. lane.
– When an overvoltage occurs in – Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe- . When the 8-inch audio/navigation
the vehicle battery. destrians, stationary objects on the system is performing a software up-
road or road side, etc. date, the RCTA warning icons may not
When the above conditions are cor- – Vehicles with body shapes that be displayed on the audio/navigation

(357,1)
BSD/RCTA 355
screen until the update is complete. tected. trol” FP164.

The indicator light will flash to warn the
driver of dangers under the following ! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-
& BSD/RCTA approach indica- zer (only when reversing)
tor light/warning buzzer conditions. S07BM0302
S07BM03 . While the indicator light illuminates, if A warning buzzer sounds along with
When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/ you operate the turn signal lever toward flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-
RCTA approach indicator light will operate the side in which this light turned on. dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
to alert the driver when there are vehicles
in the neighboring lanes. When reversing . When reversing the vehicle while the The setting of the warning buzzer volume
the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach system detects a vehicle approaching can be changed by operating the combi-
indicator light and warning buzzer will from either side. nation meter display (color LCD). For
operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is details, refer to “Menu screens” FP195.
approaching from the left or right side. ! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA
light dimming function
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light S07BM030101 approach indicator light/warning
S07BM0301
When the headlights are turned on, the buzzer 7
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach S07BM0303
. In the following cases, operation of the
indicator light will be reduced.

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and
NOTE the warning buzzer may be delayed or the
. You may have difficulty recognizing system may fail to issue these warnings.
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light – When a vehicle moves to the neigh-
under the following conditions. boring lane from a lane next to the
– When affected by direct sunlight neighboring lane.
– When affected by the headlight – When driving on a steep incline or
beams from the vehicles behind on repeated sharp uphill and downhill
grades
. While the illumination brightness
control dial is in the fully upward – When going beyond a pass
position, even if the headlights are – When both your vehicle and a
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light turned on, the brightness of the BSD/ vehicle driving on a neighboring lane
It is mounted in each side of the outside RCTA approach indicator light will not are driving on the far side of each lane.
mirrors. be reduced. For details about the – When several narrowly-spaced ve-
The indicator light will illuminate when a illumination brightness control dial, hicles are approaching in a row.
vehicle approaching from behind is de- refer to “Illumination brightness con- – In low radius bends (tight bends or
– CONTINUED –

(358,1)
356 BSD/RCTA
when making turns at an intersection) away is driving on the near side of its
– When there is a difference in height lane from your vehicle.
between your lane and the neighboring
lane. & BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
S07BM08
– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is
activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA ! System temporary stop
S07BM0801
OFF switch.
– Immediately after the select lever is
shifted to the “R” position.
– When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the cargo area.
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
system may fail to issue these warnings light may illuminate when driving close to
under the following conditions. solid objects on the road or road side (such
– When backing out of an angled as guardrails, tunnels or sidewalls).
parking space . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
– When a large-sized vehicle is light may flash when turning at an inter-
section in urban areas or a multilane 1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
parked next to your vehicle. (That 2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
vehicle prevents the propagation of intersection.
radar waves.) . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator This display appears when the system is
– When reversing on sloped roads light may flash and the warning buzzer used under the following conditions.
– When reversing at a high speed may sound if a building or a wall exists in . Extremely high or low temperatures
the reversing direction. . When abnormal voltage exists for the
. In the following cases, the system may vehicle battery.
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away . When the radar sensor is significantly
from your vehicle. misaligned.
– When you are driving on the near
side of the lane of the corresponding Once the above conditions are corrected,
vehicle. the system will recover from the temporary
– When the vehicle driving two lanes stop condition and the indicator will dis-

(359,1)
BSD/RCTA 357
appear. If the indicator remains displayed & BSD/RCTA warning indicator & BSD/RCTA OFF switch
for a prolonged time, have the system S07BM04 S07BM05
inspected at a SUBARU dealer. ! System malfunction

S07BM0403
! System temporary stop due to re-
duced radar sensitivity
S07BM0802
BSD/RCTA OFF switch 7

1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2) At first, this message will appear
3) Then this message will appear
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due 4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator
to reduced radar sensitivity
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator This display appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
This display appears when the detectabil-
dealer and have the system inspected.
ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once
the condition is corrected, the system will
recover from the temporary stop condition
and the indicator will disappear. If the
indicator remains displayed for a pro-
longed time, have the system inspected
at a SUBARU dealer. BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,
the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on
the combination meter, and the BSD/
– CONTINUED –

(360,1)
358 BSD/RCTA
RCTA is deactivated. position. ! Canada-spec. models

S07BM0602
Press the switch again to activate the BSD/
RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will & Certification for the BSD/
disappear. RCTA
When this occurs, the BSD/RCTA ap- S07BM06
proach indicator light on the side of the ! U.S.-spec. models

S07BM0601
rearview mirror illuminates for a few FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
seconds and then turns off.
CAUTION
NOTE
. In the following cases, the system FCC WARNING
may not operate properly due to Changes or modifications not ex-
blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/ pressly approved by the party re-
RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the sponsible for compliance could void
system. the user’s authority to operate the
– When towing a trailer equipment.
– When a bicycle carrier or other
carrier item is fitted to the rear of the
vehicle. NOTE
– When using a chassis dynam- This device complies with part 15 of the
ometer or free roller device, etc. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
– When running the engine and following two conditions: (1) This de-
making the wheels rotate while vice may not cause harmful interfer-
lifting up the vehicle ence, and (2) this device must accept
. If the ignition switch is turned to the any interference received, including
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known interference that may cause undesired
status of the system is maintained. For operation.
example, if the ignition switch is turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA
will remain deactivated the next time
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

(361,1)
BSD/RCTA 359
! Mexico-spec. models & Handling of radar sensors sensor becomes misaligned, a system
S07BM0603 S07BM07 malfunction may occur, including the in-
ability to detect vehicles entering the
detection areas. If any strong shock is
applied to the bumper, be sure to contact
your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-
1) Sensors tance. 7

The radar sensors, one on each side of the
vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
To ensure correct operation of the BSD/
RCTA, observe the following precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface near
the radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the bumper surface near the radar
sensors.
. Do not modify the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the radar
sensors.
. Do not expose the bumper near the
radar sensors to strong impacts. If a

(362,1)
360 Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-21. Reverse Automatic . The system is not designed to the acquired data to any other third
detect people (including chil- party except under the following con-
Braking System (if equipped) ditions.
S07BN
dren), animals or other moving
objects. . The vehicle owner has given his/her
Reverse Automatic Braking is a system consent.
designed to help avoid collisions or reduce . Depending on the vehicle condi-
tion or the surrounding environ- . The disclosure/provision is based
collision damage when reversing the on a court order or other legally en-
vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected ment, the sonar sensor’s ability
to detect objects may be compro- forceable request.
in the reversing direction, the system will . Data that has been modified so that
notify the driver with a warning sound and mised.
the user and vehicle cannot be identi-
may activate the vehicle’s brakes auto- fied is provided to a research institution
matically. NOTE for statistical processing or similar
The Reverse Automatic Braking Sys- purposes.
WARNING
tem records and stores the following
. Reverse Automatic Braking is not data when automatic braking operates. & Reverse Automatic Braking
a system intended to replace the It does not record conversations, per- System overview
driver’s responsibility to check sonal information or other audio data. S07BN01
The system detects objects using sonar
surrounding areas for vehicles or . Distance from the object sensors installed in the rear bumper.
obstacles to avoid a collision. . Vehicle speed
. Accelerator pedal operation status . If the system determines a possible
. The driver is responsible for driv- collision with an object in the reversing
ing safely. Always be sure to . Brake pedal operation status
. Select lever position direction, automatic deceleration will be
check the surroundings visually activated. Also, beeping sounds will acti-
when reversing the vehicle. . Outside temperature
. The sensitivity setting of the sonar vate.
. There are some cases in which sensors . If the vehicle is further reversed, auto-
the vehicle cannot avoid colli- matic hard braking will be applied and a
sion, because the system opera- SUBARU and third parties contracted continuous beeping sound will activate.
tion has limitations. The warning by SUBARU may acquire and use the
sound or automatic braking may recorded data for the purpose of vehi-
be delayed or may not operate at cle research and development.
all even when an obstacle is SUBARU and third parties contracted
present. by SUBARU will not disclose or provide

(363,1)
Reverse Automatic Braking System 361
! Detecting range cancel the system, refer to “Cancel- tem is set to on.
S07BN0101
ing the Reverse Automatic Braking . The select lever is in the “R” position.
system operation” FP367. . The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9
mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).
& Operating conditions NOTE

S07BN02
The Reverse Automatic Braking system . In the following cases, the Reverse
will operate when all of the following Automatic braking system will not
conditions are met. operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
– The EyeSight warning indicator
is illuminated.
– The Reverse Automatic Braking
fail indicator is illuminated.
1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6 . When the Reverse Automatic Brak- 7
in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width ing system OFF indicator is illumi-

2) Range that the system cannot detect: nated, the Reverse Automatic braking
Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the
rear of the vehicle system cannot be operated.
3) Detecting range (length): Approximately . In the following cases, the system
5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle may not be able to properly detect an
obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU
WARNING dealer to have the system inspected.
1) EyeSight warning indicator – A sticker, paint, or a chemical is
If your vehicle is trapped on a rail- 2) RAB warning indicator applied to the sonar sensor or the
road crossing and you are trying to 3) RAB OFF indicator rear bumper near the sonar sensor
escape by reversing through the . The ignition switch is in the “ON” – The rear bumper is modified.
crossing gate, the system may re- position. – The rear bumper has been re-
cognize the crossing gate as an moved and reattached.
. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.
obstacle and the brake may activate. – The ground clearance is changed
In this case, remain calm and either . The RAB warning indicator is off.
due to the vehicle’s loading condi-
continue to depress the accelerator . HALT (RAB OFF) indicator is off. tion or modification.
pedal or cancel the system. To . The Reverse Automatic Braking sys- – Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
– CONTINUED –

(364,1)
the rear bumper near the sonar not reflect the sound wave emitted cles.
sensor. from the sonar sensor. – Sounds of air brakes
– The rear bumper is exposed to – Objects that are too close to the – Vehicle detection equipment or a
strong impact, or the rear bumper is rear bumper when the select lever is sonar from other vehicles
deformed. set to the “R” position. – A sound wave with a frequency
. When the 8-inch audio/navigation – Objects with a surface which may similar to the vehicle’s system is
system is performing a software up- not reflect the sound wave emitted transmitted nearby.
date, the Reverse Automatic Braking from the sonar sensor such as a – A vehicle equipped with the same
System may not display the following chain link fence. system is reversing toward your
items on the audio/navigation screen . Objects the system is not designed reversing direction.
until the update is complete. to detect
– Display Icon on/off Function – Pedestrians Weather conditions:
– Distance Indicator Image – Moving objects including moving – Extremely high or extremely low
– Warning Message vehicles temperatures in which the area near
. On a steep hill, the system’s auto- – Objects which absorb sound the sonar sensor becomes too hot
matic braking ability will be reduced. waves such as cloth or snow. or too cold to operate
. The system is designed to avoid – Objects whose surface has a – The sonar sensors or the rear
collisions by automatic hard braking diagonal angle. bumper near the sonar sensors is
when the vehicle’s reversing speed is – Objects that are low to the ground exposed to heavy rain or a signifi-
less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). such as parking blocks. cant amount of water.
However, the system does not guaran- – Objects that are high above the – Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid ground such as objects hanging – Air is moving rapidly such as
collisions in any situation. from above. when a strong wind is blowing.
. If the vehicle is reversed at an . The system may not be able to
extremely slow speed, the driver’s Parts attached to the rear bumper
properly detect objects or may cause near the sonar sensor:
operation may be prioritized. In this a system malfunction when the follow-
case, automatic braking will not oper- – Commercial electronic parts (fog
ing conditions exist. light, fender pole, radio antenna) or
ate.
. The system may not be able to detect High frequency sound from other commercial attachment parts (trai-
the following objects. sources are nearby: ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper
– Sharp or thin objects such as – Horn sounds from other vehicles. guard) are attached.
poles, fences and ropes which may – Engine sounds from other vehi- – Parts that emit high frequency

(365,1)
sound, such as a horn or speaker,

are attached.
Vehicle conditions:
– The vehicle is significantly in-
clined.
– The ground clearance is signifi-
cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s
loading condition, etc.
– When the sonar sensor is mis-
aligned due to a collision or an
accident
Surrounding environment:
– When reversing on an uneven
– A cloth banner, flag, hanging road 7
branch or railroad crossing bars
are present in the reversing direc-

. In circumstances such as the follow-
tion. ing, it may not be possible to avoid a
– When reversing on a gravel or collision even when the system oper-
grassy area ates normally.
– When reversing in an area where – The tire air pressure is not cor-
objects or walls are adjacent to the rect.
vehicle such as narrow tunnels, – The tires have become worn.
narrow bridges, narrow roads or – Tires which are not the desig-
narrow garages. nated size are installed.
– Wheel tracks or a hole is present – Emergency repairs were per-
in the ground of the reversing – The path of the reversing direc- formed using a puncture repair kit.
direction. tion is inclined such as on a steep – The suspension was modified.
– When reversing over a drainage uphill. – Tire chains are installed.
cover (grate cover) – A curb is present in the reversing – Vehicle driving is unstable due to
direction. accident or malfunction.
– When reversing downhill
– CONTINUED –

(366,1)
– The brake warning light is illumi- Guideline of detecting range

nated. Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern
Long proximity (ob- 35 inches (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound
& Reverse Automatic Braking ject detected)
System operation Medium proximity
S07BN03 alert (approaching the 28
cm)
to 35 inches (70 to 90 Yellow Short beeps
When the Reverse Automatic Braking object)
System is in operation, the range between Short proximity alert
the vehicle and the detected object will be (approaching closer 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 Orange Rapid short beeps
cm)
indicated on the audio/navigation monitor. to the object)
Also, warning sounds will activate in 3 Closest proximity
levels to warn the driver of a potential alert (too close to the 20 inches (50 cm) or less Red Continuous beep
collision. object)
While the RAB is operating, a warning *: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.
message is displayed on the audio/navi-
gation monitor and the combination meter
display (color LCD).

(367,1)
! Obstacle detected and alert level When an object is detected in the rever-
S07BN0301
sing direction, the range of detected object
will be shown on the audio/navigation
monitor.
A warning alarm will sound and, depend-
ing on the speed, either torque control to
generate engine braking or automatic
braking will be applied.
! Object close behind warning
S07BN0302
Short proximity alert (approaching the

object closer) 7
Long proximity alert (object detected)
1) Orange: 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)
1) Green: 35 inches (90 cm) or more

Automatic braking warning
1) Warning message
If the vehicle continues to go in reverse,
the system may determine the risk of
collision with the object. In this case, short
warning beeps or continuous warning
Closest proximity alert (too close to the beeps will sound and either strong auto-
Medium proximity alert (approaching the
object)
object) matic braking or torque control will be
1) Red: 20 inches (50 cm) or less applied to prevent collision.
1) Yellow: 28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)
– CONTINUED –

(368,1)
! When the vehicle is being stopped pending on the conditions of the position.
by the system road surface and tires, the vehicle In circumstances such as the following, the
S07BN0303
may not remain stopped, possibly Reverse Automatic Braking system auto-
leading to an unexpected accident. matically stops operating and the Reverse
Automatic Braking system OFF indicator
! After the vehicle is stopped by the illuminates.
system – There is ice, snow, mud, or other
S07BN0304 substance on the sonar sensors.
– The select lever was shifted to R when
there is an obstacle located close to the
rear bumper.
– A sound with a frequency close to that
of the sonar used by the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking system was detected.
Depress brake pedal warning NOTE
1) Warning message . In the following cases, after the
Make sure to depress the brake pedal vehicle has been stopped by the Re-
once the vehicle has been stopped by verse Automatic Braking system, brake
automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is control is released and the electronic
depressed, a message will be displayed 1) Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF parking brake operates. For details
on the audio/navigation monitor and the indicator about releasing the parking brake, refer
continuous beep will remain sounding. to “Electronic parking brake” FP332.
After the brake pedal is depressed, the
At this time, a warning message is also Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF – When 2 minutes pass after the
displayed on the combination meter dis- indicator will illuminate and the system will vehicle is stopped.
play (color LCD). temporarily stop operating. The Reverse – When any door is opened.
Automatic Braking system OFF indicator – When the EyeSight system mal-
WARNING will turn off when the select lever is shifted functions.
to a position other than the “R” position. – When the EyeSight system stops
Depress the brake pedal immedi- temporarily.
The system will operate again the next
ately after the system stops the – When the Reverse Automatic
time the select lever is shifted to “R”
vehicle by automatic braking. De- Braking system stops temporarily.

(369,1)
. The message/warning message will & Reverse Automatic Braking When the OFF setting is shown, the
not display for approximately 8 sec- system ON/OFF setting corresponding setting is OFF.
onds after turning the ignition switch to S07BN05
Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn
the “ON” position. While the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position, the below functions of the Re- the setting ON.
verse Automatic Braking system can be When the Reverse Automatic Braking
& Canceling the Reverse Auto- set by operating the audio/navigation system is turned OFF, the following in-
matic Braking system opera- monitor. dicator will illuminate.
tion
S07BN04
The Reverse Automatic Braking system
can be temporarily canceled by any of the
following operations.
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the brake
pedal is depressed. 7
. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the accel-
erator pedal is depressed.
. The accelerator pedal is kept de-
pressed. (In this case, limited acceleration
will be canceled and the vehicle will 1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the
continue reversing.) Braking Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned
. The select lever is shifted to a position 2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic OFF.
other than the “R” position. Braking
3) ON setting key of the object detection RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the
NOTE warning beeping sound Reverse Automatic Braking system is
4) OFF setting key of the object detection turned ON.
The system will be canceled if the warning beeping sound
object is no longer detected.
When the ON setting key is shown, the
corresponding setting is ON.
Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn
the setting OFF.
– CONTINUED –

(370,1)
NOTE & RAB warning indicator & Handling of the sonar sen-
S07BN07
. When the settings cannot be chan- sors
ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be S07BN06
The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear
grayed out. bumper. To ensure the proper operation of
. The ON/OFF setting key may be the Reverse Automatic Braking system,
greyed out if the Reverse Automatic observe the following precautions.
Braking system malfunctions, etc. In
this case, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and then turn it
to the “ON” position again. If the setting
cannot be changed even after turning
the ignition switch to the “ON” position
again, consult your SUBARU dealer.
. The settings will be restored as
follows when the select lever is shifted If the Reverse Automatic Braking System
to the “R” position next time. malfunctions, the above indicator illumi-
– Reverse Automatic Braking sys- nates on the combination meter. Contact
tem settings: default (ON setting) the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
– Object detection warning beep-
ing sound: the setting selected by
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
operating the combination meter
on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface
display (color LCD)
near the sonar sensors.
Also, the following settings can be chan- . Always keep the rear bumper surface
ged by operating the combination meter near the sonar sensors clean.
display (color LCD). . Do not modify the rear bumper.
. Warning volume . Do not paint the bumper near the sonar
. Sonar audible alarm ON/OFF sensors.
For details, refer to “Menu screens” . Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
FP195. bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor
becomes misaligned, a system malfunc-
tion may occur, including inability to detect

(371,1)
Driver Monitoring System 369
objects in the reversing direction. If any 7-22. Driver Monitoring Sys-

strong impact is applied to the rear
bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
tem (if equipped)
S07BP
have the system inspected.
. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors. The Driver Monitoring System monitors
possible cases when the driver is not
NOTE paying attention to the forward direction,
If the sonar sensors require repair or and also recognizes individual users.
replacement, or if the area of the rear This system warns the driver of inattentive/
bumper near the sonar sensors re- drowsy driving, and can support safe and
quires repair, paintwork or replace- comfortable driving by automatically re-
ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for trieving the following settings.
assistance. – Driver’s position
– Climate control setting 1) Camera
– Meter setting 7
– Multi function display setting CAUTION

When a user is registered, various settings . Always use the utmost care in
are automatically retrieved when the user driving
enters the vehicle. – Overconfidence because you
are driving a vehicle with the
Driver Monitoring System
could easily lead to a serious
accident.
. This system cannot detect if the
driver is feeling drowsy or is
concentrating on safe driving.
. It cannot judge if the driver is
awake or asleep, if their driving
abilities have diminished, or if
they are concentrating on safe
– CONTINUED –

(372,1)
370 Driver Monitoring System
driving. not operate correctly at the following position set for the tilt/telescopic steer-
. In some circumstances, the sys- times when the driver is wearing ing wheel, the cover may block the
tem may not be able to correctly glasses or sunglasses. system’s view of the face, and the
detect the driver state. – The sunglasses do not allow the system and the Driver Monitoring Sys-
easy passage of infrared light. tem may not operate correctly.
– The surrounding scenery is re- . Do not attach any stickers to the
NOTE flected strongly in the lenses of the user recognition camera or the infrared
. The user recognition camera does glasses or sunglasses. light source (LED). If the user recogni-
not save images, audio, or video. – The eyes are hidden by the frame tion camera or infrared light source
. The Driver Monitoring System may of the glasses and the user recogni- (LED) is covered by an obstruction, it
not operate correctly when sunlight is tion camera cannot detect the eyes. will not be possible to correctly monitor
shining into the vehicle in the following – The light from an infrared light the driver.
ways. source (LED) is reflected in the . If an accessory is hung from the
– Sunlight is shining directly (or lenses of the glasses or sunglasses. inside mirror, correct detection may not
through glass) onto the user recog- – The driver is wearing an eye- be possible.
nition camera. patch. . Do not touch the user recognition
camera or the infrared light source
– There are shadows on the dri- – The driver is wearing a hat set
(LED) directly with your fingers. If there
ver’s face caused by sunlight (or deeply over the eyes.
is dirt or a fingerprint on these parts, it
any light with a strong infrared . Depending on the type of mask, will not be possible to correctly monitor
component). correct detection of inattentive/drowsy the driver. If there is dirt or a fingerprint
– There are large momentary fluc- driving may not be possible. on these parts, either wipe them with a
tuations in the strength of the sun- . Correct user recognition is not pos- soft dry cloth, or wipe gently with a
light (or any light with a strong sible if the eyes, nose, or mouth is damp cloth after first firmly wringing
infrared component) shining on the covered with a mask, muffler, sun- the water out.
face. glasses, or other item. . If the surface of the user recognition
. Correct detection may not be possi- . The Driver Monitoring System may camera or the infrared light source
ble when a device that includes an not operate correctly when the eye- (LED) becomes scratched, correct de-
infrared light source (such as a com- brows, eyes, nose, or mouth is hidden tection may not be possible. Be careful
mercially available driver monitoring due to item that is between the face and that hard objects do not contact these
system) is installed in the vehicle the system. parts.
interior. . If a thick cover is attached to the . If there is condensation on the user
. The Driver Monitoring System may steering wheel, then depending on the recognition camera or the infrared light

(373,1)
source (LED), correct detection may . There are cases when the system stopped or travelling at slow speed
not be possible. If there is condensa- concludes that the user’s eyes are even if the driver is not looking ahead.
tion on these parts, wipe it away with a closed when the user is looking down- . The Driver Monitoring System col-
soft dry cloth. ward during driving, such as when lects and stores data regarding drivers’
. When registering a user for user checking instruments or the navigation facial features. Facial recognition data
recognition, avoid closing your eyes screen. In such cases, the drowsy is stored locally and does not leave the
as much as possible. driving warning buzzer may sound or vehicle. It is not transmitted to or stored
. If the user recognition success rate the system may otherwise not operate by SUBARU or anyone else. The Driver
is low, it is possible that the user is not correctly. Monitoring System may be disabled
correctly registered. Delete the regis- . If the eyes are narrowed when laugh- and any stored driver data may be
tered data and perform registration ing or when there is a dazzling outside deleted by following the instructions
again. light, the system may judge that the below. If the Driver Monitoring System
. If a user frequently drives both with eyes are closed and the drowsy driving is disabled, it will be unable to provide
glasses and contact lenses, it is re- warning buzzer may sound or the any of its safety or convenience func-
commended that registration be per- system may otherwise not operate tions. 7
formed both when wearing glasses and correctly.

when wearing contact lenses. . The drowsy driving or asleep warn-
. User recognition starts immediately ing states are recognized from the
after entering the vehicle, however if length of time and percentage of time
the user looks downward or at the that the eyes are closed. The drowsy
driver side mirror for a long time, the driving warning buzzer will not sound
user may not be recognized. simply when the driver feels sleepy or
. When one person among twins or yawns.
another pair of persons with similar . Even when the driver does not feel
facial features is registered, the other sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed or if
person may be incorrectly recognized he or she blinks frequently, the drowsy
as the registered user when entering driving warning buzzer may sound.
the vehicle. . The inattentive driving warning buz-
. If the person in the passenger’s seat zer may sound if the driver leans
leans into the driver’s seat, or in other forward or puts his or her head out of
cases when there are two or more faces the window while driving.
near the driver’s seat, the system may . The inattentive driving warning buz-
not operate correctly. zer will not sound when the vehicle is
– CONTINUED –

(374,1)
The functions which are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring System
setting and the user recognition function setting.
Available functions
Driver Monitoring System*1
ON OFF
Inattentive/drowsy Available Not available
driving warning
ON
User recognition Available Not available
User recognition function
function*2 Inattentive/drowsy
driving warning Available Not available
OFF
User recognition Not available Not available
function

(375,1)

Available function items & User recognition function
Driver Monitoring System*1 S07BP01
ON OFF WARNING
Register User Available Not available
Perform registration, retrieving, or
Delete User Available Not available delete of the seat position and out-
Delete All Users Available Not available side mirror angle before beginning
ON driving. There is the risk of an
Update User Set- Available Not available accident if registration, retrieving,
tings
or delete is performed while driving.
Delete Driver Posi- Available Not available
User recognition tion
When a user is registered, it is possible to
function*2 Register User Not available Not available retrieve the following settings.
Delete User Available Not available ! Driver position personalization
Delete All Users Available Not available
S07BP0101 7
. Seat position and outside mirror angle
OFF

Update User Set- Not available Not available Retrieves the registered seat position and
tings outside mirror angle.
Delete Driver Posi- Not available Not available . Reverse tilt angle
tion
Retrieves the registered reverse tilt-down
*1: The system can be turned ON/OFF with the Driver Monitoring System OFF switch. Refer to “Driver outside mirror angle.
Monitoring System OFF switch” FP380.
*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the Multi Function Display customization settings. Refer to ! Meter personalization
S07BP0102
“User Recognition settings” FP220. . Combination meter display basic
screen
The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is Displays the screen which the user had
registered. selected at the time when he/she last
exited the vehicle.
Available functions
. Fuel consumption screen
The user is registered. The user is not registered. Displays the average fuel economy for
User recognition function Available Not available past driving by that user.
– CONTINUED –

(376,1)
! Multi Function Display personalization ! Air conditioner personalization

S07BP0103 S07BP0104
. Multi Function Display basic screen . Air conditioner settings
Displays the screen which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the Retrieves the air conditioner temperature,
vehicle. outlet mode, and other settings which the
. Fuel consumption screen user had selected at the time when he/she
Displays the average fuel economy for past driving by that user. last exited the vehicle.
. Customization linked with the user recognition function
Menu Item
NOTE
When a recognized user exits the
Birthday
Time/Date vehicle with the air conditioner set to
Anniversary maximum cool or maximum heat, then
Screen Off the setting which preceded maximum
cool or maximum heat is stored.
Favorite
Display/Beep Birthday Reminder ! Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF
Bypass Screen status
Anniversary Reminder S07BP0105
Retrieves the Driver Monitoring System
Beep ON/OFF status which the user had se-
Mode Setting lected at the time when he/she last exited
Climate Control the vehicle.
Occupant Detection

(377,1)
! Changing the personalization settings & Inattentive/drowsy driving

S07BP0106
Item warning
S07BP02
Seat position/outside mirror While driving, the Driver Monitoring Sys-
Change the setting by using the
Driver’s position personaliza- angle combination meter display tem monitors possible cases of driver
tion Reverse tilt-down outside mir- customization function. Refer inattention or drowsiness and warns the
ror angle to “Menu screens” FP195. driver.
Combination meter display ba- When the inattentive/drowsy driving warn-
Meter personalization* sic screen ing activates, the buzzer sounds and an
Multi Function Display basic interrupt display appears.
When the customization screen
Multi Function Display perso-
nalization* Customization linked with syn- linked with the synchronized
user function is selected and NOTE
chronized user function the setting is changed, it is . The inattentive/drowsy driving warn-
Climate control personaliza- automatically stored. ing operates regardless of the status of
tion* Climate control settings
the user recognition function.
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status . The inattentive driving warning does
7
not activate when the turn signal is

*: When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store the operating or when the select lever is in
conditions from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if the
screen was selected and the setting was changed. the “R” position.
. When the pre-crash brake OFF in-
dicator is illuminated on the combina-
tion meter display, the inattentive driv-
ing warning activates at the same
timing as usual even when a vehicle
ahead or obstacle is detected. For
details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
– CONTINUED –

(378,1)
! Inattentive driving warning ! Drowsy driving warning

S07BP0201 S07BP0202
Possible drowsiness is detected from the amount of driver eyelid closure, and a warning
is given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and
an interrupt display appears.
Combination meter Multi Function Display Warning chime
display
Beep, beep... (Con-
Drowsy driving tinues until the driver’s
eyes open.)
Very drowsy Beep, beep, beep,

beep, beep (5 times)
Slightly drowsy — Beep

When the system monitors that the driver
may be inattentive, it warns the driver.
Not drowsy — — —
When the inattentive driving warning acti-
vates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt
display appears on the combination meter
display.
When the EyeSight system has detected a
vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward
direction, the inattentive driving warning
may activate at earlier timing than usual.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.

(379,1)
& Driver Monitoring System in- nated, the Driver Monitoring System high or low.
dicator/warning function cannot be used. In addition, . When the Driver Monitoring System
S07BP03 the following items cannot be selected. cannot monitor the driver’s eye move-
. Register User ment.
. Delete User . When the Driver Monitoring System
. Delete All Users cannot monitor the driver’s eyebrows,
. Update User Settings eyes, nose or mouth.
. Delete Driver Position . When the camera and the infrared
. Automatically retract seat on entry light source (LED) are covered and the
Driver Monitoring System cannot moni-
! Driver Monitoring System operation tor the driver correctly.
indicator light (green)
S07BP0301
This indicator illuminates when the Driver ! Driver Monitoring System warning
Monitoring System is operating. light (yellow)
S07BP0304
! Driver Monitoring System OFF in-

This warning illuminates when there is a 7
problem with the Driver Monitoring Sys-
1) Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light

dicator light (green) S07BP0302 tem. Contact a SUBARU dealer to have
This indicator illuminates when the user the system inspected.
2) Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator
light has pressed the Driver Monitoring System
3) Driver Monitoring System temporary stop OFF switch and the Driver Monitoring & Using the Driver Monitoring
indicator light System is not operating. System
4) Driver Monitoring System warning light ! Driver Monitoring System tempor- S07BP04
(yellow) ! User recognition
ary stop indicator light S07BP0401
S07BP0303
The Driver Monitoring System indicator/ This indicator illuminates when the Driver When a user is registered with the user
warning indicates the status of the Driver Monitoring System is temporarily stopped. recognition function, the Driver Monitoring
Monitoring System on the combination System performs the following.
meter display. NOTE
NOTE The Driver Monitoring System stops
temporarily in the following circum-
When the Driver Monitoring System stances.
OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring Sys-
. When the temperature of the main
tem temporary stop indicator, or Driver
unit of the Driver Monitoring System is
Monitoring System warning is illumi-
– CONTINUED –

(380,1)
“P” position, the seat position will not

change even when user recognition is
completed.
. If user recognition fails, perform
recognition again following the instruc-
tions, refer to “When a user is not
recognized” FP379.
. User recognition is not performed
while driving.
. If the seat position or outside mirror
angle are in motion at the time when
user recognition is completed, then it is
not possible to retrieve the seat posi-
1. When the door is opened and the 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and face forward tion, outside mirror angle, or reverse
push-button ignition switch is OFF, the for a few moments. tilt-down outside mirror angle.
user recognition screen appears and the 3. When user recognition is completed, . If any of the following operations is
Driver Monitoring system starts user re- the Hello screen appears on the Multi performed while retrieving of the seat
cognition. Function Display. position or outside mirror angle, re-
The user recognition screen may not trieving of the seat position and outside
appear when the door is opened in some At this time, the seat position, outside mirror angle is canceled.
cases, such as when only a short time has mirror angle, air conditioner settings, – The power seat adjustment
passed after the push-button ignition combination meter display basic screen, switch was operated.
switch was turned OFF. In such cases, Multi Function Display basic screen, and – The outside mirror adjustment
user recognition starts when the door is customization settings all change based switch was operated.
closed however the user recognition on the user information. – The “SET” button was pressed.
screen does not appear. – The “1” or “2” button was
NOTE pressed.
. When a Multi Function Display op- – The select lever was moved to a
eration switch is pressed, the user position other than “P” position.
recognition screen is canceled, how-
ever user recognition continues.
. When the select lever is not in the

(381,1)
! When a user is not recognized that has been thoroughly wrung out. & Registering and deleting dri-
S07BP0402
In the following case, user recognition may . When the synchronized user func- ver position personalization
not be possible and “User recognition tion is turned OFF, manual repeat facial S07BP06
scan is not possible. At the time when a user is registered, the

stopped” may be displayed. seat position, outside mirror angle, and
. There is an object blocking the camera. & Registering and deleting a reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle are
user registered at the same time. To change the
Remove the obstacle and follow the S07BP05 setting for the seat position, outside mirror
reference procedure to perform user re- Users can be registered in the Driver angle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirror
cognition again. Monitoring System, and registered users angle, refer to “Driver Monitoring System
Refer to “Repeat facial scan”“Repeat facial can be deleted. For the user registration settings” FP215.
scan” FP215. and delete procedures, refer to “Driver
Monitoring System settings” FP215. NOTE
. When the user recognition setting is
NOTE OFF, or when the Driver Monitoring
. When the Driver Monitoring System System OFF indicator, Driver Monitor- 7
OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring Sys- ing System temporary stop indicator, or

tem temporary stop indicator, or Driver Driver Monitoring System warning is
Monitoring System warning is illumi- illuminated, the following items cannot
nated, the following items cannot be be selected.
selected. – Update User Settings
– Register User – Delete Driver Position
– Delete User . The driver position can be registered
– Delete All Users or deleted only when a registered user
. User information can also be deleted is sitting in the driver’s seat and user
1) Camera by resetting the Multi Function Display recognition is completed.
to the factory default settings. When
NOTE the settings are reset to the factory
default settings, all user information is & Driver Monitoring System
. User recognition may not be possi- ON/OFF settings
ble when there is dirt or fingerprints on deleted. The settings cannot be reset to S07BP07
the user recognition camera. To clean, the factory default settings when the NOTE
either wipe using a soft cloth or else Driver Monitoring System is OFF. . When the vehicle is stopped and the
wipe gently using a moistened cloth driver’s door is opened and closed, the
– CONTINUED –

(382,1)
Driver Monitoring System automati- ! Driver Monitoring System OFF NOTE

cally turns ON regardless of the push- switch . The user recognition function
button ignition switch status. S07BP0701
setting cannot be changed for each
. After the Driver Monitoring System individual user.
was turned OFF, if the Driver Monitoring . The default setting for the user
System is turned ON while the driver’s recognition function is ON.
door is open, user recognition may not . When the user recognition function
occur correctly. is turned OFF, the following items
. When the Driver Monitoring System cannot be selected.
is turned OFF after user recognition – Repeat facial scan
was completed, the user recognition – Register User
function stores the Driver Monitoring – Update User Settings
System ON/OFF state.
– Delete Driver Position
! Automatically retract seat on entry
S07BP0704
When the Driver Monitoring System OFF The function which automatically moves
switch is pressed, the Driver Monitoring the driver’s seat back when the door is
System turns OFF. When the Driver opened in order to make entry easier can
Monitoring System is turned OFF, the be turned ON/OFF. Refer to “Driver Mon-
Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator itoring System settings” FP215.
on the combination meter display will
illuminate. To turn the Driver Monitoring NOTE
System ON, press the Driver Monitoring . Even when the automatically retract
System OFF switch again. seat on entry setting is ON, the auto-
matically retract seat on entry function
! User recognition settings
S07BP0702 automatically turns OFF when the user
The Driver Monitoring System User recog- recognition function is OFF.
nition function can be turned ON/OFF. For . Automatically retract seat on entry
the setting procedure, refer to “Driver cannot be selected when the Driver
Monitoring System settings” FP215. Monitoring System OFF indicator, Dri-
ver Monitoring System temporary stop
indicator, or Driver Monitoring System

(383,1)
warning is illuminated. – Canada-spec. models – Mexico-spec. models
& Certification for Driver Mon-

itoring System
U.S.-spec. models
S07BP08
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
7

NOTE
operation.

(384,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(385,1)
Driving tips
8-1. New vehicle break-in driving – the first 8-10. Loading your vehicle ....................................394
S08
1,000 miles (1,600 km) .................................. 384 Vehicle capacity weight ...................................... 395
8-2. Fuel economy hints ........................................ 384 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
8-3. Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ....... 384 Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).............. 395
Roof rails (if equipped)....................................... 396
8-4. Catalytic converter ......................................... 385
Roof tent (models with roof rails) ....................... 397
8-5. Periodic inspections....................................... 386 8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer option) ..........................398
8-6. Driving in foreign countries........................... 386 Connecting a trailer............................................ 399
8-7. Driving tips for AWD models ......................... 386 If not towing a trailer .......................................... 400
8-8. On-road and off-road driving......................... 388 8-12. Trailer towing .................................................401
8-9. Winter driving ................................................. 390 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 401
Operation during cold weather............................ 390 Maximum load limits .......................................... 401
Driving on snowy and icy roads.......................... 391 Trailer Hitches.................................................... 404
Corrosion protection........................................... 392 When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 405
Snow tires .......................................................... 392 Connecting a trailer............................................ 405
Tire chains ......................................................... 393 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 407
Rocking the vehicle ............................................ 393 8

(386,1)
384 New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
8-1. New vehicle break-in 8-2. Fuel economy hints 8-3. Engine exhaust gas (car-
driving – the first 1,000 miles S08AB bon monoxide)
(1,600 km) The following suggestions will help to save S08AC
S08AA fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new. . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first tion. Always accelerate gently until you carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km): reach the desired speed. Then try to and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine or allow engine maintain that speed for as long as possi- gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an ble.
. Always properly maintain the en-
emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or racing the engine. engine exhaust gas from entering
vehicle speed, either fast or slow. . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. the vehicle.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac- . Keep the engine properly tuned. . Never run the engine in a closed
celeration, except in an emergency. . Keep the tires inflated to the correct space, such as a garage, except
. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer- pressure shown on the tire placard, which for the brief time needed to drive
gency. is located under the door latch on the the vehicle in or out of it.
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
The same break-in procedures should be . Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
tire wear and fuel consumption.
applied to an overhauled engine, newly hicle for a lengthy time while the
. Use the air conditioner only when engine is running. If that is un-
mounted engine or when brake pads are necessary.
replaced with new ones. avoidable, then use the ventila-
. Keep the front and rear wheels in tion fan to force fresh air into the
proper alignment. vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or . Always keep the front ventilator
cargo. inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that

(387,1)
Catalytic converter 385
exhaust fumes are entering the 8-4. Catalytic converter your vehicle checked and repaired by an
vehicle, have the problem S08AD
authorized SUBARU dealer.
checked and corrected as soon . Do not apply undercoating or rust
as possible. If you must drive prevention treatment to the heat shield of
under these conditions, drive catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
only with all windows fully open. tem.
. Keep the rear gate closed while . Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
driving to prevent exhaust gas level.
from entering the vehicle.
WARNING
NOTE . Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
Due to the expansion and contraction or park the vehicle anywhere
of the metals used in the manufacture near flammable materials (e.g.,
of the exhaust system, you may hear a grass, paper, rags or leaves),
crackling sound coming from the ex- The catalytic converter is installed in the because the catalytic converter
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to operates at very high tempera-
haust system for a short time after the
tures.
8
engine has been shut off. This sound is reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,
Driving tips
normal. thus providing cleaner exhaust. . Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter: pipe while the engine is running.
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small The exhaust gas is very hot.
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have

(388,1)
386 Periodic inspections
8-5. Periodic inspections 8-6. Driving in foreign coun- 8-7. Driving tips for AWD
S08AE tries models
To keep your vehicle in the best condition S08AF S08AG
at all times, always have the recom- When planning to use your vehicle in
mended maintenance services listed in another country:
WARNING
the maintenance schedule in the “War- . Confirm the availability of the correct . Always maintain a safe driving
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” FP291. speed according to the road and
formed at the specified time or mileage
. Comply with all regulations and require- weather conditions in order to
intervals.
ments of each country. avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear

(389,1)
Driving tips for AWD models 387
For the items (a) to (d), you must conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
obey the specification that is There is little difference in handling, how-
printed on the tire placard. The ever, during extremely sharp turns or
tire placard is located on the sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
driver’s door pillar. down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
If all of four tires are not the same reduce your speed and maintain an ample
for items (a) to (h), serious me- distance from other vehicles.
chanical damage could occur to . Always check the cold tire pressure
the drivetrain of your car, and before starting to drive. The recommended
affect the following. tire pressure is provided on the tire
placard, which is located under the door
– Ride
latch on the driver’s side.
– Handling . Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
– Braking All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine under hard-driving conditions such as
– Speedometer/Odometer cali- power to all four wheels. AWD models steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate
bration provide better traction when driving on more frequent replacement of the follow-
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and ing items than that specified in the “War- 8
– Clearance between the body when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By ranty and Maintenance Booklet”
and tires
Driving tips
shifting power between the front and rear – Engine oil
It also may be dangerous and wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide – Brake fluid
lead to loss of vehicle control, added traction during acceleration and – Rear differential gear oil
and it can lead to an accident. added engine braking force during decel-
– Continuously variable transmission
eration.
fluid
CAUTION Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle – Front differential gear oil
may handle differently than an ordinary . There are some precautions that you
If you use a temporary spare tire to two wheel drive vehicle and it contains must observe when towing your vehicle.
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the some features unique to AWD. For safety For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
original temporary spare tire stored purposes as well as to avoid damaging the FP423.
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may AWD system, you should keep the follow-
result in severe mechanical damage ing tips in mind.
to the drivetrain of your vehicle. . An AWD model is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery

(390,1)
388 On-road and off-road driving
8-8. On-road and off-road with its higher profile and center If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain
of gravity, is more likely to be common sense precautions such as those
driving in the following list should be taken.
S08AN
affected by crosswinds than or-
dinary passenger cars. . Make certain that you and all of your
WARNING . Always use the utmost care in passengers are wearing seatbelts.
driving – overconfidence be- . Carry some emergency equipment,
. In a rollover crash, an unbelted cause you are driving an All- such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
person is significantly more Wheel Drive model could easily wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
likely to die than a person wear- lead to a serious accident. citizens band radio.
ing a seat belt. You the driver and . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
all your passengers should fas- Your vehicle is classified as a utility sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
ten the seatbelts before starting vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher over rough terrain.
to drive in order to minimize the ground clearance which enables them to
chance of serious injury or death. . Slow down and employ extra caution at
be used for wide applications including off- all times. When driving off-road, you will
. Do not make sharp turns and road driving. But please keep in mind that not have the benefit of marked traffic
quick maneuvers unless abso- your vehicle is neither a conventional off- lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
lutely unavoidable. Such actions road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A the like.
are dangerous as you may lose higher center of gravity in relation to the . Do not drive across steep slopes.
control, possibly resulting in a tread width as compared with ordinary Instead, drive either straight up or straight
rollover which could cause death passenger cars makes vehicles of this down the slopes. A vehicle can much more
or serious injury. type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility easily tip over sideways than it can end
. Always maintain a safe driving vehicles have a significantly higher rollover end. Avoid driving straight up or down
speed according to the road and over rate than other types of vehicles. The slopes that are too steep.
weather conditions in order to high ground clearance of this vehicle is a
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
avoid having an accident on a real advantage, giving you a better view of
cially at higher speeds.
sharp turn, during sudden brak- the road and allowing you to anticipate
problems earlier. However, remember that . Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
ing or under other similar condi- steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
tions. your utility vehicle is not designed for high-
speed cornering comparable to ordinary wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
. Whenever strong crosswinds are with your fingers and thumbs on the
passenger cars and that your vehicle could
present, slow down sufficiently outside of the rim.
roll over if you make a sharp turn at high
to maintain control of your vehi- . If driving through water, such as when
speed.
cle. Remember that your vehicle,

(391,1)
On-road and off-road driving 389
crossing shallow streams, first check the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these . Frequent driving of an AWD model
depth of the water and the bottom of the materials trapped or adhering to the under hard-driving conditions such as
stream bed for firmness and ensure that underbody, a mechanical breakdown or rough roads or off roads will necessitate
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly fire could occur. more frequent replacement of the follow-
and cross the stream without stopping. . Secure all cargo carried inside the ing items than that specified in the main-
The water should be shallow enough that it vehicle and make certain that it is not piled tenance schedule described in the “War-
does not reach the vehicle’s undercar- higher than the seatbacks. During sudden ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
riage. Water entering the engine air intake stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be – Engine oil
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto thrown around in the vehicle and cause – Brake fluid
electrical parts may damage your vehicle injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.
and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of Remember that damage done to your
drive through rushing water; regardless of gravity and make it more prone to tip over. SUBARU while operating it off-road and
its depth, it can wash away the ground . If you must rock the vehicle to free it not using common sense precautions
from under your tires, resulting in possible from sand or mud, depress the accelerator such as those listed above is not eligible
loss of traction and even vehicle rollover. pedal slightly and move the shift lever/ for warranty coverage.
. Always check your brakes for effective- select lever back and forth between “1”/“D”
ness immediately after driving in sand, and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the 8
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and engine. For the best possible traction,
stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that
Driving tips
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
process several times to dry out the brake free the vehicle.
discs and brake pads. . When the road surface is extremely
. Do not drive or park over or near slippery, you can obtain better traction by
flammable materials such as dry grass or starting the vehicle with the transmission in
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The 2nd than 1st. For models with manual
exhaust system is very hot while the mode, refer to “Selection of manual mode”
engine is running and right after engine FP312.
stops. This could create a fire hazard. . Never equip your vehicle with tires
. After driving through tall grass, mud, larger than those specified in this manual.
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, road driving. Suspension components are
etc. adhering to or trapped on the under- particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
body. Clear off any such matter from the need to be washed thoroughly.

(392,1)
390 Winter driving
8-9. Winter driving the vehicle. CAUTION

S08AI SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
& Operation during cold weath- tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% . Adjust the washer fluid concen-
er surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- tration appropriately for the out-
S08AI01 perature varies according to how much it is side temperature. If the concen-
! Maintenance diluted, as indicated in the following table. tration is inappropriate, sprayed
S08AI0105
Carry some emergency equipment, such Washer Fluid Con- washer fluid may freeze on the
centration Freezing Temperature windshield and obstruct your
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,
a small shovel and jumper cables. 30% 10.48F (−128C)
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
Check the battery and cables. Cold tem- 50% −48F (−208C)
peratures reduce battery capacity. The . State or local regulations on
battery must be in good condition to 100% −498F (−458C) volatile organic compounds may
provide enough power for cold winter restrict the use of methanol, a
In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid, common windshield washer anti-
starts.
check the freezing temperatures in the freeze additive. Washer fluids
It normally takes longer to start the engine table above when adjusting the fluid containing non-methanol anti-
in very cold weather conditions. Use an concentration to the outside temperature. freeze agents should be used
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with only if they provide cold weather
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil a different concentration from the one protection without damaging
will make it harder to start the engine. used previously, purge the old fluid from your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
Keep the door locks from freezing by the piping between the reservoir tank and or washer system.
squirting them with deicer or glycerin. washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if ! Before driving your vehicle
Forcing a frozen door open may damage the concentration of the fluid remaining in S08AI0101
or separate the rubber weather strips the piping is too low for the outside Before entering the vehicle, remove any
around the door. If the door is frozen, use temperature, it may freeze and block the snow or ice from your shoes because that
hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards nozzles. could make the pedals slippery and driving
thoroughly wipe the water away. dangerous.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con- While warming up the vehicle before
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
engine antifreeze or other substitutes brake pedal, and all other controls operate
because they may damage the paint of smoothly.

(393,1)
Winter driving 391
Clear away ice and snow that has accu- icing may develop on the brake fuel tank filled to capacity.
mulated under the fenders to avoid making system, which could cause poor ! Opening rear gate (models with
steering difficult. During severe winter braking action. Check for snow or power rear gate)
driving, stop when and where it is safe to ice buildup on the suspension, S08AI0104
do so and check under the fenders disc brakes and brake hoses
periodically.
CAUTION
underneath the vehicle. If there
! Parking in cold weather is caked snow or ice, remove it, Before operating the power rear
S08AI0102 being careful not to damage the gate, check that there is no frost or
WARNING disc brakes, brake hoses or ABS snow between the power rear gate
harness. and the vehicle body. If you notice
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust frost or snow etc. on the power rear
gases under your vehicle. Keep When parking for long periods in cold gate, remove it. If you forcibly oper-
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and weather, you should observe the following ate the power rear gate with frost or
from around your vehicle if you park tips. snow, it may cause a malfunction.
the vehicle in snow with the engine 1. Place the select lever in the “P”
running. position.
& Driving on snowy and icy
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent
roads 8
the vehicle from moving. S08AI02
CAUTION
Driving tips
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
! Refueling in cold weather sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
. Do not use the parking brake S08AI0103 speed driving, and sharp turning when
when parking for long periods in To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, driving on snowy or icy roads.
cold weather since it could freeze Always maintain ample distance between
in that position. use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather. your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
. When the vehicle is parked in to avoid the need for sudden braking.
snow or when it snows, raise the Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an anti- To supplement the foot brake, use the
wiper blades off the glass to engine brake effectively to control the
prevent damage to them. freeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
. When the vehicle has been left fuel level reaches half empty. when necessary.)
parked after use on roads heavily Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
covered with snow, or has been If your SUBARU is not going to be used for vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
left parked during a snowstorm, an extended period, it is best to have the leading to loss of vehicle control.
– CONTINUED –

(394,1)
392 Winter driving
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- . To thaw the windshield wiper blade ! Lighting operation when snowing
hances your vehicle’s braking perfor- rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow S08AI0202
Check that the headlights are clean before
mance on snowy and icy roads. For selection in “ ” and the temperature set driving. If snow, frost or ice are attached to
information on braking on slippery sur- for maximum warmth until the wiper blade the headlights, remove it.
faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to
If the headlights are not clean, they will not
System)” FP321 and “Vehicle Dynamics “Climate control” FP255.
light the front normally. Also if the indica-
Control system” FP323. . If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper tors and brake lamps are not clean, the
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the vehicle will not be able to inform its status
WARNING windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to to other drivers and it may result in an
“Defogger and deicer” FP250. accident.
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy . To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,
roads. This may cause loss of vehi- use the rear window defogger. Refer to & Corrosion protection
cle control. “Defogger and deicer” FP250. S08AI03
Refer to “Corrosion protection” FP436.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield & Snow tires
CAUTION despite wiper operation, use the defroster S08AI04
Avoid prolonged continuous driving with the airflow selection in “ ” and the WARNING
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the temperature set for maximum warmth.
engine’s intake system and may After the windshield gets warmed enough . When replacing or installing win-
hinder the airflow, which could re- to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away ter tire(s), all four tires must be
sult in engine shutdown or even using the windshield washer. Refer to the same for following items.
breakdown. “Windshield washer” FP239. (a) Size
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the (b) Circumference
! Wiper operation when snowing wiper from working effectively. If snow is (c) Speed symbol
S08AI0201
Before driving in cold weather, make sure stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
(d) Load index
the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the
vehicle at road side, use the hazard (e) Construction
the windshield or rear window.
warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer (f) Manufacturer
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the to “Hazard warning flasher” FP160. (g) Brand (tread pattern)
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure. (h) Degrees of wear

(395,1)
Winter driving 393
For the items (a) to (d), you must mance in year-round driving. In winter, it spring chains) may be acceptable if use
obey the specification that is may be possible to enhance performance on your vehicle is recommended by the
printed on the tire placard. The through use of tires designed specifically device manufacturer, taking into ac-
tire placard is located on the for winter driving conditions. count tire size and road conditions.
driver’s door pillar. When you choose to install winter tires on Follow the device manufacturer’s in-
If all of four winter tires are not your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire structions, especially regarding max-
the same for items (a) to (h), size and type. You must install four winter imum vehicle speed.
serious mechanical damage tires that are of the same size, construc- To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
could occur to the drivetrain of tion, brand and load range and you should drive slowly, readjust or remove the
your car, and affect the following. never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires device if it is contacting your vehicle,
since this may result in dangerous hand- and do not spin your wheels. Damage
– Ride
ling characteristics. When you choose a caused to your vehicle by use of a
– Handling tire, make sure that there is enough traction device is not covered under
– Braking clearance between the tire and vehicle warranty.
– Speedometer/Odometer cali- body.
Make certain that any traction device
bration Remember to drive with care at all times you use is an SAE class S device, and
– Clearance between the body regardless of the type of tires on your use it on the front wheels only. Always 8
and tires vehicle. use the utmost care when driving with a
Driving tips
It also may be dangerous and traction device. Overconfidence be-
lead to loss of vehicle control, & Tire chains cause you are using a traction device
and it can lead to an accident.
S08AI05
could easily lead to a serious accident.
. Do not use a combination of CAUTION
radial, belted bias or bias tires & Rocking the vehicle
Tire chains cannot be used on your S08AI06
since it may cause dangerous vehicle because of the lack of clear- If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
handling characteristics and lead ance between the tires and vehicle snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
to an accident. body. erator pedal slightly and move the select
lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the
tires” as original equipment, which are NOTE best possible traction, avoid spinning the
designed to provide an adequate measure When tire chains cannot be used, use of wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
of traction, handling and braking perfor- another type of traction device (such as When the road surface is extremely
– CONTINUED –

(396,1)
394 Loading your vehicle
slippery, you can obtain better traction by 8-10. Loading your vehicle
starting the vehicle with the transmission in WARNING
S08AJ
2nd than 1st. . When you carry something inside
WARNING the vehicle, secure it whenever
For information about holding the trans-
mission in the 2nd position, refer to . Never allow passengers to ride you can to prevent it from being
“Selection of manual mode” FP312. on a folded rear seatback in the thrown around inside the vehicle
cargo area. Doing so may result during sudden stops, sharp turns
in serious injury. or in an accident.
. Never stack luggage or other . Do not pile heavy loads on the
cargo higher than the top of the roof. These loads raise the vehi-
seatback because it could tumble cle’s center of gravity and make it
forward and injure passengers in more prone to tip over.
the event of a sudden stop or . Secure lengthy items properly to
accident. Keep luggage or cargo prevent them from shooting for-
low, as close to the floor as ward and causing serious injury
possible. during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.

(397,1)
Loading your vehicle 395
CAUTION & GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating and
Do not carry spray cans, containers Gross Axle Weight Rating)
with flammable or corrosive liquids S08AJ02
or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle capacity weight Vehicle placard

S08AJ01
The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can Certification label 8
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
The certification label attached to the
Driving tips
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows
of the driver and all passengers and their GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and
belongings, any optional equipment such GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
pending on the situation. The GVWR
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire
– CONTINUED –

(398,1)
396 Loading your vehicle
assembly) plus the vehicle capacity & Roof rails (if equipped) CAUTION
weight. S08AJ04
In addition, the total weight applied to each . When using a carrying attach-
axle (GAW) must never exceed the ment, make sure that the total
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be carrying load of the cargo, cross-
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the bars and carrying attachment
vehicle. does not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg).
Overloading may cause damage
Even if the total weight of your luggage is to the vehicle. Read the manufac-
lower than the vehicle capacity weight, turer’s instructions and pay at-
either front or rear GAW may exceed the tention to not exceed the load
GAWR, depending on the distribution of limit of the parts.
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly . For cargo carrying purposes, the
distributed throughout the vehicle. roof rails must be used together
1) Roof rails with the SUBARU recommended
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you Cargo can be carried on the roof after crossbars and any appropriate
should confirm that GVW and front and securing the crossbars to the roof rails and carrying attachment that may be
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and installing an appropriate carrying attach- needed. The roof rails must never
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle ment. When installing crossbars and a be used alone to carry cargo.
scale, found at a commercial weighing carrying attachment, follow the manufac- Otherwise, damage to the roof
station. turer’s instructions. The roof rail system is or paint, or a dangerous road
designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars hazard due to loss of cargo could
Do not use replacement tires with a lower result.
load range than the originals because they and carrying attachment) of no more than
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita- 176 lbs (80 kg). Be sure not to exceed
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR. NOTE
range than the originals do not increase Remember that the vehicle’s center of
the GVWR and GAWR limitations. gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting driving
characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

(399,1)
Loading your vehicle 397
effects will be increased. applies only when the vehicle is

parked and the load is evenly
& Roof tent (models with roof distributed left/right and front/
rear and the roof crossbars and
rails) roof tent are tightly secured to
S08AJ14
the vehicle. If these conditions
are not met, the load limit will be
lower.
. The maximum load limit of the
roof crossbars must be obtained
from the manufacturer or retailer
of the roof rack. When driving the
vehicle, the maximum roof rail
load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the
crossbar load limit (whichever is
lower).
. Roof tents can only be used on 8
vehicles originally equipped with
Driving tips
WARNING roof rails. Otherwise, damage to
the vehicle’s roof may occur.
Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof
can adversely affect handling, brak- On vehicles equipped with roof rails, roof
ing, and rollover resistance. The tents may be used under certain condi-
vehicle must never be driven with a tions at your own risk.
total roof rail load in excess of 176
lbs (80 kg). ! When driving the vehicle
S08AJ1401 A: Roof rails
The total weight on the roof rails, including B: Roof crossbars
the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not C: Roof tent
CAUTION exceed the vehicle’s roof rail load of 176 B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg)
lbs (80 kg), evenly distributed.
. The roof rail load limit for sta-
tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg))
– CONTINUED –

(400,1)
398 Trailer hitch (dealer option)
! When the vehicle is parked on level The total weight on the roof rails – 8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer op-
ground including the roof crossbars, roof tent,
S08AJ1402
and all occupants and contents in the roof
tion)
S08AK
tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s
roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly WARNING
distributed, or the load limit of the roof
crossbars, whichever is lower. . Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
Load limit of the roof rail (A). hitch. Exceeding the maximum
B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg) weight could cause an accident
Exceeding this load limit could cause resulting in serious personal in-
damage to the vehicle or racking system. juries. Permissible trailer weight
The vehicle must never be driven with changes depending on the situa-
occupants in the roof tent. Before the tion. For possible recommenda-
vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo tions and limitations, refer to
must be removed from the roof tent and “Trailer towing” FP401.
the roof rail load must be restored to within . Trailer brakes are required when
the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg). the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs
Refer to the user manual that accompa- (453 kg). Be sure your trailer has
nied the roof tent for important safety safety chains and that each chain
information and instructions on the proper will hold the trailer’s maximum
installation and use of the tent. gross weight. Towing trailers
without safety chains could cre-
ate a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch
due to coupling damage or hitch
ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and
A: Roof rails
safety pin for positive locking
B: Roof crossbars
placement before towing a trailer.
C: Roof tent
D: Occupants in the roof tent
If the ball mount comes off the
hitch receiver, the trailer could

(401,1)
Trailer hitch (dealer option) 399
get loose and create a traffic bumper beam if you do not have & Connecting a trailer
S08AK01
safety hazard. the original.
. Although towing regulations for . Safety performance is decreased
trailer or caravan vehicles vary and there is increased risk of
by state/region, all regulations injury to passengers in the case
agree that specifications such of an accident if the trailer hitch
as the maximum gross trailer or a standard bumper beam is not
weight must not exceed the les- installed. One of them must al-
ser of the following: ways be installed on the vehicle.
– Maximum gross trailer weight . If a trailer hitch is installed, it is
– Maximum gross tongue not possible to install the rear
weight towing hook.
– GVWR The maximum gross trailer weight and
– GAWR maximum gross tongue weight are indi-
. Failure to comply with the proce- cated in the following table.
dures set forth will not only Maximum gross trai- Maximum gross ton-
8
compromise your safety, but will ler weight gue weight
Driving tips
also negate your insurance cov- 1,500 lbs (680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
erage and/or may violate the state
road and traffic acts and regula- When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer
tions. towing” FP401.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight dis-
tributing hitch. 1) Ball mount
. The standard bumper beam must 2) Hitch pin
be installed after you remove the 3) Safety pin
trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU A) Hitch receiver tube
dealer for purchase of a standard 1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch
– CONTINUED –

(402,1)
400 Trailer hitch (dealer option)
receiver tube. maximum gross weight. The chains should 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located cross under the trailer tongue to prevent electrical wire harness by individually
on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin the tongue from dropping onto the ground activating the brake, stop and turn signal
passes through the ball mount. in case it should disconnect from the hitch lights on the trailer.
3. Insert the safety pin through the pro- ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains
vided hole on the hitch pin securely. taking tight turn situations into account; NOTE
4. Check the ball mount assembly by however, be careful not to let them drag on
the ground. Always disconnect the trailer electrical
pulling on it to make sure it does not come wire harness before launching or re-
off the hitch receiver. trieving a watercraft.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to any & If not towing a trailer
S08AK02
part of the vehicle other than the . Remove the ball mount from the hitch
safety chain hooks. receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch electrical wire
harness to protect against possible da-
mage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the Hitch harness connector
ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball. 8. Connect the hitch electrical wire har-
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with ness’s black four-pin electrical wire con-
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s nector to the towing trailer’s wire harness.

(403,1)
Trailer towing 401
8-12. Trailer towing & Warranties and maintenance total weight.

S08AL01
S08AL SUBARU warranties do not apply to . Before towing a trailer, check the
Your vehicle is designed and intended to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow and tongue load. Make sure the
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional a trailer, more frequent maintenance will load and its distribution in your
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, be required due to the additional load. vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
brakes, tires and suspension and has an (Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
adverse effect on fuel economy. severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty ! Total trailer weight
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and Maintenance Booklet”.) S08AL0201
and satisfaction depend upon proper use Under no circumstances should a trailer be
of correct equipment and cautious opera- towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with
tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of any new powertrain component (engine,
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in transmission, differential, wheel bearings,
purchasing a hitch and other necessary etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
towing equipment appropriate for your driving.
vehicle. Do not use towing equipment
other than genuine SUBARU towing & Maximum load limits 8
S08AL02
equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
Driving tips
the instructions for proper installation and WARNING
use provided by the trailer or caravan’s
manufacturer. Never exceed the maximum load
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for limits explained in the following. Total trailer weight
injuries or vehicle damage that result from Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
trailer towing equipment, or from any its cargo load) must never exceed the
errors or omissions in the instructions vehicle damage.
maximum total trailer weight in the follow-
accompanying such equipment or for your ing table.
failure to follow the proper instructions.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting CAUTION
bolts and nuts are tightened securely.
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
– CONTINUED –

(404,1)
402 Trailer towing
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight ! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
When towing a trailer with brakes. 1,500 lbs (680 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
S08AL0202
Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-
bined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

(405,1)
Trailer towing 403
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and prevent a change in weight distribution

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) while driving.
S08AL0203
! Tongue load
S08AL0204
Certification label
GVWR of your vehicle that is given by
SUBARU is shown on the certification Gross Axle Weight
label located at the bottom of driver’s side The total weight applied to each axle Tongue load 8
door pillar of your vehicle. (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8
Driving tips
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating does not exceed the maximum value of
passengers and luggage inside the vehi- 150 lbs (68 kg).
cle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
– CONTINUED –

(406,1)
404 Trailer towing
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing cornering, resulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
1) Jack F: Front & Trailer Hitches

2) Bathroom scale S08AL03
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper
The tongue load can be weighed with a distribution of the load in the trailer. Never WARNING
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration load the trailer with more weight in the
above. When weighing the tongue load, be back than in the front; approximately 60 Never drill the frame or under-body
sure to position the towing coupler at the percent of the trailer load should be in the of your vehicle to install a commer-
height at which it would be during actual front and approximately 40 percent in the cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
towing, using a jack as shown. rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
possible on both the left and right sides. enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
prevent a change in weight distribution
colorless and odorless gas which is
while driving.
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.

(407,1)
Trailer towing 405
CAUTION & When you do not tow a trailer & Connecting a trailer
S08AL14 S08AL04
. Do not modify the vehicle ex- ! Trailer brakes

CAUTION S08AL0401
haust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a . The housing should be kept dirt WARNING
hitch or other trailer towing and corrosion-free at the points
of contact. The surfaces only . Adequate size trailer brakes are
equipment.
require cleaning with a cloth. required when the trailer and its
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
as they can cause damage to the Grease or other lubricants
should never be used. total weight.
axle housing, wheel bearings,
. If the ball is not installed, the . Do not directly connect your
wheels or tires.
plastic insert should then be trailer’s hydraulic brake system
inserted for protection and to to the hydraulic brake system in
Do not use a trailer hitch other than a
prevent it from getting dirty. your vehicle. Direct connection
genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine
would cause the vehicle’s brake
SUBARU trailer hitch is available from
When the ball is not used, place the ball performance to deteriorate and
your SUBARU dealer.
could lead to an accident.
cap and store securely. 8
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
Driving tips
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped with its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes are re-
commended, and must be installed prop-
erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con-
form with Federal, state/province and/or
other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
– CONTINUED –

(408,1)
406 Trailer towing
! Trailer safety chains ! Side mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s
S08AL0402 S08AL0403
electrical system requires modifications to
WARNING the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its
capacity and accommodate wiring
Always use safety chains between changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing connected properly, please consult your
trailer without safety chains could SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera-
create a traffic safety hazard if the tion of the turn signals and the brake lights
trailer separates from the hitch due each time you connect a trailer to your
to coupling damage or hitch ball vehicle.
damage. ! Tires
S08AL0405
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch WARNING

ball should break or become discon-
nected, the trailer could get loose and After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, Never tow a trailer when the tempor-
create a traffic safety hazard. check that the standard side mirrors ary spare tire is used. The temporary
For safety, always connect the towing provide a good rearward field of view spare tire is not designed to sustain
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety without significant blind spots. If significant the towing load. Use of the tempor-
chains. Two chains should be used in blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- ary spare tire when towing can result
total, one to the right side and the other to dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that in failure of the spare tire and/or less
the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains conform with Federal, state/province and/ stability of the vehicle.
crossing each other under the trailer or other applicable regulations.
tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
onto the ground in case the trailer tongue ! Trailer lights are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”
S08AL0404
should disconnect from the hitch ball. FP493.
Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking CAUTION
tight turn situations into account; however, Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
Direct splicing or other improper proper inflation pressure should be in
be careful not to let them drag on the
connection of trailer lights may accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
ground.
damage your vehicle’s electrical specifications. Also check federal, state,
system and cause a malfunction of province and/or other applicable regula-
your vehicle’s lighting system. tions.

(409,1)
Trailer towing 407
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer in hilly trailer.
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial country on hot days. . Check that the vehicle rests horizon-
road service representative or profes- . When towing a trailer, steering, tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle
sional to repair the flat tire. stability, stopping distance and is tipped sharply up at the front and down
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your braking performance will be dif- at the rear, check the total trailer weight,
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against ferent when compared to normal GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire operation. For safety’s sake, you confirm that the load and its distribution are
is firmly secured. should employ extra caution acceptable.
when towing a trailer and you . Check that the tire rating and pressures
& Trailer towing tips should never drive at excessive are correct.
S08AL05 speeds. You should also keep the . Check that the vehicle and trailer are
CAUTION following tips in mind: connected properly. Confirm that:
. The braking power of the parking – The trailer tongue is connected
. For models equipped with the brake may not be sufficient when properly to the hitch ball.
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and stronger braking power is – The trailer lights connector is con-
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) needed (e.g., when parking on a nected properly and trailer’s brake
driving support systems, when steep slope while towing a trai- lights illuminate when the vehicle’s 8
towing a trailer, press the BSD/ ler). brake pedal is pressed, and that the
Driving tips
RCTA OFF switch to deactivate trailer’s turn signal lights flash when
the system. The system may not ! Before starting out on a trip the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-
operate properly due to the S08AL0501 ated.
blocked radar waves. For details . Check the towing regulations for trailer – The safety chains are connected
about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch, or caravan vehicles that vary by state/ properly.
refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch” region. Failure to comply with the proce-
– All cargo in the trailer is secured
FP357. dures set forth will not only compromise
safely in position.
your safety, but will also negate your
. For models equipped with RAB insurance coverage and/or may violate – The side mirrors provide a good
(Reverse Automatic Braking) the state road and traffic acts and regula- rearward field of view without a sig-
system, consult your SUBARU tions. nificant blind spot.
dealer for additional information . Sufficient time should be taken to learn
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
about towing a trailer. the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
hitch mounting are in good condition. If any
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) before starting out on a trip. In an area free
problems are apparent, do not tow the
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
– CONTINUED –

(410,1)
408 Trailer towing
backing up. 3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-

! Driving with a trailer tion.
S08AL0502 4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line
. You should allow for considerably more
with the trailer, then straighten the steering
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
again.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss . If the ABS warning light illuminates
of control. while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and the trailer and have repairs performed
rapid lane changes. immediately by your nearest SUBARU
. Slow down before turning. Make a dealer.
longer than normal turning radius because ! Driving on grades
the trailer wheels will be closer than the S08AL0503
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a
down and shift to a lower gear (if neces-
tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the engine braking effect and prevent over-
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus- heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to make sudden downshifts.
weather conditions or the passing of large
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
air conditioner may turn off automatically
grip the steering wheel and promptly begin
to protect the engine from overheating.
decelerating your vehicle at a gradual
pace. . When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the following indicators be-
. When passing other vehicles, consider-
cause the engine and transmission are
able distance is required because of the
relatively prone to overheating.
added weight and length caused by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle. : Coolant temperature high warning light
To reverse around a corner, perform the
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can following procedure. : AT OIL TEMP warning light
be difficult and requires experience. Never 1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo-
accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the If the coolant temperature high warning
site direction to the way you want to turn. light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light
bottom of the steering wheel with one
2. Once the trailer begins to swing illuminates, immediately turn off the air
hand.
around, straighten the steering wheel. conditioner and stop the vehicle in the

(411,1)
Trailer towing 409
nearest safe location. For further instruc- ! Parking on a grade

tions and additional information, refer to Always block the wheels under both
S08AL0504
the following sections. vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

– “If you park your vehicle in case of the parking brake firmly. You should not
an emergency” FP412 park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or
– “Engine overheating” FP422 slope cannot be avoided, you should take
– “Coolant temperature low indicator the following steps:
light/Coolant temperature high warn- 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
ing light” FP168 down.
– “AT OIL TEMP warning light” 2. Have someone place wheel blocks
FP170 under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
. Avoid using the accelerator pedal to 3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of release the regular brakes slowly until the
using the parking brake or foot brake. That blocks absorb the load.
may cause the transmission fluid to over- 4. Apply the regular brakes and then
heat. apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
8
5. Shift into “P” position and shut off the
Driving tips
engine.

(412,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(413,1)
In case of emergency
9-1. If you park your vehicle in case of an 9-7. Towing ..............................................................423
S09
emergency ..................................................... 412 Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes ............ 423
9-2. Maintenance tools .......................................... 412 Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 426
Screwdriver and wheel nut wrench ..................... 413 Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 426
Under the rear floor ............................................ 413 9-8. Access key fob – if access key fob does
9-3. Temporary spare tire ...................................... 414 not operate properly .....................................427
9-4. Flat tires .......................................................... 415 Locking and unlocking ....................................... 427
Changing a flat tire ............................................. 415 Switching power status ...................................... 428
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Starting engine .................................................. 428
(U.S.-spec. models)........................................... 418 9-9. Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
9-5. Jump starting.................................................. 419 opened ...........................................................429
How to jump start ............................................... 420 9-10. Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof
9-6. Engine overheating ........................................ 422 does not close...............................................430
If steam is coming from the engine 9-11. If your vehicle is involved in an accident....430
compartment .................................................... 422 Auto lock/unlock operation when involved in
If no steam is coming from the engine an accident ...................................................... 430
compartment .................................................... 422
9

(414,1)
412 If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency
9-1. If you park your vehicle in NOTE 9-2. Maintenance tools

case of an emergency When the hazard warning flasher is on, S09AH
S09AA
the turn signals do not work. Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
. Jack
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt)
. Wheel nut wrench
The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the
hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off
by pushing the switch again.
When the hazard warning flasher are
flashing, the corresponding turn signal
indicator will also flash.

(415,1)
Maintenance tools 413
& Screwdriver and wheel nut

wrench
S09AH13
1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
1) Screwdriver 4) Towing hook (eye bolt)
2) Wheel nut wrench
The screwdriver, wheel nut wrench, etc. NOTE
are stored in your vehicle. . For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat
9
The tools can also be stored in the tool tires” FP415.
bucket. . The following items may be different
depending on the model.
& Under the rear floor – The shape of the storage com-
S09AH12
The jack, jack handle and towing hook are partment
stored as shown in the following illustra- 1) Under-floor storage compartment (if – The locations of some mainte-
tions. equipped) nance tools
2) Jack handle
3) Spare tire
4) Tool bucket

(416,1)
414 Temporary spare tire
9-3. Temporary spare tire CAUTION spare tires at the same time.
S09AB . Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
Never use any temporary spare tire has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
WARNING other than the original. Using other is reduced.
sizes may result in severe mechan-
. Never tow a trailer when the ical damage to the drivetrain of your
temporary spare tire is used. vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing The temporary spare tire is smaller and
load. Use of the temporary spare lighter than a conventional tire and is
tire when towing can result in designed for emergency use only. Re-
failure of the spare tire and/or move the temporary spare tire and re-
less stability of the vehicle and install the conventional tire as soon as
may lead to an accident. possible because the spare tire is de-
. When a spare tire is mounted or a signed only for temporary use.
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans- Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
mitter being transferred, the low porary spare tire periodically to keep the
1) Tread wear indicator bar
tire pressure warning light will tire ready for use. For the correct tire
2) Indicator location mark
illuminate steadily after blinking pressure, refer to “Temporary spare tires”
for approximately one minute. FP493. . When the wear indicator appears on
This indicates the tire pressure the tread, replace the tire.
When using the temporary spare tire, note
monitoring system (TPMS) is un- . The temporary spare tire must be used
the following.
able to monitor all four road only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
. Drive with caution when the temporary gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
wheels. Contact your SUBARU spare tire is installed. Avoid hard accel-
dealer as soon as possible for rear wheel and install the temporary spare
eration and braking, or fast cornering, as tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
tire and sensor replacement and/ control of the vehicle may be lost.
or system resetting.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary

(417,1)
Flat tires 415
9-4. Flat tires & Changing a flat tire vehicle.

S09AC01
S09AC
If you have a flat tire while driving, never WARNING

brake suddenly; keep driving straight
. Use only the jack provided with
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
your vehicle. The jack supplied
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
with the vehicle is designed only
place.
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack.
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a 4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
severe accident. of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
. Always turn off the engine before 5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
raising the flat tire off the ground wheel nut wrench.
using the jack. Never swing or The tools and spare tire are stored under 9
push the vehicle supported with the floor of the cargo area. Refer to
the jack. The jack can come out of “Maintenance tools” FP412.
the jacking point due to a jolt and
this can result in a severe acci- NOTE
dent. Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)
position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
unload all occupants and luggage from the
– CONTINUED –

(418,1)
416 Flat tires
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the 7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, after 8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take your hands are protected by gloves, grasp nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
the spare tire out. the wheel cover spokes and pull toward
you to remove the wheel cover.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” FP414 and
strictly follow the instructions.
Jack-up points
9. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.

(419,1)
Flat tires 417
11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat CAUTION

tire.
If the threaded part was damaged,
we recommend that you immedi-
ately contact your SUBARU dealer.
13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts when the spare tire is
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack installed. This could cause the nuts
head engages firmly into the jack-up point. to become loose and lead to an
accident.
14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.
9
10. Insert the jack handle into the jack- 12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
screw, and turn the handle until the tire the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle with a cloth.
higher than necessary.
– CONTINUED –

(420,1)
418 Flat tires
stop or collision, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
models)
S09AC02
15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely 1) Support holder

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified 16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
torque, following the tightening order in the compartment. Install with the support
illustration. holder facing upward and secure the flat
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt.
to “Tires” FP493. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension NOTE
on the wrench because you may exceed If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut turning the support holder upside
torque checked at the nearest automotive down. The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
service facility. vides the driver with the warning message
17. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel indicated by sending a signal from a
nut wrench in their storage locations. sensor that is installed in each wheel when
tire pressure is severely low.
WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Never place a tire or tire changing Also, this system may not react immedi-
tools in the passenger compartment ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
after changing wheels. In a sudden example, a blow-out caused running over

(421,1)
Jump starting 419
a sharp object). wheel rim is replaced without the 9-5. Jump starting
original pressure sensor/trans- S09AD
WARNING mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning illuminate steadily after blinking
light illuminates while driving, for approximately one minute. . Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
never brake suddenly. Instead, This indicates the TPMS is unable Do not let it come in contact with
perform the following procedure. to monitor all four road wheels. the eyes, skin, clothing or the
(1) Keep driving straight ahead Contact your SUBARU dealer as vehicle.
while gradually reducing soon as possible for tire and If battery fluid gets on you, thor-
speed. sensor replacement and/or sys- oughly flush the exposed area
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a tem resetting. with water immediately. Get med-
safe place. Otherwise an acci- . When a tire is repaired with liquid ical help if the fluid has entered
dent involving serious vehicle sealant, the tire pressure warning your eyes.
damage and serious personal valve and transmitter may not If battery fluid is accidentally
injury could occur. operate properly. If a liquid sea- swallowed, immediately drink a
(3) Check the pressure for all four lant is used, contact your nearest large amount of milk or water,
tires and adjust the pressure SUBARU dealer or other qualified and obtain immediate medical
to the COLD tire pressure service shop as soon as possi- help. 9
shown on the vehicle placard ble. Make sure to replace the tire Keep everyone including chil-
pressure warning valve and
on the door pillar on the dren away from the battery.
driver’s side. transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if . The gas generated by a battery
If this light still illuminates while explodes if a flame or spark is
driving after adjusting the tire there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly brought near it. Do not smoke or
pressure, a tire may have signifi- light a match while jump starting.
cant damage and a fast leak that cleaned off.
If the light illuminates steadily . Never attempt jump starting if the
causes the tire to lose air rapidly. discharged battery is frozen. It
If you have a flat tire, replace it after blinking for approximately
one minute, promptly contact a could cause the battery to burst
with a spare tire as soon as or explode.
possible. SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
tem inspected. . Whenever working on or around a
. When a spare tire is mounted or a battery, always wear suitable eye
– CONTINUED –

(422,1)
420 Jump starting
protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start

S09AD01
objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
. Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have 2. If the booster battery is in another
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
. A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.

(423,1)
Jump starting 421
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other cable
to the negative (−) terminal of the
booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Make sure that the cables are not near any
moving parts and that the cable clamps are
not in contact with any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery. 9
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut

(424,1)
422 Engine overheating
9-6. Engine overheating & If no steam is coming from the If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
S09AE engine compartment radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
S09AE02 radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
WARNING 1. Keep the engine running at idling clockwise slowly without pressing down
speed. until it stops. Release the pressure from
Never attempt to remove the radiator 2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the the radiator. After the pressure has been
cap until the engine has been shut engine compartment. Refer to “Engine fully released, remove the cap by pressing
off and has fully cooled down. When hood” FP447. down and turning it.
the engine is hot, the coolant is Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
under pressure. Removing the cap the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
while the engine is still hot could the engine and contact an authorized
release a spray of boiling hot cool- SUBARU dealer for repair.
ant, which could burn you very 3. After the coolant temperature high
seriously. warning light that has blinked or illumi-
nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the For details about the warning light, refer to
road and stop the vehicle in a safe “Coolant temperature low indicator light/
location. Coolant temperature high warning light”
FP168.
& If steam is coming from the 4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
engine compartment check the coolant level in the reserve tank.
S09AE01
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
“OFF” position and get everyone away mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
from the vehicle until it cools down. NOTE
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal- For details about how to check the
er. coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine coolant” FP453.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then
remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator
with coolant.

(425,1)
Towing 423
9-7. Towing & Towing hooks and tie-down scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head
S09AF hooks/holes screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and
S09AF01 pry open the cover.
If towing is necessary, it is best done by The towing hooks should be used only in
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial an emergency.
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety. CAUTION
Use only the specified towing hooks
and tie-down hooks/holes. Never
use suspension parts or other parts
of the body for towing or tie-down
purposes.
! Front towing hook

S09AF0112
1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and
jack handle out of the cargo area. 3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
9
WARNING
Never tow AWD models with the
front wheels raised off the ground
while the rear wheels are on the
ground, or with the rear wheels
raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will
cause the vehicle to spin away due
to the operation or deterioration of
the center differential. 2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not 4. Tighten the towing hook securely using
– CONTINUED –

(426,1)
424 Towing
the jack handle. ! Rear towing hook

S09AF0105
After towing, remove the towing hook from 1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. out of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper. out of the cargo area.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag 3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
system in a frontal collision. hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
CAUTION 2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
To prevent deformation to the bum-
scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover on
per and the towing hook, do not
the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and
apply an excessive load to the tow-
you will find a threaded hole for attaching
ing hook.
the towing hook.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from

(427,1)
Towing 425
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. ! Front tie-down hooks ! Rear tie-down holes
S09AF0106 S09AF0107
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehi-
cle is struck from behind.
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
CAUTION front bumper.
To prevent deformation to the bum-
per and the towing hook, do not 9
apply an excessive load to the tow-
ing hook.
1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the
– CONTINUED –

(428,1)
426 Towing
plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes, 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier & Towing with all wheels on the
return the plugs to their original places. properly with safety chains. Each safety ground
chain should be equally tightened and care S09AF03
WARNING must be taken not to pull the chains so

tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any CAUTION
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a . If your vehicle has a bumper
dangerous situation. under guard (optional), be careful
not to scrape it when placing the
vehicle on the carrier and when
& Using a flat-bed truck removing the vehicle from the
S09AF02
carrier.
. Transport by flat-bed truck may
cause the headlights to become 1. Release the parking brake and put the
misaligned. In such a case, have transmission in the neutral position.
the headlight alignment checked 2. The ignition switch should be in the
by a SUBARU dealer after trans- “ON” position while the vehicle is being
porting the vehicle by flat-bed towed.
truck.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
This is the best way to transport your . Never turn the ignition switch to
vehicle. Use the following procedures to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
ensure safe transportation. the vehicle is being towed be-
1. Shift the select lever into the “P” cause the steering wheel and the
position. direction of the wheels will be
locked.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

(429,1)
Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly 427
. Remember that the brake booster 9-8. Access key fob – if ac- & Locking and unlocking
S09AP01
and power steering do not func- cess key fob does not operate
tion when the engine is not run-
ning. Because the engine is properly
S09AP
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal CAUTION
and steering wheel.
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
CAUTION sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
. If transmission failure occurs, access key fob and the push-button
transport your vehicle on a flat- ignition switch. They may interfere
bed truck. with the communication between
the access key fob and the push-
. The traveling speed must be 1) Release button
button ignition switch.
limited to less than 20 mph (32 2) Emergency key
km/h) and the traveling distance
The following functions may be inoperable While pressing the release button of the
to less than 31 miles (50 km). For
because of strong radio signals in the access key fob, take out the emergency
greater speeds and distances,
surrounding area or a low battery condition key. 9
transport your vehicle on a flat-
of the access key fob. Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
bed truck.
. Locking/unlocking doors (including the emergency key in the procedure described
rear gate) in “Locking and unlocking from the out-
. Switching power status side” FP131.
. Starting engine
NOTE
In such cases, perform the following After locking or unlocking, be sure to
procedure. When the battery of the access attach the emergency key back to the
key fob is discharged, replace it with a new access key fob.
one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access
key fob” FP484.
– CONTINUED –

(430,1)
428 Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly
& Switching power status 5. When the keyless access with push- 4. Hold the access key fob with the
S09AP02 button start system is deactivated, press buttons facing you, and touch the push-
1. Apply the parking brake. the push-button ignition switch with the button ignition switch with it.
2. Shift the select lever to the “P” (Park) brake pedal released. The status of the When the communication between the
position. push-button ignition switch then changes access key fob and the vehicle is com-
3. Depress the brake pedal. to “ON”. pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
same time, the push-button ignition switch
NOTE turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
If the power does not switch even 5. After the push-button ignition switch
though the above procedure was fol- turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU depressing the brake pedal, press the
dealer. push-button ignition switch.
& Starting engine NOTE

S09AP03
1. Apply the parking brake. If the engine does not start even though
2. Shift the select lever to the “P” (Park) the above procedure was followed
position. precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is com-
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
same time, the status of the push-button
ignition switch changes to either of the
following.
. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated:
“ACC”
. Under other conditions: “ON”

(431,1)
Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened 429
9-9. Rear gate – if the rear CAUTION

gate cannot be opened
S09AG
Never operate the rear gate open
lever with fingers because doing so
In the event that you cannot open the rear may cause an injury. Always use a
gate by operating the rear gate opener flat-head screwdriver or a similar
button, you can open it from inside the tool.
cargo area.
Models with power rear gate

3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to
the right position.
1. Remove the access cover at the Models without power rear gate
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using
a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl
tape or a cloth.
2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind
the rear gate trim.

(432,1)
430 Moonroof – if the moonroof does not close
9-10. Moonroof (if equipped) 9-11. If your vehicle is in- Models without “keyless access with
– if the moonroof does not volved in an accident
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
close S09AR
or “ACC” position.
S09AJ
CAUTION 2. Restart the engine.
If the moonroof does not close, we
recommend that you have the system If your vehicle is involved in an
checked by a SUBARU dealer. Models with “keyless access with
accident, be sure to inspect the push-button start system”:
ground under the vehicle before 1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
restarting the engine. If you find that the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
fuel has leaked on the ground, do 2. Restart the engine.
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact & Auto lock/unlock operation
the nearest automotive service facil- when involved in an accident
ity. We recommend that you consult S09AR03
When the auto lock/unlock function is ON,
your SUBARU dealer. all the doors will be locked automatically
while driving. For further details, refer to
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off
“Automatic door locking/unlocking”
system. When the vehicle sustains an
FP133.
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in When the vehicle sustains a strong impact
order to minimize fuel leakage. However, which may trigger the airbags to deploy,
depending on the impact conditions at the the door locks may be unlocked automa-
time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-
system may not operate. erally, an impact sustained from a rear end
collision does not trigger the airbags to
Perform the following procedures to restart
deploy. However if the impact is strong
the engine after the system is activated.
enough to deploy the airbags, it can also
trigger the unlocking function.
Under such circumstance, the auto unlock/
lock function will be suspended and the

(433,1)
If your vehicle is involved in an accident 431
doors will remain unlocked. while driving.

Confirm the safety of the surroundings first . With all doors shut, the doors
and carry out the following to retrieve the unlock when pressing the lock
auto door lock function. side of the power door locking
Models without “keyless access with switch.
push-button start system”: . The auto door lock function does
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” not operate.
position.
position.
Models with “keyless access with
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
NOTE 9
Depending on the severity of the im-
pact, the emergency unlocking may not
function.
CAUTION
If the following occur, there may be a
malfunction in the system.
Have the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
. The doors unlock automatically

(434,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(435,1)
Appearance care
10-1. Exterior care.................................................. 434 10-3. Cleaning the interior .....................................437
S10
Washing ............................................................. 434 Seat fabric ......................................................... 437
Waxing and polishing ......................................... 435 Leather seat materials ........................................ 438
Cleaning alloy wheels ......................................... 436 Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 438
10-2. Corrosion protection .................................... 436 Seatbelt ............................................................. 438
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 436 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
To help prevent corrosion ................................... 437 panel, console panel, and switches .................. 438
Monitor .............................................................. 439
10

(436,1)
434 Exterior care
10-1. Exterior care the cover surface may be da- Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
S10AA maged. of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the
& Washing . Since your vehicle is equipped vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-
S10AA01
with a rear wiper, automatic car- light.
CAUTION wash brushes could become Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,
tangled around it, damaging the and bird droppings should be washed off
. When washing the vehicle, the wiper arm and other compo- using a light detergent, as required. If you
brakes may get wet. As a result, nents. Ask the automatic car- use a light detergent, make certain that it is
the brake stopping distance will wash operator not to let the a neutral detergent. Do not use strong
be longer. To dry the brakes, drive brushes touch the wiper arm or soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning
the vehicle at a safe speed while to fix the wiper arm on the rear agents should be promptly flushed from
lightly depressing the brake ped- window glass with adhesive tape the surface and not allowed to dry there.
al to heat up the brakes. before operating the machine. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
. Do not wash the engine compart- lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water
ment and area adjacent to it. If off with a chamois or soft cloth. Wear
water enters the engine air intake NOTE rubber gloves and use a hand brush when
or electrical parts, it will cause . When having your vehicle washed in washing down underbody, inner fenders
engine trouble or a malfunction an automatic car wash, make sure and suspension to effectively remove mud
of electrical equipment. beforehand that the car wash is of and dirt off.
. When washing inner fenders, un- suitable type.
derbody, bumpers and protrud- . The rear view camera lens has a hard
ing objects such as exhaust coating to help prevent scratches.
pipes and exhaust finishers, be However, when washing the vehicle or
careful to prevent injuries from cleaning the camera lens, be careful not
contacting sharp ends. to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
washing brush directly on the camera
. Do not use any organic solvents lens. The image quality of the rear view
when washing the surface of the camera may deteriorate.
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
is used to wash the cover sur- beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
face, completely rinse off the vehicle at least once a month to avoid
detergent with water. Otherwise, contamination by road grime.

(437,1)
Exterior care 435
! Washing the underbody CAUTION & Waxing and polishing

S10AA0101 S10AA02
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for Always wash and dry the vehicle before
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor- . Be careful not to damage brake waxing and polishing.
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un- hoses, sensor harnesses, and Use a good quality polish and wax and
derbody components, such as the exhaust other parts when washing sus- apply them according to the manufac-
system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, pension components. turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
floor pan and fenders, and suspension. . Be careful not to flush the engine the painted surface is cool.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside bottom for a long time. It may
of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water cause damage of some electrical Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful parts. as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
effects of such agents. wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody ! Using a warm water washer deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
S10AA0102
components may accelerate their corro- . Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) mended that a coat of wax be applied at
sion. or more between the washer nozzle and least once a month, or whenever the
After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy the vehicle. surface no longer repels water.
roads, wash the mud and sand off the . Do not wash the same area continu-
ously. If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
underbody. Carefully flush the suspension
ished to the point where the luster or tone
and axle parts, as they are particularly . If a stain will not come out easily, wash cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-
prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use by hand. Some warm water washers are of face with a fine-grained compound. Never
a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud. the high temperature, high pressure type, polish just the affected area, but include 10
and they can damage or deform the resin the surrounding area as well. Always
parts such as moldings, or cause water to
Appearance care
polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
leak into the vehicle. grain compound is recommended. Never
use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-
grained compounds have a smaller grain-
size number and could damage the paint.
After polishing with a compound, coat with
wax to restore the original luster. Frequent
polishing with a compound or an incorrect
polishing technique will result in removing
the paint layer and exposing the under-
– CONTINUED –

(438,1)
436 Corrosion protection
coat. When in doubt, it is always best to & Cleaning alloy wheels 10-2. Corrosion protection
contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto S10AA04
. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of S10AB
paint specialist. any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on Your SUBARU has been designed and
too long, it may be difficult to clean off. built to resist corrosion. Special materials
CAUTION
. Do not use soap containing grit to clean and protective finishes have been used on
Do not use any agents with organic the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
solvents on the surface of the bulb cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly fine appearance, strength, and reliable
assembly cover. However, if a polish with water. Do not clean the wheels with a operation.
or wax with organic solvents is stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
applied to the cover surface, com- washing device. & Most common causes of cor-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax. . Clean the vehicle (including the alloy rosion
S10AB01
Otherwise, the cover surface may be wheels) with water as soon as possible The most common causes of corrosion
damaged. when it has been splashed with sea water, are:
exposed to sea breezes, or driven on
. The accumulation of moisture retaining
roads treated with salt or other agents.
NOTE dirt and debris in body panel sections,
. Be careful not to block the wind- cavities, and other areas.
shield washer nozzles with wax when . Damage to paint and other protective
waxing the vehicle. coatings caused by gravel and stone chips
. Do not wipe the rear view camera or minor accidents.
with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner. Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To when:
remove contamination, wipe the cam-
era with a cloth moistened with diluted . It is exposed to road salt or dust control
neutral detergent and then wipe it with a chemicals, or used in coastal areas where
soft, dry cloth. there is more salt in the air, or in areas
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful where there is considerable industrial
not to apply the wax to the rear view pollution.
camera. If it comes in contact with the . It is driven in areas of high humidity,
camera, moisten a clean cloth with especially when temperatures range just
diluted neutral detergent to remove above freezing.
the wax. . Dampness in certain parts of the

(439,1)
Cleaning the interior 437
vehicle remains for a long time, even assistance. 10-3. Cleaning the interior
though other parts of the vehicle may be S10AC
dry. Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them. Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
. High temperatures will cause corrosion control panel, audio equipment, instru-
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry Check the interior of the vehicle for water ment panel, center console, combination
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
because that could cause corrosion. Oc- organic solvents.)
& To help prevent corrosion casionally check under the mats to make
S10AB02
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent sure the area is dry. CAUTION
corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar- Do not use sharp instruments or
promptly after driving on any of the age. In such a garage, corrosion can be window cleaner containing abra-
following surfaces. caused by dampness. If you wash the sives to clean the inner surface of
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the rear window. They may damage
. Roads that have been salted to prevent
the garage when wet or covered with the conductors printed on the win-
them from freezing in winter
snow, that can cause dampness. dow.
. Mud, sand, or gravel
. Coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other & Seat fabric
After the winter has ended, it is recom- corrosive materials are used, the door S10AC01
mended that the underbody be given a hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hood Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
very thorough washing. latch should be inspected and lubricated vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum 10
Before the beginning of winter, check the periodically.
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Appearance care
condition of underbody components, such Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry
them are found to be rusted, they should thoroughly.
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact If the stain does not come out, try a
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind commercially-available fabric cleaner.
of maintenance and treatment if you need Use the cleaner on a hidden place and
– CONTINUED –

(440,1)
438 Cleaning the interior
make sure it does not affect the fabric covered, or the windows shaded, to pre- & Seatbelt
adversely. Use the cleaner according to its vent fading or shrinkage. S10AC09
For details about how to clean the seatbelt,
instructions. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches refer to “Seatbelt maintenance” FP56.
may be treated with a commercial leather
CAUTION spray lacquer. You will discover that each & Climate control panel, audio
leather seat section will develop soft folds
When cleaning the seat, do not use
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
panel, instrument panel, con-
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
genuine leather. sole panel, and switches
materials. Doing so could damage S10AC04
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
the surface and cause the color to control panel, audio equipment, instru-
deteriorate. & Synthetic leather upholstery
S10AC03 ment panel, center console, combination
The synthetic leather material used on the
meter panel, and switches.
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
& Leather seat materials or detergent and water, after first vacuum- CAUTION
S10AC02 ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe . Do not use organic solvents such
quality natural product which will retain its
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial as paint thinners or fuel, or
distinctive appearance and feel for many
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic strong cleaning agents that con-
years with proper care.
leather materials may be used when tain those solvents. Doing so
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the necessary. could damage the surface and
surface can cause the material to become
cause the color to deteriorate.
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular CAUTION
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber . Do not use chemical solvents that
cloth should be performed monthly, taking Strong cleaning agents such as contain silicone on the vehicle
care not to soak the leather or allow water solvents, paint thinners, window audio system, electrical compo-
to penetrate the stitched seams. cleaner or fuel must never be used nents of the air-conditioner or
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning on leather or synthetic interior ma- any switches. If silicone adheres
woolen fabrics may be used to remove terials. Doing so could damage the to these parts, it may cause
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry surface and cause the color to damage to electrical compo-
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If deteriorate. nents.
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and head restraints be

(441,1)
Cleaning the interior 439
& Monitor
S10AC05
To clean the audio/navigation/multi func-
tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone
cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is
extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth
moistened with neutral detergent then
carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the 10
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.
Appearance care
(442,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(443,1)
Maintenance and service

11-1. Maintenance schedule.................................. 443 11-11. Continuously variable transmission
S11
11-2. Maintenance precautions ............................. 443 fluid ................................................................456
Before checking or servicing in the engine 11-12. Front differential gear oil and rear
compartment .................................................... 444 differential gear oil........................................457
When checking or servicing in the engine Recommended grade and viscosity .................... 457
compartment .................................................... 444 11-13. Brake fluid ....................................................457
When checking or servicing in the engine Checking the fluid level...................................... 457
compartment while the engine is running.......... 445 Recommended brake fluid.................................. 458
11-3. Maintenance tips........................................... 445 11-14. Brake booster ..............................................458
Removing and reinstalling clips .......................... 445 11-15. Brake pedal ..................................................458
11-4. Engine hood .................................................. 447 11-16. Replacement of brake pad ..........................459
11-5. Engine compartment overview .................... 449 Breaking-in of new brake pads ........................... 459
11-6. Engine oil....................................................... 450 11-17. Tires and wheels..........................................459
Engine oil consumption ...................................... 450 Types of tires ..................................................... 459
Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
and oil filter ...................................................... 450 (U.S.-spec. models) .......................................... 460
Checking the oil level ......................................... 450 Tire inspection ................................................... 461
Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 451 Tire pressures and wear..................................... 462
Recommended grade and viscosity..................... 452 Wheel balance.................................................... 463
Synthetic oil ....................................................... 452 Wear indicators.................................................. 464
11-7. Cooling system ............................................. 452 Rotational direction of tires ................................ 465
Safety precautions.............................................. 452 Tire rotation ....................................................... 465
Cooling fan, hose and connections ..................... 453 Tire replacement ................................................ 466 11
Engine coolant ................................................... 453 Wheel replacement............................................. 467
11-8. Air cleaner element....................................... 454 11-18. Alloy wheels.................................................467
Replacing the air cleaner element ....................... 455 11-19. Windshield washer fluid..............................467
11-9. Spark plugs ................................................... 456 Adding the windshield washer fluid .................... 468
Recommended spark plugs................................. 456 Windshield washer fluid ..................................... 468
11-10. Drive belts ................................................... 456

(444,1)
11-20. Replacement of wiper blades..................... 469 Front fog light (if equipped)................................ 479
Windshield wiper blade assembly ....................... 469 Rear turn signal lights........................................ 479
Window wiper blade rubber ................................ 470 Backup light....................................................... 481
Rear window wiper blade assembly .................... 471 License plate light.............................................. 482
Rear window wiper blade rubber ......................... 471 Vanity mirror light .............................................. 483
11-21. Battery ......................................................... 473 Door step light ................................................... 483
11-22. Fuses ........................................................... 474 Dome light and cargo area light.......................... 483
11-23. Installation of accessories ......................... 475 Other bulbs........................................................ 483
11-24. Replacing bulbs .......................................... 476 11-25. Replacing key battery .................................484
Headlights (models with LED headlights) ............ 476 Safety precautions ............................................. 484
Front turn signal light ......................................... 477 Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 484
Front position light (if equipped) ......................... 478 Replacing transmitter battery ............................. 485
Front side marker light (if equipped) ................... 478

(445,1)
Maintenance schedule 443
11-1. Maintenance schedule 11-2. Maintenance precau- viced by persons fully competent
S11AA tions to do so. Serious personal injury
U.S. models S11AB
may result to persons not experi-
enced in servicing vehicles.
The scheduled maintenance items re- When maintenance and service are re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals quired, it is recommended that all work be . Always use the proper tools and
are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte- done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. make certain that they are well
nance Booklet”. For details, read the maintained.
separate “Warranty and Maintenance If you perform maintenance and service by . Never get under the vehicle sup-
Booklet”. yourself, you should familiarize yourself ported only by a jack. Always use
with the information provided in this sec- safety stands to support the
Canada models tion on general maintenance and service vehicle.
The scheduled maintenance items re- for your SUBARU.
quired to be serviced at regular intervals . Never keep the engine running in

Incorrect or incomplete service could a poorly ventilated area, such as
are shown in the “Warranty and Service
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera- a garage or other closed areas.
Booklet”. For details, read the separate
tion. Any problems caused by improper . Do not smoke or allow open
“Warranty and Service Booklet”.
maintenance and service performed by flames around the fuel or battery.
Except for U.S. and Canada models you are not eligible for warranty coverage. This will cause a fire.
Some items of your vehicle are required to . Because the fuel system is under
be serviced at scheduled intervals. For WARNING
pressure, replacement of the fuel
details about your maintenance schedule, filter should be performed only
. Always select a safe area when
read the separate “Warranty and Main- by your SUBARU dealer.
performing maintenance on your
tenance Booklet”.
vehicle. . Wear adequate eye protection to
NOTE . Always be very careful to avoid guard against getting oil or fluids 11
For models with a multi-function dis- injury when working on the vehi- in your eyes. If something does
play (color LCD), you can set a remin- cle. Remember that some of the get in your eyes, thoroughly
der to be displayed when a scheduled materials in the vehicle may be wash them out with clean water.
maintenance item is almost due. For hazardous if improperly used or . Do not tamper with the wiring of
details, refer to “Maintenance settings” handled, for example, battery the SRS airbag system or seat-
FP222. acid. belt pretensioner system, or at-
. Your vehicle should only be ser- tempt to take its connectors
– CONTINUED –

(446,1)
444 Maintenance precautions
apart, as this may activate the . Always let the engine cool down. . Before performing any servicing
system or render it inoperative. Engine parts become very hot on a vehicle equipped with a
NEVER use a circuit tester for when the engine is running and remote engine start system (a
this wiring. If your SRS airbag or remain hot for some time after the dealer option), temporarily place
seatbelt pretensioner needs ser- engine has stopped. the remote engine start system in
vice, consult your nearest . Do not spill engine oil, engine service mode to prevent it from
SUBARU dealer. coolant, brake fluid or any other unexpectedly starting the engine.
fluid on hot engine components.
NOTE This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
& When checking or servicing
SUBARU does not endorse the use of in the engine compartment
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys- “ON” position, the cooling fan S11AB03
tems and strongly advises against may operate suddenly even when
performing these services on a the engine is stopped. If your
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap- body or clothes come into con-
proved flushing systems use chemi- tact with a rotating fan, that could
cals and/or solvents which have not result in serious injury. To avoid
been tested or approved by SUBARU. risk of injury, perform the follow-
SUBARU warranties do not cover any ing precautions.
part of the vehicle which is damaged by – Models with push-button start
adding or applying chemicals and/or system:
solvents other than those approved or Always turn the push-button
recommended by SUBARU. ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
& Before checking or servicing operation indicator on the
switch is turned off. Then take
in the engine compartment the access key fob out from CAUTION
S11AB01
the vehicle. . Do not touch the engine cover
WARNING
– Models without push-button while checking the components
. Always stop the engine and apply start system: in the engine compartment.
the parking brake firmly to pre- Always remove the key from Doing so may cause your hand
vent the vehicle from moving. the ignition switch. to slip off the cover and result in

(447,1)
Maintenance tips 445
an unexpected injury. 11-3. Maintenance tips 3. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the S11BI
engine has cooled down comple- Some clips and fender linings must be ! Type B clips
S11BI010102
tely. Doing so may result in a burn removed before replacing the air cleaner
or other injury. Note that the oil elements or specific bulbs.
filter becomes very hot when the
engine is running and remains & Removing and reinstalling
hot for some time after the engine clips
has stopped. S11BI01
! Removing clips
S11BI0101
There are several types of clips used for
& When checking or servicing your vehicle.
in the engine compartment

while the engine is running ! Type A clips
S11BI010101
S11AB02
WARNING
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
A running engine can be dangerous. using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, the illustration.
hair and tools away from the cooling 2. Pull the protruded center portion to
fan, drive belt and any other moving remove the entire body of the clip.
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
11
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
– CONTINUED –

(448,1)
446 Maintenance tips
! Type C clips ! Reinstalling clips

S11BI010103 S11BI0102
Type C clips
Type A clips Insert the clip without the center portion
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
first and then push the center portion of the
Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
clip into the hole.
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
Type B clips

(449,1)
Engine hood 447
11-4. Engine hood To open the hood:

S11AC 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
CAUTION position.
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the metal.
. Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could

close suddenly, possibly causing 3. Release the secondary hood release
injuries from slamming. by moving the lever between the front grille
. Do not install accessories other and the hood toward the left.
than genuine SUBARU parts to
the engine hood. If the engine 2. Pull the hood release knob under the
hood becomes too heavy, the instrument panel.
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
11
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
– CONTINUED –

(450,1)
448 Engine hood
To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.

(451,1)
Engine compartment overview 449
11-5. Engine compartment overview

S11AD
1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 457)

2) Fuse box (page 474)
3) Battery (page 473)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 467)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 450)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 453)
7) Radiator cap (page 453)
8) Engine oil filter (page 451)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 450)
10) Air cleaner case (page 454)

11

(452,1)
450 Engine oil
11-6. Engine oil . When the engine is new and within the & Locations of the oil level
S11AE
break-in period. gauge, oil filler cap and oil
. When the engine oil is of lower quality. filter
CAUTION . When the incorrect oil viscosity is used. S11AE06
. If the level gauge cannot be . When engine braking is employed

pulled out easily, twist the level (repeatedly).
gauge right and left, then gently . When the engine is operated at high
pull it out. Otherwise, you may be engine speeds (for extended periods of
injured accidentally straining time).
yourself. . When the engine is operated under
. Use only engine oil with the heavy loads (for extended periods of time).
recommended grade and vis- . When towing a trailer
cosity. . When the engine idles for extended
. Be careful not to spill engine oil periods of time.
when adding it. If oil touches the . When the vehicle is operated in stop-
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad and-go and/or heavy traffic situations.
1) Oil level gauge
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If . When the vehicle is used under severe 2) Oil filler cap
engine oil gets on the exhaust thermal conditions. 3) Oil filter
pipe, be sure to wipe it off. . When the vehicle accelerates and
decelerates frequently.
& Checking the oil level
S11AE01
& Engine oil consumption Under these or similar conditions, you 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
S11AE07 should check your oil at least every 2nd turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
Some engine oil will be consumed while
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more “OFF” position. If you check the oil level
driving. The rate of consumption can be
frequently. Different drivers in the same just after turning the ignition switch to the
affected by such factors as transmission
car may experience different results. If “LOCK”/“OFF” position, wait a few minutes
type, driving style, terrain and tempera-
your oil consumption rate is greater than for the oil to drain back into the oil pan
ture. Under the following conditions, oil
expected, contact your authorized before checking the level.
consumption can be increased and may
SUBARU dealer who may perform a test
require refilling between maintenance in-
under controlled conditions.
tervals.

(453,1)
Engine oil 451
CAUTION judged by the lowest of the two levels. If . The engine low oil level warning light
the oil level is below the low level mark, may stay illuminated when the engine
If the level gauge cannot be pulled add oil so that the full level is reached. is started straight after topping up or
out easily, twist the level gauge right changing the engine oil. In such cases,
and left, then gently pull it out. park the vehicle on a level surface and
CAUTION wait for more than a minute until the oil
Otherwise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself. . Be careful not to touch the engine level settles, after which the warning
oil filter when removing the oil light will turn off. Refer to “Engine low
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, filler cap. Doing so may result in a oil level warning light” FP170.
and insert it again. burn, a pinched finger, or may
cause some other injury.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly S11AE02
inserted until it stops. . Use only engine oil with the Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-

recommended grade and vis-
cosity. ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
. Be careful not to spill engine oil changed more frequently than listed in
when adding it. If oil touches the the maintenance schedule when driving
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad on dusty roads, when short trips are
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If frequently made, or when driving in ex-
engine oil gets on the exhaust tremely cold weather.
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
NOTE
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil . Changing the engine oil and oil filter
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
should be performed by a well-trained 11
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
into the engine, you must use the level for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
1) Full level gauge to confirm that the oil level is
2) Low level Fully trained mechanics are on standby
correct. at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level NOTE special tools, spare parts and recom-
mended oil for this work, and also, used
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again. . To prevent overfilling the engine oil, oils are properly disposed of.
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the do not add any additional oil above the . If performing oil replacement your-
level gauge. The engine oil level must be upper level when the engine is cold.
– CONTINUED –

(454,1)
452 Cooling system
self, observe the local regulations and NOTE 11-7. Cooling system
dispose of waste oil properly. Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity S11AF
noted in chapter 12 is the recom- & Safety precautions
& Recommended grade and mended engine oil for optimum engine S11AF04
viscosity performance. Conventional oil may be WARNING

S11AE03 used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
Never attempt to remove the radiator
CAUTION cap until the engine has been shut
Use only engine oil with the recom- off and has cooled down completely.
mended grade and viscosity. Since the coolant is under pressure,
you may suffer serious burns from a
Refer to “Engine oil” FP489. spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity CAUTION
provide better fuel economy. However, . Vehicles are filled at the factory
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is with SUBARU Super Coolant that
required to properly lubricate the en- does not require the first change
gine. for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
years/220,000 km). This coolant
& Synthetic oil should not be mixed with any
S11AE05
You should use synthetic engine oil that other brand or type of coolant
meets the same requirements given for during this period. Mixing with a
conventional engine oil. When using syn- different coolant will reduce the
thetic oil, you must use oil of the same life of the coolant. Should it be
classification, viscosity and grade shown necessary to add the coolant for
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine any reason, use only SUBARU
oil” FP489. Also, you must follow the oil Super Coolant.
and filter changing intervals shown in the If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. diluted with another brand or

(455,1)
Cooling system 453
type, the maintenance interval is system. It is recommended that the cooling

shortened to that of the mixing system and connections be checked for
coolant. leaks, damage, or looseness.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol & Engine coolant
S11AF02
contained in the engine coolant ! Checking the coolant level
may damage the paint surface. S11AF0201
WARNING
& Cooling fan, hose and con- Never attempt to remove the radiator
nections cap until the engine has been shut
S11AF03
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling off and has cooled down completely.

fan which is thermostatically controlled to Since the coolant is under pressure, 1) “FULL” level mark
operate when the engine coolant reaches you may suffer serious burns from a 2) “LOW” level mark
a specific temperature. spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed. Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate 1. Check the coolant level on the outside
even when the coolant temperature high of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
warning light blinks or illuminates in RED, 2. If the level is close to or lower than the
the cooling fan circuit may be defective. “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica- “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
tor light/Coolant temperature high warning empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
light” FP168. coolant up to just below the filler neck as
shown in the following illustration. 11
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” FP474 and “Fuse panel
located in the engine compartment”
FP497.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary,
there may be a leak in the engine cooling
– CONTINUED –

(456,1)
454 Air cleaner element
CAUTION 11-8. Air cleaner element

S11AG
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant WARNING
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or Do not operate the engine with the
a fire. If engine coolant gets on air cleaner element removed. The air
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe cleaner element not only filters in-
it off. take air but also stops flames if the
. Do not splash the engine coolant engine backfires. If the air cleaner
over painted parts. The alcohol element is not installed when the
contained in the engine coolant engine backfires, you could be
may damage the paint surface. burned.
1) Fill up to this level.
! Changing the coolant CAUTION

S11AF0202
It may be difficult to change the coolant. When replacing the air cleaner ele-
Have the coolant changed by your ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
SUBARU dealer if necessary. cleaner element. If it is not used, it
will cause a negative effect to the
The coolant should be changed according
engine.
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter
screen. When the element is perforated or
removed, engine wear will be excessive
and engine life shortened.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the It is not necessary to clean or wash the air
radiator, reinstall the cap and check that cleaner element.
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.

(457,1)
Air cleaner element 455
& Replacing the air cleaner ele- cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
ment cleaner case (front).
S11AG01
Replace the air cleaner element according 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under NOTE
extremely dusty conditions, replace it Install the air cleaner element so that
more frequently. It is recommended that the surface with “UPR” printed on it
you always use genuine SUBARU parts. faces upward.

3. Remove the air cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).
11
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the
cover rearward while lifting it up.
5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

(458,1)
456 Spark plugs
11-9. Spark plugs 11-10. Drive belts 11-11. Continuously variable

S11AH S11AI transmission fluid
It may be difficult to replace the spark It is unnecessary to check the deflection of S11AY
plugs. It is recommended that you have the the drive belt periodically because your It is not necessary to check the transmis-
spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU engine is equipped with an automatic belt sion fluid level. Check that there are no
dealer. tension adjuster. However, replacement of cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
the belt should be done according to the fluid inspection should be performed ac-
The spark plugs should be replaced maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
according to the maintenance schedule cording to the maintenance schedule in
and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book- SUBARU dealer for replacement.
let”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,
CAUTION contact your SUBARU dealer.
Make sure the cables are replaced in

the correct order.
& Recommended spark plugs

S11AH01
For the recommended spark plugs, refer to
“Electrical system” FP492.

(459,1)
Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil 457
11-12. Front differential gear 11-13. Brake fluid Alcohol contained in the brake
oil and rear differential gear S11AO fluid may damage them.
oil & Checking the fluid level . Be careful not to spill brake fluid
S11AO01
S11BL
when adding it. If brake fluid
WARNING touches the exhaust pipe, it may
It is not necessary to check the gear oil cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
level. Check that there are no cracks, . Never let brake fluid contact your a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
damage or leakage. However, the oil eyes because brake fluid can be exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
inspection should be performed according harmful to your eyes. If brake off.
to the maintenance schedule in the “War- fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult ately flush them thoroughly with
your SUBARU dealer for details. clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing

& Recommended grade and eye protection is advisable.
viscosity . Brake fluid absorbs moisture
S11BL01
Each oil manufacturer has its own base from the air. Any absorbed moist-
oils and additives. Never use different ure can cause a dangerous loss
brands together. For details, refer to “Front of braking performance.
differential and rear differential gear oil” . If the vehicle requires frequent
FP491. refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
CAUTION vehicle checked at your SUBARU
Using a differential gear oil other dealer.
1) “MAX” level line 11
than the specified oil may cause a 2) “MIN” level line
decline in vehicle performance. CAUTION A) The brake fluid level must be checked in
this area.
. When adding brake fluid, be care- Check the fluid level monthly.
ful not to allow any dirt into the Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level
. Never splash the brake fluid over for the brake system at the shaded area in
painted surfaces or rubber parts. the illustration.
– CONTINUED –

(460,1)
458 Brake booster
If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the 11-14. Brake booster 11-15. Brake pedal
recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use S11AQ S11AR
only brake fluid from a sealed container.
The brake booster utilizes the vacuum Check the brake pedal free play and
produced by the engine manifold to reduce reserve distance according to the main-
& Recommended brake fluid the force required to depress the brake tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
S11AO02
Refer to “Fluids” FP492. pedal. Maintenance Booklet”.
The vacuum in the brake booster may be
CAUTION insufficient if the brake pedal is depressed
Never use different brands of brake when the engine is stopped or after the
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing vehicle has been parked for a long period
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if of time. It such cases, it is necessary to
they are the same brand. depress the brake pedal using greater
force than usual.

(461,1)
Replacement of brake pad 459
11-16. Replacement of brake CAUTION 11-17. Tires and wheels

pad S11AV
S11AT
If you continue to drive despite the & Types of tires
S11AV01
scraping noise from the audible You should be familiar with the type of tires
brake pad wear indicator, it will present on your vehicle.
result in the need for costly brake
rotor repair or replacement. ! All season tires
S11AV0101
All season tires are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
& Breaking-in of new brake and braking performance in year-round
pads driving including snowy and icy road
S11AT01
When replacing the brake pad, use only conditions. However, all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as

genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-
ment, the new parts must be broken in. winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
The disc brakes have audible wear in- SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
dicators on the brake pads. If the brake the tire sidewall.
pads wear close to their service limit, the ! Summer tires
wear indicator makes a very audible S11AV0102
scraping noise when the brake pedal is Summer tires are high-speed capability
applied. tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
If you hear this scraping noise each time Summer tires are inadequate for driving on 11
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake slippery roads such as on snow-covered or
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as icy roads.
soon as possible. If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
– CONTINUED –

(462,1)
460 Tires and wheels
! Winter (snow) tires the temperature in the garage and the pressure warning light does not turn off,
S11AV0103
Winter tires are best suited for driving on temperature outside. By way of example, the tire pressure monitoring system may
snow-covered and icy roads. However, the following table shows the required tire not be functioning normally. In this event,
winter tires do not perform as well as pressures that correspond to various out- go to a SUBARU dealer to have the
summer tires and all season tires on roads side temperatures when the temperature system inspected as soon as possible.
other than snow-covered and icy roads. in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
Example: tween tires and the road surface causes
& Tire pressure monitoring Tire size: 225/60R17 99H the tires to warm up. After illumination of
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. Standard tire pressures: the low tire pressure warning light, any
models) Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) increase in the tire pressures caused by an
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
S11AV02
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) increase in the outside air temperature or
vides the driver with a warning message by Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) by an increase in the temperature in the
sending a signal from a sensor that is Outside
tires can cause the low tire pressure
Adjusted pressure
installed in each wheel when tire pressure temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)] warning light to turn off.
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- Front Rear System resetting is necessary when the
ing system will activate only when the wheels are changed (for example, a switch
308F
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4) to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are
react immediately to a sudden drop in tire installed on the newly fitted wheels. Have
pressure (for example, a blow-out caused 108F 38 (265, 2.65) 37 (255, 2.55)
(−128C) this work performed by a SUBARU dealer
by running over a sharp object). following wheel replacement.
−108F 41 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm (−238C) It may not be possible to install TPMS
garage and will then drive the vehicle in valves on certain wheels that are on the
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire If the low tire pressure warning light market. Therefore, if you change the
pressures may cause the low tire pressure illuminates when you drive the vehicle in wheels (for example, a switch to snow
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this cold outside air after adjusting the tire tires), use wheels that have the same part
problem when adjusting the tire pressures pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the number as the standard-equipment
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to tire pressures using the method described wheels. Without four operational TPMS
pressures higher than those shown on above. Then, increase the vehicle speed valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to will not fully function and the warning light
by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for see that the low tire pressure warning light on the combination meter will illuminate
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire steadily after blinking for approximately 1

(463,1)
Tires and wheels 461
minute. a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire & Tire inspection
S11AV03
as soon as possible.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are Check on a daily basis that the tires
necessary to ensure continued normal When a spare tire is mounted or a are free from serious damage,
operation of the tire pressure monitoring wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter nails, and stones. At the same time,
system. Therefore, as with wheel replace-
ment, you should have the work performed being transferred, the low tire pres- check the tires for abnormal wear.
by a SUBARU dealer. sure warning light will illuminate Contact your SUBARU dealer im-
steadily after blinking for approxi- mediately if you find any problems.
WARNING mately 1 minute. This indicates the
TPMS is unable to monitor all four NOTE
If the low tire pressure warning light road wheels. Contact your SUBARU . When the wheels and tires
does not illuminate briefly after the dealer as soon as possible for tire
ignition switch is turned ON or the and sensor replacement and/or sys-
strike curbs or are subjected to

light illuminates steadily after blink- tem resetting. If the light illuminates harsh treatment as when the
ing for approximately 1 minute, you steadily after blinking for approxi- vehicle is driven on a rough
should have your tire pressure mon- mately 1 minute, promptly contact a surface, they can suffer damage
itoring system checked at a SUBARU dealer to have the system that cannot be seen with the
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- inspected.
ble.
naked eye. This type of damage
does not become evident until
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep time has passed. Try not to drive
driving straight ahead while gradu- over curbs, potholes or on other
ally reducing speed. Then slowly rough surfaces. If doing so is
pull off the road to a safe place. unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s 11
Otherwise, an accident involving speed down to a walking pace or
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur. less, and approach the curbs as
squarely as possible. Also, make
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pressure the tires are not pressed
sure, a tire may have significant against the curb when you park
damage and a fast leak that causes the vehicle.
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have . If you feel unusual vibration
– CONTINUED –

(464,1)
while driving or find it difficult to When a tire becomes warm, the air
steer the vehicle in a straight line, inside it expands, causing the tire
one of the tires and/or wheels pressure to increase. Be careful not
may be damaged. Drive slowly to to mistakenly release air from a
the nearest authorized SUBARU warm tire to reduce its pressure.
dealer and have the vehicle in-
NOTE
spected.
. The air pressure in a tire
increases by approximately 4.3
& Tire pressures and wear psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when the
S11AV04
Maintaining the correct tire pres- tire becomes warm.
sures helps to maximize the tires’ . The tires are considered cold
service lives and is essential for Tire placard
when the vehicle has been
good running performance. Check Check the tire pressures when the parked for at least three hours
and, if necessary, adjust the pres- tires are cold. Use a pressure or has been driven less than 1
sure of each tire (including the gauge to adjust the tire pressures mile (1.6 km).
spare - if equipped) at least once a to the values shown on the tire
month (for example, during a fuel placard. The tire placard is located WARNING
stop) and before any long journey. on the door pillar on the driver’s
side. Do not let air out of warm tires
to adjust pressure. Doing so
Driving even a short distance will result in low tire pressure.
warms up the tires and increases
the tire pressures. Also, the tire Incorrect tire pressures detract from
pressures are affected by the out- controllability and ride comfort, and
side temperature. It is best to check they cause the tires to wear abnor-
tire pressure outdoors before driv- mally.
ing the vehicle.

(465,1)
2) Under inflated tire (tread worn vehicle control could lead to

on shoulders) an accident.
Rolling resistance is high, so
fuel consumption is also high-
er. & Wheel balance
S11AV05
3) Over inflated (tread worn in the Each wheel was correctly balanced
center) when your vehicle was new, but the
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the wheels will become unbalanced as
tire magnifies the effects of the tires become worn during use.
road-surface bumps and dips, Wheel imbalance causes the steer-
possibly resulting in vehicle ing wheel to vibrate slightly at

damage. certain vehicle speeds and detracts
If the tire placard shows tire pres- from the vehicle’s straight-line sta-
sures for the vehicle when fully bility. It can also cause steering and
loaded, adjust the tire pressures to suspension system problems and
the values that match the loading abnormal tire wear. If you suspect
conditions. that the wheels are not correctly
balanced, have them checked and
WARNING adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire
Driving at high speeds with repairs and after tire rotation. 11
excessively low tire pressures
1) Correct tire pressure (tread can cause the tires to deform
worn evenly) severely and to rapidly heat
Roadholding is good, and up. A sharp increase in tem-
steering is responsive. Rolling perature could cause tread
resistance is low, so fuel con- separation and destruction of
sumption is also lower. the tires. The resulting loss of
– CONTINUED –

(466,1)
CAUTION & Wear indicators is worn beyond the acceptable

S11AV06
limit and must be replaced
Loss of correct wheel align- immediately. With a tire in this
ment causes the tires to wear condition, driving at high
on one side and reduces the speeds in wet weather can
vehicle’s running stability. cause the vehicle to hydro-
Contact your SUBARU dealer plane. The resulting loss of
if you notice abnormal tire vehicle control can lead to an
wear. accident.
NOTE NOTE
The suspension system is de- For safety, inspect tire tread
signed to hold each wheel at a 1) New tread regularly and replace the tires
certain alignment (relative to the 2) Worn tread before their tread wear indicators
other wheels and to the road) for 3) Tread wear indicator become visible.
optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance. Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible
when the depth of the tread grooves
decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A
tire must be replaced when the
tread wear indicator appears as a
solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indi-
cator becomes visible, the tire

(467,1)
& Rotational direction of tires & Tire rotation

S11AV11 S11AV07

Vehicles equipped with unidir-
Example of rotational direction Vehicles equipped with 4 non- ectional tires
marked on the sidewall unidirectional tires 1) Front
1) Front 1) Front Tire wear varies from wheel to
If the tires have specific rotational wheel. Move the tires to the posi-
direction, refer to the arrow marked tions shown in the illustration each
on the side wall. time they are rotated. For the tire
The arrow should be pointing for- rotation schedule, refer to the “War-
ward direction when the wheels are ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. 11
fitted. Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tires at the time of rotation.
After tire rotation, adjust the tire
pressures and make sure the wheel
nuts are correctly tightened.
After driving approximately 600
– CONTINUED –

(468,1)
miles (1,000 km), check the wheel replace the tires with new ones that are affect the following.
nuts again and retighten any nut identical to those fitted as standard equip- – Ride
ment.
that has become loose. – Handling
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU – Braking
For handling alloy wheels, refer to “Alloy recommends replacing all four tires at the
wheels” FP467. same time. – Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
& Tire replacement WARNING – Clearance between the body
S11AV08
The wheels and tires are important and and tires
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they . When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the It also may be dangerous and
cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires lead to loss of vehicle control,
fitted as standard equipment are optimally same for following items.
and it can lead to an accident.
matched to the characteristics of the (a) Size
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
vehicle and were selected to give the best (b) Circumference radial tires together with belted
possible combination of running perfor-
(c) Speed symbol bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is
(d) Load index Doing so can dangerously re-
essential for every tire to have a size and
duce controllability, resulting in
construction matching those shown on the (e) Construction an accident.
tire placard and to have a speed symbol (f) Manufacturer
and load index matching those shown on
the tire placard. (g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degree of wear
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking For items (a) to (d), you must
performance, speedometer accuracy and obey the specification that is
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- printed on the tire placard. The
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- tire placard is located on the
priately changes the vehicle’s ground driver’s door pillar.
clearance. If all four tires are not the same
for items (a) to (h), serious me-
All four tires must be the same in terms of chanical damage could occur to
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- the drivetrain of your car, and
struction, and size. You are advised to

(469,1)
Alloy wheels 467
& Wheel replacement 11-18. Alloy wheels 11-19. Windshield washer

S11AV09
When replacing wheels due, for example, S11BM fluid
to damage, make sure the replacement Alloy wheels can be scratched and da- S11AX
wheels match the specifications of the maged easily. Handle them carefully to
wheels that are fitted as standard equip- maintain their appearance, performance,
ment. Replacement wheels are available and safety.
at your SUBARU dealer. . When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change a
WARNING flat tire, always check the tightness of the
Use only those wheels that are wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
specified for your vehicle. Wheels miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
not meeting specifications could tighten it to the specified torque.

interfere with brake caliper opera- . Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
tion and may cause the tires to rub wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
against the wheel well housing dur- wheel.
ing turns. The resulting loss of . Never let the wheel rub against sharp Type A combination meter
vehicle control could lead to an protrusions or curbs.
accident. . When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap are replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
NOTE designed for alloy wheels.
When any of the wheels are removed . When stacking and storing removed
and replaced for tire rotation or for any tires, place shock-absorbing material be- 11
other reason, always check the tight- tween the tires to protect the wheels from
ness of the wheel nuts after driving becoming scratched.
approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If
any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
Type B combination meter
– CONTINUED –

(470,1)
468 Windshield washer fluid
When there is only a small amount of & Windshield washer fluid CAUTION
washer fluid remaining, the windshield S11AX02
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid warning light will illuminate. washer fluid is unavailable, use clean . Adjust the washer fluid concen-
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid. water. tration appropriately for the out-
In areas where water freezes in winter, use side temperature. If the concen-
& Adding the windshield an anti-freeze type windshield washer tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid washer fluid may freeze on the
S11AX01
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% windshield and obstruct your
CAUTION surfactant by volume. Its freezing tem- view, and the fluid may freeze in
perature varies according to how much it is the reservoir tank.
Never use engine coolant as washer diluted, as indicated in the following table. . State or local regulations on
fluid because it could cause paint volatile organic compounds may
damage. Washer Fluid Freezing
Concentration Temperature restrict the use of methanol, a
30% common windshield washer anti-
10.48F (−128C)
freeze additive. Washer fluids
50% −48F (−208C) containing non-methanol anti-
100% −498F (−458C) freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid, protection without damaging
check the freezing temperatures in the your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
table above when adjusting the fluid or washer system.
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
add windshield washer fluid. the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.

(471,1)
Replacement of wiper blades 469
11-20. Replacement of wiper arms to the original positions,

CAUTION
blades carefully return the wiper arms
S11AZ
on the windshield by hand. You Hold the wiper arm when replacing
should not return the wiper arms the wiper blade. Holding the wiper
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on to the windshield only by the
the windshield or the wiper blade results in blade, may result in blade deforma-
return spring. Otherwise, the wi- tion.
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the per arms may be deformed and/or
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks the windshield surface may be
after operating the windshield washer or if scratched.
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer
surface of the windshield (or rear window) If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
and the wiper blades using a sponge or after following this method, replace the
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild- wiper blades using the following proce-

abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the dures.
windshield and wiper blades with clean
water. The windshield is clean if beads do & Windshield wiper blade as-
not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
sembly
S11AZ01
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades 1) Lock knob
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This 2. Hold the wiper blade connection by
will cause deterioration of the hand, push the lock knob to release the 11
wiper blades. lock, and then pull out the wiper blade
assembly.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not NOTE
return the wiper arms to the Do not use a hard object to push the
original positions. Otherwise, lock knob. The lock knob may be
the windshield surface may be scratched.
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
– CONTINUED –

(472,1)
470 Replacement of wiper blades
& Window wiper blade rubber illustration, so that it can be removed.

S11AZ05
2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber
through the slit to remove it.
3. To install a new wiper blade rubber,
perform the removal procedure in the
reverse order. After installation, check that
the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the
end of the cap.
NOTE
It may be difficult to perform the wiper
blade rubber replacement. We recom-
3. When installing the wiper blade as- mend that you contact your SUBARU
sembly, align it with the wiper arm connec- dealer for wiper blade rubber replace-
tion part and then slide it in the opposite ment if necessary.
direction of removal to install. After instal-
ling the wiper blade assembly, check that
the connection part is locked completely.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Replace the wiper blade rubber according

to the following procedure.
1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit
on the underside of the wiper blade is in
the removal position, as shown in the

(473,1)
Replacement of wiper blades 471
& Rear window wiper blade as- & Rear window wiper blade
sembly rubber
S11AZ03 S11AZ04
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the 1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. assembly to unlock it from the plastic
5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly support.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
terclockwise.
11
– CONTINUED –

(474,1)
472 Replacement of wiper blades
them in the new blade rubber. with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support. 4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and install Securely retain both ends of the rubber

(475,1)
Battery 473
11-21. Battery remove rings, metal watchbands,

S11BA and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
WARNING positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
. Before beginning work on or near are at the same time in contact
any battery, be sure to extinguish with any other metallic portion of
all cigarettes, matches, and light- the vehicle because a short cir-
ers. Never expose a battery to an cuit will result.
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is . Keep everyone including children
highly flammable and explosive. away from the battery.
. For safety, in case an explosion . Charge the battery in a well-

does occur, wear eye protection ventilated area. 1) Cap
or shield your eyes when working . Battery posts, terminals and re- 2) Upper level
near any battery. Never lean over lated accessories contain lead 3) Lower level
a battery. and lead compounds, chemicals
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
. Do not let battery fluid contact known to the State of California
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be- to cause cancer and reproductive
distilled water.
cause battery fluid is a corrosive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the However, if the battery fluid level is below
acid. If battery fluid gets on your the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
skin or in your eyes, immediately State of California to cause can-
cer. Wash hands after handling. upper level with distilled water.
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme- CAUTION 11
diately if acid has entered the
eyes. Never use more than 10 A when
If battery fluid is accidentally charging the battery because it will
swallowed, immediately drink a shorten battery life.
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im- It is unnecessary to periodically check the
mediately. battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
– CONTINUED –

(476,1)
474 Fuses
For “STARLINK Safety and Security 11-22. Fuses

without navigation system”: S11BB
When the vehicle battery is discharged or
replaced, the audio unit needs to be paired CAUTION
with a smartphone via bluetooth for some
settings. For details about how to pair, Never replace a fuse with one having
refer to the separate navigation/audio a higher rating or with material other
Owner’s Manual. than a fuse because serious damage
or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes. 1) Spare fuses
The other one (main fuse box) is housed in
the engine compartment. Also, the spare
fuses are stored in the fuse box cover.
One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.

(477,1)
Installation of accessories 475
Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller 11-23. Installation of acces-
when removing it from the main fuse box.
sories
S11BD
Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
1) Good replace it with a spare fuse of the same
2) Blown rating.
If any lights, accessories or other electrical 6. If the same fuse blows again, this
controls do not operate, inspect the corre- indicates that its system has a problem.
sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories. 11
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
FP495.

(478,1)
476 Replacing bulbs
11-24. Replacing bulbs them away with a soft cloth & Headlights (models with LED
S11BE moistened with alcohol. Also, if headlights)
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We the bulb is scratched or dropped, S11BE18
recommend that you have the bulb re- it may blow out or crack.
placed by your SUBARU dealer if neces-
sary. NOTE
WARNING For models with type B combination
meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the
Bulbs may become very hot while SRH OFF indicator appears on the
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, combination meter when the ignition
turn off the lights and wait until the switch is in the “ON” position. It
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is indicates that SRH has been deacti-
a risk of sustaining a burn. vated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
CAUTION The LED headlight warning light illumi-

nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
. Replace any bulb only with a new Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
bulb of the specified wattage. dealer as soon as possible.
Using a bulb of different wattage
could result in a fire. For the
specified wattage of each bulb,
refer to “Bulb chart” FP499.
. Do not touch the glass portion of
the light bulb with bare hands.
When holding the glass portion is
unavoidable, hold it using with a
clean dry cloth to avoid getting
moisture and grease on the bulb.
If there is any fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface, wipe

(479,1)
Replacing bulbs 477
& Front turn signal light

S11BE55

Type A
Right-hand side
1. Use a screwdriver to remove the clips
on the air intake duct, then remove the
duct.
11
Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the Type B
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck of 3. Disconnect the electrical connector
the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated. from the bulb and remove the bulb from
the headlight assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
– CONTINUED –

(480,1)
478 Replacing bulbs
4. Replace the bulb. At this time, use care & Front side marker light (if
not to touch the bulb surface. equipped)
5. To install the bulb to the headlight S11BE24
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Put the air intake duct with the clips
(right-hand side).
8. Set the washer fluid filler pipe to the
original place and secure it with the clips
(left-hand side).
& Front position light (if

equipped)
S11BE56
The bulbs of the front position lights are the
same as the front turn signal lights. Refer Right-hand side
to “Front turn signal light” FP477 for the
replacement order. 1. Use a screwdriver to remove the clips
on the air intake duct, then remove the
duct.
Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck of
the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated.

(481,1)
Replacing bulbs 479
& Front fog light (if equipped)

S11BE04
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Rear turn signal lights

S11BE51

3. Remove the bulb from the headlight 2. Push and move the cover to the
assembly by turning it counterclockwise. forward to unlock the 2 tabs.
4. Replace the bulb with a new one. At
this time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
1. Use a screwdriver to remove the
6. Install the air intake duct with clips secured clips of the covers.
(right-hand side).
7. Set the washer tank to the original
place and secure it with a clip (left-hand
11
side).
3. When unlocked, pull out the covers.
– CONTINUED –

(482,1)
480 Replacing bulbs
8. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it.
9. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
10. Reconnect the electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector. 6. Slide the rear combination light as-
sembly rearward to remove it from the
vehicle.
11. Put the rear combination light assem-

bly into place while aligning the 2 pins with
the holes and secure to the vehicle.
5. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove

the screws that secure the rear combina-
tion light assembly. 7. Remove the bulb socket from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.

(483,1)
Replacing bulbs 481
& Backup light

S11BE36

12. Tighten the screws. 2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
13. Put the covers back in place. 1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the and remove it.
light cover as shown in the illustration, and
pry the light cover off from the rear gate
trim.
11
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
– CONTINUED –

(484,1)
482 Replacing bulbs
5. Route the wire as shown in the & License plate light

illustration. S11BE07
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

1. The license plate lights must be and pull out the socket.
6. Install the light cover on the rear gate. pushed outwards, and then pulled out to 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
be removed. 4. Install a new bulb.
5. Put the bulb socket and the license
plate light cover back in place.

(485,1)
Replacing bulbs 483
& Vanity mirror light & Dome light and cargo area
S11BE34
light
S11BE21
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Door step light

S11BE10
CAUTION

Cargo area light (if equipped)
Replacing the bulb could cause a 1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
short circuit. Have the bulb replaced Dome light the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
by your SUBARU dealer.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Put the lens back in place.
& Other bulbs

S11BE29
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your 11
SUBARU dealer if necessary.

(486,1)
484 Replacing key battery
11-25. Replacing key battery swallow them. & Replacing battery of access
S11BK . There is a danger of an explosion key fob
S11BK01
The access key fob/transmitter battery if the battery is incorrectly re-
may be discharged under the following placed. Replace only with the CAUTION
conditions. same or equivalent type of the
battery. When removing or reinstalling the
. The operation of the keyless access
access key fob cover, make sure that
function is unstable. . Batteries should not be exposed
the plastic part does not come off or
. The operating distance of the remote to excessive heat such as bright
become misaligned.
keyless entry system is unstable. sunlight, fire or the like.
. The transmitter does not operate prop- Battery: Button battery CR2032 or
erly when used within the standard dis- NOTE equivalent
tance.
. Replace only with the same or
Replace the battery with a new one. equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
& Safety precautions . Dispose of used batteries according
S11BK04 to local laws.
CAUTION . Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
or in the access key fob/transmit- may result in a malfunction.
ter when replacing the battery. . It is recommended that the battery
. Before replacing the battery, re- be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
move any static electricity. . Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
. Be careful not to touch or damage that the transmitter functions properly. 1) Release button
the printed circuit board in the 2) Emergency key
access key fob/transmitter when
replacing the battery. 1. Take out the emergency key.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could

(487,1)
Replacing key battery 485
& Replacing transmitter battery

S11BK02
Battery: Button battery CR1620 or
equivalent

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl 4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to side facing upward as shown in the figure.
remove the cover.
1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth. Open the key head using a
flat-head screwdriver.
11
5. Attach the cover to the access key fob

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head by fitting the projections and recesses
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth. together.
– CONTINUED –

(488,1)
486 Replacing key battery
2. Remove the transmitter case from the 1) Negative (−) side facing up
key head. 4. Replace the old battery with a new
battery making sure to install the new
battery with the negative (−) side facing up.
5. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

(489,1)
Specifications
12-1. Specifications ............................................... 488 Brake pedal........................................................ 493
S12
Dimensions ........................................................ 488 Brake disc ......................................................... 494
Engine................................................................ 488 Brake pad .......................................................... 494
Fuel.................................................................... 489 12-2. Fuses and circuits.........................................495
Engine oil ........................................................... 489 Fuse panel located in the passenger
Front differential and rear differential gear oil ..... 491 compartment.................................................... 495
Fluids ................................................................. 492 Fuse panel located in the engine compartment ... 497
Engine coolant ................................................... 492 12-3. Bulb chart ......................................................499
Electrical system ................................................ 492 Safety precautions ............................................. 499
Tires................................................................... 493 Bulb chart .......................................................... 500
Temporary spare tires ......................................... 493 12-4. Vehicle identification.....................................503
12

(490,1)
488 Specifications
12-1. Specifications
S12AA
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
S12AA01
in (mm)
Item
Overall length 182.1 (4,625)
Overall width 71.5 (1,815)
Overall height 68.1 (1,730)*2

67.5 (1,715)*3
Wheel base 105.1 (2,670)
Tread Front 61.6 (1,565)
Rear 61.8 (1,570)
Ground clearance*1 8.7 (220)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty

*2: Models with roof rails
*3: Models without roof rails
& Engine
S12AA02
Engine model FB25
(2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 152 (2,498)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)
Compression ratio 12.0 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4

(491,1)
Specifications 489
& Fuel
S12AA08
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher 16.6 gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)
For more details, refer to “Fuel” FP291.
& Engine oil

S12AA12
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” FP450.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil

S12AA1201
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
Specifications
12
– CONTINUED –

(492,1)
490 Specifications
! Alternative engine oil

S12AA1202
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and Engine oil capacity

applicable temperature
– Adding the oil from low level to
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil full level:
for optimum engine performance and 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. – Changing the oil and oil filter:
4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 conventional oil may be used if
replenishment is needed but should be
changed to 0W-20 synthetic oil at the
next oil change.
or
API (American Petroleum Insti- ILSAC (International Lubricant

tute) classification SN with the Specification Advisory Commit-
tee) GF-5, which can be identi-
words “RESOURCE CONSER- fied with the ILSAC certification
VING” mark (Starburst mark)

(493,1)
Specifications 491
& Front differential and rear differential gear oil

S12AA13
Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil
. SUBARU Extra MT*3
Oil grade . API classification GL-5
(75W-90)
SAE viscosity No. and applicable

temperature
Oil capacity*1 1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 lmp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*2 “Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil” FP457
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
Specifications
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.
12
– CONTINUED –

(494,1)
492 Specifications
& Fluids
S12AA10
Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3
Continuously variable Consult your SUBARU dealer. 12.7 US qt (12.0 liters, 10.6 lmp qt) “Continuously variable
transmission fluid transmission fluid” FP456
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 – “Brake fluid” FP457

or DOT 4 brake fluid
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant

S12AA11
Coolant capacity Coolant type
9.0 US qt (8.5 liters, 7.5 lmp qt) SUBARU Super Coolant
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” FP452.
& Electrical system

S12AA03
Battery type Q85
Alternator 12 V-150 A
Spark plugs DILKAR7Q8 (NGK)

(495,1)
Specifications 493
& Tires
S12AA05
Tire size 225/60R17 99H 225/55R18 98H
Wheel size 17 6 7 J 18 6 7 J
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Wheel nut tightening torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts
by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,
refer to “Changing a flat tire” FP415.
& Temporary spare tires

S12AA15
U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec. models Other models

Temporary spare tire size T145/80 D17 185/65 R17
Temporary spare tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
2
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm ) 42 psi (290 kPa, 2.9 kgf/cm2)
Specifications
& Brake pedal
S12AA27
in (mm)
Pedal clearance 2.68 (68)*
Pedal free play 0.016 - 0.07 (0.4 - 1.8)
12
*: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)
– CONTINUED –

(496,1)
494 Specifications
& Brake disc

S12AA18
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your
SUBARU dealer.
& Brake pad

S12AA28
in (mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.06 (1.5)

(497,1)
Fuses and circuits 495
12-2. Fuses and circuits

S12AB
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

S12AB01
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
1 Empty
2 20 A CIGAR
3 7.5 A IG A-1
4 15 A AUDIO NAVI
5 15 A IG B-2
6 7.5 A METER IG (DCDC)
7 15 A 12 V SOCKET
8 15 A A/C IG
9 7.5 A ACC
10 7.5 A IG B-1
Specifications
11 7.5 A EYE SIGHT (DCDC)
12 Empty
13 7.5 A IG A-3
14 10 A UNIT +B
15 7.5 A METER IG
12
16 7.5 A SRVD (DCDC)
17 7.5 A MIRROR
18 7.5 A LAMP IG
19 10 A IG A-2
20 10 A SRS AIR BAG
– CONTINUED –

(498,1)
496 Fuses and circuits
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
21 7.5 A A/C IG (DCDC)
22 25 A SEAT/H STRG/H
23 10 A DRL
24 7.5 A A/C ACC (DCDC)
25 7.5 A UNIT +B (DCDC)
26 10 A BACK UP
27 10 A A/C +B
28 20 A TRAIL R.FOG
29 7.5 A AUDIO ACC (DCDC)
30 7.5 A BACK UP (DCDC)
31 7.5 A SMT (DCDC)
32 7.5 A ILLUMI
33 7.5 A KEY SW A
34 Empty
35 7.5 A ILLUMI (DCDC)
36 7.5 A KEY SW B
37 7.5 A STOP
38 7.5 A EYE SIGHT

(499,1)
Fuses and circuits 497
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

S12AB02
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
1 7.5 A HORN 2
2 7.5 A HORN 1
3 15 A H/L LO RH
4 15 A H/L LO LH
5 10 A DCM
6 10 A H/L HI RH
7 10 A H/L HI LH
8 10 A TAIL
9 30 A JB-B
10 20 A FUEL
11 7.5 A OBD
12 10 A ODS
Specifications
13 7.5 A PU B/UP
14 15 A HAZARD
15 Empty
16 10 A MB-B
17 Empty 12
18 20 A D/L
A) Main fuse
19 10 A AVCS
20 10 A E/G2
21 7.5 A CVT SSR
– CONTINUED –

(500,1)
498 Fuses and circuits
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
22 Empty
23 Empty
24 20 A O2 HTR
25 Empty
26 20 A TCU
27 15 A IG COIL
28 15 A E/G1
29 30 A BACKUP
30 25 A MAIN FUN
31 30 A VDC SOL
32 10 A F. FOG
33 25 A R. DEF
34 20 A AUDIO
35 10 A DEICER
36 25 A SUB FUN
37 15 A BLOWER
38 15 A BLOWER
39 Empty
40 15 A R. WIPER
41 15 A F. WASH
42 30 A F. WIPER

(501,1)
Bulb chart 499
12-3. Bulb chart

S12AC
& Safety precautions
S12AC03
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Specifications
12
– CONTINUED –

(502,1)
500 Bulb chart
& Bulb chart

S12AC04
NOTE
Lights A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K and L are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

(503,1)
Bulb chart 501
Wattage Bulb No. Wattag

1) Front turn signal light / Front position light (if equipped) 12 V-28 W / 8 W 7444NA
Front turn signal light (if equipped) 12 V-28 W 7444NA
2) Vanity mirror light 14 V-2 W –
3) Dome light 12 V-8 W –
4) Cargo area light (if equipped) 12 V-13 W –
5) Door step light 12 V-5 W W5W
6) Rear turn signal light 13.5 V-21 W WY21W
7) Backup light 13.5 V-16 W W16W
8) License plate light 12 V-5 W W5W
9) Front side marker light (if equipped) 12 V-5 W W5W
10) Front fog light (if equipped) 12 V-19 W H16
A) Low/High beam headlight – –
Daytime running light (if equipped) – –
B) Map light – –
Specifications
C) Side turn signal light (if equipped) – –
D) Rear gate light (if equipped) – –
E) High-mounted stop light – –
F) Cargo area light (if equipped) – –
G) Tail light – –
H) Stop light – –
12
Tail light – –
I) Rear side marker light – –
J) Front side marker light (if equipped) – –
– CONTINUED –

(504,1)
502 Bulb chart
Wattage Bulb No.

K) Front position light (if equipped) – –
Daytime running light (if equipped) – –
L) Front fog light (if equipped) – –

(505,1)
Vehicle identification 503
12-4. Vehicle identification

S12AD
1) Vehicle identification number (under the

floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)
2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Certification label
5) Vehicle identification number label
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
Specifications
12

(506,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(507,1)
Consumer information and reporting safety defects

13-1. For U.S.A. ...................................................... 506 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit........... 515
S13
13-2. Tire information ............................................ 506 13-3. Vehicle load limit – how to determine .........515
Tire labeling ....................................................... 506 Calculating total and load capacities varying
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 508 seating configurations...................................... 516
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 509 13-4. Uniform tire quality grading standards .......518
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ...... 514 TREADWEAR ..................................................... 519
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle TRACTION AA, A, B, C ....................................... 519
load capacities ................................................. 514 TEMPERATURE A, B, C ...................................... 519
Adverse safety consequences of overloading 13-5. Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.).................520
on handling and stopping and on tires.............. 514
13

(508,1)
506 For U.S.A.
13-1. For U.S.A. 13-2. Tire information Example:

S13AA S13AB
The following information has been & Tire labeling

S13AB01
compiled according to Code of Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part Identification Number or TIN) are (1) P = Certain tire type used on
575”. placed on the sidewall of a tire by light duty vehicles such as passen-
tire manufacturers. These markings ger cars
can provide you with useful infor- (2) Section Width in millimeters
mation on the tire. (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
! Tire size 7 section width).
Your vehicle comes equipped with
S13AB0101
(4) R = Radial Construction
P-Metric tire size. It is important to (5) Rim diameter in inches
understand the sizing system in ! Load and Speed Rating
selecting the proper tire for your Descriptions
vehicles. Here is a brief review of S13AB010102
The load and speed rating descrip-
the tire sizing system with a break-
tions will appear following the size
down of its individual elements.
designation.
! P Metric They provide two important facts
S13AB010101
With the P-Metric system, Section about the tire. First, the number
Width is measured in millimeters. designation is its load index. Sec-
To convert millimeters into inches, ond, the letter designation indicates
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio the tire’s speed rating.
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.

(509,1)
Tire information 507
Example: WARNING individual elements.

. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean Mark

a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (2) Tire Size
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(3) Tire Type Code
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- (4) Date of Manufacture
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs The first two figures identify the
maged, repaired, retreaded,
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 week, starting with “01” to represent
or otherwise altered from
kg). the first full week of the calendar
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re- year; the second two figures repre-
WARNING
treaded, or otherwise al- sent the year. For example, 0101
Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- means the 1st week of 2001.
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment ! Other markings
a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and The following makings are also
S13AB0103
does not mean the vehicle can speeds. placed on the sidewall.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load. ! Tire Identification Number ! Maximum permissible infla-
(TIN) tion pressure
S13AB010301
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical S13AB0102
The maximum cold inflation pres-
system describing a tire’s capability Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard sure to which this tire may be
to travel at established and prede- inflated. For example, “300 kPa 13
termined speeds. sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h) the TIN with a breakdown of its
– CONTINUED –

(510,1)
508 Tire information
! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE- The vehicle placard is attached to
S13AB010302
The load rating at the maximum WALL 2 POLYESTER” the driver’s side door pillar.
permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grad- Example:
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg ing (UTQG)
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) S13AB010305
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
MAX. PRESS.” quality grading standards” FP518.
WARNING
& Recommended tire inflation
Maximum load rating applies pressure
S13AB02
only to the tire, not to the ! Recommended cold tire in-
vehicle. Putting a load rated flation pressure
tire on any vehicle does not S13AB0201
For recommended cold tire inflation
mean the vehicle can be
pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
loaded up to the tire’s rated
refer to “Tires” FP493. The vehicle placard shows original
load.
! Vehicle placard tire size, recommended cold tire
S13AB0202
! Construction type inflation pressure on each tire at
S13AB010303
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
Applicable construction of this tire.
seating capacity and loading infor-
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL mation.
BELTED RADIAL”
! Adverse safety conse-
! Construction quences of under-inflation
S13AB010304
S13AB0203
The generic name of each cord Driving at high speeds with exces-
material used in the plies (both sively low tire pressures can cause
sidewall and tread area) of this tire. the tires to flex severely and to
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

(511,1)
crease in temperature could cause & Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tread separation, and failure of the . Accessory weight
S13AB03
flated, bears the load.
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking
vehicle control could lead to an those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the
accident. replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall.
! Measuring and adjusting air sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure

pressure to achieve proper power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been
inflation and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been
S13AB0204
Check and, if necessary, adjust the items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more.
pressure of each tire (including the stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord
spare) at least once a month and stalled or not). The strands forming the plies in the
before any long journey. Check the . Bead tire.
tire pressures when the tires are The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation
cold. Use a pressure gauge to steel wires, wrapped or reinforced The parting of cords from adjacent
adjust the tire pressures to the by ply cords and that is shaped to fit rubber compounds.
specific values. Driving even a short the rim. . Cracking
distance warms up the tires and . Bead separation Any parting within the tread, side-
increases the tire pressures. Also, A breakdown of the bond between wall, or inner liner of the tire
the tire pressures are affected by components in the bead. extending to cord material.
the outside temperature. It is best to . Bias ply tire . Curb weight
check tire pressure outdoors before A pneumatic tire in which the ply The weight of a motor vehicle with
driving the vehicle. When a tire cords that extend to the beads are standard equipment including the
becomes warm, the air inside it laid at alternate angles substantially maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
expands, causing the tire pressure less than 90 degrees to the center- coolant, and if so equipped, air 13
to increase. Be careful not to mis- line of the tread. conditioning and additional weight
takenly release air from a warm tire . Carcass optional engine.
to reduce its pressure. The tire structure, except tread and
– CONTINUED –

(512,1)
. Extra load tire a vehicle. . Measuring rim

A tire designed to operate at higher . Light truck (LT) tire The rim on which a tire is fitted for
loads and higher inflation pressure A tire designated by its manufac- physical dimension requirements.
than the corresponding standard turer as primarily intended for use . Normal occupant weight
tire. on lightweight trucks or multipur- 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
. Groove pose passenger vehicles. occupants specified in the second
The space between two adjacent . Load rating column of Table 1 that is appended
tread ribs. The maximum load that a tire is to the end of this section.
. Innerliner rated to carry for a given inflation . Occupant distribution
The layer(s) forming the inside sur- pressure. Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
face of a tubeless tire that contains . Maximum inflation pressure cle as specified in the third column
the inflating medium within the tire. The maximum cold inflation pres- of Table 1 that is appended to the
. Innerliner separation sure to which a tire may be inflated. end of this section.
The parting of the innerliner from . Maximum load rating . Open splice
cord material in the carcass. The load rating for a tire at the Any parting at any junction of tread,
. Intended outboard sidewall maximum permissible inflation sidewall, or innerliner that extends
(1) The sidewall that contains a pressure for that tire. to cord material.
whitewall, bears white lettering . Maximum loaded vehicle weight . Outer diameter
or bears manufacturer, brand, The sum of: The overall diameter of an inflated
and/or model name molding that (a) Curb weight new tire.
is higher or deeper than the (b) Accessory weight . Overall width
same molding on the other side- (c) Vehicle capacity weight The linear distance between the
wall of the tire, or (d) Production options weight exteriors of the sidewalls of an
(2) The outward facing sidewall . Maximum permissible inflation
inflated tire, including elevations
of an asymmetrical tire that has a pressure
due to labeling, decorations, or
particular side that must always The maximum cold inflation pres- protective bands or ribs.
face outward when mounting on sure to which a tire may be inflated.

(513,1)
. Passenger car tire sory weight, including heavy duty . Rim type designation
A tire intended for use on passen- brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger heavy duty battery, and special trim. ignation for a rim by style or code.
vehicles, and trucks, that have a . Radial ply tire . Rim width
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) A pneumatic tire in which the ply Nominal distance between rim
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. cords that extend to the beads are flanges.

. Ply laid at substantially 90 degrees to . Section width
A layer of rubber-coated parallel the centerline of the tread. The linear distance between the
cords. . Recommended inflation pres- exteriors of the sidewalls of an
. Ply separation sure inflated tire, excluding elevations
A parting of rubber compound The cold inflation pressure recom- due to labeling, decoration, or pro-
between adjacent plies. mended by a vehicle manufacturer. tective bands.
. Pneumatic tire . Reinforced tire . Sidewall
A mechanical device made of rub- A tire designed to operate at higher That portion of a tire between the
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or loads and at higher inflation pres- tread and bead.
other materials, that, when sures than the corresponding stan- . Sidewall separation
mounted on an automotive wheel, dard tire. The parting of the rubber compound
provides the traction and contains . Rim from the cord material in the side-
the gas or fluid that sustains the A metal support for a tire or a tire wall.
load. and tube assembly upon which the . Snow tire
. Production options weight tire beads are seated. A tire that attains a traction index
The combined weight of those . Rim diameter equal to or greater than 110, com-
installed regular production options Nominal diameter of the bead seat. pared to the ASTM E-1136 Stan-
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in . Rim size designation dard Reference Test Tire, when 13
excess of those standard items Rim diameter and width. using the snow traction test as
which they replace, not previously described in ASTM F-1805-00,
considered in curb weight or acces- Standard Test Method for Single
– CONTINUED –

(514,1)
Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight city.

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered . Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Surfaces, and which is marked with Load on an individual tire that is
an Alpine Symbol “ ” on at least determined by distributing to each
one sidewall. axle its share of the maximum
. Test rim loaded vehicle weight and dividing
The rim on which a tire is fitted for by two.
testing, and it may be any rim listed . Vehicle normal load on the tire
as appropriate for use with that tire. Load on an individual tire that is
. Tread determined by distributing to each
That portion of a tire that comes into axle its share of the curb weight,
contact with the road. accessory weight, and normal oc-
. Tread rib cupant weight (distributed in accor-
A tread section running circumfer- dance with Table 1 that is appended
entially around a tire. to the end of this section) and
. Tread separation dividing by 2.
Pulling away of the tread from the . Wheel-holding fixture
tire carcass. The fixture used to hold the wheel
. Treadwear indicators (TWI) and tire assembly securely during
The projections within the principal testing.
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-

(515,1)
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
13
– CONTINUED –

(516,1)
& Tire care – maintenance and rotation. After tire rotation, adjust axle’s GAWR are shown on the
safety practices the tire pressures and make sure vehicle certification label located at
S13AB04
. Check on a daily basis that the the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- the bottom of driver’s side door
tires are free from serious damage, tened. For information about the pillar.
nails, and stones. At the same time, tightening torque and tightening The GVWR and front and rear
check the tires for abnormal wear. sequence for the wheel nuts, refer GAWRs are determined by not only
. Inspect the tire tread regularly to “Flat tires” FP415. the maximum load rating of tires but
and replace the tires before their also loaded capacities of the vehi-
tread wear indicators become visi- & Determining compatibility of cle’s suspension, axles and other
ble. When a tire’s tread wear in- tire and vehicle load capaci- parts of the body.
dicator becomes visible, the tire is ties
S13AB06 Therefore, this means that the
worn beyond the acceptable limit The sum of four tires’ maximum vehicle cannot necessarily be
and must be replaced immediately. load ratings must exceed the max- loaded up to the tire’s maximum
With a tire in this condition, driving imum loaded vehicle weight load rating on the tire sidewall.
at even low speeds in wet weather (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
can cause the vehicle to hydro- maximum load ratings of two front & Adverse safety conse-
plane. Possible resulting loss of tires and of two rear tires must quences of overloading on
vehicle control can lead to an exceed each axle’s maximum handling and stopping and on
accident. loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original tires
S13AB07
. To maximize the life of each tire equipment tires are designed to Overloading could affect vehicle
and ensure that the tires wear fulfill those conditions. handling, stopping distance, and
uniformly, it is best to rotate the The maximum loaded vehicle vehicle and tire performance in the
tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km). weight is referred to Gross Vehicle following ways. This could lead to
For information about the tire rota- Weight Rating (GVWR). And each an accident and possibly result in
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” axle’s maximum loaded capacity is severe personal injury.
FP465. Replace any damaged or referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- . Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
unevenly worn tires at the time of ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each . Heavy and/or high-mounted

(517,1)
Vehicle load limit – how to determine 515
loads could increase the risk of luggage load capacity. For exam- 13-3. Vehicle load limit – how
rollover. ple, if the “XXX” amount equals to determine
. Stopping distance will increase. 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 S13BU
. Brakes could overheat and fail. lb passengers in your vehicle, the The load capacity of your vehicle is
. Suspension, bearings, axles and amount of available cargo and determined by weight, not by avail-
other body parts could break or luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. able cargo space. The load limit of

experience accelerated wear that (1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.) your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
will shorten vehicle life. 5. Determine the combined weight placard attached to the driver’s side
. Tires could fail. of luggage and cargo being loaded door pillar. Locate the statement
. Tread separation could occur. on the vehicle. That weight may not “The combined weight of occupants
. Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo and cargo should never exceed
and luggage load capacity calcu- XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
& Steps for Determining Cor- lated in Step 4.
rect Load Limit vehicle’s placard.
S13AB08 6. If your vehicle will be towing a The vehicle placard also shows
1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be seating capacity of your vehicle.
bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult The total load capacity includes the
cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this total weight of driver and all pas-
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s reduces the available cargo and sengers and their belongings, any
placard. luggage load capacity of your ve- cargo, any optional equipment such
2. Determine the combined weight hicle. as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
of the driver and passengers that carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
will be riding in your vehicle. a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of can be calculated by the following
the driver and passengers from method. 13
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
available amount of cargo and weight of occupants + total weight
– CONTINUED –

(518,1)
516 Vehicle load limit – how to determine
of optional equipment + tongue load indicated on the vehicle placard further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
of a trailer (if applicable)) with the statement “The combined be carried.
weight of occupants and cargo
For information about vehicle load- Example 1B
should never exceed 900 lbs or
ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
408 kg”.
FP394.
For example, if the vehicle has one
& Calculating total and load occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
capacities varying seating plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
configurations kg).
S13BU01
Calculate the available load capa- 1. Calculate the total weight.
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
For example, if a person weighing

2. Calculate the available load ca- 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same
pacity by subtracting the total vehicle (bringing the number of
weight from the vehicle capacity occupants to two), the calculations
weight of 900 lbs (408 kg). are as follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is 3. The result of step 2 shows that a

(519,1)
Vehicle load limit – how to determine 517
Example 2A trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =

176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
2. Calculate the available load ca-

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve- pacity.
hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
3. The total weight now exceeds weight of occupants and cargo
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 should never exceed 408 kg or
kg), so the cargo weight must be 900 lbs”.
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
For example, the vehicle has one 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170 be carried.
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs 13
(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer
weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of
the trailer weight is applied to the
– CONTINUED –

(520,1)
518 Uniform tire quality grading standards
Example 2B 13-4. Uniform tire quality

grading standards
S13AC
This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
For example, if a person weighing tween tread shoulder and maximum
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 2. Calculate the available load ca- section width.
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same pacity. For example:
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 TEMPERATURE A
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the The quality grades apply to new
child to use, the calculations are as pneumatic tires for use on passen-
follows. ger cars. However, they do not
1. Calculate the total weight. 3. The total weight now exceeds apply to deep tread, winter type
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
kg), so the cargo weight must be ary use spare tires, tires with
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more. nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.

(521,1)
Uniform tire quality grading standards 519
All passenger car tires must con- under controlled conditions on spe- excessive temperature can lead to
form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of sudden tire failure.
ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. The grade C corresponds to a level
A tire marked C may have poor of performance which all passenger
& TREADWEAR traction performance. car tires must meet under the
S13AC02
The treadwear grade is a compara- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING dards No. 109.
the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to Grades B and A represent higher
trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight- levels of performance on the la-
government test course. ahead braking traction tests, boratory test wheel than the mini-
For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accelera- mum required by law.
would wear one and one-half (1- tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
1/2) times as well on the govern- WARNING
or peak traction characteris-
ment course as a tire graded 100. tics. The temperature grade for this
The relative performance of tires tire is established for a tire that
depends upon the actual conditions is properly inflated and not
of their use, however, and may & TEMPERATURE A, B, C
S13AC04 overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the underinflation, or excessive
due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the loading, either separately or
service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of in combination, can cause
road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat heat buildup and possible tire
when tested under controlled con- failure.
& TRACTION AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
S13AC03
The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. 13
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those Sustained high temperature can
grades represent the tire’s ability to cause the material of the tire to
stop on wet pavement as measured degenerate and reduce tire life, and

(522,1)
520 Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)
13-5. Reporting safety de- also obtain other information about

fects (U.S.A.) motor vehicle safety from http://
S13AH www.safercar.gov.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer,
or Subaru of America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590. You can

(523,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(524,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(525,1)
Index
14

(526,1)
524 Index
A Audio
Abbreviation .............................................................. P3 Antenna ............................................................ P272
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................. P321 Antenna system ................................................. P272
Warning light ............................................ P172, P322 Set ................................................................... P272
Access key ............................................................ P110 Audio set............................................................... P272
Warning indicator............................................... P178 Auto dimmer cancel function.................................... P164
Warning light ............................................ P178, P179 Auto on/off headlights ............................................. P229
Access key fob ....................................................... P110 Sensor .............................................................. P230
Warning light ............................................ P178, P179 Auto Start Stop system ........................................... P339
Accessories .......................................................... P475 Indicator............................................................ P187
Accessory power outlet .......................................... P280 Indicator light ........................................... P186, P187
Air cleaner element ................................................ P454 OFF indicator..................................................... P186
Air conditioner OFF indicator light.............................................. P186
Automatic climate control.................................... P261 Warning indicator ............................................... P186
Manual climate control........................................ P263 Warning light ..................................................... P186
Air filtration system ................................................ P267 Auto Vehicle Hold ................................................... P334
Air flow mode ........................................................ P263 Auto Vehicle Hold function....................................... P334
Alarm system ........................................................ P134 ON indicator light ............................................... P175
All-Wheel Drive warning light................................... P175 Operation indicator light ...................................... P175
Alloy wheel ........................................................... P467 Auto Vehicle Hold ON ............................................. P175
Cleaning ........................................................... P436 Auto Vehicle Hold Operation .................................... P175
Antenna................................................................ P272 Auto-dimming mirror ............................................... P241
Roof antenna .................................................... P272 Auto-dimming mirror/compass.................................. P241
Antenna system..................................................... P272 Automatic headlight beam leveler
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................. P321 Warning light ..................................................... P186
Arming the system ................................................. P135 Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Armrest .................................................................. P40 Retractor (ALR/ELR).............................................. P49
Ashtray................................................................. P284 Automatic transmission
AT OIL TEMP warning light ..................................... P170 Fluid ................................................................. P492
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ........ P170
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ......... P49

(527,1)
Index 525
B BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning

Battery ................................................................. P473 buzzer ............................................................ P355
Drainage prevention function............................... P134 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator.................................... P356
Jump starting .................................................... P419 BSD/RCTA OFF switch ....................................... P357
Replacement (access key fob) ............................ P484 BSD/RCTA warning indicator ............................... P357
Replacement (access key) .................................. P484 OFF indicator............... P188, P191, P355, P356, P357
Replacement (keyless access with push-button OFF switch........................................................ P357
start system) .......................................... P123, P484 Warning indicator ............................ P188, P191, P357
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ...... P307 Warning volume ................................................. P355
Replacement (remote keyless entry Bulb
system) ................................................. P129, P485 Chart ................................................................ P499
Replacement (transmitter)................................... P485 Replacement ..................................................... P476
Vehicle battery................................................... P473 Replacing.......................................................... P476
Booster seat............................................................ P67
Brake C
Assist ............................................................... P320 Cargo area
Booster.................................................... P320, P458 Cover ............................................................... P285
Disc ................................................................. P494 Light ....................................................... P275, P483
Fluid........................................................ P457, P492 Tie-down hooks ................................................. P288
Parking............................................................. P332 Catalytic converter.................................................. P385
Pedal ............................................................... P458 Center
System ............................................................. P320 Console ............................................................ P278
Brake pad ............................................................. P494 Center console....................................................... P278
Brake system ........................................................ P320 Changing
Warning light ..................................................... P173 Coolant ............................................................. P454
Braking................................................................. P319 Flat tire ............................................................. P415
Index
Tips.................................................................. P319 Oil and oil filter .................................................. P451
Breaking-in of new brake pads ................................ P459 Charge warning light............................................... P169
BSD/RCTA............................................................ P351 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer................ P355 light ................................................................... P168 14

(528,1)
526 Index
Checking Compass............................................................... P241

Coolant level ..................................................... P453 Console................................................................. P278
Engine oil level .................................................. P450 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ................. P309
Fluid level ......................................................... P457 Fluid ....................................................... P456, P492
Fluid level (brake fluid) ....................................... P457 Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ........ P170
Fluid level (washer fluid) ..................................... P467 Coolant ....................................................... P453, P492
Oil level (engine oil) ........................................... P450 Temperature high warning light ............................ P168
Child restraint systems ............................................. P59 Temperature low indicator light ............................ P168
Installation of a booster seat ................................. P67 Coolant temperature high warning light ..................... P168
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ......................... P63 Coolant temperature low indicator light ..................... P168
Lower and tether anchorages ................................ P68 Cooling system ...................................................... P452
Top tether anchorages.......................................... P71 Corrosion protection................................................ P436
Child safety............................................................... P5 Cruise control ........................................................ P346
Locks ............................................................... P137 Indicator............................................................ P185
Chime Indicator light ........................................... P185, P350
Key .................................................................. P157 Set indicator ...................................................... P186
Key reminder..................................................... P157 Set indicator light ............................ P186, P346, P350
Light................................................................. P229
Seatbelt ..................................................... P50, P165 D
Cigarette lighter ..................................................... P281 Daytime running light system ................................... P234
Cleaning Defogger ............................................................... P250
Alloy wheels...................................................... P436 Defrosting.............................................................. P265
Interior.............................................................. P437 Deicer ................................................................... P250
Ventilation grille ................................................. P266 Differential gear oil
Climate control system ........................................... P257 Front ...................................................... P457, P491
Automatic ......................................................... P261 Rear ....................................................... P457, P491
Manual ............................................................. P263 Dimensions............................................................ P488
Clock............................... P202, P203, P206, P211, P225 Disarming the alarm system .................................... P136
Clutch Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .................... P321
Fluid................................................................. P492 Dome light ................................................... P274, P483
Combination meter display (color LCD) .................... P189

(529,1)
Index 527
Door Indicator light ..................................................... P173

Locks ............................................................... P131 Warning ............................................................ P337
Open warning light............................................. P175 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ........................... P49
Step light .......................................................... P483 Engine
Unlock selection function .................................... P196 Compartment overview ....................................... P449
Double trip meter ................................................... P161 Coolant ................................................... P453, P492
Drive belts ............................................................ P456 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)..................... P6, P384
Driving Hood ................................................................ P447
All-Wheel Drive model ........................................ P386 Low oil level warning light ................................... P170
All-Wheel Drive warning light............................... P175 Oil .......................................................... P450, P489
AWD models ..................................................... P386 Overheating....................................................... P422
AWD vehicles.................................................... P386 Starting & stopping................................... P297, P299
Drinking ................................................................ P6 Event data recorder ................................................... P8
Drugs ................................................................... P6 Exterior care .......................................................... P434
Foreign countries ............................................... P386
Pets ..................................................................... P7 F
Snowy and icy roads.......................................... P391 Flat tires ................................................................ P415
Tips................................................ P316, P384, P386 Floor mat............................................................... P284
Tired or sleepy ...................................................... P7 Fluid level
Winter .............................................................. P390 Brake................................................................ P457
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ............. P456
E Fog light ................................................................ P236
EBD system Bulb........................................................ P479, P499
Warning ............................................................ P173 Indicator light ..................................................... P186
ECO gauge........................................................... P162 Switch............................................................... P236
Electrical system.................................................... P492 Front
Index
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Differential gear oil ................................... P457, P491
system ..................................................... P173, P322 Fog light......................................... P236, P479, P499
Warning ............................................................ P173 Fog light (bulb) .................................................. P479
Electronic parking brake ......................................... P332 Fog light indicator light........................................ P186 14
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P334 Position light...................................................... P478

(530,1)
528 Index
Seatbelt pretensioners.......................................... P56 Welcome lighting function.................................... P230

Front fog light ............................................... P236, P479 High Beam Assist ................................................... P231
Bulb ........................................................ P479, P499 High Beam Assist function....................................... P231
Indicator light..................................................... P186 Indicator light ..................................................... P185
Switch .............................................................. P236 High beam assist warning indicator .......................... P185
Fuel ............................................................ P291, P489 High beam indicator light ......................................... P185
Consumption indicator ............. P193, P197, P205, P211 High/low beam change (dimmer) .............................. P231
Economy hints................................................... P384 Hill descent control ....................................... P326, P329
Filler lid and cap ................................................ P292 Indicator light ..................................................... P187
Gauge .............................................................. P162 Hill start assist ....................................................... P344
Requirements........................................... P291, P489 HomeLink® ............................................................. P241
Fuses ................................................................... P474 Hook
Fuses and circuits.................................................. P495 Cargo tie-down .................................................. P288
Convenient tie-down ........................................... P288
G Shopping bag .................................................... P285
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .......................... P395 Towing and tie-down........................................... P423
Glove box ............................................................. P278 Horn ..................................................................... P253
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)...................... P395 Hose and connections............................................. P453
H I
Hazard warning flasher.................................. P160, P412 Ignition switch ........................................................ P156
Headlight ..................................................... P229, P476 Light ................................................................. P157
Beam leveler ..................................................... P236 Illumination brightness control .................................. P164
Bulb replacement............................................... P476 Immobilizer ............................................................ P125
Bulb replacing ................................................... P476 Indicator light (security indicator light) ......... P125, P183
Bulb wattage ..................................................... P499 Indicator light
Control switch ................................................... P229 Auto Start Stop ........................................ P186, P187
Flasher ............................................................. P231 Auto Start Stop OFF........................................... P186
Indicator light..................................................... P186 Auto Vehicle Hold ON......................................... P175
OFF delay function ............................................ P230 Auto Vehicle Hold operation ................................ P175
OFF delay setting .............................................. P230 BSD/RCTA OFF..................... P188, P191, P356, P357

(531,1)
Index 529
BSD/RCTA warning.......................... P188, P191, P357 Number............................................................. P109

Coolant temperature low..................................... P168 Number plate..................................................... P109
Cruise control........................................... P185, P350 Reminder chime................................................. P157
Cruise control set...................................... P186, P350 Replacement ..................................................... P125
Electronic parking brake ..................................... P173 Keyless access with push-button start system ........... P110
Front fog light .................................................... P186 Disabling keyless access functions....................... P120
Headlight .......................................................... P186 Locking and unlocking doors ............................... P115
High beam ........................................................ P185 Warning chimes and warning light.............. P123, P178
High Beam Assist .............................................. P185 When access key does not operate
High beam assist warning................................... P185 properly .............................. P123, P160, P302, P427
Hill descent control ............................................ P187 When access key fob does not operate properly.... P427
Immobilizer .............................................. P125, P183 Keyless entry system .............................................. P127
Security ................................................... P125, P183 Keys ..................................................................... P109
Security (immobilizer) ......................................... P125
Select lever/Gear position ................................... P184 L
SI-DRIVE.......................................................... P184 Lap belt pretensioner ................................................ P57
Traction control system OFF ............................... P178 LCA ...................................................................... P352
Turn signal........................................................ P185 Leather seat materials............................................. P438
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF............................ P178 LED headlights....................................................... P476
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ............ P176, P177 License plate light .................................................. P482
X-MODE ........................................................... P187 Light
Inside mirror.......................................................... P241 Back-up ............................................................ P481
Interior lights ......................................................... P274 Brake/Tail .......................................................... P499
Cargo area .............................................. P275, P483
J Control switch .................................................... P229
Jack and jack handle ............................................. P413 Daytime running....................................... P234, P479
Index
Jack-up point......................................................... P415 Dome ..................................................... P274, P483
Jump starting ........................................................ P419 Door step .......................................................... P483
Fog (front) ......................................................... P479
K Front fog ................................................. P236, P479 14
Key ...................................................................... P109 Front position.................................. P229, P236, P478

(532,1)
530 Index
Front side marker ..................................... P229, P499 Multi-function display (color LCD) ............................. P203
Ignition switch ................................................... P157
License plate..................................................... P482 N
Map ................................................................. P274 New vehicle break-in driving .................................... P384
Turn signal............................................... P237, P479
Vanity mirror............................................. P277, P483 O
Loading your vehicle .............................................. P394 Odometer .............................................................. P161
Low fuel warning light............................................. P175 Oil filter ................................................................. P451
Low tire pressure warning light ................................ P171 Oil level
Lower and tether anchorage ..................................... P68 Engine .............................................................. P450
Front differential gear ......................................... P457
M Rear differential gear .......................................... P457
Maintenance Warning light ..................................................... P170
Precautions....................................................... P443 Oil pressure warning light ........................................ P169
Schedule .......................................................... P443 On-pavement and off-road driving ............................ P388
Seatbelt .............................................................. P56 On-road and off-road driving .................................... P388
Tips.................................................................. P445 One-touch lane changer .......................................... P237
Tools ................................................................ P412 Outside
Malfunction indicator light (check engine Mirror defogger .................................................. P250
warning light)...................................................... P168 Mirrors .................................................... P248, P250
Manual Temperature indicator ............................... P202, P205
Climate control ......................................... P261, P263 Overheating engine ................................................ P422
Mode (continuously variable transmission) ............ P312
Manual mode ........................................................ P312
P
Map light .............................................................. P274
Parking ................................................................. P332
Maximum load limits............................................... P401
Brake................................................................ P332
Meters and gauges ................................................ P160
Tips .................................................................. P337
Mirror defogger...................................................... P250
Parking your vehicle ............................................... P332
Mirrors.................................................................. P241
Periodic inspections ................................................ P386
Moonroof ..................................................... P149, P430
Petrol fuel.............................................................. P291
Multi-function display (black and white) .................... P197
PIN code Access.................................................... P117

(533,1)
Index 531
Power Wiper and washer switch .................................... P240

Outlets ............................................................. P280 Wiper blades ..................................................... P471
Outside mirrors................................ P248, P249, P250 Recommended
Rear gate ......................................................... P142 Automatic transmission fluid ................................ P492
Steering............................................................ P318 Brake fluid............................................... P458, P492
Steering fluid ..................................................... P492 Continuously variable transmission fluid................ P492
Steering warning light......................................... P176 Engine oil................................................ P452, P489
Windows........................................................... P138 Front differential gear oil ..................................... P491
Precautions against vehicle modification............ P58, P103 Power steering fluid............................................ P492
Preparing to drive .................................................. P297 Rear differential gear oil...................................... P491
Push-button Spark plugs ............................................. P456, P492
Ignition switch .......................................... P156, P158 Refueling............................................................... P292
Starting and stopping engine...................... P297, P299 Remote engine start system .................................... P302
Remote keyless entry system .................................. P127
R Replacement
RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking) Access key battery ............................................. P484
OFF indicator .................................................... P188 Access key fob battery........................................ P484
ON/OFF setting ................................................. P367 Air cleaner element ............................................ P455
Warning indicator............................................... P188 Brake pad ......................................................... P459
RCTA ................................................................... P352 Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)..... P129
Rear Remote engine start transmitter battery ................ P307
Differential gear oil .................................... P457, P491 Remote keyless entry transmitter battery .............. P485
Gate........................................................ P141, P429 Wiper blades ..................................................... P469
Seats ................................................................. P39 Replacing
Rear seat................................................................ P39 Access key battery ............................................. P484
Armrest .............................................................. P40 Access key fob battery........................................ P484
Index
Folding down....................................................... P40 Air cleaner element ............................................ P455
Heater ................................................................ P46 Battery (keyless access with push-button
Reclining ............................................................ P42 start system).......................................... P123, P484
Rear window Battery (remote engine start transmitter) ............... P307 14
Defogger .......................................................... P250 Battery (remote keyless entry system) ........ P129, P485

(534,1)
532 Index
Battery of access key fob ................................... P484 Rear .................................................................. P39

Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) .... P129 Seatbelt............................................................. P4, P47
Remote engine start transmitter battery ................ P307 Fastening ........................................................... P50
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery .............. P485 Maintenance....................................................... P56
Replacing bulbs ............................................ P476, P499 Pretensioners ..................................................... P56
Back-up light ..................................................... P481 Safety tips .......................................................... P47
Brake/tail light ................................................... P499 Warning light and chime.............................. P50, P165
Cargo area light................................................. P483 Seatbelts ................................................................. P47
Daytime running light ......................................... P479 Security
Dome light ........................................................ P483 Alarm system..................................................... P134
Door step light................................................... P483 Immobilizer........................................................ P125
Front fog light .................................................... P479 Indicator light ........................................... P125, P183
Front position light ............................................. P478 Indicator light (immobilizer).................................. P125
Headlight .......................................................... P476 Security indicator light ............................................. P183
LED headlight ................................................... P476 Select lever
License plate light .............................................. P482 Position indicator................................................ P184
Rear turn signal light .......................................... P479 Shift lock function............................................... P315
Vanity mirror light............................................... P483 Shopping bag hook................................................. P285
Reverse Automatic Braking System ......................... P360 Shoulder pretensioners ............................................. P57
Rocking the vehicle................................................ P393 SI-DRIVE .............................................................. P317
Roof rails .............................................................. P396 Indicator............................................................ P184
Roof tent .............................................................. P397 Indicator light ..................................................... P184
SI-DRIVE mode ..................................................... P317
S Skid suppression function........................................ P323
Safety Snow tires ................................................... P392, P460
Precautions when driving........................................ P4 Snowy and icy roads .............................................. P391
Symbol ................................................................. P3 Sounding a panic alarm .......................................... P129
Warnings .............................................................. P2 Spark plugs ................................................. P456, P492
Seat Specifications......................................................... P488
Fabric............................................................... P437 Speedometer ......................................................... P160
Heater ................................................................ P46

(535,1)
Index 533
SRS Tie-down hooks/holes ............................................. P423

Curtain airbag ..................................................... P94 Tire ............................................................. P459, P493
Frontal airbag...................................................... P82 Chains .............................................................. P393
Side airbag ......................................................... P94 Inspection ......................................................... P461
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Pressures and wear ........................................... P462
airbag)........................................................... P4, P73 Replacement ..................................................... P466
SRS airbag system Rotation ............................................................ P465
Monitors ........................................................... P101 Size and pressure .............................................. P493
Servicing .......................................................... P102 Types ............................................................... P459
Warning light ..................................................... P167 Tire pressure monitoring system
Starting & stopping engine ............................. P297, P299 (TPMS) .................................. P171, P330, P418, P460
State emission testing (U.S. only) ............................ P295 Warning light ..................................................... P171
Steering Responsive Headlight................................ P235 Tires and wheels .................................................... P459
Steering wheel Tools..................................................................... P412
Heater .............................................................. P252 Top tether anchorages ...................................... P68, P71
Power............................................................... P318 Towing .................................................................. P423
Tilt/telescopic .................................................... P251 All wheels on the ground..................................... P426
Stop light .............................................................. P500 Flat-bed truck .................................................... P426
Storage compartment ............................................. P278 Hooks ............................................................... P423
Sun shade ............................................................ P150 Tie-down hooks ................................................. P423
Sun visors............................................................. P276 Weight .............................................................. P401
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ....... P4, P73 Traction control function .......................................... P323
Synthetic leather upholstery .................................... P438 Traction Control system
OFF indicator light.............................................. P178
T Trailer
Tachometer ........................................................... P160 Connecting ........................................................ P399
Index
Temperature warning light Hitch....................................................... P398, P404
AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P170 Towing .............................................................. P401
Coolant............................................................. P168 Towing tips ........................................................ P407
Temporary spare tire ..................................... P414, P493 Trailer towing ......................................................... P401 14
Tether (child restraint system) ............................ P68, P71 Trip meter.............................................................. P161

(536,1)
534 Index
Turn signal All-Wheel Drive .................................................. P175

Indicator lights ................................................... P185 AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P170
Lever................................................................ P237 Auto Start Stop .................................................. P186
Automatic headlight beam leveler......................... P186
U Brake system..................................................... P173
USB power supply ................................................. P282 BSD/RCTA ........................................................ P188
Charge ............................................................. P169
V CHECK ENGINE................................................ P168
Valet mode............................................................ P137 Coolant temperature high .................................... P168
Vanity mirror................................................. P277, P483 Door open ......................................................... P175
Light................................................................. P483 Engine low oil level ............................................ P170
Vehicle Icy road surface ................................................. P189
Capacity weight ................................................. P395 Keyless access with push-button start system ....... P178
Identification...................................................... P503 LED headlight .................................................... P186
Symbols ............................................................... P4 Low fuel ............................................................ P175
Vehicle Dynamics Control Low tire pressure ............................................... P171
OFF indicator light ............................................. P178 Oil pressure....................................................... P169
OFF switch ....................................................... P325 Power steering................................................... P176
Operation indicator light.................... P176, P177, P325 RAB ................................................................. P188
System ............................................................. P323 Seatbelt .................................................... P50, P165
Warning light ............................................ P176, P178 SRS airbag system ............................................ P167
Ventilator .............................................................. P256 Steering Responsive Headlight ............................ P186
Vehicle Dynamics Control ......................... P176, P178
Windshield washer fluid ...................................... P170
W
Warranties ................................................................ P1
Warning and indicator lights .................................... P164
Warranties and maintenance ................................... P401
Warning chimes
Washing ................................................................ P434
Keyless access with push-button start system....... P178
Waxing and polishing .............................................. P435
Seatbelt ..................................................... P50, P165
Wear indicators ...................................................... P464
Warning light
Welcome lighting function........................................ P230
ABS ........................................................ P172, P322
Access key .............................................. P178, P179

(537,1)
Index 535
Wheel
Alloy................................................................. P467
Balance ............................................................ P463
Nut tightening torque................................. P415, P493
Replacement ..................................................... P467
Windows............................................................... P138
Windshield
Washer fluid ...................................................... P467
Wiper and washer switches ................................ P239
Wiper blades ..................................................... P469
Wiper deicer...................................................... P250
Winter
Driving.............................................................. P390
Tires........................................................ P392, P460
Wiper and washer.................................................. P237
Wiper deicer.......................................................... P250
X
X-MODE ............................................................... P326
Indicator light..................................................... P187
Index
14

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
(2,1)
GAS STATION REFERENCE

S99AA
& Fuel: & Engine oil:
S99AA01 S99AA04
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 Use only the following oils.
RON) or higher. . API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-
SERVING”
& Fuel octane rating: . or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC
S99AA02
certification mark (Starburst mark)
! RON
S99AA0201
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number. For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
FP489.
! AKI
S99AA0202
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and & Engine oil capacity:
S99AA05
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
Knock Index (AKI).
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
& Fuel tank capacity: based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.
S99AA03
16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal) After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked
using the oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance
and service, refer to “Engine oil” FP450.
& Cold tire pressure:

S99AA06
Refer to “Tires” FP493.

2019 Forester Owner’s Manual
MSA5M1902A
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates and lead, which are known to the State of California
OWNER’S MANUAL
Forester
A8240BE-B
Issued July 2018
to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Printed in USA 07/18
2019B
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle
the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a 2019
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Vehicles shown on the cover of this booklet

may not be available in all markets. Please see
One Subaru Drive SUBARU CORPORATION your Subaru Retailer for a Product Brochure
Camden, NJ 08103-9800 TOKYO, JAPAN detailing all currently available models.
Love. It’s what makes a Subaru, a Subaru.

2019 Subaru Forester Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 Subaru Forester Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 Forester Owner’s Manual

Vehicles shown on the cover of this booklet

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 4

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 4

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 4

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

Chapter 4: Climate control Chapter 12: Specifications WARNING

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

& Safety symbol & Abbreviation list Abbreviation Meaning

EBD Electronic brake force distri-

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

not to take illegal drugs in the first place WARNING

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

! Passenger compartment area

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

& Instrument panel 0

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 0

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

& Combination meter

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

! Except U.S.-spec. models (type B)

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

& Warning and indicator lights

AT OIL TEMP warning Vehicle Dynamics

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

Mark Name Page Mark Name Page

Cruise control indica- 185 BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

Cruise control set indi- 186 RAB warning light (if

X-MODE indicator light 187 RAB OFF indicator

Hill descent control in- Driver Monitoring Sys-

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

Item Page reference for

Welcome Screen — On/Off On 190

English/Español/Fran- U.S.-spec models: Eng-

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

355 and 367

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

Item Page reference for

Audible Signal On/Off On 123

Interior Light — 10 seconds/20 seconds/ 30 seconds 275

Auto Door Lock Vehicle Speed/Shift Into Vehicle Speed 133

Approaching Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds 230

Door mirror setting Reverse Tilt-Down Mir- On/Off On 195

*: You can also set this while driving.

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5

& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer

Auto dimmer cancel Sensitivity of the operation of the OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid

北米Model "A8240BE-B" EDITED: 2018/ 7/ 5